Hmesh Tut70

HyperMesh 7.
0
Tutorials
Altair Engineering Contact Information

Web site
www.altair.com
FTP site
Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com or http://ftp.altair.com/ftp

Login: ftp
Password: <your e-mail address>
Location
Telephone
North America
248.614.2425
e-mail
HyperWorks
hwsupport@altair.com
HyperMesh
hmsupport@altair.com
HyperForm
hfsupport@altair.com
OptiStruct
ossupport@altair.com
MotionView
mvsupport@altair.com
HyperView
hvsupport@altair.com
HyperGraph
hgsupport@altair.com
HyperStudy
hstsupport@altair.com
HyperOpt
hosupport@altair.com
Process Manager
pmgrsupport@altair.com
China
86.21.5393.0011
support@altair.com.cn
France
33.1.4133.0990
francesupport@altair.com
Germany
49.7031.6208.22
hwsupport@altair.de
India
91.80.26588540
1600.44.0234 (toll free)
support@india.altair.com
Italy
39.800.905.595
support@altairtorino.it
Japan
81.3.5396.1341
81.3.5396.2881
support@altairjp.co.jp
Korea
82.31.728.8600
support@altair.co.kr
Scandinavia
46.46.286.2052
support@altair.se
United Kingdom
44.2476.323.600
support@uk.altair.com
The following countries have distributors for Altair Engineering: Australia, Brazil, Czech Republic, Greece,
New Zealand, Romania, South Korea, Singapore, Spain, and Taiwan. See www.altair.com for complete
contact information.
2004 Altair Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved.
Altair HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials
Trademark and Registered Trademark Acknowledgments

HyperForm, HyperGraph, HyperMesh, HyperOpt, HyperShape, HyperStudy, HyperView, HyperView Player,
HyperWeb, HyperWorks, MotionView, MotionSolve, Process Manager, BatchMesher and OptiStruct are
registered trademarks of Altair Engineering, Inc.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Altair HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

Introductory Tutorial
Getting Started With HyperMesh - HM-1000 ................................................................................... 1
Working with Geometry

Creating and Editing Line Data - HM-2000.................................................................................... 29
Fixing Geometry for Meshing - HM-2020....................................................................................... 43
Generating a Midplane from Solid Geometry - HM-2030 .............................................................. 49
Simplifying Geometry Features - HM-2040 ................................................................................... 63
Generating Surfaces from Elements - HM-2060 ........................................................................... 73
Meshing
1-D Elements
Creating 1-D Elements - HM-3000 .......................................................................................... 91
Connecting Components with 1-D Elements - HM-3010 ........................................................ 97
Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties Using HyperBeam - HM-3020 ... 107
2-D Elements
Creating 2-D Elements from Surfaces Using the Automesh Function - HM-3100................ 121
Remeshing 2-D Elements - HM-3110 ................................................................................... 141
2-D Meshing around Fixed Points - HM-3120....................................................................... 147
Exploring 2-D Mesh Parameter Options in the Automesh Function - HM-3130 ................... 151
Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas - HM-3140 .................................. 157
Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on User-Defined Quality Criteria - HM-3150 .. 163
Creating a 2-D Mesh using Batch Mesher - HM-3160 .......................................................... 167
Creating 2-D Elements without Surfaces - HM-3170 ............................................................ 183
Splitting and Combining 2-D Elements - HM-3180 ............................................................... 197
Creating a Tria Mesh for Tetrameshing - HM-3190 .............................................................. 205
3-D Elements
Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function - HM-3200............................... 223
Generating 3-D Tetrahedral Elements - HM-3210 ................................................................ 241
Meshing a Part with Hexahedral Elements - HM-3220 ......................................................... 249
Tetrameshing a Volume in a Single Step - HM-3230............................................................ 267
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering.
Quality
Checking 2-D Mesh Quality and Continuity - HM-3300.........................................................273
Checking 3-D Mesh Quality and Continuity - HM-3310.........................................................279
Measuring and Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a Quality Index - HM-3320 ....................295
Troubleshooting 2-D Mesh Quality Issues Manually - HM-3330 ...........................................309
Connectors
Creating Connectors - HM-3400 .................................................................................................. 321
Morphing
Getting Started with HyperMorph - HM-3500...............................................................................339
Understanding the HyperMorph Morphing Process - HM-3510...................................................351
Applying HyperMorph Strategies - HM-3520 ...............................................................................371
Modeling
All Solvers
Defining Composites - HM-4000............................................................................................393
Working with Loads on Geometry - HM-4010 .......................................................................397
OptiStruct
Setting Up OptiStruct FE Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4100................................................407
NASTRAN
Setting Up NASTRAN Static Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4200 ..........................................409
ABAQUS
Setting Up an ABAQUS Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4300 .................................................419
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4310 ................................435
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4320 ................................443
Defining *STEP using ABAQUS Step Manager - HM-4330 ..................................................457
Pre-Processing for Bracket and Cradle Analysis using ABAQUS - HM-4340.......................467
Pre-Processing for Crashing Tubes Analysis using ABAQUS - HM-4350 ............................481
ANSYS
Setting up an ANSYS Stress Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4400 .........................................491
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4410 ...................................499
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4420 ...................................511
Crash Solvers
Checking Penetration, Creating Joints, and Checking Minimum Time Step - HM-4500.......525
Dummy Positioning, Seatbelt Routing, and Control Volumes - HM-4510 .............................537
ii
Altair Engineering
LS-DYNA
Pre-Processing for Baseball Impact using LS-DYNA - HM-4600 ......................................... 545
Pre-Processing for Airbag Analysis Using LS-DYNA - HM-4610.......................................... 555
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using LS-DYNA - HM-4620 ............................ 561
Pre-Processing for Ink Cartridge Drop Test using LS-DYNA ALE - HM-4630...................... 569
PAM-CRASH
Using the PAM-CRASH Interface in HyperMesh - HM-4700 ................................................ 575
RADIOSS
Using the RADIOSS Fixed Interface in HyperMesh - HM-4800............................................ 591
Pre-Processing for Pipes Impact Using Radioss Block - HM-4810 ...................................... 605
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using RADIOSS Block - HM-4820.................. 613
Customizing
Creating a Macro - HM-8000 ....................................................................................................... 621
Post-processing
Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis - HM-9000 .......................................................................... 629
Altair Engineering

iii
iv
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

Suggested Order
If you are a new user it is recommended that you complete the

introductory tutorial Getting Started with HyperMesh - HM-1000 before
taking any other tutorial. Most tutorials are built on the assumption that
users are familiar with the basic and common tasks presented in this
introductory tutorial.
File Location
All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the

HyperWorks installation directory under
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/.
To locate the HyperWorks installation directory,
<install_directory>, use the following approach:
From the permanent menu, select the global panel and review the path
next to template file:. <install_directory> is the portion of the path
preceding the templates/ directory on PC, and the hm/ directory on
UNIX.
If you need more help finding the installation directory, see Finding the
Installation Directory <install_directory> or contact your systems
administrator.
Introductory Tutorial
Getting Started with HyperMesh - HM-1000
Working with Geometry

Creating and Editing Line Data- HM-2000
Fixing Geometry for Meshing - HM-2020
Generating a Midplane from Solid Geometry - HM-2030
Simplifying Geometry Features - HM-2040
Generating Surfaces from Elements - HM-2060
Meshing
1-D Elements
Creating 1-D Elements - HM-3000
Connecting Components with 1-D Elements - HM-3010
Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam - HM-3020
Altair Engineering

Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering
2-D Elements
Creating 2-D Elements from Surfaces Using the Automesh Function - HM-3100
Remeshing 2-D Elements - HM-3110
2-D Meshing around Fixed Points - HM-3120
Exploring 2-D Mesh Parameter Options in the Automesh Function - HM-3130
Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas - HM-3140
Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on User-Defined Quality Criteria - HM-3150
Creating a 2-D Mesh using Batch Mesher - HM-3160
Creating 2-D Elements without Surfaces - HM-3170
Splitting and Combining 2-D Elements - HM-3180
Creating a Tria Mesh for Tetrameshing - HM-3190
3-D Elements
Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function - HM-3200
Generating 3-D Tetrahedral Elements - HM-3210
Meshing a Part with Hexeahedral Elements - HM-3220
Tetrameshing a Volume in a Single Step - HM-3230
Quality
Checking 2-D Mesh Quality and Continuity - HM-3300
Measuring and Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a Quality Index - HM-3320
Troubleshooting 2-D Mesh Quality Issues Manually - HM-3330
Connectors
Creating Connectors - HM-3400
Morphing
Getting Started with HyperMorph - HM-3500
Understanding the HyperMorph Morphing Process - HM-3510
Applying HyperMorph Strategies - HM-3520
vi

Altair Engineering
Modeling
All Solvers
Defining Composites - HM-4000
Working with Loads on Geometry - HM-4010
OptiStruct
Setting Up OptiStruct FE Analyses in HyperMesh - HM-4100
NASTRAN
Setting Up NASTRAN Static Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4200
ABAQUS
Setting Up an ABAQUS Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4300
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4310
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4320Defining *STEP using ABAQUS
Step Manager - HM-4330
Pre-Processing for Bracket and Cradle Analysis using ABAQUS - HM-4340
Pre-Processing for Crashing Tubes Analysis using ABAQUS - HM-4350
ANSYS
Setting Up ANSYS and Stress Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4400
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4410
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh - HM-4420
Crash Solvers
Checking Penetration, Creating Joints, and Checking Minimum Time Step - HM-4500
Dummy Positioning, Seatbelt Routing, and Control Volumes - HM-4510
LS-DYNA
Pre-Processing for Baseball Impact using LS-DYNA - HM-4600
Pre-Processing for Airbag Analysis using LS-DYNA - HM-4610
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using LS-DYNA - HM-4620
Pre-Processing for Ink Cartridge Drop Test using LS-DYNA ALE - HM-4630
PAM-CRASH
Using the PAM-CRASH Interface in HyperMesh - HM-4700
Altair Engineering

vii
RADIOSS
Using the RADIOSS Fixed Interface in HyperMesh - HM-4800
Pre-Processing for Pipes Impact Using RADIOSS Block - HM-4810
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using RADIOSS Block - HM-4820
Customizing
Creating a Macro - HM-8000
Post-processing
Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis - HM-9000
viii HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

Altair Engineering
Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>

Most tutorials use files that are located in the tutorials/ directory of the software installation. In
the tutorials, file paths are referenced as <install_directory>/../. In order to locate the files
needed, you will need to determine the path of the installation directory <install_directory>.
This path is dependent on the installation that was performed at your site. To determine what this
path is, follow these instructions:
1. Launch the application.
2. From the permanent menu (located at the bottom right corner of the graphics user interface),
select the global panel.
Permanent menu
The template file: field contains the path to the current template file, if one is selected.
On PC:
Global panel PC example

Review the path, and extract the portion preceding /templates/.
This is the path for the installation directory <install_directory>.
Note:
You may need to highlight the path and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to review the
complete path as the application truncates it to show only its end portion in the
corresponding field.
Installation directory path PC example

In this example, <install_directory> is C:/myinstallation/hyperworks/altair/.
Altair Engineering

ix
On UNIX:
Review the path, and extract the portion preceding /hm/.
This is the path for the installation directory <install_directory>.
Global panel UNIX example

Note:
You may need to highlight the path and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to review the
complete path as the application truncates it to show only its end portion in the
corresponding field.
Installation directory path UNIX example

In this example, <install_directory> is /soft/qa-raid2/hw/installs/hw/altair/.

Altair Engineering
Getting Started With HyperMesh - HM-1000

HyperMesh is a high performance finite element pre- and post-processor that allows you to build finite
element and finite difference models, view their results, and perform data analysis.
This tutorial introduces HyperMesh, as well as many basic concepts and tasks that are needed to get
started with HyperMesh, and which serve as pre-requisites for most other HyperMesh tutorials. It
covers:
Launching HyperMesh
The user interface
Using the on-line help
File input and output
Viewing the model using options from the permanent menu
Using the mouse for model viewing, rapid menus and entity selection
Controling the display and visual attributes
Menus and menu items
Database relationships: elements/components/materials/properties
Setting current collectors, element size and element order
Interfacing with solvers
Creating collectors
Reviewing and editing card images
Organizing and deleting entities
Each section of this tutorial takes between 5 and 15 minutes to complete. Individual sections can be
taken independently although it is recommended to take all of them and preferably in the order
presented.
A couple of sections build on previous sections. The only pre-requisite for most sections is to have
the bumper model used in this tutorial loaded in HyperMesh (See File input and output for instructions
on how to load the model).
The file referenced in this tutorial is located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory. If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, see Finding the
Installation Directory <install_directory>, or contact your systems administrator.
Launching HyperMesh
This section discusses how to launch HyperMesh and the location of the working directory.
1. Launch HyperMesh.
If you do not know how to start HyperMesh, and you are:
On UNIX
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

The most common method is to add the <install_directory>/scripts/ directory for the
HyperWorks installation to the search path for a user, then start HyperMesh by simply typing "hm"
at the command line. Some system administrators, however, incorporate site-specific scripts to
carry out some additional tasks or enable configuration specific options. Please ask your systems
administrator if this is the case at your location and for the procedure to start HyperMesh.
On Windows
HyperMesh can be started by using the Windows Start menu, and selecting Programs/
HyperWorks <version number>/Altair HyperMesh. It can also be started from a command line by
pointing to hmopengl.exe in the <install_directory>/hm/bin/ directory. A more
convenient method is to create a shortcut to hmopengl.exe, and use that shortcut to start the
software.
You should get the HyperMesh interface:
The HyperMesh interface

2. Identify your HyperMesh working directory.
HyperMesh runs in a working directory. This directory is used as the starting point for the file
browser, and the default directory to which message and session command files are written.
For UNIX systems, the working directory is the directory from which the HyperMesh starting script
command was issued.
On Windows, the working directory is the Windows standard working directory and depends on
the version of Windows you are running. For example, on Windows XP, it is %userprofile%\My
Documents. The working directory can be set to any directory when a shortcut to the HyperMesh
2

Altair Engineering
executable is used. It is set on the shortcuts shortcut tab in the Start in: field.
The User Interface

The HyperMesh Interface contains several areas (see figure above). Each is described below.
Title bar
The bar across the top of the interface is the Title bar. It contains the version
of HyperMesh that you are running and the name of the file you are working
on.
Graphics area
The Graphics area under the Title Bar is the display area for your model. You
can interact with the model in three-dimensional space, in real time. In addition
to viewing the model, entities can be selected interactively from the Graphics
area.
Macro menu
This area contains five pages of macros that perform various functions. The
Disp macro page is active and is shaded to signify this. The Disp page
macros control how a model displays in the Graphics area.
The other macro pages available are QA (contains element checking macros),
Mesh (contains macros associated with creating and editing meshes), User
(contains macros you create), and Geom (contains macros related to working
with a models geometry).
The contents of the macro menu changes based upon the selected User
Profile (see Interfacing with solvers).
Header bar
The Header bar separates the Graphics area from the Panel area. The left
end of the Header bar displays your current location. At this time, you will see
Geometry displayed. The three fields on the right side of the header bar
display the active user profile, current component collector and current load
collector. The latter two fields are blank.
As you work in HyperMesh, any warning or error messages also display in the
Header bar. Warning messages appear in green and error messages appear
in red.
The quit button on the rightmost end of the Header bar ends the HyperMesh
session. When you select quit, if changes have not been saved a save file
information confirmation message appears so you can save your changes
before HyperMesh closes down.
Hint
You can hold the left mouse button down on top of a panel to see a
description for it in the Header bar.
Permanent menu
Altair Engineering
The Permanent menu is always displayed. The upper portion contains model
and view manipulation tools. The lower portion provides access to the
following panels.
options
takes you to the options panel allowing you to modify

many of the default settings in the HyperMesh work
environment. (keyboard hotkey o).
card
takes you to the card panel where you can review and
edit the card images defined in the template file
associated with the model.
global
takes you to the global panel where you can control

global model parameters accessed by several different

panels. These parameters remain constant until changed.
Use this panel to specify which template file you want to
use. The panel controls which collectors (a collection of
data pertainent to a given entity and handled as a group)
are active. Any entities you create are stored in the active
collectors. (keyboard hotkey g)
help
allows you to access the on-line help. On panels, you

obtain context sensitive help describing the functions of
the panel with links to various terms described on the
panel. (keyboard hotkey: h)
disp
allows you to access the display panel where you can

select which collectors are displayed on the screen.
(keyboard hotkey: d)
allows you to view the HyperMesh model structure by
organizing assemblies, components, multibodies,
properties, materials, and beamsectcols into a tree-like
display.
vis
Page menu
is available when you use the performance graphics

engine. It allows you to assign a set of display attributes
to each component of your model.
The Page menu allows you to select different sets of functions.

The Geom page contains functions having to do with the creation and editing
of geometry.
The 1D, 2D, and 3D pages contain element creation and editing tools grouped
according to element type.
The BCs page (boundary conditions) contains functions to set up the analysis
problem and define the boundary conditions.
The Tool page contains miscellaneous tools and model checking functions.
The Post page contains post-processing functions.
Panel menu
Note
The Panel menu displays for each page the functions available on that page.
You access those functions by clicking on the button corresponding to the
function you wish to use.
Some functions are located on several pages. For example most of the functions in the
leftmost column (files, collectors, etc) can be accessed from each of the seven pages.
Using the on-line help

In this section access the on-line help for the geom cleanup panel and get familiar with the
HyperMesh help system.
1. From the main menu, select the Geom page.
2. Go to the geom cleanup panel.
This panel provides tools to modify your geometry data and prepare it for meshing operations.

Altair Engineering
3. From the permanent menu, click help.

A help window describing the basics of the geom cleanup panel displays. This help page
contains a description of the panel as well as links to the help pages for its various sub-panels,
and How Do Is to assist you in using the panels functions.
4. Review the content of the help.
The HyperMesh online help system is context sensitive. Whenever you press the help button
while you are in panel, you will be taken directly to the help page for that panel.
5. Click the edges link.
This takes you to a new help topic describing the edges sub-panel of the geom cleanup panel.
6. To return to the previous help topic, click the Back button located at the top of the page.
This takes you back to the page you started from. Notice how the Back button is therefore grayed
out.
Navigation through the on-line can be done following links and using the Back button as was just
done here. You can also navigate through pre-defined browse string using the double-arrow
browse buttons,
. Browse strings are goupings of topics that have a relationship
between them, whether they complete one another in covering a specific subject, or are simply
part of a broader concept.
The browse buttons are only active for topics that belong to a browse string. For example, the
current topic (geom cleanup panel help) does not belong to any browse string as these arrows
are currently disabled.
7. Go down the geom cleanup help page until you reach the Note.
This note provides provisions regarding the actual appearance of this panel, depending on the
user profile currently loaded in HyperMesh.
8. Click the link User Profiles.
A new help topic appears. Notice how the double-arrows are now active to go forward.
9. Browse forward in the browse string using the forward double arrows.
Once you are passed the first topic of the string, the back double-arrows are active and allow you
to go back to the previous page of the browse string.
While the Back button takes you to the previously displayed page, the browse buttons allow for
navigation within a set sequence of topics only. In this particular example, the browse button
would only allow you to browse through pages that belong to the User Profiles browse string and
would not take you back to the geom cleanup panel help, which does not belong to any browse
string. Using the Back button would take you back to this topic after taking you through all the
topics you have visited since you started there.
Once the help is launched, the entire help system is also available using the help contents, index
and find tabs.
10. Click the index tab and type geom cleanup at the prompt on the Index tab of the Help Topics
dialog that popped up.
The help system returns matches for the text you typed.
11. Select geom cleanup panel from the list and click Display.
Altair Engineering

This takes you again to the geom cleanup panel help, although you are not back at the starting
point of the history of pages as signified by the Back button being available. Using the Index, you
simply made a jump to a new page.
12. Click Contents at the top of the window to bring up the Help Topics dialog and the Contents
tab.
This tab allows you to review the table of content of the help system for the HyperWorks
applications installed at your site. This is a tree-like representation of the content of the help with
books representing groupings of books and/or topics (represented with a question mark).
13. Expand the Altair HyperWorks book by double clicking it, or selecting it and clicking Open.
14. Open the HyperMesh book, and expand some of the available books to review their content.
15. Bring up any topic by double clicking it in the tree structure.
When you need to find specific information, you can look for it in the table of content using the
Contents tab, or have the help system look for it by using the Find engine.
16. Click Find to bring up the Help Topics dialog with the Find tab.
17. Click Options to review the search engine options, and click OK to close the Find Options
dialog.
18. Experiment with the Find tab by typing some words and looking at the results.
The result is a list of topics matching words you entered and the criteria you set in the Options.
You can then review a topic of interest from the list by double clicking it, or selecting it and
clicking Display. To review another result topic, simply click Find again as the same list of topics
for the criteria specified will still be available.
19. Close the help.
Notes
If the help button is clicked from a main menu page, the help system will start at the
topmost book level of HyperWorks help, and you can navigate your way through the help
system using the Help Topics dialog.
The help system can be started outside of HyperMesh from the Start menu in Windos
(Start/Products/HyperWorks <version>/Altair HyperWorks Help), or by
typing winhlp at the UNIX command line from within the
<install_directory>/scripts directory.
File input and output

In this section, you use the files panel to retrieve a HyperMesh database. The files panel is primarily
used for all the input and output of files, and setting up solver templates.
1. From any page, select the files panel (leftmost column).
2. Select the hm file sub-panel by clicking the corresponding radio button.
This sub-panel is used to save and retrieve HyperMesh binary files, which contain all of the
information in the HyperMesh database, including geometry and finite element model data. While
HyperMesh has no specific file extension requirements, the typical extension is .hm. Only one
HyperMesh binary database can be opened with this sub-panel per session.
The four green buttons on the right side of the panel are used to save or retrieve the HyperMesh
database. The save as and retrieve launch a windows style file browser to allow you to
6

Altair Engineering
locate the desired file on your system. The save and retrieve buttons (without the ) simply
read or write to the filename listed in the file: field.
3. Click retrieve.
An Open File dialog appears. The starting point is your current working directory, and the filter
for Files of types is set to HyperMesh binary files (*.hm*).
Open files dialog

4. Change directories to the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory.
If you do not know the location of the <install_directory> installation directory, see Finding
the Installation Directory <install_directory>, or contact your systems administrator.
5. Select the file bumper.hm and click Open.
You can also double-click the file name to close the file dialog and read the file into Hypermesh.
The bumper model displays in the graphics area. Notice the file: field contains the path and file
name just loaded into HyperMesh. The path and file name also display in the title bar at the top of
the HyperMesh window.
If at any time you would like to revert to the original model (discarding any changes you may have
made), click the retrieve button (the file browser will not open). To save any changes you have
made, (overwriting the original file) click the save button. If you would like to save your changes
with a different file name or location, use the save as button to open the file browser, or update
the path and name in the file: field and click save.
6. Look at the other sub-panels in the files panel by clicking their corresponding radio buttons:
import
HyperMesh can import HyperMesh binary files (HM MODEL), geometry files
(GEOM), finite element information (FE), weld location and connection data (WELD).
Simply select first the type of data to import, and then the appropriate import
translator.
When data is imported into HyperMesh, it is appended to the current session
database. An import translator reads data imported and converts the native file
format into one HyperMesh understands. Import translators are included for many
finite element solver input formats, as well as many common geometry formats.
Altair Engineering

export
The export functionality is used to convert information in a HyperMesh database into

a solver formatted input deck, to export geometry as IGES data, or to export weld
information. In order to write data as a solver input deck, HyperMesh uses feoutput
templates to define the output format. The feoutput templates also define the card
images of the different entities. (See Interfacing with solvers)
Tip: Load the feoutput template prior to creating any finite element entities, like
materials, elements or loads. In this way, the solver specific entity type and required
properties can be defined most efficiently as the model is created.
command The command subpanel allows you to execute a HyperMesh command file (a file
containing commands allowing you to automate or re-create HyperMesh sessions).
template
The template sub-panel allows you to specify which solver template file you want to
load.
results
From results, you can load HyperMesh results file obtained by translating (solver
panel or command prompt) solver result files.
Viewing the model using options from the permanent menu

The top half of the permanent menu contains view manipulation tools. The functions can be activated
either by clicking the button on the permanent menu, or by pressing the corresponding key on the
keyboard (for functions with a single letter on the button), or the four arrow keys.
Permanent menu
Zoom functions
The zoom functions allow you to scale the size of the model display in the
graphics area.
Try each of the five zoom functions on the bumper.hm model loaded in the
previous section.
Circle zoom function. When activated, move the mouse into the
graphics area, then click and hold the left mouse button. Circle the
part of the model you want to zoom in to, and upon releasing the
mouse button, the view will be adjusted.
Fit function. Fits the entire model to the graphics area.
+, -
Incremental zoom functions. Zoom the view in or out by a zoom

factor specified in the options panel, modeling sub-panel.
Slide zoom function. Click and hold the mouse in the graphics area,
then move it vertically to smoothly zoom in or out.

Altair Engineering
Rotation functions
Other functions
Try the rotation functions.
The four arrow buttons will incrementally rotate the model in the
direction of the arrow. The rotation increment is set to 15 degrees
by default, and can be changed in the options panel, modeling
sub-panel.
Arc rotate. Rotate the model as if grabbing and dragging it with the
mouse.
Dynamic rotate. Rotate the model in the direction of the vector

created from the rotation center to the mouse position. Rotation
speed is proportional to the distance from the rotation center to the
mouse.
Try some of these functions.

p
Plots the model to refresh the screen. Often, after deleting

elements or lines, the entities adjacent to those deleted are not
drawn correctly. Clicking the p button re-draws the model.
Center the model. Use this function to reposition the model by

selecting a new screen center. The point selected is centered on
the screen and the model repositioned accordingly.
Back to the previous view. Allows you to toggle between two views.
View
View pop-up menu. Set basic views, such as front, back, right, left,
top, bottom, and access five view memories that can be used to
save and restore specific view settings for the model. To save a
specific view, type in a name and click the corresponding save
button. To close the menu, move your mouse off it. (keyboard
hotkey: v).
Spherical Clipping. Displays the specific area of a model that is
inside a three dimensional sphere, masking everything outside the
sphere.
Surface Transparancy. Sets the transparency level for the surfaces
of selected components. The effects are only seen in shaded mode
and with models containing surfaces.
Using the mouse for model viewing, rapid menus and entity selection
The mouse attached to your system is integral to HyperMesh. While the left mouse button is used for
entity selection, the right mouse button is used for de-selecting entities. Holding either left or right
mouse buttons down will allow you to pre-highlight the entities to select or de-select.
Rapid menu allows you to use the middle mouse button to quickly perform common operations
without frequently moving the mouse between the graphics region and the panel region. The function
button that is assigned to rapid menu is outlined in black in the panel.
With the bumper.hm model loaded (see File Input and Output):
1. From the Tool page, go to the mask panel.
2. Go to the mask sub-panel.
Altair Engineering

Notice how the return button is outlined in black.

3. Press the middle mouse button.
HyperMesh automatically takes you back to the Tool page.
4. Enter the mask panel, mask sub-panel again.
5. With the entity selector set to elems, go to the graphics area and left mouse click the dot located
at the centroid of several elements.
The elements highlight and are put into a mark. Note how the mask button is now outlined in
black. This is the function that would be performed should you press the middle mouse button.
6. Right mouse click the centroid of some of the elements you previously selected.
These elements return to their original color and are removed from the mark.
7. Hold your left mouse button down and move over the centroid of various elements.
Note how elements temporarily highlight as you move over them.
8. Relese the left mouse button over one element and note how the elements is selected.
9. Click mask or press the middle mouse button to mask these elements.
Note how after performing this function, the return button is again outlined in black.
10. Click unmask all to bring all the elements back.
Some operations require pressing a keyboard key in addition to using the mouse. In addition to
the view controls on the permanent menu or their keyboard equivalents, the three mouse buttons,
used in conjunction with the control key (CTRL) on the keyboard, allow you to quickly and
conveniently access common view controls.
11. Try the following:
CTRL + Left mouse button
activates the arc rotate function. Hold down the Ctrl key, then
click and hold the left mouse button in the graphics area. While
holding both the Ctrl key and the left mouse button, you can drag
the mouse to rotate the model in the direction of the mouse
movement. One quick click will let you re-define the center of
rotation which can be set to a node location for example.
CTRL + Middle mouse

button
activates the circle zoom and fit functions. While holding down
the CTRLkey, click and hold the middle mouse button, then draw
a zoom circle around a part of your model. When you release
the middle mouse button, the view will be adjusted to fit the
circled area to the graphics screen. If you hold down the CTRL
button and quickly click the middle mouse button, the model will
fit to the screen.
This function also applies to mice equipped with scroll wheels.
Press down on the wheel as if it were a mouse button.
CTRL + Right mouse button
activates a drag pan mode. When holding down the Ctrl key, you
can click and grab the model with the right mouse button, then
translate it in the plane of the screen by dragging it with the
mouse.
When collecting entities in a panel where the selection by window is available (see Menus and
10 HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

Altair Engineering
menu items), use the SHIFT key to access the quick window selection mode. Hold down the shift
key to access it and do a left mouse drag or right mouse drag.
In any panel that can select entities by window (lines, nodes, elems, comps etc. not nodelist or
linelist or single node collector), shift-left drag will draw a rubber band window and selects the
entities in that window. Now you can use middle mouse (rapid menu) to perform the function of
the panel.
12. Hold the SHIFT key down, and in the graphics window, do a left mouse click to bring up the four
options for the quick window selection.
Quick window options

13. Select the top left option for which a rectangular window can be selected and the elements for
which the centroid falls inside the window will be selected.
14. Place the mouse anywhere in the graphics window, do a left mouse click and hold the left mouse
button down.
15. Drag the mouse to build a window, and release the left mouse button.
The elements are highlighted. You could now mask these elements.
16. Click return to go back to the main menu.
Note
In the display panel the quick window with left mouse will turn off the collectors in the
window and the right mouse quick window will turn on the collectors that would have
been in the window if displayed.
Controling the display and visual attributes

This section looks at the display (disp) and visual (vis) panels from the permanent menu and shows
you how you can control the display of what you see (elements and geometry) and how you see it.
1. Click disp on the permanent menu to enter the display panel.
Display panel
The collector type selector is set to comps. On the left side of the panel is a list of component
collectors (comps). A collector holds related data and allows you to handle the data as one unit.
A component collector is a collector that holds element (elems) and geometry (geom)
information. Each component collector in this model has been assigned a specific color. Those
containing a check mark in the box to the left of the name are displayed for the type of entity
Altair Engineering

11
defined by the geom/elem toggle.

2. Right mouse click on the name of a collector to de-select it.
Notice that collectors elements no longer display.
3. Use a left mouse click on the collector name to re-select that collector to re-display its elements.
4. Pick any element displayed in the model using the right mouse button or the left mouse button.
This has the same effect as de-selecting the collector from the collector name list.
5. Click none to de-select all the component collectors.
Although no component is currently turned on, portions of the model are still displayed in the
graphics area. This is because we have turned off the element portion of the component
collectors.
6. Use the geom/elem toggle to work on the geom portion of the components.
Notice how some of the components are active. The display panel allows you to independently
turn on and off the display of both the element and geometry portions of component collectors.
7. Toggle back to elems and click all to bring all the elements back.
Similarly, the display panel allows you to control the display of other types of collectors (entities)
that are represented in the graphics area.
8. Click return to leave the disp panel.
Changing visual attributes for elements

The visual (vis) panel controls how elements (and multibodies) look. The vis panel is available only
when you use the performance graphics engine.
1. Turn on performance graphics from the macro menu Disp page: on the Gfx: line, click per.
Activating the performance graphics mode with the macro button sets the visual attributes for all
elements to hidden line (shaded) with mesh lines.
Note
The performance graphics engine can also be set from the options panel, graphics subpanel.
2. From the permanent menu, click vis to enter the visual panel.
The components appear on the left side of the panel and each has an icon showing the display
type. On the right side of the panel is a list of choices. Each component can be displayed
differently.
Wireframe
Element edges are displayed with lines.
Hidden Line
The element is displayed as a filled polygon.
Hidden Line with

Mesh Lines
The element is displayed as a filled polygon with the

edges drawn in mesh line color.
Hidden Line with

Feature Lines
The element is displayed as a filled polygon with the

"feature" edges drawn in mesh line color.

Altair Engineering
Transparent
The element is displayed as a filled transparent polygon.
For post-processing, you have two options:

Element Color
The elements are displayed in element color even in

post-processing panels that use results contouring.
Contours
The elements are contoured with the selected results.
3. Select a new choice.

4. Click all.
Notice the icons for all the components change, as does the display.
5. Select another display type and click on the name of a component.
The corresponding elements have their display type updated in the graphics area.
6. Select one more display type and click on one element in the graphics ares.
Once again, all the elements in the correponding component are updated and the icon next to the
component name is also updated to reflect this change.
7. Select the icon for Hidden line with Mesh Lines,
8. Click all.
9. Click return.
Viewing the model using the model browser

1. On the permanent menu, click the model browser
2. Look in the macro menu area for the browser display. Youll see something similar to the figure
below.
Altair Engineering

13
Model browser.
The model browser allows you to view the HyperMesh model structure by organizing assemblies,
components, multibodies, properties, materials, and beamsectcols into a tree-like display. It also
combines functionalities from the disp and vis panels.
Components and assemblies have two display states: one for its elements and another for its
geometry. You can switch the display mode by clicking the Elems or Geoms radio button on the
bottom right of the browser window.
You can also determine which components are displayed by removing the checkmark from the
box infront of the component. To remove the check mark, click the check mark in front of the
components name.
3. Click the check mark infront of end1 and end2 and notice the display.
4. Use the leftmost bottom icon to Display All.
5. Close the model browser, by clicking the x in the upper right-hand corner of the browser window.
Menus and menu items

In this section, familiarize yourself with the various menus and menu items available in the
HyperMesh panels. Then experiment with these menu items in the translate panel by translating
portions of the bumper model.
Toggles and switches
These icons for toggles and switches appear on some panels and sub-panels.

Altair Engineering
Alternates between two options.

Toggle:
Presents a pop-up (floating) menu with several options to choose from.
Switch:
Menu Items
Panels can contain sub-panels or tools. These tools appear as function buttons, toggles, switches,
entity selectors, direction selectors, coordinate system selectors, data entry fields, input fields, and
pop-up menus. The tools on each panel allow you to specify settings and enter information needed to
perform the panels function.
Most panels in HyperMesh work from left to right. The left side of the panel contains the information
gathering tools for the operation and on the right side of the panel are the action buttons to carry out
the operation.
From the Tool page, select the translate panel to view the menu items described in this section.
Translate panel
Entity selector
The entity selector allows you to choose which type of entity you want to perform a function on. The
entity selector may or may not have a switch; some panels perform a function on only one type of
entity. The entity selector button is yellow; when it is surrounded by a halo, the selector is active and
ready for you to select or pick the entities to be processed.
Entity selector
Direction selector
The direction selector allows you to define a plane or vector by using the global x, y, or z axis; or by
selecting a vector; or by selecting nodes in the model. Click the switch to obtain the pop-up menu of
available directions.
Altair Engineering

15
Direction selector
Direction selector pop-up menu
x-, y-, and z-axis
These options allow you to specify a direction or plane using the global
X Y Z coordinate system.
N1, N2, N3
This option allows you to create a user-defined direction. Selecting two

nodes, N1 and N2, allows you to define a vector direction with base
point at N1 toward N2. Selecting three nodes, N1, N2, and N3, allows
you to define a plane with base point at N1 (unless otherwise specified).
The vector is normal to the plane and its direction is determined by the
right hand rule.
SettIing vector direction using right hand rule

vector
Allows you to use an existing vector to define a direction.

Altair Engineering
base
Defines a point on the plane or the base of a vactor. If a base node is not
specified, the N1 node selection is used.
edit
Click this button to enter the Node Vector Edit panel. In this panel, you can
define or edit the coordinates of N1, N2, and N3 and/or the base node used
to define a plane or vector.
reset
Clears the node selections.

Input fields
Input fields are used to enter text or numerical values. A description of the type of input precedes the
field.
For a numeric input field, you can double click the input field and use the HyperMesh calculator to
enter the value.
Pop-up menus
Pop-up menus display when there are several options from which to choose.
The extended entity selection menu allows you to specify alternate methods for selecting entities of
the current data type. To use the extended entity selection menu, click the yellow data type button of
the entity selector. The menu automatically closes after you have made your selection.
Extended entity selection menu

Function buttons
The color of the menu button corresponds to its purpose:
green
Carries out a function or a command.
red
Exits a panel or aborts a command.
Altair Engineering

17
Secondary menu
Access the Secondary Menu by pressing the function keys, F1 through F12, and Shift F1 through
Shift F12. Secondary menu functions temporarily interrupt main panel functions while leaving all
settings and selections intact. When the secondary function completes, the initial main panel function
resumes.
Translating elements
In this example, use the translate panel to translate elements along a vector and familiarize yourself
with using the various menu items in HyperMesh.
1. Click the entity selector switch.
A pop-up menu displays all the entity types you can modify with the translate panel. The mouse
cursor is located at the center of the pop-up menu.
2. Select elems to specify elements as the type of entity to translate.
After you select elems, the pop-up menu automatically closes. The yellow entity selector button
displays elems and the button has a blue border to indicate it is active.
3. Click elems.
The extended entity selection menu displays. Review the options available.
4. Select by collector, indicating you want to select the elements by component collector.
After you select by collector, a list of component collectors displays.
5. In the graphics area, pick an orange element. Selecting this element also selects the component
collector the element belongs to, in this case end1.
The picked element is momentarily highlighted white. The check box preceding end1 has a check
mark in it.
6. Click select accept and confirm your selection.
This selects all the elements in the component collector, end1, as the elements to be modified
when you use the translate function.
7. Click the direction selector switch and select N1,N2, N3 to use nodes as the means for defining
the direction of translation.
8. Click N1.
The N1 button has a blue halo to indicate that it is active. The selected elements in the graphics
area display in gray because the entity selector is no longer active.
9. In the graphics area, pick any node.
A green node appears in the graphics area at the node that was picked. The N1 button no longer
has a blue halo, but the N2 button does. N2 is currently active.
10. In the graphics area, pick a second node node.
A blue node displays in the graphics area at the node that you specified. N3 becomes active: in
this case we choose to define a vector, so no additional node will be selected.
To define the magnitude of translation, use the distance between two nodes.
Altair Engineering
11. Press the function key, F4, on the keyboard to interrupt the translate panel and jump to the
distance panel.
The distance panel displays. By default the active sub-panel is the top two nodes sub-panel.
The N1 button has a blue halo to indicate that it is active.
12. Pick two nodes in the graphics area for N1 and N2.
The absolute distance between the two nodes automatically displays in the input field following
distance =. To use this value back in the translate panel, you can copy and paste it using
CTRL+C and CTRL+V.
13. Click the field next to distance = to make it active and press CTRL+C on your keyboard to store
this value in a buffer.
14. To exit the distance panel, click return.
The translate panel re-displays. The elements and the nodes for N1 and N2 selected prior to
using the distance panel are still selected.
Warning
Returning out of the distance panel would have automatically reset our selections.
Using the secondary menus through the function keys allowed us to maintain these
selections as we never returned out of the translate panel but simply interupted it.
15. Click magnitude = to make the field active, and press CTRL+V on your keyboard to paste the
value from the buffer.
16. Click translate + .
The highlighted elements translate in the direction from N1 to N2.
17. Click translate - .
The highlighted elements are translated in the negative N1-N2 vector direction to their original
position.
18. To exit the translate panel, click return.
Database relationships: elements/components/properties/materials

This section of the tutorial introduces key concepts you will need to effectively work with your models.
It describes the relationships between key portions of the HyperMesh database.
Elements
Each element has two associated variables: a configuration and a type. The
configuration tells HyperMesh how to draw, store, and work with the element. The
type allows you to define multiple analysis elements for each HyperMesh element.
Collectors
All entities within HyperMesh belong to a collector. HyperMesh uses several types
of collectors, for the various entity types. Geometry, nodes and elements, are
stored into component collectors (comps). Boundary conditions (loads and
constraints) are stored into load collectors (loadcols). Other collector types in
HyperMesh are more analysis specific, and include such things as system
collectors, vector collectors, multibodies collectors, and others.
Components
Components are collectors that contain element and geometry data. This allows
you to organize and group your data into units on which various function can
performed. Operations performed on a component affect all the elements, lines,
and surfaces that belong to the component.
Altair Engineering

19
Component collectors also retain property and material information about the
entities that belong to it. All the elements in a component collector are assigned
the same properties and material except when the elements have a property
reference. In this case, the elements are assigned properties from the property
collector they reference.
Lines, elements, and surfaces cannot exist outside of a component collector. If
you have not created a component first, HyperMesh automatically creates a
component, auto1, for those entities as they are generated. At the time of creation,
a material collector is assigned to the component collector. If this is not done by
the user, HyperMesh automatically creates a "dummy" (empty) material collector
with the same name as the component collector and assigns it to the component.
Property
Property collectors (props) contain property information about 1-D elements and
are required only when a model contains one or more of the following elements:
bar2
bar3
gap
joint
masses
rod
spring
After you create a property collector, you can assign the specified properties to
new 1-D elements by entering the collector name after property = when you
create or update the elements. Properties for all other element types, 2-D or 3-D,
are assigned by the component to which the elements belong. A material collector
is assigned at the time of creation of a property collector. Similarly to component
collectors, when a material is not assigned by the user to the property collector at
the time of creation, HyperMesh automatically generates a material collector with
the same name as the property collector.
Material
Material collectors contain information about the materials in a HyperMesh model.

If a model contains any non-rigid elements, then the model should have at least
one material collector. You can assign a material collector to a component or
property collector by entering the material collector name after material = when
creating either one of them.
Setting current collectors, element size and element order

The global panel from the permanent menu allows you to set many global parameters for your
HyperMesh session. It is possible, for example, to select a solver template (see Interfacing with
solvers), or specify a result file for post-processing analysis results (see File input and output).
With the bumper.hm model loaded (see File input and output):
1. From the permanent menu, select the global panel.
Specify a global element size using the element size = field. Simply activate the field and type in
any value. This defines the element size HyperMesh will use for meshing operations unless
otherwise specified locally in a given panel such as the automesh panel.
Altair Engineering
2. Click element size =, enter 20 and push ENTER on your keyboard to accept this value.
The toggle for the element order: lets you specify the order, first or second, for the elements
HyperMesh creates. Using this toggle does not affect the order of already existing elements, but
sets the order for element subsequently generated. To change the order of already existing
elements, use the order change panel from the 1D, 2D or 3D pages.
3. Use the toggle next to element order: to change the order between first and second.
Finally, the global panel gives you the ability to set the current collectors. Current collectors are
the collectors in which new entities are placed as they are created. If no collector exists in the
database for the type of entity created, HyperMesh automatically creates a collector and stores
the entities in it. By default, the last created collector is the current collector, whether it was
automatically created by HyperMesh, or created by the user.
To modify the current collectors, use the page toggle between pg1 and pg2 to find the collector
type of interest. Only six types of collectors are available in this panel: components to collect
element and geometry information, systcol for coordinate systems, loadcol for boundary
conditions, beamsectcol for beam properties, vectorcol for vectors, and multibody for
multibody entities. For all the other types of collectors, the creation of the entities they collect is
coincident with the creation of the collector itself.
4. Set the page toggle to pg1, click component = and select end1 from the list of component
collectors in the bumper model.
end1 appears next to component = in the global panel, and in the header bar as well next to
comp:. Any new element or geometry created at this time would go into the end1 component
collector and display in the color of this component.
Note
For convenience, the header bar lists the current component collector (comp:) as well as
the current load collector (loadcol:) for the model.
Interfacing with solvers

The HyperMesh database is solver neutral. In order to define any solver specific information, such as
material or element properties, you need to load a solver template. The template defines the interface
between HyperMesh and an FE solver. In HyperMesh, there are two places where the solver
template can be set: in the files panel, template sub-panel, or in the global panel. Once you are in
either panel, the steps for selecting a template are identical:
1. Go to the global panel from the permanent menu, or to the template sub-panel of the files panel.
2. Click load to launch the windows style file browser.
The file browser shows the contents of the <install_directory>/templates/feoutput/
directory on PC, and
<install_directory>/hm/bin/<platform>/templates/feoutput/ directory on Unix.
Altair Engineering

21
feoutput directory showing available solver templates

3. Open the optistruct directory, select the optistruct template and click Open.
This loads the selected solver template, and from this point on, entities can be defined in terms of
this solver.
Another way to load a solver template is to select the HyperMesh user profile for this solver. The
HyperMesh user interface provides tools that support a variety of solvers. To reduces the number
of tools to what is useful for a specific solver, solver user profiles are available. User profiles are
tailored to include loading a specific template, loading a specific macro menu, renaming panels,
removing unused panels or subpanels, and removing, moving, or renaming panel options. A set
of standard user profiles is included in the HyperMesh installation. While the user profiles may
change the appearance of a panel - they do not affect the internal behavior of each function.
Note
Once you select a standard user profile, the appropriate template and macro menu are
loaded. You can return to the standard HyperMesh GUI by selecting the HyperMesh
profile. The current user profile is displayed on the header bar.
To load a user profile, from the Geom page, click user prof and select the solver desired from
the drop down list.
Creating collectors
The collectors panel allows you to create, review, and edit collectors. A collector is a database entity
that collects other entities, grouping together all the data pertaining to that entity and allowing you to
handle the data as a group. Before you create an entity in HyperMesh, a collector in which to store
the data must exist, whether it has been created by the user, or is automatically generated by
HyperMesh. In this section, create a component collector and a material collector.
With the bumper.hm model loaded (see File Input and Output) and the optistruct solver template
loaded (see Interfacing with solvers):
1. From any page, go to the collectors panel.
The collectors panel has three subpanel. The create sub-panel is used to create new collectors.
Depending on the type of collector and the template loaded, card images to define solver specific
information can be assigned to the collectors as they are created. The update sub-panel lets you
modify some collector attributes, and the card image sub-panel lets you assign, review and edit
Altair Engineering
solver card images.

2. Select the create sub-panel.
3. To the right of the label collector type:, click the switch.
A pop-up menu appears with all the available collector types.
4. Select comps from the list.
comps represenents component collectors, which are used for collecting geometry and element
data.
Notes The create sub-panel displays fields for card images or dictionaries depending on the
type of solver template that is referenced. If a card image template is loaded, or no
template is loaded, the panel displays card image related fields. If a dictionary template is
loaded, the panel displays dictionary related fields. Card image and dictionary entry
fields are used in the same way except that when a card image solver is being used and
edit is selected, the card image is displayed in a new area of the screen. For dictionary
solvers, the data is shown in the existing menu area. This is how solver specific
information can be tied to the HyperMesh entities.
The sub-panel also references a material field. This is where a material collector is
assigned to the new component collector. In order to assign a material to a new
component as it is being created, the material collector needs to exist or be created first.
See Database relationships: elements/components/materials/properties for detailed
information on how various collectors are tied together.
Start by creating a material collector. When creating a material collector, you need to set
the collectory type to mats, give the material collector a name, indicate if there is a card
image to assign to it and what type, and supply the necessary values to specific fields on
the card.
5. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats.
6. Click the text box after name = and enter 6061_T6_ALUMINUM.
7. Click the switch under creation method: and select card image =.
8. Click card image = and select MAT1.
This is the card image necessary to create an OptiStruct elastic isotropic material.
9. Click create/edit.
This function, unlike create which would simply create the material collector with the card image
attached to it, gives you the opportunity to review the MAT1 card image and type in any values for
the various parameters. The MAT1 card image is displayed in the card previewer.
By default, most of the number fields are not active. To activate a number field, click the field
heading (in brackets). A text box with a default value opens. Modify the value by over-writing it or
if no value has been set, enter a value in the text box.
Warning
When creating collectors, it is common to inadvertently click create instead of clicking

create/edit. In such situations, clicking create/edit will result in an error message as
HyperMesh does not allow for the creation of two collectors with the same name. In
order to edit the card image, use the card image sub-panel instead.
10. Click E, type 70000, and press ENTER.

11. Click NU, type .33, and press ENTER.
Altair Engineering

23
12. Click return to accept the values.

A material collector named 6061_T6_ALUMINUM is created.
Component collectors (comps) require a name, a material and if a card image is desired, the
card image type. Since components are displayed, they also require a color. Field values on the
card images can be set at this time as well.
13. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.
14. Click name = and enter bumper.
15. Click the switch under creation method: and select card image =.
16. Click card image = and select PSHELL.
This is the OptiStruct card image that is used to define shell element properties.
17. Click material = and select 6061_T6_ALUMINUM from the list of material collectors.
18. Click color and select color 8.
The PSHELL card is displayed in the card previewer. Set a value for the thickness.
20. Click T, and enter 3.0.
21. Click return to accept the value.
A component collector named bumper is created.
The same principles would apply to the creation of property collectors, and other types of
collectors.
Reviewing and editing card images

The card panel from the permanent menu is used to view and edit database information (card
images) in the solver format defined by the output template (see Interfacing with solvers).
With the bumper.hm model loaded (see File Input and Output) and the optistruct solver template
loaded (see Interfacing with solvers):
1. Click card on the permanent menu to enter the card panel.
2. The default setting of the entity selector in this panel is nodes.
3. If it is not currently set, use the entity selector to set the type of entities to nodes.
4. Pick any node in the model by clicking it in the graphics area.
5. Click edit to bring up the card image for the node you selected.
The OptiStruct GRID card image displays. It contains the node ID number and its coordinates.
This is the actual information for this node that appears in the FE deck once the model is
exported out of HyperMesh to an ASCII file using the OptiStruct
template.

Altair Engineering
OptiStruct grid card defining node coordinates

6. Click return to close the card editor.
7. Set the entity selector to elems and select any one element from the graphics area.
8. Click edit to review the information specific to the element you have selected.
The card image for the element you selected displays. For a 4-noded element, the CQUAD card
displays and contains the element ID number (EID), a reference to a property (PID), as well as
the ID number of the 4 nodes (G1 to G4) the element builds on.
OptiStruct card image for a 4-node plate element

9. Click return to close the card editor for the element.
In the OptiStruct and NASTRAN formats, the property card for shell and solid elements (PSHELL
or PSOLID cards) are assigned to the component collector. To review the PSHELL card for the
element selected, we must card edit the component that the element belongs to.
10. Set the entity type to comps, and click comps to bring up the list of the components in the
model.
11. On the CQUAD4 card, the PID field refers to the property by number only. In HyperMesh, the
components can be refered to by name or id. To display the id number of the component, along
with the name, click the switch next to name on the lower right corner of the panel and choose
name(id) for the display format in the component list. This will add the component id number to
the listed components in the model.
Altair Engineering

25
12. Select the component with the same ID number as the PID number from the element card image
reviewed previously.
13. Click edit to bring up the card image.
OptiStruct PSHELL card image

Note the information on the PSHELL card includes a refrence to a material (MID1) and an
editable number field to specify the thickness of the shell elements (T) in the component collector.
You can edit this thickness value and enter any new thickness.
14. Click the return button to exit the card editor.
15. Change the type of entity from comps to mats (materials).
16. Click mats to bring up a list of materials in the model, and select the steel material.
17. Click select.
18. Click edit to bring up the card image for the material card.
MAT1 card image

19. The MAT1 card image defines properties for linear elastic materials. In this case, the fields for E
(Youngs modulus) and NU (Poissons ratio) are activated. Change any of the numbers in the
active fields by clicking in the field and then typing in the new value.
20. If a field is blank and no number field appears, it is inactive. To activate a field, click the field
heading.

Altair Engineering
21. Click field heading RHO to activate the density field.

The default value appears.
22. Click return to close the card editor.
23. Click return to exit the card panel and return to the main menu.
Note
The card image sub-panel of the collectors panel is also useful in assigning, reviewing
and editing card images for collectors.
Organizing and deleting entities

In this section, learn how to move and organize entities in a HyperMesh database, as well as how to
delete them. This section assumes that the bumper.hm file has been loaded (see File input and
output)
Organizing the elements into one component
1. From any page, go to the organize panel.
2. Set the entity type to elems.
3. Click elems and select all from the pop-up menu.
4. Click destination = and select end1 from the component list.
5. Click move to move all the elements into the one component.
6. Click return.
Cleaning up the model

At this point, the model contains unneeded geometry, several empty component collectors, and
potentially some unused material collector. Delete all this information that is no longer needed using
the delete panel.
1. Go to the Tool page and select the delete panel, or use the F2 function key to jump to this panel
directly.
2. Set the entity type to lines.
3. Click lines and select all from the pop-up menu.
4. Click delete entity.
A message comfirms the lines were deleted.
5. To identify and delete empty components, set the entity type to comps.
6. Click preview empty.
A message confirms there are empty components. If you wish, click comps to display the list of
components in the model. Those with checks are empty.
7. Click select.
Altair Engineering

27
9. To check for unused materials, set the entity type switch to mats.
10. Click preview unused.
A message in the header will return the number of unused materials in the database.
11. Click delete entity if there are any unused materials.
Note
Notice the order in which these steps were performed. One of the components,
mid1_and_lines, contained geometry lines. Without deleting the lines in the model first, this
component would not have shown up in the list of empty components. This would be true for
materials as well. Until the components referencing a material are deleted, this material is not
considered unused.
This concludes this introductory tutorial. You may discard the model by using the delete model
function from the delete panel.
Proceed from here to any other tutorial.

Altair Engineering
Creating and Editing Line Data - HM-2000

For this tutorial it is recommended that you complete the introductory tutorial, Getting Started with
HyperMesh - HM-1000.
This tutorial explains how to create lines and surfaces with the geometry creation panels found on the
Geom page. The lines, line edit, circles, fillet, delete, reflect, section cut, tangent and translate
panels are included. There are also instructions about using the plane panel to create a surface.
The completed geometry of this exercise is illustrated below

Note
Before using HyperMesh, make sure you delete the hmmenu.set file from your current
working directory.
To create a component collector for geometry:

1. Select the collectors panel.
2. Select the create subpanel.
3. Click the selection switch and choose comp.
4. Click name = and enter geometry.
5. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.
7. Click create.
8. Click return to exit the collectors panel.
To create nodes:
1. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.
Altair Engineering

29
2. Click Iso1.
3. Select the Geom page.
4. Select the create nodes panel.
5. Select the type in subpanel.
6. To create the nodes, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the table below and click create node
for each of the nodes.
Node
25
37
25
-2
7. Click return to exit the create nodes panel

To display the node IDs:
1. Select the tools page.
2. Select the numbers panel.
3. Click the input selection switch and select nodes.
4. Click node to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click all.
6. Click on to display all the node IDs.
7. Click return to exit the numbers panel.
To create a circle:
1. Select the Geom page
2. Select the circles panel.
3. Select the center and radius subpanel.
4. Pick the node with ID number 2 as the node list at which the circle is to be created.
5. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select X-axis.
6. Pick the node with ID number 2 again as the base for the axis of rotation.
7. Click on the toggle switch and select circle
8. Click radius and enter 5.
9. Click create.
30

Altair Engineering
To create an arc:
1. Click the toggle to change from circle to arc.
2. Pick the node with ID number 2 as the node list at which the circle is to be created.
3. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select X-axis.
4. Pick the node with ID number 2 again as the base for the axis of rotation.
5. Input 180 for angle =.
6. Enter 2.5 for radius =.
7. Enter 90 for offset =.
8. Click create to create an arc.
9. Click return to exit the circles panel.
11. Click rear to change the view.
Altair Engineering

31
To create a line:
2. Select the lines panel.
3. Select create line subpanel.
4. Pick the nodes with ID number 4 and node 5 in node list.
5. Click create to create a line between nodes 4 and 5.
6. Click return to exit the lines panel.
To duplicate and translate lines:
1. Select the Tool page.
2. Select the translate panel.
3. Click the input selection switch and select lines.
4. Pick the line that was created between nodes 4 and 5.
5. Click lines again to display the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click duplicate.
7. Click current comp to copy the new line into the current component (Geometry).
8. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis.
9. Click magnitude = and enter 10.0.
10. Click translate -.
11. Click p on the permanent menu to refresh the screen.
12. Click return to exit the translate panel.
32

Altair Engineering
To edit lines by splitting at a line:

2. Select the line edit panel.
3. Select the split at line subpanel.
4. Click lines and pick the circle.
5. Click cut line and pick the line between node 4 and node 5.
6. Click split.
7. Repeat this procedure on the other line that was just translated.
8. Click return to exit the line edit panel.
To display the line IDs:
1. Select the Tools page.
4. Click lines to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click all.
6. Click on to display all the line IDs.
Altair Engineering

33
To delete a redundant arc:

2. Select the delete panel.
4. Select the lower semi-circle (line id 10) on the screen.
5. Click on delete entity to delete the redundant arc.
6. Click return to exit the delete panel.
To duplicate and reflect an arc:
2. Select the reflect panel.
4. Choose the arc on screen (line id 2).
5. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select z-axis.
6. Pick node 2 as the base node.
7. Click lines again to display the extended entity selection menu.
8. Click duplicate.
9. Click original comp to copy the new line into the current component (Geometry).
original comp allows you to place all duplicated entities into the component collector where
duplication occurred. current comp allows you to place all duplicated entities into the current
working component defined in global panel.
10. Click reflect to create the lower arc.
11. Click return to exit the reflect panel.
12. Click p on the permanent menu to refresh the screen.
34

Altair Engineering
To create two tangent lines

2. Select the tangents panel.
3. Select the node with ID number 3 as the node list.
4. Select the line panel.
5. Select the line with ID number 7. Comment: Node 7 is not clearly illustrated in the diagram above.
6. Click find tangent.
HyperMesh finds a tangent line for the selected curve.
7. Repeat step 3-5, but pick line 8 instead of line 7
There are two tangent lines on screen.
8. Click return to exit the tangent panel
To redisplay the line IDs:
3. Click the input collector switch and select lines.
4. Click lines to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click all.
6. Click on to display all the line IDs.
Altair Engineering

35
To split curves by tangent lines, and delete redundant line:

3. Select split at line subpanel.
4. Pick line 7 for lines and tangent line 12 for cut line.
5. Click split to split line 7 by line 12.
6. Repeat step 3-5 in order to cut curve line 8 by tangent line 13 in line edit panel.
7. Press the F2 key to jump into delete panel from line edit panel.
8. Select the two curve lines between tangent lines 12 and 13.
9. Click delete entity to delete the two curves.
10. Click return twice to go back to main menu
To create a component collector for surfaces:

3. Click the selection switch and choose comp.
4. Click name = and enter surfaces.
5. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.
7. Click create.
8. Click return to exit the collectors panel
36

Altair Engineering
To create a square surface on X-Y plane:

1. Select the 2D page.
2. Select the planes panel.
3. Select the square subpanel.
4. Click the input collector switch and select z-axis.
5. For base node, choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base reference node.
6. Choose surface only from the triangle entity switch.
7. Enter 30 in the size = input field.
8. Click on create to create a square surface.
9. Click return to exit the planes panel.
To create a line which connects two parallel lines on an X-Y plane:
2. Select the section cut panel.
3. Click the input selection switch and select z-axis.
The reason to choose z-axis is because we want to create the line on the X-Y plane.
4. For base, choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base node.
5. For line list, choose the 2 straight lines that are perpendicular to the X-Y plane.
A line on the screen shows the result.
6. Click create to finish creating the line.
To switch the current working component from surfaces to geometry:
1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.
2. By default, component = should be set to surfaces component collector.
3. Click surfaces, and change to geometry from the collector name list.
From this point, any element or geometry, such as a line or surface that is created, will be placed
in this geometry component collector.
To extend line to surface edge:
2. Click Iso1.
5. Select the extend line subpanel.
Altair Engineering

37
6. Click on the toggle and change subpanel from distance = to to : line.

7. Choose the purple straight line for the upper line panel, then choose 1 surface edge (see
figure below) in the lower line panel.
Now you see a red " V " which marks the beginning to extend the purple line.
8. Click on extend + .
You can see that line 11 is extended to reach one surface edge.
Note
If the extended line does not stop and extend over the surface edge, try extend and
review the result.
9. Click return to exit the line edit panel.

The result should resemble the figure below.
To create a fillet between two lines:

1. Select the geom page.
2. Select the fillets panel.
4. Switch the toggle from no trim to trim.
5. For radius, enter 5.
6. For the 1st line panel, pick line 3.
7. For the 2nd line panel, pick the purple straight line which is perpendicular to line 3.
Please select fillet quadrant is displayed in the message bar. HyperMesh is asking you to select
a reference location for fillet.
38

Altair Engineering
8. Pick the "x" above X-Y plane and closed to node 1.

You can see a fillet on screen created by HyperMesh
9. Repeat steps 5-7 to create another fillet for line 3.
10. Click return to exit the fillets panel.
Altair Engineering

39
To trim a line by plane and delete a redundant line segment:

3. Select split at plane subpanel.
4. Select line 4 in the lines panel.
5. Choose z-axis from the input collector switch.
6. Choose node 1 as the base node.
7. Click split to split line 2 by the X-Y plane.
8. Press the F2 key to jump into the delete panel.
10. Choose the small line segment under the X-Y plane, and click on delete entity to remove the line
segment.
11. Click return twice to return to the main menu.
To remove all temp nodes:
2. Select the temp nodes panel.
3. Click clear all to remove all temp nodes.
4. Click return to return to the main menu.
To change to performance graphics:
1. From the Macro menu, select the Disp panel.
2. Select the per panel for performance panel.
40

Altair Engineering
To export all geometry as an IGES file:

1. From any page, select the files panel.
2. Select the IGES subpanel.
3. Click write as.
4. Input a name for filename =.
5. Click save to save the model as an IGES file.
The IGES file you generate can be shared with other CAD packages such as UG, Catia, and
ProE.
Altair Engineering

41
42

Altair Engineering
Fixing Geometry for Meshing - HM-2020

This tutorial introduces the geom cleanup panel. This panel is used to prepare surface geometry for
meshing. The gaps, overlaps and misalignments that can occur when surfaces are imported into
HyperMesh can prevent the automesher from creating quality meshes. By eliminating misalignments
and holes and by suppressing the boundaries between adjacent surfaces, you can automesh across
larger, more logical regions of the model and improve overall meshing speed and quality.
The following topics are included:
HyperMesh terminology
Using the geom cleanup and surface edit panels
See the geom cleanup panel and the surface edit panel (filler surface subpanel) for more
information on panel features.
HyperMesh Terminology
This image identifies various geometric features found on models labeled with the terminology used
in HyperMesh for faces, edges, and points. Refer to the definitions below for each feature identified
on this image.
New HyperMesh terminology
Altair Engineering

43
face
A single NURB; the smallest area entity.
surface
A collection of one or more adjacent faces whose common edges

are suppressed. HyperMesh meshes on surfaces.
free edge
The edge is owned by one surface. In the geom cleanup panel,

the default color is red.
shared edge
The edge is owned by two adjacent surfaces. In the geom

cleanup panel, the default color is green.
suppressed edge
The edge is owned, or shared, by two adjacent surfaces.

Suppressed edges are ignored by the meshing routines in
HyperMesh. In the geom cleanup panel, the default color is blue.
non-manifold edge
The edge is owned by three or more surfaces. In the geom

cleanup panel, the default color is yellow.
fixed point
A point associated with a surface. A fixed point is displayed as a

small circle (o) and is the same color as the surface to which it is
associated. The automesher places a finite element node at each
fixed point on the surfaces being meshed.
free point
A point in space not associated with a surface. A free point is

displayed as a small x, (x), and is the same color as the geometry
collector to which it belongs.
Using the Geom Cleanup and Surface Edit Panels

In this section, you will use the geom cleanup panel and the filler surface subpanel of the surface
edit panel to import surface geometry and prepare it for meshing.
To import surface geometry data file:
1. Go to the files panel, select the import sub-panel and import the file,
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/raw_iges_data.iges, using the IGES translator.
2. Click return.
In this tutorial the surfaces you will select are referred to by their ID numbers. Therefore, you will
need to have the ID numbers of the surfaces displayed so that you know which ones to select.
To display surface IDs:
1. Select the Tool page.
3. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.
4. Click surfs and select all on the extended entity selection pop-up window.
5. Click on.
The IDs for the displayed surfaces are displayed.
6. Click return.

Altair Engineering
Displayed surface IDs

To change surface edges from free to shared using edges/equivalence subpanel:
2. Select the geom cleanup panel.
3. Select the edges subpanel.
4. Click the equivalence radio button.
5. Click surfs and select displayed.
6. Click equivalence.
Some of the free surface edges (red) became shared edges (green).
To identify and delete duplicate surfaces:
1. Select the surfaces subpanel.
2. Click the find duplicates radio button.
3. Click faces and select displayed from the extended entity selection pop-up window.
4. Click find.
The message, "One face is duplicated," is displayed in the header bar.
5. Click delete.
The message, "One face was deleted," is displayed in the header bar.
To replace a fixed point:
1. Select the fixed points subpanel.
2. Click the replace radio button.
3. Zoom into the corner of surface 9 which borders surface 1 and is on the perimeter of model.
4. Pick the surface 1 corner node.
Altair Engineering

45
5. Pick the surface 9 corner node.

6. Click replace.
The surface 9 corner node is replaced with the surface 1 corner node.
To combine free edges to create shared edges using the edges/toggle subpanel:
1. Select the edges subpanel.
2. Select the toggle radio button.
3. Click f on the permanent menu to fit displayed components to the graphics area.
4. Pick surface 3 free edge adjacent to surface 1.
The surface edge becomes green. The surface edge selected in the edges/toggle subpanel is
the retained edge. The other edge, which is found automatically, is the edge which is moved.
5. Pick the surface 9 free edge adjacent to surface 1.
8. Pick any other interior free edges.
At this point, there are still a number of problems with the geometry. There are a number of free
(red) edges, the corner where surfaces 1, 3, 5, and 7 meet has some misaligned fixed points
causing a gap in the surfaces, and there is a missing surface between surfaces 10 and 11.
To locate problem areas in the geometry:
1. Click vis opts.
2. Deactivate the shared edges check box to turn the display of these edges off.
3. Deactivate the fixed points to turn the display of these points off.
4. Click r on the permanent menu to rotate and view model.
Only the free edges that define the model perimeter and the interior holes should remain.
However, there are also some very short free edges where surfaces 1, 3, 5, and 7 meet. This
indicates that there is a gap in the geometry. Also, there some edges defining the slot which
appears between surfaces 10 and 11. These features are not something we want, so we need to
fix them.
5. Click vis opts.
6. Activate the shared edges check box to turn display of the edges on.
7. Activate the fixed points check box to turn display of the points on.
8. Click the toggle to change from wireframe to shaded.
9. Click r on the permanent menu to rotate and view model.
Using the shaded mode for surfaces is another method to help identify whether any surfaces are
missing in the part. This method can be particularly helpful if the surfaces are supposed to fully
enclose a volume.
10. Click vis opts.
Altair Engineering
11. Click the toggle to change from shaded to wireframe.

12. Click return.
To fill in missing surfaces using the surface edit / filler surface subpanel:
1. Select surface edit panel.
2. Click the filler surface radio button.
3. Zoom into the corner in which surfaces 1, 3, 5, and 7 meet where we found the small gap in the
geometry in the last section.
4. On the Disp page of the macro menu, click the button labeled 2 next to Vis opts:.
This turns on the topology colors for geometry cleanup. The three edges surrounding the gap in
the geometry should now be colored red.
5. Make sure that the auto create and keep tangency check boxes are checked on.
6. Select one of the three red (free) edges in the graphics area.
The filler surface function will automatically select the other two free edges because they are
connected to the one you selected. Auto create was checked on, and so filler surface goes
ahead and automatically creates the surface once it has found a closed loop.
7. Click return.
8. On the Disp page of the macro menu, click the button labeld 0 next to Vis opts:.
This turns on the standard display of geometry colors.
9. Click geom cleanup.
10. Click edges.
11. Click toggle.
12. Of the three lines selected in surface edit / filler surface subpanel, pick the line closest to the
center of the model. The shared (green) edges are suppressed (blue).
To combine two free edges into a shared edge using surfaces / replace subpanel:
1. Select the edges radio button.
2. Click replace on left side of menu panel.
3. Pick the surface 10 edge that is parallel and closest to a surface 11 edge.
4. Pick the surface 11 edge that is parallel and closest to the surface 10 edge just selected.
5. Click replace on the right side of the menu panel.
You get a pop-up window which displays the message, "Gap = (0.603626). Do you still wish to
replace?".
6. Click Yes.
You get this message if the distance of the gap is less than 10 times your cleanup tolerance.
Otherwise, you will have to enter a larger value for the tolerance and try the replace function
again.
Altair Engineering

47
Note
Do not set the cleanup tolerance to unreasonably high values. New edges are
generated based on the cleanup tolerance. The cleanup tolerance not only affects the
selected entities, but it affects the edges that touch the selected entities at vertices. The
generated edges are accurate only to within the set cleanup tolerance. As a result, if
unreasonably high tolerances are used, small gaps can increase in distance up to the set
tolerance.
The geom cleanup edges / toggle subpanel can also be used to combine the surface
10 and 11 edges.
If the shortest distance between two surface edges is greater than the intended element
size, do not use this function. Instead, use the surface filler subpanel on the surface
edit panel. Create a filler surface and toggle surface edges to suppressed edges
accordingly. Another panel that can be used is the drag geoms subpanel in the drag
panel.
To stitch surfaces together:

1. Click (un)suppress.
2. Pick the line between surfaces 4 and 6.
3. Pick the line between surfaces 3 and 5.
4. Pick the two linear lines between surfaces 3 and 9.
5. Click suppress.
The selected lines change from shared (green) to suppressed (blue) edges.
6. Click return.
The suppressed surface edges are not displayed in the graphics area. They still exist in the
model and can be toggled back to shared edges in the geom cleanup panel.
Note
The resulting stitched surface is located in the component collector of the stitched
surface having the lowest id. As a result of surfaces 4 and 6 being stitched together, the
stitched surface is located in middle2 component collector where surface 4 was
originally located. As a result of surfaces 3, 5, and 9 being stitched together, the stitched
surface is located in middle1 component collector where surface 3 was originally
located.
In the geom cleanup panel, HyperMesh treats lines and surface edges the same. To
select surface edges more easily, display off or mask lines.

Altair Engineering
Generating a Midplane from Solid Geometry - HM-2030

For this tutorial, it is recommended that you complete the introductory tutorial Getting Started with
A midsurface is the midplane layer of geometry that when meshed, can be used as a finite element
shell representation of a given solid part. Midsurface extraction can be used with sheet metal
stampings, molded plastic parts with ribs, and other parts consisting of plates; for example, pieces
with a thickness clearly smaller than the width and length.
In this tutorial you will learn how to obtain the midsurface of two given surfaces, and extract the
midsurface of a more complicated group of surfaces that represent an electrical housing solid
bracket. The midsurface panel will be used, and for more detailed information about this panel and
all its options, please refer to the Panels section of the HyperMesh on-line help, or click the
HyperMesh help button while in the panel to activate its context sensitive help.
This tutorial requires about 35 minutes to complete and uses a file located in the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory. For detailed instructions on how to locate the
installation directory <install_directory> at your site, see Finding the Installation Directory
<install_directory>.
The model geometry is an electrical housing bracket:
To load and review the model:

1. From the files panel select the hm file sub-panel and retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/electrical_housing.hm.
The model is organized into a single HyperMesh component collector corresponding to the
original IGES layer lvl0.
2. From the Disp page of the macro menu select Vis opts: 3 to shade the surfaces of the model.
Altair Engineering

49
3. Observe the model using the HyperMesh view controls.

When you want to midsurface a part, it is important to have a clear understanding of the geometry
of the part itself. This helps you determine whether or not the midsurfaces obtained are consistent
with the original geometry.
Note
The original geometry that you select to extract midsurfaces remains unchanged. The
variable thickness for each midsurface is calculated and stored in the database.
To obtain baseline midsurfaces:

In this section, generate midsurfaces for the entire part. From the midsurface panel, select the
create sub-panel and use the solid function. Observe the midsurfaces obtained and compare them
to the original geometry using transparency settings for the shaded surfaces. Identify any problems
with the midsurfaces generated.
1. Extract midsurfaces for the entire bracket.
From the Geom page select the midsurface panel.
Select the create sub-panel.
Select the solid function.
The solid function allows you to extract midsurfaces of entire parts at once. The between surfs
function works on one pair of surfaces at a time.
Verify the leftmost toggle is set to closed solid.
Click surfs and select displayed.
Click extract.
HyperMesh extracts the midsurfaces and places them into the Middle Surface component
collector. This new component becomes the current component, as shown in the header bar. For
more detailed descriptions on the various options available in the advanced options mode, click
the HyperMesh help button to bring up the context sensitive help for this panel.
2. Change the level of transparency of the surfaces in the lvl0 component.
From the permanent menu, select the transparency panel,
Use the slider bar to vary the level of transparency between 0 and 10.
Click comps to review and modify the list of components to which transparency is applied.
Set the transparency level to 10 and go back to the midsurface panel.
The surfaces in the lvl0 components are now transparent and only their edges are visible.
Note
By default, all the components, except the one in which the midsurfaces are placed,
are automatically selected for transparency settings in this panel, and their level of
transparency can be adjusted from opaque to fully transparent.
3. From the permanent menu select the view panel and restore pre-defined view1.
Notice how a midsurface is missing in this area.

Altair Engineering
4. Restore view2.
Notice how some of the midsurfaces created here do not match up.
Three of the main types of problems that can appear with generated midsurfaces are:
The midsurface is incorrectly shaped.
The midsurface is correctly shaped, but incorrectly positioned.
The midsurface is incorrectly shaped and incorrectly positioned.
Altair Engineering

51
Most of the problem midsurfaces shown in the image above fall into these categories of
problems. Some specific examples of these will be covered in the next section.
Various tools and techniques can be used to correct these problems, and will typically produce
the same sought result: correctly shaped and positioned midsurfaces. Some of these techniques
are presented in the next sections as we take a closer look at the problems in our example
model. The techniques presented involve tools available on the midsurface panel itself.
In this section we used the midsurface panel to generate midsurfaces for an entire part in a
single step. We then used the transparency tool to identify areas where various problems, such
as missing or incorrect surfaces, may be present.
To create or re-create individual midsurfaces:
In this section use the between surfs function to create the midsurface that is missing, and also
manually re-create some of the midsurfaces in the model that are incorrectly shaped and/or
positioned.
1. Restore view3.
Incorrectly positioned surface

Notice how this surface is incorrectly positioned in the sense that it does not follow the midplane
of the section it represents.
2. Restore view4.

Altair Engineering
Incorrectly shaped surface

Notice how this same surface is also incorrectly shaped in the sense that one corner does not line
up the two corners of which it is a mid-representation, and also in the sense that one of the edges
is not straight.
One possible approach for resolving these issues is to simply delete the faulty midsurface and regenerate one there manually. Before proceeding, it is important to have a clear understanding of
the geometry at hand as well as the behavior and requirements of the between surfs option.
3. From the midsurface panel select the create sub-panel, and select the between surfs function.
This function generates a midplane surface between two surfaces selected as side1 and side2.
This means that a midplane cannot be created, for example, between one surface on one side
and two surfaces on the corresponding opposite side.
To check for any such situation in our model, set the transparency of all surfaces back to opaque
(0).
4. Set the transparency to 0.
Observe the surfaces in the lvl0 component and look for sections where opposite sides are
defined with a dissimilar number of surfaces.
The two images below show one example:
Altair Engineering

53
For example, for this particular case, you would need to first suppress the shared (green) edge
between the two surfaces so that only one surface is left for selection as side1 or side2.
With our model, we will arbitrarily pick some of the bad midsurfaces, delete them and re-generate
them.
5. Set the transparency back to 10.
6. From the Tool page select the delete panel to delete the 3 midsurfaces identified in the image
below.

Altair Engineering
For the remainder of this section, you can work either with shaded surfaces and the transparency
options (Vis opts: 3), or in the default component color wireframe mode
(Vis opts: 0).
7. Use the between surfs function to re-create the 3 midsurfaces previously deleted.
From to the midsurface panel select the create sub-panel.
Select the between surfs option.
For side1 select one surface from the lvl0 component that defines the first side of the given
section.
For side 2 select the surface on the opposite side of the section.
Verify that both boxes for combine with adjacent plates and combine all adjacent plates
are checked, and that the toggle is set to new comp.
Click extract.
Repeat these steps for the other 2 midsurfaces to re-generate.

Hint
Start with the larger 2 square midsurfaces and finish with the narrow rectangular
midsurface.
Altair Engineering

55
Notes The combine with adjacent plates options combines the new midsurface with the
closest midsurface, while the combine all adjacent plates option combines the new
midsurface with all neighboring midsurfaces.
When you do not obtain the right midsurface with the given combination of these
options, it is often useful to compare the results of using one, the other, none, or both
of these options.
Notice how the midsurfaces that were re-generated now are correctly shaped and correctly
positioned. There are still some problems with the midsurfaces that we have not yet worked on,
and we will address these in the next section using a different approach.
The midsurface that was missing from the beginning still needs to be created. We are saving its
creation until after most of the neighboring midsurfaces are corrected.
8. Use the between surfs function with the same options to generate the midsurface that was
missing all along.
In this section we used the between surfs function to not only create midsurfaces that were missing,
but also to re-generate new midsurfaces where inaccurate ones were initially produced. This is one
way of correcting potential problems that are produced when midsurfaces for entire parts are
generated. Another approach is presented in the next section.
To correct midsurfaces by editing them:
Re-creating surfaces by hand is one possible approach to resolving problems with incorrectly shaped
and/or positioned surfaces. This can be time consuming as it involves deleting surfaces first, before
re-creating new ones. One alternative is to edit the existing midsurfaces to correct these problems
directly. One of the editing functions available on the midsurface panels edit sub-panel is the quick
edit function. This function consists of re-defining some of the handles that define the midsurfaces
offset distance and direction, allowing for an immediate update in shape and position, thus correcting
this class of problems.
Altair Engineering
Use the quick edit function to fix the last two midsurfaces that are incorrectly shaped and/or
positioned.
This function uses various color codes to identify the original midsurface, the original surface (source)
for it, as well as an updated midsurface. It is therefore important to work in the default component
color mode (0) when using this function so that the various surfaces can be easily recognized.
1. Select Vis opts: 0.
2. From the midsurface panel select the edit sub-panel.
3. Select the quick edit function.
4. Click help.
This brings up the on-line help for the midsurface panel. Follow the link to the edit sub-panel
help and review the help for the quick edit function. This contains all the definitions needed to
understand and effectively use this function.
5. Use the edge to edge type to repair first the smaller square surface.
Set the target type: to edge to edge.
Set the target location: to mid point.

We will update the definition of this midsurface using the edges of the two surfaces defining
this section of the part. For each edge of the midsurface we update, HyperMesh will line it up
with the mid point edge from the two edges we select as reference.
With the surf selector active, select the square midsurface.
Altair Engineering

57
Several new entities appear in different colors. In orange is the midsurface you selected. In
cyan is the midsurface (in-progress) that you can edit by re-assigning the targets in red. In
yellow is the surface to offset (the original surface from which the middle surface was
created).
Quick edit entities and color code

The edge selector, located under edge to offset, is active and ready for you to select one
edge from the original surface (yellow) to match with the corresponding edge from the
opposite surface as pilot edge. The combination will define the mid point edge for the
midsurface to edit.
Select one edge from the original surface (yellow).
With the edge selector under pilot edge active, select the corresponding edge on the
opposite surface defining this section.

Altair Engineering
Repeat these last two steps for the remaining pairs of edges until all (red) targets are
updated.
Alternatively, you can use the arrow buttons to the left of edge to offset to cycle through all
the edges of the original surface and simply select a pilot edge for each one of them. The
active edge to offset is identified with a red circle.
Click update to accept the new midsurface.
6. Use the point to point type to repair the larger side surface.
Set the target type: to point to point.
Set the target location: to as selected.

In this mode, the midsurface to edit uses the fixed point selected by the user. We select this
mode to simply take advantage of the fact that all the other midsurfaces are correct and
therefore offer a set of fixed points that are correctly located. We will simply force the fixed
points of the last midsurface to edit to these locations as needed.
Note
We could have used the edge to edge type just as easily here, and vice versa for the
other surface we already fixed. Both methods are equivalent.
Click surf to make it the active selector and select the last midsurface to update.
The same temporary entities as earlier are displayed. Observe carefully each corner of the
midsurface to edit (cyan) and see how it fits with the neighboring midsurfaces corners. You
may zoom into one of the corners and use the arrow buttons to cycle through all of them.
After careful observation, you should identify some corners that require updating, a possible
two of which are show in the image below with the pilot points to use to re-define them.
Altair Engineering

59
Under point to offset select the point selector.
Select one of the points to offset as needed and as described in the figure above.
Select the corresponding pilot point.
Repeat these last two steps for all the remaining pairs of points (corners) requiring an update.
Click update to accept these changes.

Note
In most cases, several parts are present in a given model, and this can make it
difficult to identify which surface, edge or point to select. In such cases, use the
Spherical Clippling panel from the permanent menu. This panel allows you to focus
on a specific area of a model by showing only the model inside of a sphere and
masking everything outside. Review the help for this panel for more detailed
information.
7. Use the disp panel to turn off the display of the geometry in the lvl0 component.
8. Turn on Vis opts: 3 and observe the midsurfaces.

Altair Engineering
The free (red) edges remaining inside the boundaries of the set of midsurfaces are an indication
that some edge equivalencing is required.
The midsurface panels edit sub-panel has the replace edge function that can be used to
equivalence free edges.
9. Restore view5.
The gap observed here could be closed by updating the definition of the midsurface we are
directly facing in this view using the same approach as we did in this section. In this case, it is
simply easier to close that gap by snapping the two free edges together.
10. Use the replace edge function to close the gap.
From the midsurface panel select the edit sub-panel.
Select the replace edge function.
Under retained edge: select the line selector.
Select the lower edge (see figure below).
Select the upper free edge as the edge to move:.
Click cleanup tol = and enter 0.5.

This tolerance represents how far apart the free edges can be to be equivalenced.
Click replace.
This closes the gap and turns the free (red) edges into a shared (green) edge.
Altair Engineering

61
11. Use the geom cleanup panel to equivalence any remaining free edges.
From the Geom page, select the geom cleanup panel.
Select the edges sub-panel.
Select the equivalence function.
Click surfs and select displayed from the pop-up dialog.

You can leave all other selections unchanged.
Click equivalence.
This turns the last free edges into shared edges. We now have a complete set of midsurfaces.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model, or save it to your working directory for your
own reference.
In this tutorial, we experimented with both midsurface creation tools available in HyperMesh. We also
used some of the editing tools to fix incorrectly shaped and/or positioned midsurfaces. Other editing
tools are also available in the edit sub-panel, and although we did not use them here, they are
powerful tools in correcting other types of midsurfaces issues. The extend surface tool, for example,
can be used to extend surfaces that do not meet where you need them to. Refer to the Panels help
for complete descriptions of all the tools available.
The midsurfaces that were created here can be meshed, defeatured, edited, exported, etc., just like
any other surface in HyperMesh. For geometry simplification techniques, you can refer to the tutorial,
Simplifying Geometry Features - HM-2040. For shell meshing techniques, review the tutorial Creating
2-D Elements from Surfaces Using the Automesh Function - HM-3100.

Altair Engineering
Simplifying Geometry Features - HM-2040

For this tutorial, it is recommended that you complete the introductory tutorial, Getting Started with
HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the automesh panel and the topology display of surfaces is
also helpful, although not required.
In FEA modeling, element quality greatly affects the accuracy of the analysis results. Element quality
is often directly dependent on the features you are trying to model. Often times, designers model
details that are unimportant in FEA. Features that may be needed for manufacturing can often be
ignored for analysis. In these situations, you may consider removing extra features if this yields a
better quality mesh.
The defeature panel, located on the Geom page, provides tools to remove unwanted features in
geometry, such as edge and surface fillets, holes etc. The tools remove features and create any
necessary filler surfaces as a substitution.
In this tutorial, you will learn how to use the tools in the defeature panel to effectively suppress
features from a bracket. The goal is to perform the following operations:
Remove trim lines
Remove pinholes
Remove surface fillets and replace them with hard corners
Remove edge/line fillets
Remove edge fillets by selecting two points of tangency around the fillet
For more information regarding the panels used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section of
the on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help.
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you are unable to locate this directory at your
site, see Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>, or contact your systems administrator.
The model is represented in the image below:
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials HM-2040

63
Bracket model in shaded mode

To load and mesh the bracket:
In many situations, the decision to keep or remove a feature is directly tied to the quality of the
elements it yields, as well as the time required for the defeaturing operations. This is a typical
cost/benefit situation.
If a given (unneeded) feature yields some poor quality elements, it may make sense to remove it.
Still, if the benefits (in terms of element quality) of suppressing this feature do not outweigh the cost
(in time) of doing so, you may simply decide not to remove the given feature.
To help make such an assessment, it is often useful to mesh the part at hand to see how the various
features affect the mesh quality. In this section, load the bracket model and preview a shell mesh of
quad elements with a size of 15 units.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the HyperMesh database file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/defeature.hm.
2. From the macro menu select the Disp page.
3. Set the graphics engine Gfx: to perfomance mode Per.
4. Preview a mesh of quad elements with a size 15 on all the surfaces using the automesh panel.
From the 2D page select the automesh panel.
Select the create mesh sub-panel.
Click surfs and select all.
Check the box for reset meshing parameters to:.
Enter 15 for elem size = and set the type of elements to quads.
Set the mode to interactive and click mesh.

HyperMesh displays the surface edges with density values.
Click mesh to preview the mesh.
With the element size we selected, the holes on the top surface cause distortions in the mesh.
64

Altair Engineering
Capturing the curvature of the surface fillets would also require much smaller elements, and the
edge fillets result into skewed elements.
Click abort to reject this mesh.
For this small example, removing these features requires very limited time. We will therefore proceed
to remove them. Getting familiar with the tools and techniques used in this tutorial will help you
assess how much time and effort would be required in a more complex example.
To remove trim lines:
The trim lines sub-panel, located on the defeature panel, can be used to retrieve the original
surfaces from which the current surfaces were trimmed. It can also be used to remove the interior trim
lines of a surface. Interior trim lines are any edges (free or shared) that are entirely contained within a
surfaces boundary. These interior trim lines receive node seedings when the surfaces are meshed
and thus influence the final mesh quality.
With our model, use the trim lines sub-panel to remove one of the holes in the top surface, as it is an
interior trim line for this surface.
1. From the macro menu select the Disp page.
2. Shade the surfaces in the model by setting Vis opts: to 3.
3. From the defeature panel select the trim lines sub-panel to remove one of the interior holes of
the top surface:
From the Geom page, select the defeature panel.
Select the trim lines sub-panel.
Click the toggle below remove: and select interior trim lines.
With the lines selector active, pick one of the interior trim lines defining one of the holes on
the top surface.
Click untrim to remove the interior trim lines.
The trim line is removed and the surface goes back to its definition prior to the creation of the hole
(see image below).
Altair Engineering

65
Notes
The other option under remove: is to remove all trim lines. This function allows you to
specify a surface and will return the original, untrimmed surface information. Depending
on the CAD package and method used to create these surfaces, the results of this
operation will vary.
When it comes to meshing applications, one alternative to removing interior trim lines is
to suppress (where applicable) these surface edges into suppressed (blue) edges. A
suppressed edge does not receive any node seeding and therefore has no influence on
the mesh.
To remove pinholes:
The pinholes sub-panel identifies and removes holes within surfaces. To be considered a pinhole,
the internal surface edge defining the hole must be continuous and close upon itself. In topology
mode, it will appear as a free (red) edge. The approximate diameter of the hole (or longest distance
across in the case of non-round holes) can be input for identification. Once candidate pinholes are
identified, a confirmation step allows you to deselect individual pinholes.
Use this function to remove the remaining hole in the top surface.
1. Use the distance panel to get an approximate value for the diameter of the remaining hole.
From the Geom page, select the distance panel.
Select the two nodes sub-panel.
In the graphics area, hold down the left mouse button and place the mouse cursor on top of
the line defining the remaining hole.
When the line highlights, release the left mouse button to complete the selection.
The line remains highlighted. Clicking anywhere on the line will generate a temporary node.
Click two locations diametrically opposed on the circular hole.
HyperMesh generates two temporary nodes, N1 and N2.

The distance = field displays the distance between these two nodes, and reads a value that
approaches 20 units.
2. Use the pinholes sub-panel to remove the remaining hole from the top surface.
Select the pinholes sub-panel.
With the surfs selector active, pick the top surface with the hole.
Enter 20 in the field next to diameter <.

This defines the maximum diameter a pinhole can have to be detected.
Click find.
HyperMesh detects one pinhole and marks it in the graphics area with an xP symbol (see
figure below).
Hint
66
Use the pinholes selector at this time to deselect or select pinholes before deletion.

Altair Engineering
Click delete.
This removes the pinhole by filling up the hole, and a fixed point is created at the center of the
hole. This fixed point can be used to create weld or beam elements representing a bolted or
riveted connection, for example.
In this section, we decided to measure the diameter of the hole. This knowledge is useful and only
needed when you try to identify only a certain category of holes in your model (the holes with a
diameter up to the value of interest). When trying to find quickly all the holes in the model example,
simply set the value of the diameter to a large number.
To remove surface fillets:
The surf fillets function can be used to remove surface fillets, or fillets between two non-coplanar
surfaces. The rounded fillet surface will be replaced by a planar, tangential extension of the adjacent
surfaces. Fillets may be specified by selecting the fillet profile as a line, or by specifying a surface
and range of fillet radii.
In this section, search the surface fillets by min/max radius.
1. Use the surf fillets sub-panel to remove the surface fillets with a radius between 5 and 15 units.
Select the surf fillets sub-panel.
Set the entity selector to surfs.

Options for fillet params: are displayed.
Altair Engineering

67
Click surfs and select the surfaces displayed.
Enter 5 for min radius and 15 for max radius.
Click find fillets.
HyperMesh detects two surface fillets meeting the criteria set for the min and max radii, and posts
new selectors in the panel.
The selector for ignore edge assoc.: is used to verify or modify the selection of edges whose
adjacent surface geometry is ignored in favor of using the selected fillet geometry when
calculating the tangent surface. This is commonly used if the adjacent surface has a very high
degree of curvature compared to the fillet, if the edge in question is a free edge, or if the neighbor
surfaces are co-planar.
The selector for fillet ends: is used to verify or modify fillet ends. Unless a string of fillets makes
a complete loop and closes upon itself, you should see at least two fillet end lines.
Under fillet ends: click the lines selector to make it active and review the lines that were
automatically selected to define the ends of the two surface fillets.
Under ignore edge assoc.: click the lines selector and select the two edges of the fillet that
are surrounded by co-planar surfaces (see image below).
Tangential extension of these two surfaces would never meet. Therefore the edge association
has to be ignored in this case and HyperMesh uses the tangents to the fillet instead.
Click remove to delete the rounded fillet surfaces, and replace them with an intersecting,
planar surface tangent to the fillet surface edge.
Adjacent surfaces extended along tangents
68

Altair Engineering
Note
It is typical to remove surface fillets for which the width is less or much less than the
target element size, as meshing such fillets produces elements that may fail minimum
length as well as maximum aspect ratio requirements for the mesh.
To remove edge fillets:

The edge fillets option is used to remove any edge fillets on a free (red) surface edge. HyperMesh
can identify these fillets given a range of fillet radii and a minimum arc angle. Using these filtering
options, you can find the fillets in your model and then remove them.
The trim intersect function works like the edge fillet function, except the points of tangency are
specified by clicking on the free surface edge. With this function you can directly influence the shape
of the hard corner you create.
Removing edges fillets and replacing them with hard corners typically allows for the creation of quad
elements that "fill" the corner.
1. Use the edge fillets sub-panel to remove three out of the four edge fillets in the model (with radii
of 5 and 15).
From the defeature panel select the edge fillets sub-panel.
Click surfs and select the surfaces displayed.
Set min radius to 5;max radius to 15; and min angle to 15.
Leave the lower switch set to all.
Click find.
The fillets are identified with a white F and lines indicating the beginning and ending points of
tangency of the fillets.
Note
By default, any fillets identified are selected for removal. Should you wish not to
remove one of the selected edge fillets, deselect it by clicking the right mouse button.
Deselect one of the fillets by right mouse clicking its corresponding F symbol.
Click remove to eliminate the fillets by projecting the surface edges from the point of
tangency until they intersect.
2. Use the trim-intersect sub-panel on the edge fillet that was not processed in the previous step
and replace it with a square corner.
Altair Engineering

69
From the defeature panel, select the trim-intersect sub-panel.
With the upper node selector active, select the first trim point (point of tangency) for the edge
fillets (see figure below).
Note
In this sub-panel, HyperMesh is expecting a point to be defined on a surface edge. A

temporary node is created. After selecting the second point, the trimming and defilleting operation occurs.
The lower node selector automatically becomes active.
Select the second trim point.
The round surface edge is replaced by a hard corner.
Simplified geometry
To mesh the simplified geometry:
In this section, mesh the final set of surfaces obtained from defeaturing the bracket and compare the
resulting mesh to the earlier mesh (review the image at the beginning of this tutorial).
1. From the macro menu, select the Disp page.
70

Altair Engineering
2. Change the display of surfaces to wireframe by setting Vis opts: to 0.

3. Create a mesh of quad elements with a size 15 on all the surfaces using the automesh panel.
Click surfs and select all.
With all other options unchanged, click mesh.
Click return to accept it.
Simplified geometry meshed

This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model or save it to your working directory for your
own reference.
In this tutorial, we used the functions in the defeature panel to simplify the geometry of a small part
and improve the resulting mesh. The result of these operations yielded a more regular, geometric
mesh.
In order to quantify changes in the mesh quality, the check elems and qualityindex panels can be
used. Review the tutorials from the Quality section of the HyperMesh tutorials for practical examples
on how to use these tools.
While defeaturing techniques help improve element quality, geometry cleanup tools provide another
set of opportunities to achieve the same result. Experiment with these tools and techniques in the
Fixing Geometry for Meshing - HM-2020 tutorial.
Altair Engineering

71
72

Altair Engineering
Generating Surfaces from Elements - HM-2060

In this tutorial you will learn how to use the FE -> surf panel to generate surfaces from existing
elements. The surfaces created in this process are regular surfaces that can be used for geometry
editing (for changes to a design) and meshing, and to export geometry information (in reverse
engineering applications, for example). This is particularly useful if you are trying to obtain geometry
information (surfaces) from a model containing elements only.
In this tutorial, you will also be introduced to some of the ways plot elements, which can be used to
define the delineation of surfaces, are created and edited in HyperMesh. This will also give you some
insight on how to control what surfaces are created.
You will use the features and edit element panels to create and edit the plot elements.
For more information on the various panels, refer to the Panels section of the HyperMesh on-line
help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up the context sensitive help.
<install_directory> or contact your system administrator.
The model is the tetrahedral mesh of a bracket. It is organized into a single component, and does not
contain any entities besides the solid elements.
Tetrahedral model of the bracket
Altair Engineering

73
To open the model and create shell elements:

Start by retrieving the HyperMesh database for the model and create faces elements from the solid
tetrahedral elements using the faces panel. The FEsurf panel only accepts shell elements, and
therefore you cannot supply solid elements to it.
1. From the files panel, select the hm file sub-panel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/fe_to_surf.hm.
The model is loaded in wireframe mode. Change the graphics engine to performance, and
shade the elements to review the shape of the bracket. This solid mesh was obtained by running
the HyperMesh tetramesher on a tria mesh of the surfaces defining the initial part.
In this tutorial we will reverse this process by obtaining the shell elements and then the surfaces.
We can then, for example, re-mesh the surfaces with a different element size, or export them as
an IGES file.
2. Use the faces panel to generate shell elements on the outside of the solid mesh.
From the Tool page, select the faces panel.
With the entity selector set to comps, click any element.

The element is temporarily highlighted, signifying that the component has been selected. The
tolerance field can be left unchanged, as it does not influence the creation of face elements.
Click find faces.

HyperMesh creates shell elements on the free faces of the solid elements (faces that are not
shared with any other element), and places them into the ^faces component collector.
3. Use the disp panel to turn off the display of the elements in the tetras component.
Faces (shell) elements

74

Altair Engineering
In this section, we quickly generated the shell elements required for surface generation from the solid
elements that were provided to us. We can now have HyperMesh generate some surfaces.
To obtain surfaces from elements:
Use the FE surf panel on a subset of tria (faces) elements to obtain some surfaces and understand
the behavior of the panel. Start by creating a component collector for the new surfaces using the
collectors panel.
1. Use the collectors panel to create a component collector with the name surfaces. Select any
color, and do not assign any card image or material to the component.
If you are not familiar with the creation of collectors, please refer to the tutorial Getting Started
with HyperMesh - HM-1000, or click help to bring up the collectors panel help.
2. Click view from the permanent menu.
3. Click restore4 to retrieve the pre-defined view4.
This is a view of the model that was saved to the model to make identification of a specific area
easier.
4. Run the FEsurf panel on elements selected by face as shown in the image below.
From the Geom page, select the FEsurf panel.
With the upper elems selector active, pick two tria face elements: one from the bottom flat
area, and one from the interior of the arm connecting the bottom area to the top area (see
image below)
Click elems and select by face.

This highlights all the elements that are part of the same face as the two elements selected
(see image below).
These are all the elements for which the change in the normal direction between adjacent
elements is less than the feature angle defined in the options panel, modeling sub-panel.
Altair Engineering

75
The default value for this feature angle is set to 30 degrees.
Set surface complexity: to 5 using the slider bar.
Elements by face
Verify the toggle is set to mesh-based auto tolerance.
Click create.
5. Turn off the display of all elements to review the surfaces that were created.
Notice how only two surfaces were created with common edges that are automatically toggled to be
suppressed (see image below). This delineation of the surfaces may or may not correspond to what a
specific user may expect or wish to obtain. For example, you may want to have three separate
surfaces: one for the bottom area, one for the arm, and one for the top area.
76

Altair Engineering
Surfaces generated
6. Use the automesh panel to preview only a tria mesh on the surfaces displayed using an
element size of 3. Do not accept any mesh at this time.
Verify that the graphics engine is set to performance.
From the 2D page, select the automesh panel.
Check the box for reset meshing parameters to:, set the elem size = to 3, and use the
switch to set the type of elements to trias.
Set the lower left toggle to elements to current comp.
Set the mode to interactive.
Click mesh to enter the automeshing secondary panel.
Click mesh to preview the mesh on the surfaces (see image below).
Altair Engineering

77
Preview of a tria mesh

The mesh conforms perfectly to the surfaces and looks good. You might still want to have the
ability to work with independent surfaces and densities for the various areas the surfaces
captured.
Click abort to disregard this mesh.
7. Delete the surfaces that were generated by going to the Tool page and selecting the delete
panel.
8. Turn on the display of the elements in the ^faces component.
In this section we have learned how to use the FEsurf panel to generate some surfaces that can
later be meshed.
We have also seen that when the surface generation engine is supplied with shell elements only, the
surfaces obtained may not necessarily have the specific delineation one may wish to obtain.
In order to obtain specific delineation, plot elements can be used to define the boundaries of the
various surfaces, and can be supplied to the engine.
To capture features with plot elements:
Delineating the surfaces to be created is an essential step in obtaining the desired surfaces. This
level of control is achieved by supplying the surface generator with some plot elements, which will
indicate what the boundaries of the various surfaces should be. This function works well only when
the selected plot elements form closed loops.
For our bracket, numerous surfaces will be created. It is essential to have control over how the
various areas are broken down into various surfaces, so that further re-meshing operations, for
example, can be carried out on areas that match specific goals.
The new surfaces should definitely have boundaries that respect the features of the tria mesh as the
tria mesh captured, to some extent, the features of the initial geometry.
Generate plot elements that correspond to the features of the mesh. You can use the edges,
78

Altair Engineering
features, and edit element panels to create plot elements. Although using the features panel is one
of the most automated ways of generating plot elements, it does not always create closed loops of
plot elements. On the features panel, the edit sub-panel allows you to quickly close the open loops
of features (plot elements).
1. Use the features panel to automatically generate plot elements capturing the features of the tria
mesh (^faces component). Use a break angle of 30 degrees.
From the Tool page, select the features panel.
Select the features sub-panel.
Set the entity selector to elems.
Click elems and select displayed.
Enter 30 in the feature angle = field.
Check the box for ignore normals.
Use the toggle to select create: plot elements.
Click features.
Plot elements representing features

This generates plot elements representing the features of the mesh (see image above).
These plots elements are automatically created in a component collector named ^feature.
For detailed information on this panel and its various options, click the help button from the
permanent menu to bring up the panels help.
Note
The edit edges function from the FEsurf panel is a shortcut to the features panel.
2. Click view to restore view4.

Notice how some plot elements now define a boundary between the bottom area and the arm
used earlier.
Altair Engineering

79
The features panel generated many open loops of plot elements that are not suitable for the
surface generation engine. Review these open loops using the edit sub-panel. Close any open
loop that is needed for surface delineation and remove the ones that are not useful.
3. To display the plot elements only, use the disp panel to turn off the display of the elements in the
^faces component.
4. From the features panel, select the edit sub-panel.
5. With the toggle set to interactive review, click continue several times to review individual open
loops of plot elements.
In this mode, each open loop can be closed manually by using the node list selector and
selecting individual nodes to create additional plot elements. They can also be deleted by using
the remove function.
For more detailed information on this approach, click the help button to bring up the on-line help
for this panel.
6. Set the toggle to find all open features and click move into ôpen features.
This isolates all the open loops of plot elements, and organizes them into a separate component
named ôpen features. All the open loops also change color for easier identification.
Observing the open loops, it becomes clear that some need to be closed while all the others can
be removed.
7. Turn on the display of the elements in the ^faces component.
8. Select the view panel.
9. Restore the pre-defined view view1.
The image below is an example of a loop that needs to be closed.
Open loop of plot elements
80

Altair Engineering
10. From the features panel, select the edit sub-panel to close this open loop.
Click node list to make it active.
Select the nodes defining where new plot elements need to be created, starting with the node
at one end of the open loop, and ending with the node at the other end of the gap.
Closing an open loop
Click add.
This closes the loop, and the corresponding plot elements are moved from the ôpen
features component back into the ^features component.
11. Restore view2 and repeat step 10 for this open loop. There are only two nodes to select in this
case.
Closing an open loop
Altair Engineering

81
12. Turn off the display of the elements in the ^faces component, and use the view panel to restore
view3.
Interior cylinder open loops

In this area, there are numerous open loops. When meshing a surface representing the interior of
a cylinder, most of the time it is useful to have at least one edge parallel to the axis of the
cylinder, so that additional control over the number of elements created in the direction of the
cylinder is available.
For this cylinder, and all the other ones, make sure that two such edges, diametrically opposed,
are generated by having two diametrically opposed closed loops of plot elements between the
bottom and top sides of each interior cylinder.
13. Close an open loop by using the node list selector, and clicking add.
82
Hint
Start by identifying an open loop for which the segment missing is shortest and the gap
seems to correspond to the length of a single element (see image below). Simply click
then the two plot ends (plot nodes) across the gap.
Note
Work with one gap at a time. All the nodes selected at once will be considered as part of
the same loop.

Altair Engineering
Closing diametrically opposed open loops

14. Repeat step 13 for the remaining two longer interior cylinders creating two closed loops for each
cylinder.
Note
For the two shorter cylinders, closed loops already exist, and there are actually more than
two, which may result in more surfaces than necessary defining the interior of the
cylinders.
15. Restore view4, and remove the extra vertical closed loops of plot elements located on the inside
of the cylinders leaving only two diametrically opposed. From the edit sub-panel, use the elem
entity selector.
Click on elem to make it the active selector.
Select all closed loop plot elements that need to be removed (two extra for each cylinder).
Click remove.
Altair Engineering

83
Removing extra closed loops

The remaining open loops can be easily disposed of by deleting the component collector they
belong to. It is still useful to perform an overall visual review of all the features that will remain to
eliminate any closed loop that would result in the creation of a strangely shaped surface.
The elements that were created on the initial set of surfaces most likely only captured the
surfaces curvature so well, and features based on these elements may not always produce the
most accurate representation of what the initial geometry was.
16. Restore view1, and delete the jagged closed loop using the same technique as in step 15 (see
image below).
Removing bad features

17. Delete the ôpen features component to remove all the remaining open loops in the model.
84
From the Tool page, select the delete panel.

Altair Engineering
Set the entity selector to comps.
Click comps and select ôpen features from the list of components.
Click select.
Click delete entity.
18. Turn back on the display of the elements in the ^faces component.
Note
We created plot elements that will be used in the FEsurf panel to indicate the
boundaries of the surfaces to generate. These plot elements were generated in an
attempt to capture the features of the tria mesh. Obviously, the number and location of
plot elements generated using this approach is directly dependent on the value that is
chosen for the feature angle.
In most situations, a lower feature angle will generate more plot elements while a higher
one will yield fewer plot elements.
It is often useful to experiment with different values for the feature angle as one value
may bring you much closer to the desired set of plot elements than another, limiting
significantly the amount of subsequent editing required.
In this section we learned how to create and edit plot elements using the features panel. The creation
process was straightforward, but required some editing in order to obtain a set of plot elements
forming closed loops only. Various tools are available to make the editing process as easy as
possible and we used the ones that would allow us to get to our goal the most effectively.
To generate additional plot elements manually:
Plot elements obtained from the features panel are highly dependent on the value that was set for
the feature angle. They may or may not capture all the features of interest to form a complete set of
plot elements needed for the delineation of the surfaces.
In this section, create additional plot elements manually using the edit element panel, to complete
the definition of all the areas that will yield the individual surfaces.
1. Use the global panel to set the current component to ^feature.
2. From the 1D page, select the edit element panel.
3. Select the create sub-panel.
4. Check the radio button for plot, click node list and select by path.
Hint
In this mode, you can select two nodes and HyperMesh will automatically select the
nodes between them along the shortest path. HyperMesh will then automatically create
plot elements for each pair of adjacent nodes.
This saves valuable time over creating plot elements one by one with the node list option. For
more detailed information on the selection by path, refer to the on-line help.
5. Observe the model to identify boundaries between sets of elements, features that were not
captured with the features panel, and create plot elements to materialize them. See the images
below for examples.
With the node path selector active, pick a first node.
Select a second node where the series of plot elements is to end.
Altair Engineering

85
Note
The nodes highlight only for a split second and the plot elements are automatically
generated and put in the current component. The image below is only a representation
of the areas to consider and node paths, and does not capture the actual behavior of
the panel.
Nodes by path to create additional features

There are numerous areas where possible features where not detected based on the value we chose
for the feature angle, but these are easily detected by visual inspection, and the image below displays
all the areas where plot elements should be added.
Locations to add features (node representation)

6. Further break areas down with plot elements where changes in mesh patterns occur. Use the
86

Altair Engineering
same approach as in steps 2 to 5. Restore view4 for one example area.
Change in mesh pattern

Note
When you observe a clear change in mesh patterns, it is often an indication that the
elements were created on separate initial surfaces, and it may therefore make sense to
respect the former delineation by re-creating similar surfaces.
Here is a representation of all the areas where a change of pattern occurs:
Changes in mesh pattern (node representation)

7. Observe the model, and further break groups of elements using plot elements where you wish to
obtain smaller surfaces. Use the same approach as in steps 2 to 5.
Note
A final review of the shell mesh and plot element may reveal some additional need for
plot elements where some surfaces would take an unconventional shape. The image
below is one example for this model:
Altair Engineering

87
Break area down

In this example, the surface produced would end with a small area wrapping all around the
cylinder. The creation of one plot element using the nodes highlighted, for example, will prevent
this and ensure that the two areas produce separate surfaces.
In this section, additional plot elements were created using the edit element panel to further refine
the definition of the various areas that will be used to generate the surfaces.
To generate surfaces for the entire model
Now that both the shell elements and the plot elements delineating the surfaces are available, finish
by running the FEsurf panel engine on the entire model.
1. Use the global panel to set the current component to surfaces.
2. Generate the surfaces using the FEsurf panel.
88
From the Geom page, select the FEsurf panel.
Click the upper most elems selector, and select by collector from the extended entity
selection dialog.
Select the ^faces component and click select to return to the panel.
Click the lower most elems selector, and select by collector.
Select the ^feature component and click select.

Altair Engineering
Leave all other options unchanged.
Click create.
3. Turn off the display of all elements to review the surfaces that were generated (see image below).
Surfaces generated
Many surface edges were automatically suppressed (blue) by the surface generation engine. Some
may need to be unsuppressed before a meshing operation for example.
The surfaces generated could now be exported or used for any surface editing or meshing operation.
own reference.
As this tutorial showed, the FEsurf panel is a powerful tool in generating surface data where none
is available, but needed. It also provides you with a great deal of control over the surfaces that are
generated through the use of plot elements. Automated and semi-automated ways let you create and
edit plot elements quickly and easily.
Altair Engineering

89
90

Altair Engineering
Creating 1-D Elements - HM-3000

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Bar, Line mesh and Features functions available on the 1D and Tool pages of HyperMesh. These functions allow you to build 1-D elements.
<install_directory>, or contact your system administrator.
To retrieve the file for this tutorial:
1. Retrieve the file 1d_elements.hm file, located in the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory.
2. Click return to access the main menu.
The 1d_elements.hm file.
Altair Engineering

91
To create 1-D bar elements using the bars panel:

The bars panel allows you to create, review or update 2-noded and 3-noded bar elements.
1. Select the bars panel on the 1-D page.
2. Select the bar2 subpanel.
3. Click ax = and enter the value 0.
4. Click ay = and enter the value 0.
5. Click az = and enter the value 0.
These are the values for the bar offset.
6. Click property = and select property1.
A property is now assigned to the element.
7. Click pins a = and enter the value 0.
8. Click pins b = and enter the value 0.
These are the values for the degrees of freedom.
9. Click the switch below update and select components from the pop-up menu.
10. After x comp =, enter the value 1.
11. After y comp =, enter the value 1.
12. After z comp =, enter the value 1.
The local y axis is now specified.
13. Click node A and select the lower node in the graphics area.
14. Click node B and select the upper node in the graphics area.
The 2 noded bar element is created.
92

Altair Engineering
Bar 2 element created.

To create 1-D elements along a line using the line mesh panel:
1. Select the line mesh panel on the 1-D page.
2. Click the upper left switch and select lines from the pop-up menu.
3. Select a line on the model.
4. Click the toggle and select segment is whole line.
5. Click the switch after element config: and select rigid from the pop-up menu.
6. Click mesh.
The secondary panel now appears.
7. Click set segment to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
8. After elem density =, enter the value 20.
9. Click set all.
10. Click return twice to access the main menu.
Altair Engineering

93
Rigids created in the line mesh panel.

To create a 1-D element from the features in the model using the features panel:
1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.
2. Click the toggle and select elems.
3. Click none.
4. Select feature_elements.
Only the elements needed for this exercise are displayed.
6. Select the features panel on the Tool page.
7. Click Comps.
8. Select feature_elements.
9. Click select.
10. After feature angle =, enter the value 30.
11. Select ignore normals.
12. Click the toggle after create: and select plot elements.
13. Click features.
The plot elements are created.
94

Altair Engineering
14. Click return.

16. Click the right toggle and select elems.
17. Click none.
18. Select ^feature.
The plot elements in the green ^feature component are displayed.
Altair Engineering

95
96

Altair Engineering
Connecting Components with 1-D Elements - HM-3010

This tutorial demonstrates how to connect components using the following panels:
rigids panel
Create single and multi-node MPCs
welds panel
Create weld elements
rbe3 panel
Create RBE3s
springs panel
Define and create springs
equations panel
Constrain a model using equations
Using rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components
Using welds to join element and components
Using RBE3s and spring elements to model a rubber grommet
Using equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components

Using Rigids and Rigidlinks

In this section, use rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components.
The rigids menu panel allows you to create rigid or rigid link elements. A rigid element is an
element created in a space between two nodes of a model where a rigid connection is desired.
Rigid elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter R written at the centroid of
the element.
Rigid link elements are displayed as lines between the independent node and the dependent
node(s) with RL displayed at the independent node of the element.
Rigids can translate to RBE2 in NASTRAN or *MPC in ABAQUS.
To retrieve the file:
1. Retrieve the file connect1.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
Altair Engineering

97
To create nodes at the center of the holes in parts 1 and 2:

1. Select distance panel on the Geom page.
2. Select the three nodes subpanel.
3. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 1.
4. Click circle center.
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 1.
5. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 2.
6. Click circle center.
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 2.
7. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component A.
8. Click circle center
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component A.
9. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component B.
10. Click circle center
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component B.
To change the current component to rigids:
2. Click component = and select rigids.
3. Click return.
To create rigidlinks at the large holes:
1. Select the rigids panel on the 1-D page.
3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select multiple nodes.
4. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 1 to be the independent node:.
5. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 1 to be the dependent node.
6. Click create
7. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 2 to be the independent node:.
8. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 2 to be the dependent node.
9. Click create
You model should look like the figure below.
98

Altair Engineering
To create a node at the mid-point between the two rigidlinks:

1. Select the distance panel on the Geom page.
2. Select the two nodes subpanel.
3. Select two nodes (N1/N2) at the center of each rigid link.
4. Click nodes between = and enter 1.
5. Click nodes between to create the mid-point node.
6. Click return.
To join the rigidlinks with two rigid elements:
1. Select the rigids panel on the1-D page.
3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select single node.
4. Pick the mid-point node created in the previous exercise to be the independent: node:.
5. Pick a node at the center of one of the rigid links on part 1 to be the dependent node.
6. Repeat steps 4 & 5 for the mid-point node and the other rigid link.
Altair Engineering

99
Using Welds
In this section, use welds to join elements and components.
The welds panel allows you to create normally aligned rigid elements between two plate elements.
Place weld elements between the sections of your model that are to be welded.
Weld elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter W written at the centroid of
the element.
Welds can translate to RBAR in NASTRAN or *mpc in ABAQUS.
directory.
To change the current component to welds:
2. Click component = and select welds.
3. Click return.
100 HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials HM-3010

Altair Engineering
To create spot welds joining part1 and part2:

1. Select the spotwelds panel on the 1-D page.
2. Select the using nodes subpanel.
3. Click the toggle and select without systems.
4. Pick the node on component A and the adjacent node on part 1.
5. Pick the node on component B and the adjacent node on part 2.
6. Click return.
Using RBE3s
In this section, use RBE3s to join elements and components.
The rbe3 panel allows you to create, review, and update RBE3 elements. The update subpanel
allows you to edit the connectivity, dofs, and weight for each node of the element.
RBE3 elements are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s)
with RBE3 displayed at the dependent node of the element.
RBE3s define the motion at a reference grid point -the dependent node- as the weighted average of
the motions at a set of other grid points -the independent nodes. RBE3 is used in NASTRAN.
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials HM-3010 101


directory.
To change the current component to rigids:
2. Click component = and select rigids.
3. Click return.
To create RBE3s at the small holes:
1. Select the rbe3 panel on the 1-D page.
3. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component A to be the dependent node.
4. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component A to be the independent nodes.
5. Click create.
6. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component B to be the dependent node.
7. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component B to be the independent nodes.
8. Click create.
9. Click return.

Altair Engineering
Using Springs
In this section, use springs to join elements and components.
The springs panel allows you to create spring elements. A spring element is an element created in
a space between two nodes of a model where a spring connection is desired. Spring elements
store a property and a degree of freedom (dof).
Spring elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter K written at the centroid
of the element.
Springs can translate to CELAS2 in NASTRAN or *spring in ABAQUS. Springs require a property
definition.
directory.
To select the NASTRAN analysis template:
2. Click template file = twice.
3. Select the nastran/ directory.
4. Select general.
5. Click return.
To change the current component to springs:
2. Click component = and select springs.
3. Click return.
To create a spring property definition:
1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.
3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props.
4. Click name = and enter k1.
5. Click card image = and select PELAS.
HyperMesh goes to the card image subpanel.
This allows you to enter the NASTRAN card data.
Altair Engineering

7. Click the data entry field under K1 and enter 1.0 as the spring constant.
8. Click return twice to access to the main menu.
To create a spring element joining the RBE3s:
1. Select the springs panel on the 1-D page.
2. Click property = and select k1.
3. Select dof2.
4. Click the toggle and select no vector.
The other options are off by default.
5. Pick a node at the center of one of the RBE3 elements.
6. Pick a node at the center of the other RBE3 element.
The spring element is created and represented by a "CELAS1".
7. Click return.

Altair Engineering
Using Equations
In this section, use equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components.
The equations panel allows you to create, review, and update equations.
Equations are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s) with
the letters EQ displayed at the dependent node of the equation.
Equations are used in NASTRAN as MPC or in ABAQUS as *equation.
Place an equation in a load collector.
directory.
To create a load collector:
3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.
4. Click name = and enter the name equations.
6. Click create.
The collector was created.
To set up the constraint equations:
1. Select the equations panel on the BCs page.
3. Click the switch and select dof2 as the dependent node degree of freedom.
4. Activate dof2 as the independent node degree of freedom. Deactivate any other degree of
freedom options selected.
5. Ensure w has a value of 1.0.
6. Click constant and enter 0.
To create the constraint equations:
1. Pick a node on the edge of part 1 as the dependent node.
2. Pick the corresponding node on part 2 as the independent node.
Altair Engineering

3. Click create.
4. Repeat this for all nodes along the edge.

Altair Engineering
Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties

Using HyperBeam - HM-3020
HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the display options in HyperMesh, as well as with the creation
and editing of collectors will be particularly useful.
In FEA, beams are typically modeled as 1-D elements. In this tutorial you will learn how to obtain
beam section properties for various types of beam cross-sections using HyperBeam, a module within
HyperMesh. You will also learn how to populate the fields of property collectors with these beam
properties, and assign the property collector to a beam element you create.
This tutorial is particularly useful for becoming familiar with the modeling of beam sections for 1-D
elements (beam, bar, and rod) in HyperMesh. The focus is on obtaining and assigning beam-section
properties, not on creating beam elements themselves.
The main panels used in this process are the HyperBeam panel for the definition of beam crosssection, and the collectors panel for assigning the computed values to actual beam elements. For
more information regarding a specific panel, refer to the Panels section of the HyperMesh on-line
help, or click the HyperMesh help button while in the panel to activate its context-sensitive help.
<install_directory> or contact your systems administrator.
The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections used in this tutorial standard,
shell, and solid. The model consists of a solid cylinder attached to a hollow trapezoidal structure,
which is further joined to an irregularly shaped solid component (see image below).
Model geometry
Altair Engineering

To model beam cross-sections in HyperMesh:

HyperBeam is a HyperMesh module that allows you to define and calculate the beam cross-sectional
properties of simple as well as complex models to represent them as simple bar/beam elements.
Modeling beam cross-sections is a three-step process in HyperMesh. First use HyperMesh
(HyperBeam panel) to define the beam cross-section. A variety of entities can be used (lines,
elements, or surfaces) unless you want to use a standard section, in which case, entities are not
required. Then use the HyperBeam module to complete the definition of your beam section and
obtain the properties. Finally, return to HyperMesh to assign the beam properties calculated in
HyperBeam to a property collector, and to assign this property collector to 1-D elements.
Three types of sections can be modeled using HyperBeam: standard sections, shell sections, and
solid sections.
Standard sections are any of the following types
Standard sections available in HyperMesh
Shell sections are used for thin-walled cross-sections. A shell section is defined by a set of
entities (lines or elements) that represent the mid-plane of the thin-walled section. The
thickness of the section is specified in HyperBeam. An example of this type of section is an
irregular box section. Note that you can create both open and closed thin-walled sections.
A solid section is defined by a set of entities (lines, elements, or surfaces) that form a closed
loop. HyperBeam creates a mesh in the area enclosed by the curves and calculates the
properties using this mesh.
HyperBeam calculates the section properties with respect to the centroid of the cross-section, and
also with respect to a user-defined system. The properties are saved along with the HyperMesh file
and can be retrieved at any point. If you expect to repeatedly use a user-defined section in different
models, it can be saved for subsequent retrieval in a different HyperMesh model.
To retrieve the model:
In this section, retrieve the model for this tutorial and load the Nastran user profile. Since a property
collector will be created, a template must be loaded.
1. Using the files panel, retrieve the file hyperbeam.hm from the
2. From the Geom page, use the user profile button to load the Nastran user profile.
The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections: standard, shell, and solid. You will
create a standard circular section to represent the cross-section of the cylinder, a shell section
created with lines to represent the cross-section of the hollow trapezoidal feature, and a solid section
created with lines to represent the cross-section of the solid irregular feature.
The model is organized into four collectors: one contains all the surfaces, two contain the lines for the
shell-section and the solid-section, respectively, and the last component stores beam elements.

Altair Engineering
To model a standard circular section using HyperBeam:

In this section, use the standard section sub-panel of the HyperBeam panel to quickly model a solid
circular section.
To define a circular cross-section, HyperBeam requires the diameter of the cross-section as input.
Measure the diameter of the section before invoking HyperBeam using the distance panel from the
Geom page.
1. Create three nodes on the circle defining the base of the solid cylinder using the create nodes
panel from the Geom page.
From the Geom page, select the create nodes panel.
Select the on line sub-panel.
With the lines selector active, select the circular line defining the base of the cylinder.
Set number of nodes = to 3.
Click create.
This generates three nodes on the line, two of which are located at the same location (since
the circular line is a line that closes upon itself). With the two independent locations left, you
can measure the diameter.
Nodes on circle to measure diameter

2. Use the distance panel from the Geom page to measure the distance between the two nodes
diametrically opposed.
Select the two nodes sub-panel.
For N1 and N2, pick the two nodes that are diametrically opposed.
The distance between the two nodes, which is the diameter of the circle, is displayed in the
diameter = field and reads 110 units.
3. Create a solid circle standard section in the HyperBeam panel.
Select the HyperBeam panel from the 1D page.
Select the standard section sub-panel.
Altair Engineering

Click the switch and select the solid circle option from the pop-up menu.
Click create.
The HyperBeam window is launched with a solid circle cross-section displayed in the center
pane. The left pane (Section Browser) lists the cross-sections defined in the model and the
right pane (Results Window) displays the results for the various beam properties computed
for the dimensions displayed.
HyperBeam window (standard section)

Note:
For detailed information on HyperBeam, see the HyperBeam section in the

HyperMesh Users Guide / Building Models / Calculating Beam Properties on-line
help.
4. Modify the diameter of the cross-section and assign the value measured earlier.
-
Click the value shown in the figure to highlight it.
Type in 110 and press ENTER.

The value of the diameter and the quantities computed for the cross-section are updated and
displayed in the Results Window. These properties are calculated based on the dimensions
that were input. The formulae for calculating these properties can be found in the on-line
help.
HyperBeam calculates, for example, the area of this cross-section, its moments of inertia and
its torsional constant.

Altair Engineering
Note
Alternatively, you could drag the graphical handles that represent the diameter of the
cross-section until the diameter changes to the desired value.
5. Assign the name Solid Circle to this cross-section in the Section Browser.
In the Section Browser, click the name of the cross-section under the auto1 folder.
Type in Solid Circle and press ENTER.
6. Save the properties computed in HyperBeam for the solid circle.
From the menu bar, select the File menu.
Click Save.
7. Use the File menu to Exit HyperBeam and return to HyperMesh. Click Yes in the confirmation
box.
The information that was computed is automatically stored in a beamsect collector with the name
you specified for the section. This beamsect collector is later used to populate the fields of a
property card.
Note
Since geometry information was available, this cross-section could have been defined as a
solid section using the solid section sub-panel. A standard section was used instead
because it did not require selection, although it required a diameter measurement.
You may save your HyperMesh model to your working directory at this point.
In this section a beam cross-section for standard sections was created using HyperBeam. You also
learned how to specify the dimensions for the standard section, and how to save this section for
subsequent use.
To model a shell section:
In this section, the shell section sub-panel of the HyperBeam panel is used to model a beam
section for the trapezoidal feature of the geometry.
Use the lines in the pre-defined component shell_section to define the section. Note that these lines
are located at the mid-plane of the trapezoidal geometry. In addition to these lines, HyperBeam also
requires the thickness of the feature as input to calculate the shell section properties.
Shell section lines

You can use various panels, such as the distance panel, to find the thickness of this feature. The
thickness of the feature is equal to two units.
Altair Engineering

1. Create a shell section using the lines in the shell_section component.
From the 1D page, select the HyperBeam panel.
Select the shell section sub-panel.
Set the entity selector to lines.
Click lines and select by collector.
Select the shell_section collector from the list and click select.
Set cross section plane: to fit to entities.
Click specify node to make this option active.
In the graphics region, hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse on top of one of
the mid-plane lines.
Release the left mouse button when the line is highlighted and click anywhere on the
highlighted line to define the base node.
Set part generation: to auto.
Click create to bring up the HyperBeam window.
Note
The cross section plane: option allows the software to define the plane for calculating
beam cross-sectional properties based on the entity (lines/element) selection. A usercontrolled plane can also be defined by changing the cross-section plane using the
toggle.
When using the fit to entities: option you can select a reference node for the plane if you
want properties about a point other than the section centroid. This is done using the
plane base node: option. This node defines the origin of the coordinate system that
serves as the reference when computing the various beam cross-section properties. All
the properties are calculated both about the centroid and about the node you select.

Altair Engineering
Shell section
The coordinates of the centroid are calculated with respect to the user-defined coordinate system
appearing at the node location specified earlier. The coordinates of the shear center are
calculated both from the centroid and from the origin of the section. Local Ys and Zs are the
coordinates of the shear center with respect to the origin of the section, while principal Vs and
Ws are the coordinates of shear center from the centroid of the section.
2. Modify the thickness of the cross-section and assign the value of 2 units.
Click on the value shown in the figure to highlight it.
Type in 2 and press ENTER.

The values for the beam properties computed in the Results Window are updated.
3. Rename the section to Trapezoidal Section.

4. Save your data using the File menu.
5. Exit from HyperBeam panel using the File menu.
In this section, a beam cross-section representing a shell section was created using HyperBeam, and
the thickness for the shell section was assigned. Note that the shell section is defined with only one
thickness as it is defined as one part. For shell sections comprised of multiple parts, each part is
assigned an independent thickness.
You may save your model to your working directory.
Altair Engineering

To edit a shell section in HyperBeam:

In this section, experiment with some of the HyperBeam editing tools on the shell section. Use the
edit section sub-panel to load the shell section back into HyperBeam and modify its dimensions and
geometry.
HyperMesh saves the geometry and property data of a shell section in beamsect collectors. This data
is used to restore the section in HyperBeam and hence modify it.
1. Load the Trapezoidal Section cross-section back into HyperBeam using the edit section subpanel.
From the 1D page, select the HyperBeam panel.
Select the edit section sub-panel.
Click beamsect and select Trapezoidal Section from the list of beam section collectors.
Click edit.
HyperBeam is displayed with the selected cross-section. Note that the state of the crosssection is retained and shows the dimensions used when the section was last saved.
Some of the typical changes to a section involve:
Modifying the thickness of the section
Changing the orientation of the section
Modifying or adding new geometry to the existing section
Moving the origin of the user coordinate system to a new location
The previous section showed how to change the thickness just click on the displayed thickness,
enter the new value, and save.
The options in the Tools menu of the HyperBeam window allow you to perform advanced
modifications such as breaking segments, joining segments, creating parts, moving vertices, etc.
Detailed information on these tools can be found in the , HyperBeam section of the HyperMesh
Users Guide / Building Models / Calculating Beam Properties on-line help. You can also click
Help on the menu bar to directly access this information.
HyperBeam tools for shell sections

These options can be invoked using either the Tools menu or the icons on the right of the
toolbar.

Altair Engineering
Use the Break a Segment option to divide the segment 1-4 (defined by vertices 1 and 4) and use
the Move Vertices option to move the new vertex formed to make the section look like a
pentagon.
2. Break segment 1-4 adding a new vertex using the Break a Segment tool.
From the Tools menu select Break a Segment.

The corresponding icon on the toolbar is deflated. The section turns blue indicating that you
are about to break a segment.
Click anywhere between vertices 1 and 4.

This adds a new vertex with ID 5 indicating that segment 1-4 is broken into two segments, 15 and 5-4.
Breaking a segment
Note
Breaking a segment amounts to adding a vertex, which can be useful in changing the
geometry and properties of a cross-section. Since this does not break a part, it will not
affect the thickness that is applied to the current part.
To turn on and off vertices, use the Vertex IDs option from the View menu.
3. Move vertex 5 to form a pentagon using the Move Vertices tool.
From the Tools menu select Move Vertices.
Move the mouse cursor on top of vertex 5 until it turns blue.

You can now grab the vertex and drag it to a new location.
Drag the vertex vertically upward so that a pentagon is formed.
Moving a vertex
This operation moves vertex 5 to a new location and the section now resembles a pentagon.
Note how the centroid and shear center change as well as the beam properties. A new crosssection has been created, a new design for which the properties could be closer or further
Altair Engineering

from intended values. This tool can be used in the initial stages of design to achieve the
functional requirement of a component.
When beams have the same cross-section, but are rotated by an angle, it is possible to easily
re-calculate the properties of a shell section at a new position. Use the Reorient Shell
Section option from the Tools menu to:
Move the origin of the cross-section to the desired location.
Specify the new y-axis or to re-orient the section.
4. Move the origin of the cross-section (user-defined system) to the location of the centroid.
From the Tools menu select Reorient Shell Section.

A dialog opens.
Under Specify Origin choose at current centroid.
Click OK.
The origin of the user-defined coordinate system is now at the centroid of the cross-section,
and all the properties calculated with respect to this system and the centroid system are
identical.
The properties calculated with respect to the user-defined system are the ones that can be
automatically passed to property collectors. This allows you to obtain the properties at the
centroid of the cross-section.
Moving the origin to the centroid

In a similar way, the origin can be moved to a particular vertex, to the current shear center, or
it can be offset from its current location.
5. Specify the y-axis as pointing from the origin to vertex 2 using the Reorient Shell Section dialog.
From the Tools menu select Reorient Shell Section.
Under Specify y-axis choose origin to vertex and enter 2 in the field.
Click OK.
The orientation of the shell section is changed such that the y-axis is now aligned with the
origin and vertex 2. All the properties are updated as well as the definition of the centroid and
shear center.

Altair Engineering
Specifying a new y-axis

6. Exit HyperBeam without saving the changes you made to the shell section.
In this section you learned how to edit an existing section. You have also learned about some of the
advanced options of HyperBeam used in modifying a shell section such as break a segment, move
vertex, and re-orient shell section.
To create a solid section using lines:
In this section, model the irregular solid feature of the geometry as a solid section using the solid
section sub-panel of the HyperBeam panel.
The input for a solid section can be 2-D elements, surfaces, or a set of lines that form a closed area.
Use the lines in the solid_section collectors to define the solid section.
1. Create a solid section using the lines in the solid_section component.
From the 1D page select the HyperBeam panel.
Select the solid section sub-panel.
Click lines and select by collector.
Select the solid_section collector from the list and click select.
Set cross section plane: to fit to entities.
Click specify node to make it active.
Select a node within the area formed by the lines by holding the left mouse button down until
a line or the surface highlights and then click anywhere on the highlighted entity.
Altair Engineering

Defining the solid section
Set analysis type: to first order.

st
This option tells HyperBeam to use 1 order (linear) elements to calculate the properties of
the section.
Click create to launch HyperBeam.

HyperBeam meshes the area enclosed by the selected curves with quadrilateral elements,
and the properties are calculated using these elements.
Solid section
The properties of sections are stored in beamsect collectors and in the current model database
file. Additionally, they can be exported to a text file using a right mouse click in the Results
Window. Finally, when a beam section is to be used in different HyperMesh models, the
properties can also be exported as a Beam Section File (.bm)using the File menu, Export
Selection option. This file can be loaded in any HyperMesh model using the import sub-panel
of the files panel.
2. Export the properties to a text file using the right mouse button in the Results Window.
Position the mouse cursor in the Results Window.

Altair Engineering
Click the right mouse button, and select Save Results to File.
A Save As file browser displays to allow you to select an output location and name for the
text file.
Save the file to your working directory using any name.
A file is saved with the information displayed as it appears in the Results Window. You can
open this file with any text editor to review the information it contains.
3. Rename the section Solid Section and save your data.

4. Exit from HyperBeam.
In this section, you learned how to model a solid section using HyperBeam. You also experimented
with the export function for the beam properties. Now that the cross-sections are defined, you can
assign the properties to property collectors.
To assign beam properties to a property collector and a beam element:
In HyperMesh, you can easily assign the beam properties computed in HyperBeam and stored in a
beamsect collector to your solver beam property card. To achieve this, simply create a property
collector with the solver beam property card of interest, and assign the beamsect collector to the
property collector.
When creating an actual beam element, simply assign the property collector to the element itself.
1. Create a property collector with a PBEAM card and assign the Solid Circle beamsect collector to
it.
Create/edit a props collector with name = standard_section, card image = PBEAM, and
material = steel.
In the card previewer, click beamsec twice and select Solid Circle from the list of beamsect
collectors defined in the model.
The properties calculated using HyperBeam are automatically assigned to the PBEAM card.
Observe that the values of the parameters (A, I1a, I2a, I12a, J, etc.) are extracted from the
properties of the selected section.
2. Create a beam element in the bars panel with a direction vector set to the global x-axis and
using the standard_section property.
From the 1D page, select the bars panel.
Click property = and select standard_section.
Click the lower left switch and select vectors as the option to define the orientation of the
beam.
Set the direction to x-axis.
Click node A to make it active.
In the graphics region, hold the left mouse button down and place the cursor on top of the line
that runs though the cylinder until it is highlighted.
Release the left mouse button and select two nodes at the ends of the line for node A and
node B.
Altair Engineering

Creating a beam element

The beam element is created and placed into the beam component.
Note
When creating beam elements, the z-axis is defined by the two nodes selected as
node A and node B. The direction of the cross-section (x or y axis) is defined either
by using components, vectors, or a direction node. Due to the nature of this solid
circle, how you define the x or y axis is unimportant.
Changes made to a beamsect collector (for example, through editing of a cross-section) are
also automatically applied to any property collector referencing this beamsect collector.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model, or keep it for your own reference.
In this tutorial, you experimented with the tools and techniques for modeling beam cross-section and
obtaining their properties using HyperBeam. You learned how to edit cross-sections and assign their
properties to property collectors, which can then be assigned to 1-D elements.
For more details on how to create 1-D elements, review the tutorials, Creating 1-D Elements - HM3000 and Connecting Components with 1-D Elements - HM-3010. Additional techniques for creating
1-D elements from connector entities are discussed in the tutorial, Creating Connectors - HM-3400.

Altair Engineering
Creating 2-D Elements from Surfaces Using the Automesh

Function - HM-3100
The automesh module has the ability to automatically mesh specified surfaces given an element
edge length. The module also has the ability to interactively select and mesh multiple surfaces. It can
increase biasing, density, change mesh parameters, and element types all before accepting the
mesh. Once the mesh is created, the remesh button can be used to re-mesh the surfaces.
automesh panel layout
Using the automesh modules and remesh function
Cleaning up surfaces and adding fixed points
Refining element quality by remeshing elements

The Automesh Panel

The automesh panel includes four subpanels: create mesh, mesh params, cleanup, and proj to
edge.
create mesh subpanel

There are three options in the create mesh sub-panel. The switch allows you to choose from the
interactive, automatic, and QI optimized selections. The default is interactive. The interactive
option is used to automesh multiple surfaces or elements with user-controlled parameters. Once a
surface or a group of elements have been selected for the automeshing module, the information is
retained and updated with any changes to meshing parameters while in the automeshing module.
The next time the selected entity, either surfaces or a group of elements, is brought into the
automeshing module, the saved data is used unless the reset mesh parameters to: button is
selected, in which case the old information is discarded and new values are computed.
The meshing parameters can be set to either element size with element shape or use mesh
params. When the mesh params option is used, the mesh is created by using the parameters
chosen in the mesh params sub-panel, such as use chordal deviation mesh or use size and
biasing. This tutorial uses the element size option. The options when using use mesh params are
illustrated in tutorials HM-3130 and HM-3140.
Altair Engineering

121
The toggle between elements to current comp and elements to surfaces comp tells HyperMesh
where these newly created elements should be located. You can put created elements in the
associated surface components or the global current working component where you define them.
After clicking the green mesh button, the automeshing module will be displayed allowing you to
adjust element density and biasing of all the shared and free edges belonging to the selected
surfaces, change element type, and perform quality checks. Once the elements are created, you
may select surfaces that contain bad elements or a group of elements, and you can refine them by
clicking the remesh button. HyperMesh will first delete the existing elements and then re-mesh the
selected entity.
The failed surfs button, below identify and select:, directs HyperMesh to scan through all the
selected surfaces for mesh and highlight those failed in creating meshes in your last attempt. The
unmeshed surfs button allows you to find all the surfaces in the displayed model that do not have
any mesh associated to them.
The Automatic panel has the same features as the interactive panel. The only difference is it
creates elements on surfaces without bringing up the interactive automeshing modules.
The QI optimized panel behaves differently from interactive and automatic. It allows you to specify
the target element quality you would like to achieve. Set the toggle to use criteria from QI panel or
specify a criteria file. You can establish the quality criteria in the qualityindex panel (2D page) as
well as create a criteria file. Please review the qualityindex panel documentation for details on
setting the required quality parameters and working with criteria files.
Once target criteria are chosen, the QI optimized panel creates meshes on the selected surfaces to
best meet the criteria. An additional option, allowing the meshing module to move nodes across
green, shared edges of the surfaces, can be turned on.
The Mesh params sub-panel is divided into two parts. The left part contains options and settings
for use chordal deviation meshing algorithm described in HM-3140. The right part contains
options for the use size and biasing meshing algorithm described in tutorial HM-3130.
mesh params subpanel, use size and biasing.
mesh params subpanel, use chordal deviation.

The cleanup sub-panel consists of seven features: split surf, unsplit surf, toggle, trim-intersect,
add points, remove points, and replace points.
Split surf has the same function as trim with two nodes located at the surface edit panel. After
choosing two nodes on a selected surface, HyperMesh creates a line between these two nodes, and
uses this line to trim the selected surface at the normal direction.
Unsplit surf has the same function as remove interior trim lines in the surface edit panel. This
feature not only removes trim lines from associated surfaces, but also deletes them from the model.
A useful example of this feature is to remove pinholes.
Altair Engineering
Toggle has the same function as edge/toggle in the geom cleanup panel. The detail of using this
function is also described in the tutorial HM-2020 Geometry Clean Up.
Trim-intersect allows you to remove any edge fillets and has the same functional as the trimintersect feature in the defeature panel. This allows you to remove rounded corners along an edge.
Add points allows you to interactively add fixed points on surface edges or interior to the surface.
This tool exists only in this panel and has two separate functions. The first function allows you to click
on a surface edge or interior to a surface to create a fixed point at that location. Access this function
by selecting the point option next to add points. The second function allows you to click on a surface
edge and create a fixed point in the middle of that edge. Activate this function by selecting the line
option next to add points.
Remove points has the same function as fixed points/suppress in the geom cleanup panel. This
allows you to remove/suppress any fixed points that are not surface vertices.
Replace points has the same function as fixed points/replace in the geom cleanup panel. The
details of using this function are described in tutorial HM-2020 Geometry Clean Up.
cleanup subpanel
The Proj to edge sub-panel will locate all interior fixed points on a set of surfaces, then project each
of these points to the nearest (perpendicular) edge location on its own surface only. This produces
mesh patterns that are more regular in appearance.
The distance tolerance and angle tolerance are parameters used to control creation of fixed points.
If the shortest distance between an edge and an interior fixed point is less than or equal to the
distance tolerance, a fixed point will be created on the edge. If the angle ABC, formed by an existing
fixed point on an edge (A), the fixed point to-be-created (B) and the interior fixed point (C), is less
than the angle tolerance, a fixed point will not be created.
project to edge subpanel
Altair Engineering

123
Using the Automesh Modules and Remesh Function

In this section you will first interactively mesh selected surfaces, then apply various automeshing
modules, remesh selected surfaces, and finally delete all the elements using remesh button.
To retrieve the Clean_up_geom.hm file and display surf ids:
1. Retrieve the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/Clean_up_geom.hm file.
Enter the files panel on any page of the main menu.
Click hm file and file = Clean_up_geom.hm.
Click retrieve to clear current session and pull up the file.
Click return to exit the panel and return to main menu.
2. Display all the surface IDs.
Enter the numbers panel under Tool page.
Change selection to surfs.
Click surfs to bring up the extended entity selection window.
Select all surfaces in figure.
Click the on button.

Click return.

Altair Engineering
To interactively automesh and use the automeshing module:

1. Go to the global panel, click component =, click bottom, click element size text box and enter
2.0 and press ENTER.
2. Enter the automesh panel through 2D page and go to the create mesh subpanel. Make sure the
toggle remains in interactive.
3. Click toggle to switch from elements to current comp to elements to surfaces comp.
4. Verify surfs is active (outlined in blue) and select surface id 6, and 7 (see figure above).
5. Click mesh. The automesh modules including density, algorithm, type, biasing, details, and
checks will be displayed in the main menu area.
6. Click mesh button and review the temporary mesh.
Note
Select the checks panel, and then click on warpage button to check warpage value.
Elements having a higher warpage than the set value are highlighted. The maximum
warpage displays on the header bar.
7. Click the radio button in front of algorithm module to activate the function.
Note
The small square icons on the center of surface id 6 and 7 indicate that HyperMesh will
use mapped as rectangle meshing algorithm to create the mesh.
8. Change the meshing algorithm:
Click mesh button and review the temporary mesh setting.
Click the switch below the meshing algorithm and choose free (unmapped).
Note
The free (unmapped) option allows HyperMesh to mesh freely.
Move the mouse and click the square icon located at the center of surface id 6. The icon will
show the new meshing algorithm.
Click on mesh again and examine how the mesh changes.

Note
Select the checks panel, and then click on warpage button to check warpage value.
Notice that now the maximum warpage found is lower. This is a significant
improvement when compared to the previous value obtained by using mapped as
rectangle meshing algorithm.
Click the switch below the meshing algorithm and choose mapped as triangle.
Move the mouse and click the square icon located at the center of surface id 6. The icon will
change to a triangle shape.
Click on mesh and note the triangular icon automatically changes to the free (unmapped)
icon..
Note
The mapped as triangle algorithm should be applied to a surface with three sides
only. When you apply the triangle algorithm to other types of surfaces HyperMesh
automatically switches to the free (unmapped) algorithm. The mapped as pentagon
algorithm should be applied to a surface with five sides only.
Repeat the same steps to change the meshing algorithm back to autodecide.
Click set all button on the right side of meshing algorithm. This step is to apply autodecide
option on all the selected surfaces.
Altair Engineering

125
Click mesh button.
9. Change the smoothing algorithm:
Click the switch below the smoothing algorithm and choose shape corrected.
Click set all button to apply the algorithm to all the selected surfaces.
Click smooth button and examine the change of the mesh.

Note
Select the checks panel, check warpage and note the new Max warpage.
Click the switch below the smoothing algorithm and choose no smoothing.
Click set all button to apply the algorithm to all the selected surfaces.
Click smooth button and examine the change of the mesh.
10. Change the smoothing algorithm back to autodecide.

11. Change the meshing algorithm back to autodecide.
12. Click mesh.
13. Activate the type module to check the element type that will be used to generate the mesh. Three
element types, quad, tria and mixed are available.
14. Change the meshing element type to mixed:
Click on the switch below the element type: and choose mixed.
Click on set all button.
Click on mesh and examine the change of mesh on those selected surfaces.
15. Change the meshing element type to quads:
Click on the switch below the element type: and choose quads.
Click on set all button.
Click on mesh and examine the change of mesh on those selected surfaces
Note
The mixed element type is only applied to four side surfaces meshed using the
mapped as rectangular algorithm.
Note
The toggle surf panel allows users manually change element type.
16. Click the radio button in front of details module to activate the function.
17. Change the mapping parameters:
Click on a small diamond shape icon located at the center of surface id 6.
Click the check box in front of size control to activate this function. A check will appear in
the box.
Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh.
Click the check box in front of size control again to disable this function.
Click the check box in front of skew control to activate this function. A check will appear in
the box.

Altair Engineering
Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh.
Click the check box in front of size control to activate this function. A check will reappear in
the box. Now both skew control and size control are activated.
Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh
Click the check boxes for size control and skew control. Both functions are now disabled.
Note
The mesh generated by either type of element shape will be influenced by the size
control and the skew control.
18. Click the radio button in front of the density module to activate the function.
19. Change the element density on selected edges:
Click the number field next to the element density= and enter 10.
Click set edge to button.
Move cursor to graphic area and click on density numbers located at top two long edges and
bottom two long edges (see figure below)
Click the number field next to the element density= and enter 3.
Click set edge to button.
Move cursor to graphic area and click on density numbers located at three short edges (see
figure below).
Altair Engineering

127
20. Click the radio button in front of biasing module to active this function.
21. Change the element biasing on selected edges:
Click on the switch under bias style:, select bellcurve biasing style.
Click green set all panel on the left side of bellcurve in order to activate this style.
Click the number field next to bias intensity = and enter -0.500
Click the set edge box
Click the shared edges between surface id 4 and surface id 6, and do the same step at one
free edge of surface id 7 (see figure below).
Click the mesh button.
22. Click the radio button in front of checks module to activate this function.
23. Check the element quality:
Click the number field next to jacobian and enter 0.92
Click the jacobian button and examine the graphic area. Any element fails to meet the
specified jacobian value will be highlighted. The minimum jacobian value will be indicated in
the menu bar.

Altair Engineering
Click skew button to check the skew quality.
24. Click the return to accept the mesh.

25. Mesh surface id 4.
In the interactive sub-panel, select surface id 4.
Click mesh. Review the temporary node and element placements.

Note
Make sure not to check the box in front of the reset the mesh parameters to. The
densities will automatically match the previously meshed bottom surfaces and have
coincident nodes. The default node densities set in the global are assigned
elsewhere around the surfaces. The use of reset meshing parameters to: will
override the automatic coincident matching feature.
Click adjust edge in order to activate this function.
Click on each edge number on screen. Each element density corresponds to the figure
below.
Click mesh button again to accept this mesh.
Click return button.

Note
The mesh on surface id 6 and 7 is assigned to component bottom, and the

elements on surface id 4 are assigned to component middle, the same as
components of their associate surfaces.
Altair Engineering

129
To remesh the meshed surfaces:

1. Remesh the meshed surfaces with new parameters.
Toggle the interactive sub-panel.
Click on surfs box, and select surface id 4,6, and 7.
Click on remesh button.
Change the node density as shown in the figure below.
Click on biasing button.
Enter 0.00 in the number field next to the biasing intensity = .
Click set all button.
Click on mesh.
Click on return to accept the new mesh.
2. Delete elements using the remesh button.
Select the interactive subpanel.
Click on surfs box, and select surface id 4,6, and 7.
Click on remesh button.
Click on return button. Now the elements on these three surfaces will all be deleted. This is
an alternative way to delete elements without leaving the automesh panel.

Altair Engineering
Cleaning Up Surfaces and Adding Fixed Points

This section demonstrates the usage of the cleanup, add points, and remove points sub-panels
while automeshing a model. The addition of these functions in automesh panel allows you to clean
up surfaces without leaving the automesh panel. The mesh is done by setting the reset meshing
prarmeters to: to element size with specified element type.
To remove pinholes on selected surfaces:
1
Retrieve the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/Clean_up_geom.hm file.
Click hm file and file = Clean_up_geom.hm.
Click retrieve to clear current session and pull up the file.
Enter the numbers panel in page Tool.
Select all surfaces.
3. Enter options panel located in the permanent menu.
Go to modeling subpanel.
Click on cleanup tol = button and type 0.2 in the number field.
Click return to exit the panel.
4. Enter in the global panel located in the permanent menu.
Click on element size button, and enter 2.0 in the number field.
Click return to exit the panel.
5. Go to automesh/cleanup subpanel in page 2D.

6. Select the line button next to the unsplit surf: function.
7. Select the edges of pinholes located on surface id 1 and in the middle of surface id 3. The
selected pinhole and the trim lines will be removed (see figure below).
8. Click P to refresh the screen.
Altair Engineering

131
To suppress/unsuppress a surface edge:

1. While still in the automesh/cleanup subpanel, select the line button to the right of the label
toggle:. The cleanup tolerance of 0.2 should be automatically displayed in the field next to
cleanup tol =.
2. Click on the green shared edge between surface id 6 and 7.
3. Click P (keyboard) to refresh the screen.
To set up meshing environment:
1. Click on create mesh subpanel
2. Enter the interactive subpanel and select the surfs.
3. Switch elements to current comp to elements to surfaces comp.
Note
The element size should already be set to 2.0 due to the change of the global element
size setting in the previous step.
To add fixed points and mesh surface id 5 and 8:

1. Remain in the cleanup subpanel.
2. To add points to surfaces 5 and 8.
Click the point button following the label add point:.
Click on the surface with ID 5.

The points are automatically added to the surface at the cursor location.

Altair Engineering
If you want to add points on the line of a surface, select button line next to point and click on
the surface line.
The point is added to the line at the mid-point.
Note
Fixed points are now associated with the middle component.
3. Select the create mesh subpanel.

4. Enter the interactive subpanel and select the surface id 5 and 8.
5. Click mesh button.
6. Click mesh button again to create elements.
Note
Observe the mesh on surfaces id 5 and how the fixed points affect the placement of
the nodes. When you import this model, you have some free points in the points
collector. Free points (with graphical symbol Xs ) dont affect your meshing. After you
change those points from free points to fixed points, HyperMesh will be forced to put
nodes on those fixed points later when you mesh your model.
7. Click on abort to abort the mesh.

To trim the selected surfaces:
1. Enter the cleanup subpanel and click on the top node box next to split surf option.
2. To choose the first node, move the cursor to the shared edge between surface id 3 and 2 and
click on the middle of the edge. A node will be created at that location.
Note
A node can be created simply by clicking anywhere along the edge. You dont have to
highlight the edge or wait until the cursor becoming a box.
3. Once the first node is selected, the second node box is highlighted automatically. Click on the
vertex on the opposite side of the surface id 3. As shown in the figure below, a line connecting
these two nodes is used to trim the surface id 3 at the normal direction.
4. Repeat step 1 3 to trim surface id 2 and surface id 1 as shown in the figure below.
Note
Trimming surfaces allow you to split surfaces and generate shared edges in between.
Later while meshing surfaces, you will have more nodes on shared edges. Which gives
you more control over your mesh.
Altair Engineering

133
To display all the surface Ids again:
Enter the numbers panel in page Tool.
Select all.
To add fixed points to a selected edge:

1. Select the cleanup subpanel in the automesh panel.
2. Click the point button next to add points:.
3. Click on the edge to add fixed points along the edge between surface id 2 and 3.
4. Repeat step 1-3 to add fixed points along the edge between surface id 9 and 10.
Note
These two nodes should be placed so they break the edge into sections similar to the
nearby edges (see figure below).
To mesh the remaining surfaces:

1. Enter the create mesh subpanel,
2. Highlight surface , choose all from the sub window.
3. Using the densities indicated in the figure below, click mesh to review and return to accept. The
complete model is displayed in the figure below.
4. Click Return to exit the automesh panel.

Altair Engineering
To use the element quality checks available in HM:

1. On the Tool page, select the check elements panel.
2. Left click the 2-d radio button to make it the active subpanel.
3. Click on the switch above visual options.
4. Select assign plot and then jacobian to graphically review the element quality.
5. Repeat for any other element quality check desired.
6. Select return to enter the main menu.
Refining Element Quality by Remeshing Elements

This section tells you how to refine your mesh by remeshing elements using the automesh
panel. You can select a group of existing elements with poor quality and remesh them.
HyperMesh automatically chooses a different meshing algorithm to perform meshing.
To initialize and cleanup working environment:
1. Close any current working HyperMesh sessions by clicking red quit panel
2. Start a new HyperMesh session
To retrieve the Clean_up_geom.hm file and display surf ids:
1. Retrieve the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/Clean_up_geom.hm file.
Click hm file and observe file = Clean_up_geom.hm
Click retrieve to clear current session and bring in the file.
Altair Engineering

135
From the Tool page select the numbers panel.
Select all.
Click On.
Click Return.
To delete unnecessary holes:

1. From the 2D page, select automesh/cleanup.
2. Following the unsplit surf: label select the line button.
3. In surface ids 3 and 1, click the edges of the 4 red circles to delete these pin holes.
4. Click P (keyboard) to refresh the screen.
To trim the selected surfaces:
1. Next to the split surf option click the node box.
2. To choose the first node, move the cursor to the shared edge between surface ids 3 and 2 and
click the mid-point of the edge.
A node is created at that location.
Note
A node can be created simply by clicking anywhere along the edge. You dont have to
highlight the edge or wait until the cursor becomes a box.
3. Once the first node is selected, the next node box is highlighted automatically. Click the vertex
on the opposite side of the surface id 3.
As shown in the figure below, the line connecting these two nodes is used to trim the surface id 3
at the normal direction.
4. Repeat step 1 3 to trim surface id 2 and surface id 1 as shown in the figure below.
Note
Trimming surfaces allows you to split surfaces and generate shared edges in between.
Later, while meshing surfaces, you will have more nodes on shared edges, which gives
you more control over your mesh.

Altair Engineering
To start meshing the model:

1. Select the create mesh sub-panel.
2. Make sure the toggle remains set to interactive.
3. Activate the small check in front of reset meshing parameters to:
4. Enter element size= 2.0.
This allows HyperMesh to overwrite global element size setting and use local meshing element
size 2.0.
5. Set the element type to quads.
6. Toggle elements to current comp to elements to surfaces comp.
7. Click surfs.
8. Select all in pop-up window.
All surfaces on the screen are highlighted.
9. Click mesh and go into the meshing module.
10. Change the meshing seeds and choose densities as in the figure below.
11. Click mesh again to create the mesh.
12. Select the checks sub-panel in the meshing module.
13. Review the quality of the mesh.
14. Click return to accept mesh and return to automesh panel.
Altair Engineering

137
To refine meshing quality by remeshing elements:
From the automesh panel go to the create mesh sub-panel.
Make sure the toggle remains in interactive.
Change the yellow surfs panel to elems.
Toggle to elements to sources comps.
Select elements with poor quality on surface 8 (refer to figure below). Selected elements are
highlighted white.
Click remesh. Notice that you enter the meshing module and selected elements are ready to
remesh. To remesh them, you would click mesh.
Click abort to abort this remesh.

Altair Engineering
Note
In the meshing module, Hypermesh puts element density in the middle of the
meshed area. This restricts the nodal location of the remeshed area (refer to figure
below).
To improve the feature angle of the meshed feature recognition:
From the permanent menu, click options.
Choose modeling sub-selection in options panel.
Altair Engineering

139
Click feature angle, and change feature angle from default (30 ) to 50 .
Click return and go back to automesh panel.
To refine meshing quality by remeshing elements:
Remain in create mesh subpanel. Make sure the toggle remains in interactive.
Verify elems is active.
Select elements with poor quality on surface 8. Selected elements are highlighted white.
Click remesh. Notice you entered the meshing module and selected elements to be
remeshed.
Note
Compare the difference since changing the feature angle in the options panel.
Notice that after increasing the feature angle, Hypermesh no longer puts element
density in the middle of the meshed area.
Click adjust edge, and move the cursor to the bottom edge of surface 8.
Change element density to 8, which is the same as the upper edge between surface 8 and
surface 5.
Click mesh to generate elements.
Click return to go back to the automesh panel.
Click return again to accept this mesh.

Note
Practice remeshing elements to refine other elements that you are not satisfied with.

Altair Engineering
Remeshing 2-D Elements - HM-3110

This tutorial demonstrates how to remesh elements using the automesh panel and create mesh
subpanel. In HyperMesh, you can remesh elements when no geometry exists.
Meshing the surfaces
Remeshing the elements

Meshing the Surfaces

In HyperMesh, the automesher has two functional modes: interactive and automatic. Interactive is
the default option. In the create mesh subpanel, select the surfaces to mesh or remesh, or select the
elements to remesh.
Elements are remeshed with the use of the HyperMesh inferred surface algorithm, if geometry for the
selected elements needs to exist in the model. The inferred surface algorithm interpolates geometry
data from the selected elements in order to create new mesh.
When elements are selected to be remeshed, there is the break connectivity option and the vertex
angle parameter. The break connectivity option detaches the node connectivity between adjacent
selected and unselected elements. This allows you to adjust the node densities along the boundary
of the selected elements. The vertex angle parameter defines the placement of vertices along the
boundary of the selected elements. If the angle between two adjacent element edges along the
boundary is less the specified angle, a vertex is placed at the meeting point of the two edges. Anchor
nodes create the effect of a fixed point on the inferred surface (which is derived from the existing
mesh) and keep the location of the anchor nodes intact.
In HyperMesh, the mixed (quads and trias) meshing algorithm can be used on mapped and
unmapped surfaces. The mixed meshing algorithm generates a quad dominant mesh where
transitions between opposing mesh densities are accomplished using tria elements. This produces
mesh patterns that are more regular in appearance.
Figure 1 - The automesh panel

To retrieve the HyperMesh Database:
1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.
Altair Engineering

141
2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Retrieve the remesh.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
Figure 2 - The remesh.hm file

Rotate the model and notice the contours of the surfaces.
To mesh the surfaces:
1. Select the 2-D page.
2. Select the automesh panel
4. Click the upper left entity selector switch and select surfs.
5. From the pop-up menu, select displayed to select all of the surfaces displayed on the screen.
6. Click the box preceding reset mesh parameters to: to make this option active.
7. In the elem size = text field, enter 12 and press ENTER.
8. Click the switch under the elem size = button and select mixed.
9. Click mesh.
The automesh module displays in the main menu area. It consists of density, algorithm, type,
biasing, details, and checks.modules.
10. Click mesh again to preview the mesh.

Altair Engineering
Figure 3 - Surfaces selected and meshed

To check the mesh quality:
1. Select the checks sub-panel.
2. Click jacobian.
The minimum jacobian of 0.45 displays on the header bar.
3. Click warpage.
The maximum warpage found of 8.02 displays on the header bar.
4. Click aspect.
The maximum aspect ratio of 4.08 displays on the header bar.
5. Click skew.
The maximum skew angle of 63.27 displays on the header bar.
6. Click return to accept the mesh and return to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.
7. Click return to exit the automesh panel.
Remeshing the Elements

To remesh some elements to improve jacobian:
2. Select the automesh panel.
4. Click the upper left entity selector switch and select elems.
5. Click elems and from the pop-up menu select by window.
6. Move the mouse over to the graphics area and draw a window around the elements as shown in
Figure 4.
7. Click remesh.
Altair Engineering

143
8. Click mesh to preview the mesh.

The automesh module will be displayed in the main menu area.
9. Select the checks subpanel.
10. Click jacobian.
11. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.
Figure 4 - Elements selected to be remeshed

Altair Engineering
Figure 5 - Selected elements remeshed

To remesh some other elements to improve jacobian:
1. Select the upper left entity selector switch and select elems.
2. Click elems and from the pop-up menu select by window.
3. Bring the mouse over to the graphics area and draw a window around the elements as as shown
in Figure 6.
4. Click remesh.
The automesh module will be displayed in the main menu area.
5. Click mesh to preview the mesh.
6. From the permanent menu, click f next to local view to fit the area being meshed to the graphics
area.
7. Select the biasing module.
8. Click adjust edge.
9. Right click multiple times on the bias value on the lowest boundary edge to change the value to
2.400. Or drag the mouse over to the bias value on the lowest boundary edge. Hold down the left
mouse key and drag the mouse down to quickly change the value to 2.400.
10. Click mesh.
11. Select the checks module.
12. Click jacobian.
13. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.
Altair Engineering

145
14. Click return to exit the automesh panel.
Figure 6 - Elements selected to be remeshed
Figure 7 - Selected elements remeshed

Altair Engineering
2-D Meshing around Fixed Points - HM-3120

The automesh/proj to edge subpanel is used to project fixed points in the interior of a surface to the
surfaces edge or to multiple surfaces. As a result, when the surface is meshed, the mesh pattern will
look more regular than before. An example of this functionality would be a surface with interior fixed
points that specify weld point locations.
To retrieve the HyperMesh database file:
1. Select files on the main menu.
3. Retrieve the file projectedge.hm in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory.
4. Click return.
Proj to Edge
To mesh a surface containing interior fixed points without using the proj to edge subpanel:
1. Click the 3 button on the vis opts: line on the macro menu to display the surfaces in shaded
topology mode.
Altair Engineering


3. Select automesh.
4. Select create mesh.
6. Drag the mouse over to the graphics area and select the yellow, slender, rectangular surface as
shown in Figure 1 below.
7. Click the box preceding reset meshing parameters to: to activate this option.
8. Enter 20 in the field following elem size = and press ENTER.
9. Click the switch below elem size = and select quads.
10. Click mesh.
The automesh module displays in the main menu area.
12. Click abort to return to the automesh panel and not accept the mesh.
Figure 1. Surface meshed without using the automesh / proj to edge subpanel.
To project the surfaces interior fixed points to its edges:
There are three ways to perform this task:
The fixed points can be projected to its edges
The fixed points can be projected onto its surfaces
The fixed points can be projected to multiple surfaces by changing the tolerance values

Altair Engineering
1. Select the proj to edge subpanel.

2. Select on surfs option as the method of projection.
3. Click surfs to make sure it is active.
4. Drag the mouse over to the graphics area and select the yellow, slender, rectangular surface.
5. In the text field following distance tolerance = type 20 and press ENTER.
6. In the text field following angle tolerance = type 25 and press ENTER.
7. Click project.
Note
The distance tolerance and angle tolerance parameters control the creation of fixed points.
If the shortest distance between an edge and an interior fixed point is less then or equal to
the distance tolerance, a fixed point will be created on the edge. If the angle ABC, formed by
an existing fixed point edge (A), the fixed point to-be-created (B) and the interior fixed point
(C), is greater than the angle tolerance, a fixed point will not be created.
To mesh the surface:

3. Drag the mouse over to the graphics area and select the yellow, slender, rectangular surface.
4. Click mesh.
6. Click return to accept the mesh and return to the automesh panel.
Figure 2. Surface meshed after using the automesh / proj to edge subpanel.
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Exploring 2-D Mesh Parameter Options in the Automesh

Function - HM-3130
HyperMesh - HM-1000.\
In this tutorial, create 2-D finite elements to demonstrate the mesh quality produced using the options
on the mesh params subpanel and automeshing module
Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
1. Retrieve the file tria_trans.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
To display the surface IDs:
1. Select the numbers panel on the Tools page.
2. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.
3. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click display.
5. Click on button.
To select the collector type:
2. Click component = and select quads_size_only.
3. Click return to exit the global panel.
To set the mesh parameters:
1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.
2. Select the mesh params subpanel.
Altair Engineering

151
3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.
4. Click elem size = and enter 1.000.
5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select quads.
6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.
To mesh the surface and create elements:
2. Set the interactive meshing mode using the rightmost toggle.
4. Click mesh.
5. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.
6. Click return.
Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.
Repeat the steps using the quads_skew_only component and the skew option activated.
Repeat the steps using the quads_size_skew component and the skew and size options
activated.
Compare the elements created with each of the options:
Quads Size Only

Altair Engineering
Quads Skew Only
Quads Size and Skew
Altair Engineering

153
Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
To set the collector type:
4. Click component = and select mixed_size_only.
5. Click return to exit the global panel.
To set the mesh parameters:
3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.
5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select mixed.
6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.
To mesh the surface and create elements:
1. Click create mesh subpanel.
2. Select the interactive subpanel.
4. Click mesh.
5. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.
6. Click return.
Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.
Repeat the steps using the mixed_skew_only component and the skew option activated.
Repeat the steps using the mixed_size_skew component and the skew and size options
activated.
Compare the elements created with each of the options:

Altair Engineering
Mixed Size Only
Mixed Skew Only
Altair Engineering

155
Mixed Size and Skew

Altair Engineering
Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas HM-3140

This tutorial explains the effects of the chordal deviation parameters in the automesh panel. Chordal
deviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities and
biasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface being
meshed.
Creating a mesh based only on element size
The maximum deviation parameter
The maximum angle parameter
The maximum element size parameter

1. Retrieve the file chordal_dev.hm file, located in the
Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element Size

In this section, create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing parameters.
To set the mesh parameters and create the mesh:
3. Set the meshing mode to automatic using the rightmost toggle.
4. Activate reset meshing parameters to:.
6. Click the lowest toggle and select elements to surfaces comp.
7. Click surfs and select by collector from the extended entity selection menu.
HyperMesh goes to the display panel.
8. Select use size from the component list.
Altair Engineering

9. Click select.
10. Click mesh to create the mesh.
11. Click return.
View of the completed mesh for this exercise.
The Maximum Deviation Parameter

In this section, mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the element
densities and biasing.
To set the chordal deviation parameters:
2. Click the upper toggle and select use mesh params.
HyperMesh now uses the settings in the mesh params subpanel.
4. Click the leftmost toggle and select use chordal deviation.
5. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.
Note
You can cycle through the parameter settings by pressing the TAB key after typing in a
value.
6. Set max elem size = to 15.000.

7. Set max deviation = to 0.500.
8. Set max angle = to 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.
To create the mesh:
2. Select the automatic mode on the create mesh subpanel.

Altair Engineering

4. Select deviation ctrl from the component list.
5. Click select.
7. Click return to access the automesh subpanel.
The Maximum Angle Parameter

In this section, use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous tutorial, but reduce the
maximum angle parameter to compare the effects.
3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000
Note
value.
4. Set max elem size = to 15.000

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500
6. Set max angle = to 20.000
To create the mesh:
3. Select angle ctrl from the component list.
Altair Engineering

4. Click select.
The Maximum Element Size Parameter

In this section, use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous exercise except for the
maximum element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow the
algorithm to create larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.
3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.
Note
value.
4. Set max elem size = to 30.000.

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500.
6. Set max angle = to 20.000.
To create the mesh:
3. Select max size ctrl from the component list.
4. Click select.

Altair Engineering
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on UserDefined Quality Criteria - HM-3150
HyperMesh has a new set of features designed to help you achieve good element quality more
efficiently. These features use settings from the qualityindex panel to generate or modify a mesh.
This allows HyperMesh to give results that account for your preferences for which element quality
checks are more or less important than others. The new quality index (Q.I.) optimization features are
found in the automesh, smooth, and qualityindex panels. These functionalities can be used
separately or in unison.
To prepare the file for the tutorial:
1. Open the planar.hm file from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory.
2. Generate a mesh on the part.
-
From the 2D page go to the automesh panel.
Make sure you are on the create mesh sub-panel.
Select the surface in the graphics area.
Enter a value of 15 in the elem size= field.
Set the type to quads.
Set the meshing mode to automatic.
Click mesh. The mesh should be generated.
Click return to exit from the automesh panel.
3. Load the quality index criteria settings to be used.

-
From the 2D page go to the qualityindex panel.
Make sure that the panel is set on criteria instead of results.
Go to page 3 (pg3) of the criteria.
Click the load button next to the field for criteria file:.
Open the QI_meshing_tutorial_criteria file from the

This loads the element quality criteria we will be using for this tutorial. If you scroll through the
different pages of criteria, you should see different values entered in the fields from what you saw
before. Also, the highlighting of elements in the graphics area should change. This is because
the elements are being judged according to the new criteria we just loaded. For a complete
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-3150 163

explanation of the qualityindex panel, see the on-line help under qualityindex.
To work with node and element quality optimization:
Within the qualityindex panel, there are functions that allow the user to select individual nodes or
elements, and then alters the position or shape of the node/element to optimize the element quality
for the surrounding elements. The element qualities are optimized according to the settings in the
qualityindex panel. These features are very useful for improving element qualities in local areas of
the mesh.
1. While still in the qualityindex panel, toggle the button labeled criteria to results.
On the right-hand side of the panel, note the value for comp. Q.I.=. Currently, it should read
875.15. We will keep this number in mind so that we can judge how much progress we make in
improving the element quality.
2. Switch the button labeled view to optimize.
3. Experiment with the node optimize function.
-
The button labeled node optimize should already be highlighted. Selecting a node while this
button is highlighted optimizes the location of the node to improve the quality of the
surrounding elements.
Try selecting some of the nodes on the mesh. In particular, select nodes of elements that are
highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should see each node move as it is
selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality.
Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more
nodes.
4. Experiment with the element optimize function.

-
Click the button labeled element optimize. Selecting an element while this button is
highlighted optimizes the location of the elements nodes to improve the quality of the
element. It also considers the quality of the surrounding elements.
Try selecting some of the elements on the mesh. In particular, select elements that are
highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should usually see the shape of the
element change as it is selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality.
Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more
elements.
5. Click return to exit from the qualityindex panel.

To reset the part by remeshing:
At this point, we need to regenerate the original mesh so we can try fixing the element quality using a
different method. The new method is to use the smooth panel. Regenerating the original mesh
allows us to compare the smooth functionality to the node and element optimization used in the
previous section.
1. From the 2D page go to the automesh panel.
2. Make sure you are on the create sub-panel.
3. Select the surface in the graphics area.
4. Make sure the panel has the following settings:

Altair Engineering
The check-box for reset meshing parameters to: is checked on.
The elem size= field has a value of 15.
The type is set to quads.
The meshing mode is set to automatic.
5. Click the remesh button.

The mesh should be regenerated.
6. Click return to exit from the automesh panel.
To use Q.I. optimization smoothing:
The smooth panel also has quality index optimization features. Using this allows you to adjust the
element quality according to the settings in the qualityindex panel for an entire group of selected
elements.
1. From the 2D page, go to the smooth panel.
2. Make sure you are on the plates sub-panel.
3. Click the elems button next to smooth:.
4. Select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.
5. Switch the algorithm to QI optimization. (By default, the button should be set to autodecide.)
6. There are several optional controls you should understand, but are not needed for this tutorial:
-
target quality index = Specify a number for the value you would like the quality index to be
after the smoothing operation. This value is not guaranteed from smoothing. The smooth
operation will attempt to hit this target.
time limit
The check-box for can be checked on or off. For this model, a time limit
doesnt matter very much. However, if you are working with a large model, you may want to
check this box on to ensure the smoothing routine doesnt take more time than you want to
allow.
feature angle = The smooth panel looks at the angle between the normals of two adjacent
elements. If this angle is equal or greater than the value specified in this field, it will not allow
the nodes shared by the elements to move.
use criteria in QI panel

can be left alone in this case. You could toggle it to QI
criteria file, allowing you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. Since, we
specified a criteria file at the beginning of this tutorial, we can leave this option alone.
recursive optimization procedure

can be left alone in this case. You could optionally
toggle this to single optimization step. Using the recursive optimization procedure
allows the automesher to take more than one pass in generating the best quality mesh it can.
However, this can take longer than single optimization step, so you might want to use
single optimization step for larger models.
7. Click the smooth button.

Once HyperMesh has run the routine, you should see a message saying "result approximate
quality index = X". Compare this to 875.15, which is the quality index value we got after creating
the original mesh. In this case you should see that it is significantly lower, which tells us that the
element quality is much better.
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-3150 165

8. Click return to exit from the smooth panel.

To use the Q.I. settings in the automesh panel:
The automesh panel is capable of using quality index settings to automatically decide what pattern of
mesh it should generate.
1. From the 2D page, go to the automesh panel.
2. Make sure you are on the create sub-panel.
3. Select the surface in the graphics area.
4. Make sure the panel has the following settings:
-
The check-box for reset meshing parameters to: is checked on.
The elem size= field has a value of 15.
The type is set to quads.
5. Change the meshing mode from automatic to QI optimized.

Like the smooth panel, the QI optimized meshing mode of the automesh panel has some
controls of which you should be aware. They are, however, not needed in this tutorial.
-
use criteria in QI panel can be left alone here. You could toggle it to QI criteria file,
allowing you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. Since a criteria file has
already been specified at the beginning of this tutorial, this option can be ignored.
Smooth across common edges determines whether nodes generated on a surface edge
can be moved off the surface edge when the algorithm smoothes the mesh.
feature angle < works in conjunction with smooth across common edges. If the angle
between the normals of the surfaces sharing the edge are equal to or greater than this value,
the nodes along the edge will not be moved during smoothing. This is true even when the
smooth across common edges is checked on.
time limit: sets the maximum time that the automesher is allowed take in generating the
mesh. Turning this option on can be useful for large models to limit the time you are willing to
allocate. However, this might not allow the automesher to arrive at the absolute best element
quality.
6. Click the remesh button.

The mesh should be regenerated.
7. Click return to exit from the automesh panel.
8. Check the quality index of the mesh to compare it to the previous mesh.
-
Go to the qualityindex panel.
Make sure the panel is set on results instead of criteria.
Look at the value for the comp. Q.I.= field. It should be 351.22, which is much lower that the
875.15 value of the mesh we originally generated.

Altair Engineering
Creating a 2-D Mesh using Batch Mesher - HM-3160

Geometry clean-up and meshing are often cited as the most time consuming aspects of finite element
modeling. In HyperMesh, these tasks can be performed in batch mode (Batch Mesher), requiring
minimum input and no user interaction.
In this tutorial you will learn how to generate a 2-D mesh on a part in batch mode and how to review
and evaluate the results. As part of setting up the batch task, you will also learn how to create the
custom criteria and parameter files used in batch mode.
The following exercises are included:
Understanding the Batch Mesher process
Gathering the input requirements and configuring the Batch Mesher
Setting up and submitting a job to the Batch Mesher
Reviewing the results
You can extend this process to mesh any number of parts in batch mode in a single step. Once you
are satisfied with the mesh obtained, you can complete the modeling to generate appropriate solver
decks.
This tutorial requires about 45 minutes to complete and uses files located in the
The model file used for this tutorial is a floor panel (see figure below):
Altair Engineering

167
Floor panel model

To understand the Batch Mesher process:
Batch Mesher is a process that generates a finite element mesh of a given CAD geometry without
any user intervention. The objective of this process is to generate the best quality mesh while
respecting the parameters set by the user, and with minimal deviation from the geometry.
Batch Mesher requires the following:
Geometry data file in any CAD format that HyperMesh supports, or in a HyperMesh database
file
Parameter file - This text file defines the average element size, type of elements to be
generated (quads or trias) and various options for geometry cleanup.
Criteria file - This text file contains all the element quality requirements such as jacobian,
warpage, etc. You can export this file from the qualityindex panel in HyperMesh after you
update the settings to your requirements.
The quality of the mesh generated is measured with a quality index (QI) value which is derived from
the individual element quality criteria defined in the criteria file. The Batch Mesher invokes
HyperMesh in batch mode and performs a variety of predefined functions which include:
Import the geometry file using the specified CAD translator.
Perform a variety of geometry cleanup operations, such as closing internal slivers and
removing duplicate geometry, to cure any inaccuracies in the geometry.
Perform geometry simplification specified by the user such as removing pinholes, fillets,
etc.
Execute the geometry editing tools required to improve the regions to mesh.

Altair Engineering
Determine the best combination of meshing algorithm and mesh parameters to generate the
best quality mesh.
Perform quality optimized meshing and node placement to meet the quality requirements (QI
value).
Save the resulting mesh and geometry as a HyperMesh database file.
You can launch the Batch Mesher function from a user interface or through the command line.
In this tutorial, we will work with the Batch Mesh user interface. You control the behavior of the Batch
Mesher by setting a variety of parameters and also providing the target element quality.
To gather the input requirements:
In this tutorial, mesh a floor panel (floor.iges) in batch mode with the following requirements:
10mm target element size
Element size >3.0mm
Warpage <20.0
Jacobian >0.7
The number of tria elements should not exceed 10% of the total number of elements
All bolt holes with a diameter less than 8mm should be ignored and all others should be
meshed with one row of washer elements
In this section, invoke the Batch Mesher user interface, and configure it to the requirements set above
defining the appropriate criteria and parameter files.
1. Invoke the Batch Mesher user interface.
On PC:
-
Click Start and go to Programs / Altair HyperWorks <version> / Altair Tools / Batch
Mesher.
This launches a DOS window as well as the Batch Mesher interface.
Note
On PC, you can also launch the interface by opening a command prompt and
typing <install_directory>/hm/batchmesh/hw_batchmesh
On UNIX:
-
Type the hw_batchmesh command at the prompt.

Note
If you have difficulties launching the interface at your site, please contact your
system administrator.
The user interface has four tabs:

Batch Mesh
lets you choose the CAD geometry files to be meshed in batch mode and
submit the jobs.
Run Status
lets you check the status of runs that have been submitted to the Batch
Mesher.
Configurations
lets you specify the input parameters, such as the CAD geometry file
Altair Engineering

169
format and file extension, desired element quality criteria file, parameter
file, etc.
User Procedures
lets you customize the Batch Mesher process to your needs.
The next step is to configure the Batch Mesher to your requirements. This step includes setting
the geometry file type, and criteria and parameter file
2. Add a new Mesh Type using the Configurations tab.
In the Batch Mesh window, go to the Configurations tab.
Set Type of geometry: to IGES using the drop-drown menu.
Set File filter: to IGES (*.igs, *.iges).
Use the icon,
In the blank field under Mesh Type, type in tutorial_meshsize10.
, to add a new entry in the table.
Configurations tab
We now need to assign a Criteria File and a Parameter File for this new Mesh Type. If we had
such files already, we could use the open file icon
to browse for them. Here we will simply
edit existing files from the installation and save them to our working directory before specifying
them in the Configurations tab.
3. Edit the nvh10.criteria file to define the criteria for the mesh.
In the Configurations tab, select the Criteria File cell referencing the file nvh10.criteria.
Click the edit icon
to load this file into a text editor and edit it.
Disregard any message that is posted as we will save the edited file under a new name.
Note
The file lists 12 criteria that can be turned on or off using the On column (0=off,
1=on). Specify various weight factors for the different criteria using the Wt column.

Altair Engineering
nvh10.criteria criteria file
Leave the Ideal value for min length and max length untouched as it already matches our
target element size.
Change the Fail value for min length to 3.0.
Turn on the warpage criterion, which is already set to the right Fail value of 20, by changing
the 0 to a 1 in the On column.
Change the Fail value of the jacobian to 0.7, and the Warn value to 0.75.
Update the Fail value for % of trias to 10.0, and set the Warn value to 9.0.
Set the weight factor in the Wt column to 2 for min length, warpage, jacobian, and % of
trias as these are most important for us.
Click Save, and save this criteria file to your working directory as
tutorial_batchmesh.criteria.
Close the criteria file.
Altair Engineering

171
tutorial_batchmesh.criteria criteria file

Note
Criteria files can also be generated from the qualityindex panel located on the 2D page
of HyperMesh. Refer to this panel help for complete information.
4. Specify the tutorial_batchmesh.criteria file in the Criteria File column of the Configurations
tab for the Mesh Type we created using the open file icon.
5. Edit the nvh10.param file to define the parameters for geometry cleanup and mesh creation
according to the following table:
Parameter and options:
Action:
geometry_cleanup_flag
Leave at 1 to allow the Batch

Mesher to perform any necessary
geometry cleanup for better mesh
quality
perform geometry cleanup such as equivalencing

edges, suppressing features etc
no geometry cleanup
meshing_flag
0
Do not mesh (only cleanup if

geometry_cleanup_flag = 1)
default mesh without any optimization
perform optimized mesh but does not optimize

node across shared (green) edges
perform optimized mesh with node placement

optimization across shared (green) edges
perform local area remeshing after optimized
Leave at 5 to allow the Batch

Mesher to give the best mesh
quality using all the options at its
disposition

Altair Engineering
mesh with node placement optimization across

shared (green) edges
5
perform local area remeshing and optimization as

4 does, and also reduces the number of trias in
the mesh
element_size
Leave at 10 to mesh this part with

10mm average element size
Element size for meshing and optimization

element_type
Leave at 2 to obtain a quad mesh

with use of triangles at transitions
mesh with tria elements
mesh with quad elements
mesh with mixed (quads with trias at transitions)
surf_component
Leave at 1
place the mesh in the surfaces component
place the mesh in the current component (if none

exists, one is created)
feature_angle
Used in conjunction with meshing_flag. When
meshing_flag is set to 3 or 4 the tool tries to move
nodes on this free edge to its optimum position as long
as the angle between the two surfaces that share the
edge is less than the feature angle specified here.
nodes_around_holes
Minimum number of nodes around a round hole (even
when element size only allows for lesser number)
layers_around_holes
diameter_of_pinholes
Removes all the pinholes in the model whose diameter
is lesser than the value specified here
Removes all cylindrical holes in solid parts whose

diameter is less than the value specified here
keep_pinhole_center
Allows you to add a fixed point at the center of the
pinhole being removed.
0
Set this to 5 elements around a

hole
Leave at 1 to get one ring of

washer elements
Number of concentric layers of washer elements

around a hole
pinholes_in_solids
Leave this at the current 30

degree setting
Set to 8 mm as per our

requirements
Since our part is a sheet

representation of a stamped
metal, this parameter can be
ignored
Leave at 0 so not fixed point is
added
Does not add a fixed point
Altair Engineering

173
(non-zero value) retains the fixed point , useful for

tracking the location of bolt holes, to apply
constraints later
max_filet_radius
Removes all edge fillets whose radius is below the max
value specified
minimal_bead_height
Set this value to 0 - no fillet

removed
Set this value to 4 mm
Suppresses all beads whose height is lesser than the

specified value, thus ignoring the feature during mesh
generation
no_cleanup_comp
Name of component to which geometry cleanup
functions should not be applied. Repeat it to provide
multiple components. The geometry in these
components will be meshed without performing any
geometry cleanup
time_limit
Time limit for node optimization after meshing
Remove this parameter as we

wish to cleanup the entire model
To complete the batch mesh job

quickly, add this parameter to the
text file and set it to 10 minutes
6. Save the updated parameter file to your working directory as tutorial_batchmesh.param.

Altair Engineering
Updated parameter file

7. Specify the tutorial_batchmesh.param file in the Parameter File column of the Configurations
tab for the Mesh Type we created.
Altair Engineering

175
Completed configurations
The Batch Mesher is now configured. You can save this configuration for future use using the Save
Config option from the File menu. The next step is to select the CAD files to be meshed.
To submit CAD geometry to the Batch Mesher:
In this section, choose the CAD geometry file(s) to be meshed in batch mode, and set the results
directory where the Batch Mesher will save the resulting mesh files.
1. Use the Batch Mesh tab to set the Geometry source directory:.
Go to the Batch Mesh tab.
Click the open file icon next to Geometry source directory: and browse for the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory.
This is where the geometry file for this tutorial is located.
Warning
2. Use the
Select the directory only, not the file.
icon to select the file floor.iges to mesh in batch model.
A window is displayed with a list of all the files in this directory with the .iges extension, as
specified on the Configurations tab. While multiple selection is possible using the CTRL and
SHIFT keys, we only select one file here.
The file name and path populate the Geometry File field, while the file type populates the Geom
Type field.
3. Click the cell under Mesh Type and select tutorial_meshsize10 from the list.
4. Click the open file icon next to Result directory: and browse for your working directory as the
directory where result files will be placed.
5. Click the
icon to launch the Batch Mesher.

Altair Engineering
To monitor the status of the process and review the results:

Once the CAD geometry is submitted, the Run Status tab automatically displays. This is where you
can check the status of the run(s). Each geometry file submitted is listed individually along with its
current status (Pending, Working, or Done).
The results of the run are saved in a directory bm.xxxx within the specified result directory specified
on the Batch Mesh tab where xxxx is randomly generated and varies for each run.
1. On the Run Status tab, click Details to load the content of the floor_res.txt file.
This file is generated by the Batch Mesher and shows the progress of the run.
It lists the file name being meshed in batch mode with the corresponding element size, criteria,
and parameter files. It also lists the steps completed by the Batch Mesher along with time in
seconds for each step. It also provides information such as:
The total number of surface/faces in the model
The number of surfaces that could not be meshed (#failed surfs)
The number of surfaces whose mesh has poor quality (#badmsh surfs)
The total number of elements in the model
The % of trias
The total quality index (QI) value of the model.
This information is only provided for some steps in the process.

2. Click Refresh to review the latest status of the run.
The final timing summary, along with the word COMPLETE, in the text file indicate the successful
completion of the run. The status changes to Done on the Run Status tab.
The Batch Mesher performs various numbers of steps for each model, as different models need
varying extents of cleanup and meshing to achieve the target quality. The contents of the details
are automatically saved in the result directory.
An ERROR is printed when the run failed to complete successfully.
3. From the Run Status tab, click LoadMesh to load the resulting file into HyperMesh.
This invokes HyperMesh and loads the resulting HyperMesh database file that contains the final
mesh along with the cleaned up geometry.
Altair Engineering

177
Final model
With the final result, we can compare the model obtained to the geometry that was supplied to the
Batch Mesher to better understand how the parameters we set affected the result. In the figure above
are 6 areas we can zoom into to review the effect of the various parameters:
Area 1: Pinholes with a diameter less than 8mm were removed
Before
After

Altair Engineering
Area 2: Added (trimmed) layer of washer around pinholes with a minimum of 5 nodes (fixed points)
along the free edges
Before
After
Area 3: Suppressed geometric edges which do not have a sharp feature and that are too close to
other geometry causing elements smaller than specified element size
Before
Altair Engineering
After

179
Area 4: Bead patterns recognized and cleaned up
Before
After
Area 5: Fixed points (or trim lines) added to better align the mesh where surface edges are close to
one another
Before
After

Altair Engineering
Area 6: Nodes moved off the surface edges (while still on surface geometry) to improve mesh quality
Finally, we can review the quality of the mesh using the qualityindex panel from the 2D page. You
will find that some elements fail the quality criteria we set as many times, the Batch Mesher cannot
improve the quality of some elements due to constraints imposed on it such as:
Limit deviation from surface geometry
Maintain feature angle and external edges
Imposed minimum number of nodes around a hole
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard the files used of keep them in your working directory for
your own reference.
In this tutorial we used the Batch Mesher to mesh an IGES model in batch mode. We defined specific
criteria for the quality of the elements to be generated, and also set some parameters as to what kind
of geometry cleanup would be involved in the process. We experimented with various options and
reviewed of these options would affect the final geometry and mesh.
Altair Engineering

181

Altair Engineering
Creating 2-D Elements without Surfaces - HM-3170

This tutorial demonstrates how to build surfaces and shell meshes using the panels listed below.
These panels are located on the 2-D page.
ruled panel
Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh from nodes or lines that are
unconnected.
spline panel
Allows you to create a 3-D mesh and/or surface with lines.
skin panel
Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh skin across a set of lines.
drag panel
Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes, lines, or

elements.
line drag panel
Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes, lines, or

elements along a line.
Creating surfaces and meshes using the ruled panel
Creating surfaces and meshes using the spline panel
Creating surfaces and meshes using the skin panel.
Dragging lines to create surfaces and/or shell meshes
Dragging nodes to create surfaces and/or shell meshes
Creating surfaces and/or shell meshes with lines
Creating surfaces and/or shell meshes with nodes

See the following panels in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information:
ruled
spline
skin
drag
line drag
automesh
create nodes
lines
Altair Engineering

183
line edit
reparam (line parameters)
Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the ruled panel

In this tutorial, use the ruled panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination of nodes,
lines, and/or line segments.
1. Retrieve the file simple300.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
The simple300.hm file

To build a ruled surface using lines:
1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.
2. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.
3. Pick line L1 from the graphics area.

4. Click the lower input collector switch and select lines.

Altair Engineering
5. Pick line L2 from the graphics area.

6. Click the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.
7. Click create.
8. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edge
of the new surface.
-
To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left
mouse button increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.
9. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

-
To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.
If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panel
without saving the surface that you created.
If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.
10. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the following
mesh and surface options in step 6:
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only

To build a ruled surface using nodes:
1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.
2. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.
3. Pick nodes 1 and 4 in the graphics area.
4. Click the lower input collector switch and select nodes.
5. Pick nodes 17 and 19 in the graphics area.
6. Click the rightmost collector switch and select mesh, keep surf.
7. Click create.
of the new surface.
-

-
If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module
panel without saving the surface that you created.
-
mesh, dele surf
Altair Engineering

185
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
12. For practice, select a combination of node list and line list entity selection methods to create
surfaces or meshes.
Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the spline panel

In this tutorial, use the spline panel to create 3-D surfaces and meshes from a combination of nodes
and lines.
directory.
The simple300.hm file.

To build a spline surface using lines:
1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.
2. Click the leftmost switch and select lines.
3. Pick lines L1 and L2.

Altair Engineering

5. Click create.
of the new surface.
-

-
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
To build a spline surface using nodes:

1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.
2. Click the leftmost switch and select nodes.
3. Pick nodes 19, 2, 25, and 27 on the model, in that order.
5. Click create.
of the new surface.
-

-
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Altair Engineering

187
Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the skin panel

In this tutorial, use the skin panel to create a skin surface and mesh from a set of lines.
1. Retrieve the file skin.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
The skin.hm file.
To create a skin surface with lines:

1. Select the skin panel on the 2-D page.
2. Click line list.
3. Pick lines L1, L2, L3, and L4 in that order.
4. Select the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.
5. Click create.
of the new surface.
-

-

Altair Engineering

-
and surface options in step 4:
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Dragging Lines to Create Surfaces and Shell Meshes

The drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along a
specified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.
1. Retrieve the file dragdemo.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
The dragdemo.hm file.

To create a surface by dragging lines:
1. Select the drag panel on the 2-D page.
2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.
Altair Engineering

189
3. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.

4. Pick line L1.
5. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.
6. To specify the direction along which to drag the line, use the plane and vector collector switch, or
select three nodes. The three nodes specify a plane, and the drag direction is assumed
perpendicular to this plane.
7. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select z-axis as the direction along which to drag
the nodes.
8. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.
9. Click distance = and enter 50.0.
10. Click drag+.
The line is dragged 50 positive units in the z-axis direction and the new surface is displayed.
of the new surface.
-
-
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Dragging Nodes to Create Surfaces and Shell Meshes

The drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along a
specified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.
directory.
Altair Engineering
The simple300.hm file.

To build a surface using node selections:
1. Select the drag panel on the 2-D page.
3. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.
4. Pick nodes 9, 10, and 11 in the graphics area.

6. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis as the direction along which to drag
the nodes.
7. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.
8. Click distance = and enter 50.0.
9. Click drag-.
Altair Engineering

191
The new surface is displayed.

of the new surface.
-
-
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with Lines

In this section, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes by dragging a line, line
segments, or nodes along a selected curve path.
1. Retrieve the file dragdemo.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
The dragdemo.hm file.

Altair Engineering
To create a surface by dragging lines:

1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.
3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select lines.
4. Pick line L1.
6. Click the toggle and select use default vector.
7. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line along
which to drag the entities.
8. Click drag.
The new surface is displayed.
of the new surface.
-
-
f the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with Nodes

In this section, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination of
node picks and a 3-D line, which serves as the path curve along which the nodes are dragged.
1. Retrieve the file skin.hm file located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
Altair Engineering

193
The skin.hm file.

To create temporary nodes:
1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.
2. Select the on line subpanel.
3. Pick line L1 in the graphics area.

4. Click the data entry field after number of nodes = and enter 6.
5. Click the switch after bias style: and select linear.
6. Click the data entry field after bias intensity = and enter 0.
7. Click create.
Six evenly spaced nodes are displayed in the graphics area.
8. Click return.
To create a mesh of shell elements using the line drag panel:
1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.

Altair Engineering
3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select nodes.
4. Select the six nodes (in order from 16) created previously along line L1.
5. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line along
which to drag the entities.
7. Click the toggle and select use default vector.
8. Click drag.
The new surface is displayed in the graphics area.
of the new surface.
-
-
-
mesh, dele surf
mesh, w/o surf
surface only
Altair Engineering

195

Altair Engineering
Splitting and Combining 2-D Elements - HM-3180

This tutorial demonstrates how to split and combine shell elements using the split and edit element
panels. Splitting and combining elements allows you to refine or coarsen meshes and correct
element-to-element connectivity.
Splitting shell elements using the edit element panel
Splitting shell elements using the split panel
Combining shell elements using the edit element panel

See the following panels in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information:
edges
check elements
split-hexa elements subpanel
solid elements subpanel
Splitting Shell Elements using the Edit Element Panel

In this section, use the edit element panel to split shell elements.
The split sub-panel allows you to split an arbitrary number of shell elements by drawing a split line
over them. The splitting algorithm used depends on how the split line crosses the element.
1. Retrieve the file el_edit_split.hm file, located in the
2. Click return to exit the files panel.
Altair Engineering

197
To split shell elements using the edit element panel:

1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.
2. Select the split subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select elems.
4. Click split.
5. Use the mouse to build a line in the graphics area that intersects the elements A - E.
To draw the line:
-
Position the cursor on element A, pressing the left mouse button.
Draw the line from element A to element B and release the left mouse button.
Repeat these steps to draw a line from elements B to C, C to D, and D to E.

This specifies the elements you want to split.

Altair Engineering
6. Click split elements.
7. You can use the split panel to split elements in the following ways:
-
Across opposite edges, creating 2 quads
Along adjacent edges, creating 3 quads
From an edge to a vertex , creating one tria and one quad
From one vertex to its diagonally opposite vertex, creating 2 trias.
Note
Tria elements can be split in a similar manner.

In this tutorial, an element is split when the split line crosses two of its edges. This
feature is useful if you have several layers of duplicated shell elements that need
to be split.
Altair Engineering

199
If you select elements before drawing the split line, only the selected elements are
split. If you do not select elements before drawing the split line, the splitting
algorithm operates on all elements displayed.
If you split elements on a surface that has been automeshed, new nodes created
by the split are automatically projected to the surface.
Maintain proper connectivity (without internal free edges) after splitting the
elements.
Splitting Shell Elements using the Split Panel

In this section, use the split panel to split shell elements. The split panel allows you to split elements
simultaneously using one of four algorithms.
1. Retrieve the file split.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
To split shell elements using the split panel:

1. Select the split panel on the 2-D page.
2. Select the plate elements subpanel.
3. Pick elements A - E.

Altair Engineering
4. Click the switch and select divide quads.

5. Click split.
The selected quads are split into trias.
Note
The methods available for splitting plate elements include:

split all sides - splits an element at the midpoint of its sides
divide quads - divides all the quad element s into trias and allows you to fix quads with
severe warpage
midpoint - to trias - partitions an element by creating a node at its centroid and forms trias
using the elements vertices
midpoint - to quads partitions an element by creating a node at its centroid and forms
quads using the midpoints of each of its sides
Altair Engineering

201
When you split elements whose nodes are associated to a surface, the new nodes created
are also on the surface. To associate a node to a surface, use the node edit panel.
Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combining elements.
Combining Shell Elements using the Edit Element Panel

In this section, combine shell elements using the edit element panel.
The combine subpanel on the edit element panel allows you to combine an arbitrary number of shell
elements simultaneously or a set number of shell elements automatically. Both methods are
controlled by the tolerance = and angle = functions. When elements are being combined,
HyperMesh requires the nodes attached to the elements to be planar within a user-specified
tolerance. The tolerance may be changed with the menu item tolerance =.
When elements are being combined, HyperMesh performs node condensation on mid-side nodes.
Nodes are considered to be mid-side nodes if the angle between any three nodes in the set of nodes
being condensed is greater than a user-specified angle. The angle may be changed with the menu
item angle =.
1. Retrieve the file el_edit_comb.hm file, located in the
To combine an arbitrary number of elements:

1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.
2. Select the combine subpanel.
3. Click tolerance = and enter 0.010.
4. Click auto comb = and enter 4.
5. Pick elements A, B, C, and D.

Altair Engineering
6. HyperMesh displays the following error message: There is a node out-of-plane by 0.0888896.
8. Click combine.
The selected elements become one element.
To automatically combine a set number of elements:

The auto comb = function allows you to combine elements automatically.
1. Click auto comb = and enter 2.
2. Pick elements E and F.
HyperMesh combines the elements automatically.
Note
Setting tolerance = too high may create warped elements, and/or the deviation from the
geometry may increase.
Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combining elements.
Altair Engineering

203

Altair Engineering
Creating a Tria Mesh for Tetrameshing - HM-3190

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the geom cleanup, automesh, and check elems panels is
also useful, although not required.
Whether they are required for a specific type of application, or simply utilized because it is not
possible to easily generate hexahedral elements, tetrahedral elements are often used to model solid
parts. HyperMesh provides an automatic (standard) tetramesher that fills a volume enclosed by shell
elements with tetrahedral elements. In this process, the quality of the resulting tetrahedral mesh is
directly dependent on the quality of the surface mesh with which it starts. While HyperMesh also
provides a tetramesher capable of filling a volume defined by surfaces alone, this volume tetramesher
is not discussed in this tutorial.
In this tutorial, you will learn about the pre-requisites of the standard tetramesher, as well as work
through the process of creating a shell mesh that meets the requirements for generating a quality
tetramesh.
In this tutorial, load a file containing the model geometry. Using the geometry cleanup tools, suppress
some of the shared surface edges to eliminate slender surfaces, problematic shapes, and small
surface edges. Use the interactive mode of the automesher to generate a surface mesh of tria
elements, then use the element checks to identify any problem areas. Problem areas can be
corrected using element-editing tools. Finally, once a quality, continuous surface mesh is achieved,
generate the tetrahedral elements using the standard tetramesher.
For detailed information on the panels used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section of the
on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help.
The model geometry for this tutorial is as follows:
Model geometry
Altair Engineering

205
To understand the tetramesher pre-requisites and the tetramesh process:

The standard tetramesher produces tetrahedral elements from a 2-D shell mesh. This shell mesh
may contain both triangular and quadrilateral elements. While the tria elements are used to generate
the faces of tetrahedral elements, the quad elements are first divided into two tria faces before being
used for the underlying tetra elements. Both first order and second order 2-D meshes can be used to
produce either first or second order tetra elements.
To grow a tetramesh, the source 2-D mesh needs to enclose a volume, and only one single volume
can be tetrameshed at a time. This means that the 2-D mesh supplied needs to be continuous (there
cannot be any free edges), and the elements supplied form only one volume (there cannot be any Tconnections). When multiple volumes need to be tetrameshed, each volume needs to be submitted
separately.
When creating tetra elements from shell elements, the quality of the resulting tetra elements is
directly dependent on the quality of the shell elements. It is important to ensure that for the shell
mesh:
There are no duplicates.
No elements fold on one another.
Elements do not overlap.
The minimum tria angle is not too low.
The difference in size between adjacent elements and elements across a wall is minimal.
Given these considerations, most of the time spent tetrameshing a part using the standard
tetramesher is spent on geometry cleanup and creating a quality 2-D mesh. The general tetramesh
process can be summarized in the following steps:
Import the geometry and prepare for meshing (geometry cleanup).
Generate the surface mesh of plate elements.
Check the quality and continuity of the shell mesh.
Perform any editing on the shell mesh for quality improvement (as needed).
Generate the tetra elements in the tetramesh panel.
Delete the shell elements, and check the quality of the tetra mesh.
This is the process and the pre-requisites we will follow in this tutorial.
To load the geometry and determine the element size:
In this section, retrieve the geometry for the part to tetramesh. Then determine the element size to
use for the shell mesh based on the geometry. While at least two layers of elements are required
across the thinnest walls, too small of an element size may generate too many unneeded elements.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the file <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
standard_tetra.hm.
2. From the Disp page of the macro menu, set Vis opts: 3 to shade the surfaces in the model.
The model is a symmetric part of a solid bracket for which a hexa mesh would be very difficult to
create.

Altair Engineering
3. Use the view panel from the permanent menu to restore View1.
This area of the model presents some of the narrowest portions of the solid part. When
tetrameshing this location, we need to ensure that we create at least two layers of solid elements.
4. Use the length panel to measure the length of the various edges defining these areas.
From the Geom page, select the length panel.
With the lines selector active, pick one of the edges from the graphics area (see figure
below).
Click length.
The length displays in the length = field.
Click reset under lines, and repeat the above steps for any other edge to measure.
Edges to measure
Most of these edges are between 5 and 10 units long. These would probably require an element
size of around 5 units. While this would allow us to achieve the goal of two layers of elements in
these areas, it would produce too refined a mesh in the rest of the model, and produce more
elements than necessary. An increased number of trias would produce more tetras, and increase
the number of degrees of freedom of the model, requiring more computation time.
For this model, we will use an element size of 10 units. With this size, we will simply make sure to
manually increase the density of elements where needed, while still avoiding too great of a size
difference between neighboring elements.
5. From the global panel on the permanent menu, set element size = to 10.0.
In this section, we loaded the geometry to tetramesh and chose an element size for the tria and tetra
elements to create based on the dimensions present in the geometry.
To clean up the geometry:
To ensure that the shell mesh we create on the surfaces encloses a volume, we can first make sure
that the surface themselves enclose a volume. This is done by cleaning up the geometry, and making
sure that there are no free (red) edges left in the model. Additionally, we may want to suppress
Altair Engineering

207
shared (green) edges to avoid creating elements of poor quality based on the element size we picked
in the previous section.
In this section, start by equivalencing any free (red) edges in the model into shared (green) edges to
ensure that the surfaces are attached to one another. Then suppress any shared edges that are not
needed or would produce poor quality elements. Use the geom cleanup and automesh panels to
identify and correct the areas requiring cleanup.
1. Use the geom cleanup panel to equivalence free edges into shared edges.
Select the edges sub-panel and select the equivalence function.
Verify the box for equiv free edges only is checked.
Set cleanup tol = to 0.01.
Click equivalence.
Notice how some free (red) edges turn green (shared) while others remain red. This is
because of the tolerance (maximum distance between neighboring free edges to be
equivalenced) we set.
Repeat the steps above with a tolerance of 0.1.

All the red edges turn green.
Note
For more information on the display of surface edges in HyperMesh and geometry
cleanup, click the help button and review the on-line help for the geom cleanup
panel as well as the HyperMesh Geometry Terminology topic.
The next step is to identify and suppress shared edges, which separate surfaces with a
continuous curvature. This is often subjective as the angle between the surfaces defines how
continuous the curvature is, and whether the edge should be suppressed or not. In general,
edges capturing an angle of up to 30 degrees between surfaces can be suppressed.
2. Use the toggle function to toggle shared edges (green) into suppressed edges (blue).
From the geom cleanup panel, select the edges sub-panel.
Select the toggle function.
Leave cleanup tol = unchanged.
With the line selector active, pick in the graphics region any shared (green) edge you want to
suppress (see figures below).

Altair Engineering
Edges to suppress
Note
While suppressing some edges creates larger and more logical areas, it is often just as
desirable to limit the size of some areas so as to conserve additional control on the
resulting mesh.
The next step is to suppress any shared edges that would produce elements of poor quality.
When meshing surfaces, HyperMesh forces nodes on all shared and free surface edges, and
also at all fixed point locations. When shared edges define areas with dimensions close to the
element size, this creates the potential for elements of poor quality.
3. Using the view panel, restore View2.
4. Use the toggle function to suppress additional shared edges (see image below).
Altair Engineering

209
Suppressed edges
While some of these situations can be corrected by looking at the geometry, you may not always
find all of these situations with this approach alone. For a larger model, it may not always be
practical to spend large amounts of time trying to identify these features on the geometry. One
alternative is to preview a mesh on surfaces and look for any edge element density that reads 1.
Such a density is an indication that the edge is less than the element size, which is often a cause
for quality issues.
5. From the Disp page of the macro menu, set Vis opts: 0 and Gfx: Per.
6. Use the automesh panel to preview a tria mesh on the surfaces.
Set the type of elements to trias.
Verify elem size = is set to 10.
Set the mode to interactive and click mesh.
Do not return out of the automesh secondary panel.
Observe the model and look for any edge density set to 1.
7. Use the view panel to restore View3.
Observe the node densities set to 1, and use the view manipulation tools to understand what
causes these densities.
Observe element densities set to 1 in this area as well.
9. In the automesh secondary menu, click abort to return out of the menu without accepting a
mesh.
Altair Engineering
10. Use the cleanup sub-panel of the automesh panel to toggle any shared edge identified from the
mesh preview.
From the automesh panel, select the cleanup sub-panel.
Click vis opts and set the toggle to shaded.
Click line next to toggle: to make it active.
Toggle shared edges from the views View3 and View4 (see figures below).
Suppressed edges
Notes In the figure above, you can see that one of the densities of 1 was the result of fixed
points distant by less than the element size. This is another common cause for distorted
elements. While one approach consists in removing unneeded fixed points, it is not
possible to do this here are both these fixed points are required by the edges they belong
to. To remove the fixed points, we would need to suppress the edges they belong to first
and this is not desirable here.
While cleaning up the geometry helps avoid some of the poor quality elements, it is not
desirable to spend extensive time trying to fix the geometry. One alternative is to simply
fix bad elements once they have been generated. While for some situations it is easier to
clean-up the geometry, for others, it is better to fix elements after the fact.
Altair Engineering

211
In this section, we performed some cleanup operations on the geometry to simplify it and also avoid
creating some poor quality elements. We used various approaches to identify edges to suppress and
also various tools to carry out the operations.
To generate the tria mesh:
In this section, generate the tria mesh on the surfaces using the automesh panel. Use various tools
from the automesh secondary panel to create a tria mesh of a quality that meets the following
requirements:
At least two tria elements are created across the smallest surfaces.
Mesh patterns capture the curvature of the surfaces.
1. Fit the model to the screen using the f key on your keyboard.
2. Use the automesh panel to generate the tria mesh according to the requirements.
Set vis opts to wireframe.
Verify the box for reset meshing parameters to: is checked, elem size = is set to 10 and
the type of element is trias.
Set the middle lower toggle to elements to current comp to send the elements to the trias
component.
Click mesh to enter the automesh secondary panel, and click mesh to preview the mesh.
Note
If you have difficulties performing any of the steps described, click help to review the
on-line help for this panel.
Use the view panel to restore View1.

Observe how only one layer of elements is generated across the smallest three features.
Use the density sub-panel to adjust edge to 2 elements for these four features.
Click mesh to preview the changes (see figure below)

Altair Engineering
Densities updated to two layers of elements

Observe how the mesh patterns on these surfaces is not very regular. To resolve this, R-trias
can be generated on these surfaces instead.
Select the type sub-panel.

As you enter this sub-panel, edge densities are turned off and icons are placed at the center
of each surface to signify the type of element with which the surface is meshed.
Set element type: to R-trias using the switch.
With set surf active, click the center icon for the three sliver surfaces until it changes to a
right angle tria.
Click mesh to preview the changes to the mesh on these three surfaces.
Altair Engineering

213
Mesh using R-trias

The first requirement for creating at least two layers of trias on the smallest features of the
solid has been met. We can now make sure that quality mesh patterns are obtained in all
areas capturing the curvature.
Use the view panel and restore View5.
Mesh pattern does not capture curvature

Observe the mesh pattern in the through hole and how the mesh does not seem regular. This
can be resolved by first making sure that densities match across the through hole, and then
by setting the type of element on this surface to R-trias.

Altair Engineering
Note
Edge densities do not match because the lengths of the two edges are different.
Hint
From the automesh panel, create mesh sub-panel, select the link edge densities
option to ensure that opposite edges of surfaces have the same densities when they
are comparable in length.
Using this option would have saved us from having to manually change the densities
in this case.
Use the density sub-panel to set both element densities to 10.
Click mesh to preview the new mesh.
Use the type sub-panel to set the type of elements on this surface to R-trias.
Click mesh to preview the new mesh.
Regular mesh pattern conforming to surface curvature
Repeat this same approach for the remaining through holes.
When you are satisfied with the mesh, click return to accept it.
In this section, we used the automesh panel and several of its options to obtain the mesh that would
meet both of our requirements.
To evaluate and correct element quality:
In the previous sections, we cleaned up the geometry as much as possible to avoid creating poor
quality elements. Now that the tria mesh has been created, we need to perform a battery of quality
checks to make sure it suitable to generate tetra elements.
In this section, use the check elems panel to check for duplicates and review the quality of the 2-D
mesh against the following quality criteria:
Min length: 3
Aspect: 5
Trias - Min angle: 20
These criteria are typically most important when it comes to generating tetra elements, as poor tria
elements for these checks will typically yield poor tetra elements.
1. Use the check elems panel to check for duplicates.
Altair Engineering

215
From the Tool page, select the check elems panel.
Select the 2-d sub-panel.
Click duplicates.
The header bar should read 0 duplicate elements were found.
Note
Should you find duplicates in your mesh, use the save failed option to save these
elements to a user mark. Then, select elements and use the retrieve extended entity
selection option to select these elements in the delete panel and delete them.
2. Use the check elems panel to evaluate the mesh against the quality criteria listed earlier.
In the check elems panel, 2-d sub-panel, set the values for aspect, length and trias: min
angle.
Click aspect.
The header bar reports how many elements fail this check, what percentage of the elements
it is, and what is the maximum aspect ratio found. The elements failing the check are
highlighted in the graphics area.
Click length.
The header bar reports again how the mesh fares against this check.
Click min angle under trias.

Visually identifying the elements that fail specific checks is not necessarily easy from the
elements simply being highlighted. One technique is to save these elements that fail on a
user mark, then limit the display of elements in the model to these failing elements using the
mask panel.
3. Check the elements against the length check and place them in a user mark.
Click length in the check elems panel.
Click save failed.
4. Use the mask panel to turn off all other elements.
From the Tool page, select the mask panel
Select the mask sub-panel.
Click elems and select retrieve.

This loads the elements that were placed on the user mark.
Click elems and select reverse.
Click mask.
5. Use the Disp page of the macro menu and select Geom: Off to turn off the geometry.
6. Fill the display to the screen using f on your keyboard.
You can now see the elements that fail the length check.
7. Use the Find Attached macro from the QA page of the macro menu to turn back on one layer of

Altair Engineering
elements surrounding the elements displayed.

Bringing back layers of elements helps determine in which area the failing elements are located
as well as devise plans for resolving the problems.
8. Return to the check elems panel and click length again to highlight the failing elements.
Elements may fail in various areas of the model. Here is one example in the figure below:
In most cases, to resolve this issue, you can delete these elements and close the gaps by
equivalencing the nodes across the gap with the replace panel.
9. Use F2 to go to the delete panel and delete the elements failing the length check (see figure
above).
10. Use F3 to go to the replace panel and equivalence nodes.
Verify that the box for equivalence is checked.
With the node selector next to replace: active, select the node to move.
With the node selector next to with: active, select the node to replace it with.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all elements failing the length check have been resolved.
12. Use the mask panel (F5) to unmask all.
13. Use the check elems panel (F10) to verify that no more elements fail the length check.
14. Use the check elems panel to check for elements failing the aspect check.
In many cases, elements that fail the length check will also fail the aspect check and vice versa. If
you have elements failing the aspect ratio, use the same technique to delete them and close
open gaps.
15. Use the check elems panel to check for elements failing the min angle check.
At this point, there should be very few elements failing this check with a minimum angle found
close to 20 degrees. We will accept these elements as they are.
Hints
To check the actual values for an element for the various quality checks, simply click
on the element in the check elems panel. A dialog is displayed and disappears the
next time you do a left mouse click. If the element is close to the requirements, it is
often better to accept it as it is.
Altair Engineering

217
To resolve issues with elements failing the min angle check, use the same technique
as described for the length check, or simply delete the elements and re-create some
by hand using the edit element panel from the 2D page.
Notes
It may not always be possible to apply either technique and sometimes you need to
leave some elements as they are. It is all a function of what the minimum angle is.
In general, when all other quality requirements are met, the tetramesher succeeds in
generating tetra elements when the min angle is above 20 degrees. The rate of
success is good with a min angle between 10 and 20 degrees. With a min angle of
less than 10 degrees, it will sometimes fail. With a min angle less than 5 degrees,
there is a good chance it will fail.
In this section we checked the quality of our tria mesh and used some element editing tools to ensure
that the elements would satisfy some quality criteria.
To check for free edges and T-connections:
The next step in the process is to make sure that the elements enclose a volume (no discontinuities in
the mesh representing a volume), and that the elements, in our example, form only one volume.
In this section, use the edges panel to check for free edges in the model as well as T-connections.
While free edges are edges that are not shared between elements and therefore are an indication
that the mesh is discontinuous, T-connections are edges that are shared by more than two elements.
When T-connections exist, it means that multiple volumes may be present.
1. Use the edges panel to check for free edges.
From the Tool page, select the edges panel.
With the entity selector set to comps, pick any tria elements from the graphics region.
The element highlights briefly to signify the component has been selected.
Leave tolerance = unchanged as it has no bearing on finding free edges.
Set the toggle next to find: to free edges.
Click find edges.

HyperMesh posts a message in the header with the number of free edges found. A temporary
component collector called êdges is also created with plot elements created at the location
of free edges.
2. Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to turn off all elements except the ones in the
êdges component.
3. Use the Find Attached macro several times to display elements in this region and understand
the situation.
4. Use the Geom: On and Vis opts: 0 options from the Disp page of the macro menu to turn back
on the geometry in the default mode.

Altair Engineering
Checking for free edges

In this case it looks as if an inner surface existed in the model and was meshed by mistake
causing the mesh to be discontinuous throughout.
This is a situation where we also find T-connected elements. Check for T-connections to confirm
this.
5. Use the edges panel to check for T-connections.
From the Tool page, select the edges panel.
With the entity selector set to comps, pick any tria elements from the graphics region.
Set the toggle next to find: to T-connections.
Click find edges.
Checking for T-connections

Both issues of free edges and T-connections can be resolved here by simply deleting these
extra elements from the model.
Notes In general, free edges are a sign of discontinuity in the mesh, which is resolved by
performing an equivalence function on the edges panel. For more details on this
procedure, click help to bring up the edges panel on-line help.
Unless there is a clear need for T-connected elements (as is the case when you
check a mesh that defines multiple volumes), this situation is typically resolved by
deleting the unwanted elements.
Altair Engineering

219
6. Use the delete panel to delete the extra elements by face.
Use the F2 function key to access the delete panel.
With the type of entity set to elems, pick one of the elements to delete in the graphics
window.
7. Use the mask panel to unmask all elements.

8. From the edges panel, check for free edges and T-connections.
The header bar should now tell you that No edges were found. Selected elements may
enclose a volume and No T-connected edges were found.
The model is now ready for tetramesh generation.
To generate the tetra mesh and check its quality:
The tetramesh panel from the 3D page contains several sub-panels. Refer to the on-line help for
detailed information on these functions. In this section, use the tetra mesh sub-panel to generate a
mesh of tetra elements in the volume we defined using tria elements. Then check the quality of the
tetra elements against the tetra collapse tet collapse, tetra aspect ratio tetra AR, and volume skew
vol skew checks.
1. Use the global panel to set the current component collector to tetras.
This component collector was pre-defined to store the tetra elements.
2. Use the tetra mesh sub-panel of the tetramesh panel to generate the tetras.
From the 3D page select the tetramesh panel.
Select the tetra mesh sub-panel.
With the comps selector under floatable trias/quads: active, select one of the tria elements
from the graphics region.
Set the options to generate mesh normally and standard using the corresponding switches.
Click tetmesh.
Notes When defining the trias/quads as floatable, you allow HyperMesh to create underlying
tetras for which the outer faces do not line up with the trias, although using the same
nodes. With the fixed option, the faces of the underlying tetra are forced to match the
tria elements. This leaves less flexibility to create higher quality tetras but is useful
when trying to match tetra meshes between multiple volume.
Several options are available for the creation of the tetras. Refer to the on-line help
for a complete description.
3. Use the disp panel to turn off the display of the trias and the geometry.
4. Use the mask panel to temporarily mask, by window, some of the elements and review the
inside of the model.

Altair Engineering
Tetramesh
5. Delete the components that are no longer needed: trias and lvl2.
6. Use the check elems panel to check the quality of the tetramesh.
From the Tool page, select the check elems panel.
Check the tetras against a tet collapse of 0.3.

The header bar displays the corresponding statistics.
Check the tetras against a vol skew of 0.6.
Check the tetras against a tetra AR of 5.0.

Note
For a definition of these checks, see the on-line help for the check elems panel.
Overall, the mesh is of good quality as only a marginal number of elements failed our checks. These
elements could be isolated using the same approach that was used with the tria elements (save
failed, mask panel, Find Attached macro).
In order to improve the quality of tetra elements, you can either remesh clusters of elements using the
remesh sub-panel of the tetramesh panel, or go back to the tria mesh and improve its quality to
obtain better tetra elements.
own reference.
In this tutorial, the tetrameshing process was presented and followed for a bracket. We experimented
with ways to correct the geometry, create a quality pattern mesh, and correct poor quality elements.
We checked for free edges and T-connections to complete the pre-requisites and we created the tetra
mesh.
For more details on the tetramesh panel, refer to the tutorials Generating 3-D Tetrahedral Elements HM-3210 and Tetrameshing a Volume in a Single Step - HM-3230. If you want to learn more about
geometry cleanup, refer to Fixing Geometry for Meshing - HM-2020. If you more information
regarding checking and improving the quality of 2-D elements, refer to the tutorials Measuring and
Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a Quality Index - HM-3320 and Troubleshooting 2-D Mesh Quality
Issues Manually - HM-3330.
Altair Engineering

221

Altair Engineering
Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function HM-3200

Hyper Mesh - HM-1000, and the tutorial Creating 2-D Elements from Surfaces using the Automesh
Function - HM-3100. Working knowledge of the automeshing secondary panel and the creation of 2-D
elements are definite pre-requisites.
In this tutorial you will learn how to model a complex part using solid hexahedral elements, and how
to approach a volume by breaking it down into individual portions that can be meshed more easily.
While HyperMesh provides an automatic volume mesher using tetrahedral elements, there is no such
engine for the automatic creation of hexahedral (brick) elements. In this tutorial, the standard
technique of creating first 2-D elements in preparation for the generation of the 3-D hexahedral
elements will be applied. While several panels in HyperMesh allow you to create solid hexahedral
elements, this tutorial will put additional focus on the use of the solid map panel for the creation of
hexahedral elements. The other main meshing tools used will be the automesh, spin, and linear
solid panels.
For more information regarding these panels, please refer to the Panels section of the Hyper Mesh
on-line help, or click the Hyper Mesh help button while in the panel to activate its context sensitive
help.
This tutorial requires about one hour to complete and uses a file located in the
To load and review the model file:
In this section, retrieve the HyperMesh model file, and review the organization of the geometry into
component collectors.
1. Use the files panel to retrieve the file control_panel_hex.hm from the
2. From the Disp page of the macro menu, set Vis opts: 3 to shade the surfaces in the model and
display surface edges in topology mode.
Altair Engineering

223
Control arm
3. Go to the disp panel to review the component collectors pre-defined in the model.
The mode is organized into several component collectors that have been pre-defined based on the
geometry of the control arm. The initial set of surfaces has been broken down into logical areas to
facilitate the creation of solid elements. The geometry has also been cleaned up based on the various
areas. While this tutorial does not include the steps for dividing up the volume, meshing the various
parts will put into light the reasons for these choices.
In the subsequent sections, we will hex mesh the various parts defined by the component collectors
in this model except for the surfaces component. This last component has also been cleaned up and
broken down into some areas, but will serve as a practice area once the tutorial is completed.
To mesh the neck1 region:
The main difficulty of hex meshing lies in ensuring that groups of solid elements can be joined. While
it is often easy to create hex elements in most areas of a part, the challenge comes from creating the
transition between the various groups and this is what often requires planning.
In this model, cylinder1, cylinder2 and arm are components that, individually, can be meshed fairly
easily. The areas that separate them though, offer some unique challenges in the sense that at the
end, all elements have to match up. This, in turn, affects the way the simpler areas should be
meshed.
In this section, start by creating hex elements in the neck1 volume that represents the transition
between cylinder1 and center_area. Start by creating 2-D elements using the ruled panel, and then
create one layer of solid elements into this volume using the solid map panel.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry except the neck1 component.
Observe the geometry available to define this volume. This determines the approach to use. The
bottom area will be common to the solids for neck1 and center_area. This is where these two
portions need to match up and this where you create the 2-D elements.
2. Use the Disp page of the macro menu to set Vis opts: 0.

Altair Engineering
3. Use the global panel to set the current component to neck1.

4. Use the ruled panel to create an all-quad mesh in the area defined by surface edges and the predefined additional lines.
From the 2D page, go to the ruled panel.
Set the upper entity selector to line list and select one surface edge defining the longer side
of the area (see figure below).
Set the lower entity selector to line list and select the opposite surface edge (see figure
below).
Surfaces edges to select
Set the switch to mesh, dele surf.
Verify auto reverse is activated.
Click create.
Use the density sub-panel of the automeshing secondary panel to adjust edge to a density
of 5 for all edges.
Previewed mesh
Click return to accept this mesh and go back to the ruled panel.
Altair Engineering

225
With the upper selector set to line list, select the two surface edges and one line as shown in
the figure below.
Set the lower selector to node list and select the nodes shown in the figure below.
Line and node selection
Click create.
Use the density sub-panel to adjust the density on the lines to 7 elements.
Click return to accept the elements.
Repeat the steps above for the remaining open area and obtain the mesh described in the
figure below.
Note
It is very important to ensure that only quad elements are created. In the
subsequent steps we will add a dimension to the shell elements to obtain the
hexahedral elements. With this approach, any tria shell elements would produce
penta elements. If the densities mentioned above do not produce only quad
elements, modify them to obtain only quads.
Final shell mesh in shaded mode

Altair Engineering
5. Use the edges panel to ensure continuity of the shell mesh.
From the Tool page, go to the edges panel.
Set the entity selector to elems, click elems and select displayed.
Set tolerance = to 0.2.
Click preview equivalence to review the nodes to equivalence.
Click equivalence to ensure continuity of the mesh.
Note
This step was required because we meshed this area in multiple steps. You can look for
free edges to verify that the mesh is now continuous.
6. Use the solid map panel to generate one layer of hexa elements in the volume defined by the
neck1 geometry.
From the 3D page, go to the solid map panel.
Use the switch to set source geom: to lines.
In the graphics region, select the 8 lines that enclose the 2-D mesh.
Set destination geom: to lines.
In the graphics region, select the 8 lines that define where the neck ends.
Set along geom: to (none).
Set along parameters: to density= and type in 1.
Verify intensity= is set to 0.
Under elems to drag:, click elems and select displayed.
Solid map selections
Click mesh.
One layer of solid elements is created in the volume and is placed in a component collector
called solidmap.
Altair Engineering

227
Solid elements
Click equiv/faces.
This equivalences all the elements in the solidmap component and also directly create faces
elements on them in a ^faces component that can be used to generate solid elements in
neighboring volumes. It also automatically turns off the elements in the solidmap component.
In this section we started by creating a 2-D mesh at the boundary between two regions and then used
the solid map panel to fill the neck volume with solid elements. We also generated some face
elements in preparation for meshing the next region.
To mesh the cylinder1 region:
In this section, generate hexahedral elements for the cylinder region attached to the neck that was
meshed in the previous section. Start by creating the solid elements that will attach directly to the
neck using the linear solid panel. Since the linear solid panel requires two sets of elements to build
solids in between, use the project panel to obtain this configuration. Then complete the circular mesh
using the spin panel. Spin face elements around the axis of the cylinder to form solid elements.
Finally add the missing layer of hexa elements at the ends of the cylinder using the solid map panel.
Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry except the cylinder1 component.
1. Use the project panel to project duplicate elements of the faces elements at the boundary
between the neck and cylinder onto the interior cylinder surface.
From the Tool page, go to the project panel.
Select the to surface sub-panel.
Set the left most entity selector to elems.
In the graphics area, select one element at the center of the faces elements at the boundary
neck/cylinder.

Altair Engineering
Elements by face
Verify that only the elements at the boundary between the two regions have been selected
(see figure above).
Click elems and select duplicate.
Select original comp from the pop-up dialog.
With the surf selector active, select the surface defining the interior of the cylinder.
Set along vector: to surface normal.
Click project.
Projected duplicate elements.

2. Use the global panel to set the current component to solidmap.
3. Use the linear solid panel to create layers of solid elements between the shell elements.
From the 3D page, go to the linear solid panel.
With the upper elems selector active, pick one of the elements from the boundary
neck/cylinder as done earlier.

This highlights the remaining elements defining the set of elements the linear solid function
Altair Engineering

229
will start from to build the layers of solid elements.
Click the lower elems selector to make it active.
Select one of the elements on the interior cylinder.
Click elems and select by attached.

This highlights all the elements to which the function will map the first set.
Click the upper N1 selector to make it active and select up to three nodes to define uniquely
one shell element from the from: set.
Hint
Depending on which element you try to define uniquely, the number of nodes you
will need may be different. For this example, if you select a corner element, the
node located at the "free" corner is not shared with any other element from the
selection, and it alone defines the element. Therefore, in such a case, one
alignment node is sufficient.
Click the lower N1 selector to make it active and select the corresponding nodes from the
corresponding element as alignment nodes.
Elements and alignment nodes selection
Verify the toggle is set to distribute layers.
Set density = to 2.
Verify that bias intensity = is set to 0.
Click solids.
This generates solid elements and places them in the solidmap component. Since you have
turned this component off in the previous section, the elements do not appear at this time.
4. Use the solid map panel to turn on the solid elements, equivalence them and obtain faces
elements.
From the 3D page, go to the solid map panel.
Click 3d mesh: on to turn back on the display of the elements in the solidmap component.
Click equiv/faces.
This equivalences the solid elements from the two groups that were created up to this point, and

Altair Engineering
generate faces elements on them that can be used for subsequent operations.
5. Observe closely the elements that were created up to this point for the cylinder region.
The layers at the ends of the cylinder form narrower bands. This is a result from the 2-D mesh we
started from and that was created in an area with round corners. This will affect the result of the
next operation. We choose here not to perform any operation on these elements.
6. Use the spin panel to add layers of elements in the cylinder.
From the 3D page, go to the spin panel.
Go to the spin elems sub-panel.
With the elems selector active, pick one of the face elements to spin around the axis of the
cylinder.
Set the direction to y-axis.

A base node is needed to position in space the axis the elements will spin around. Use the
distance panel to create a node at the center of the cylinder.
Use the F4 function key to jump to the distance panel.
Select the three nodes sub-panel.
Hold the left mouse button down on top of one of the circular lines defining the cylinder.
Release the left mouse button when the line highlights.
Click any three locations on the highlighted line for nodes N1, N2, and N3.
Click circle center.
Click return to go back to the spin panel.
With the base selector active, pick the node that was just created.
Set angle = to 269.0.

An approximate value of the angle of spin to use can be obtained using the distance panel,
three nodes sub-panel.
Set on spin = to 16.
Verify bias intensity = is set to 0.
Use the disp panel to turn back on the display of the elements in the solidmap component.
Spin the faces elements.

If the elements are spun in the wrong direction, reject the operation and spin them in the
opposite direction
Observe the elements obtained and how the situation described earlier affected the solid
mesh.
Altair Engineering

231
Hexas from spinning shell elements

7. Use the edges panel to restore continuity in the mesh.
Select the elements displayed.
Click preview equivalence and review the nodes that are highlighted.
Click equivalence.
Verify that the mesh is now continuous and no elements were collapsed. Reject the
equivalence if needed, and use the lower tolerance.
Hint
For larger gaps that were not closed, use the replace panel from the 2D page to
manually equivalence nodes across these gaps. Review the replace panel help for
complete details.
8. Use the solid map panel to add the missing layer of solid elements at both ends of the cylinder.
Go to the solid map panel.
Click 3d mesh: on if needed to display the solid elements.
Click equiv/faces to obtain the faces elements on the solid elements.
Set source geom: to nodes.
Set the selector to node path.
Select the nodes around the inside of the cylinder from one end (see figure below).
Increment the nodelist using the forward arrow under node path.
Select the nodes on the outside periphery of the cylinder for the same end as a second
nodelist (see image below).

Altair Engineering
Set destination geom: to surf and select the surface at the end of the cylinder.
Leave along geom: set to (none).
Select by face the face elements between the node lists as the elems to drag:.
Set density= to 1.
Click mesh.
Click equiv/faces.
Repeat all these steps for the other end of the cylinder.
Neck and cylinder

9. Repeat the steps described in this section and the previous one to mesh the neck2 and
cylinder2 components.
Altair Engineering

233
10. Use the disp panel to turn on the display of all the geometry and all the elements except the ones
in the ^faces component.
Meshed necks and cylinders

In this section, you started by creating the elements in the cylinder that would attach to the neck using
the linear solid panel. You then completed the mesh to fill the geometry of the cylinder by using the
spin and solid map panels taking advantage of the faces elements that were generated on the solid
elements. Finally, you repeated the process of the last two sections to mesh another neck and
cylinder volume.
To mesh the arm:
The arm component is broken down into two volumes to limit the influence of some of its features to
only one portion of the arm. In this section, use the solid map panel to mesh this arm, starting with
the smaller portion that presents the most curvature. Use the same approach to mesh the longer
portion aferwards.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry except the arm component.
2. Use the disp panel to turn off all the elements except the ^faces component.
Note
If you do not currently have faces elements created on the solid elements representing
neck2, create them using the equiv/faces function from the solid map panel. This only
works provided the solid elements are part of the solidmap panel.
3. Use the solid map panel to create solid elements in the portion of the arm attached to neck2.
Set source geom: to nodes and select the nodes delineating the end of the neck2 (see
figure below).
Set destination geom: to lines and select the lines that breaks the arm into two volumes
(see figure below).
Set along geom: to lines and select all the side lines that define the path from the source to
the destination.

Altair Engineering
Set density= to 7.
Set bias style: to exponential, and set intensity= to 2.

This helps ensure that the number of elements in the curved areas is sufficient.
Select the elements by face for elems to drag:.
Click mesh.
Click equiv/faces.
First portion of the arm

4. Repeat step 3 to mesh the second portion of the arm. Do not use biasing and create 30 layers of
solid elements.
Altair Engineering

235
Completed arm
In this section, you use the solid map panel twice to mesh the arm volume. The volume was broken
down into two regions, and biasing was used for the solid elements in one region to capture the
curvature properly.
To mesh the center area:
The last volume you mesh in this tutorial is the center area that connects the arm and the first neck
that was worked on. This area also connects to the remainder of the model that you can mesh for
additional practice purposes.
To mesh the center area, start by mapping out the solid elements that are involved in the fillets of the
part. Use the solid map panel to achieve this. The geometry of this volume has already been edited
to facilitate this process. Then, use the spline panel to generate a shell mesh in the central portion,
and use the solid map panel to fill the remainder of this volume.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry except the center_area component.
2. Use the solid map panel to create solid elements in the fillet areas.
Set source geom: to nodes and select the nodes delineating the elements to map (see
figure below).
Set destination geom: to lines and select the lines that define the end area (see figure
below).
Set along geom: to lines and select the four side lines that define the path from the source
to the destination.

Altair Engineering
Set density= to 10.
Verify intensity= 0.
Select the elements enclosed by the nodes defining the source for elems to drag:.
Click mesh.
Click equiv/faces.
Repeat these steps for the second filet area between the meshed neck1 and the unmeshed
remainder of the model.
Meshed fillet regions

3. Use the solid map panel to create solid elements in the fillet area between neck1 and arm.
Altair Engineering

237
Set source geom: to nodes and select the nodes delineating the elements to map from the
arm component (see figure below).
Set destination geom: to nodes and select the nodes that surround the corresponding
elements from the neck1 component.
Set along geom: to lines and select the four side lines that define the path from the source
to the destination.
Set density= to 7.
Select the elements enclosed by the nodes defining the source area for elems to drag:.
Click mesh.
The new elements do not line up completely with the existing elements.
Click equiv/faces to equivalence some of the solid elements in the solidmap component.
HyperMesh may post a message telling how many nodes can be equivalenced for a given
tolerance. Click Yes to accept and continue to click equiv/faces to see if additional elements get
equivalenced as each time you try the tolerance is increased, up to 10% of the element size.
When no more nodes are equivalenced, it means that the distance between nodes that should be
shared, if any remain, is larger than the maximum tolerance.
4. Use the edges panel to equivalence any remaining elements.
Select the elements displayed.
Click preview equivalence to review the nodes detected.
If nodes are missing from the selection, increase the tolerance until they are found.

Altair Engineering
Click equivalence.
This equivalences the nodes. Although the elements in the solidmap component were not
displayed (an selected), working with the faces elements that share nodes with them ensured
that solid elements would be fixed as well.
5. Use the global panel to set the current component to center_area.

6. Use the disp panel to turn on the display of the elements in the center_area component.
7. Use the spline panel to create 2-D elements in the open area.
From the 2D page, go to the spline panel.
Set the entity selector to nodes and select the nodes on one side of the control arm
surrounding the open area (see figure below).
Hint
Use the selection by path to speed up this process.
Set the switch to mesh, dele surf.
Click create.
Use the density sub-panel to adjust the element densities such that they match the neighbor
faces elements (see image below).
As needed, use the type sub-panel to ensure that quad elements are being used to mesh the
area.
Previewed mesh
Click return to accept the quad only mesh.
8. Use the solid map panel to complete the solid mesh in the center_area component.
Altair Engineering

239
Set source geom: to surf and select the surface the elements previously created lay onto.
Set destination geom: to surf and select the corresponding surface on the other side of the
control arm.
Set along geom: to (none).
Set density= to 5.
Select by collector the elements created in the previous step for elems to drag:.
Click mesh.
Click equiv/faces several times as needed to equivalence the solid elements in the
solidmap component.
Completed mesh
9. Use the edges panel to equivalence any nodes that were not equivalenced in the solid map
panel, working with the elements displayed and a tolerance of 0.1.
10. Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry, and turn off all the elements except the ones in
the solidmap component.
11. Optionally complete the solid mesh for this control arm using similar techniques as the ones
presented in this tutorial.
own reference.
In this tutorial, you used the solid map panel in various situations to quickly and effectively create a
hexahedral mesh for a control arm. You especially took advantage of built in functions allowing you to
quickly equivalence nodes and obtain faces elements from the solid elements, limiting the needs
produce shell elements in other panels.
For additional techniques and panels pertaining to the creation of hexahedral elements, refer to the
tutorial Meshing a Part with Hexahedral Elements - HM-3220.

Altair Engineering
Generating 3-D Tetrahedral Elements - HM-3210

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the tetra mesh, tetra remesh and CFD mesh subpanels
available in the tetramesh panel.
Tetramesh a volume
Tetra remesh a selected group of elements
Tetramesh using the CFD algorithm

Tetramesh a Volume
The tetramesh panel allows you to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedral
elements. A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a mesh of tria elements where
each tria has material on one side and open space on the other.
You can specify trias as fixed and floatable. Under most circumstances, select only those trias that
must match up to another pre-existing mesh as fixed. You can also specify various growth options in
order to control the tradeoff between the number of tetras generated and the average and minimum
element qualities. Higher, more aggressive growth rates produce fewer elements, but they may be of
poor quality.
1. Retrieve the file tetmesh.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
Altair Engineering

241
tetmesh.hm model file.

To tetra mesh the enclosed volume:
1. Select the tetramesh panel on the 3-D page.
2. Select the tetra mesh subpanel.
3. Click the switch below floatable trias: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Pick an element that belongs to the component.
or
Click the upper comps and select trias, then click select.
5. Click the upper right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.
6. Click the lower right switch and select the growth option standard from the pop-up menu.
7. Click tetmesh.
Note:
The header bar displays status messages as the elements are created. Clicking and
holding the right mouse button while in the graphics display area, allows you to
cancel the tetramesh operation.
Note:
If the tetramesher fails, the last plate elements to be worked on are highlighted and
placed into a buffer for later retrieval.

Altair Engineering
Tetra Remesh Panel

The tetra remesh subpanel allows you to regenerate the mesh for a single volume of tetras. The
tetras you select form a single connected region. This command allows you to locally remesh an
area where poor quality tetras may exist. Look for a concentration of bad elements and use a
combination of the mask and find panels to locate a collection of neighboring tetras to remesh.
1. Retrieve the file tetremesh.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
To identify tetra elements with poor quality:
1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the 3-D subpanel.
3. After tetra collapse, enter the value 0.10.
4. Click tetra collapse.
5. Once elements are highlighted, click save failed.
Note
The header bar relays the message that the minimum tetra collapse is 0.00, a tetra
element that does not occupy a volume. The save failed operation places the bad elements
that show a tetra collapse value less than what is specified in a buffer, allowing the
elements to be retrieved later.
tetremesh.hm model file.
Altair Engineering

243
To isolate the save failed elements:

1. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the mask subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
4. Click elems and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.
The save failed elements become highlighted.
5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection window.
All the elements excluding the save failed become highlighted.
6. Click mask.
Only the save failed elements should remain.
To find elements attached to the displayed element:
1. Select the find panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the find attached subpanel.
3. Click the upper switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the lower switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the displayed element.
6. Click find.
To tetra remesh the selected group of elements:
2. Select the tetra remesh subpanel.
3. Click elems and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Draw a window around one of the three groups of elements, and click the select entities button.
The elements to be remeshed become highlighted.
5. Click remesh.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for the two remaining element groups.
To unmask previously masked elements:

Altair Engineering
3. Click unmask all.

To review the newly created elements:
2. Select the 3-D subpanel.
3. Click tetra collapse.
The minimum tetra collapse is now 0.20.
4. Continue to tetra remesh until element quality is satisfactory.
5. Click return to access the main menu
CFD Mesh
The accuracy with which a solution is resolved is directly related to the number of elements in regions
of high solution gradient. In most CFD applications, this is near the surface of the flow and is called
boundary layer behavior. Consequently, the mesh is generated so that it clusters many elements
near the surface. The CFD mesh subpanel utilizes floatable trias which allow you to pack many
layers of high aspect ratio tetras against a surface in order to resolve boundary layer behavior in the
solution.
Using the normal algorithm, if you pack many elements against the surface, many of the elements will
have some very obtuse face angles, which often cause problems for solvers. For the prism layer
algorithm, the tetra elements are generated in prism-shaped groups of three or more in such a way to
prevent large angles from appearing. Arbitrarily, many of these high aspect ratio tetras can be
layered against the surface as needed in order to resolve the boundary layer behavior. They are
generated with very thin initial layers, growing in thickness with an accelerating growth rate until the
layer thickness is the same as the width of the prism, at which point the tetramesher switches to its
normal algorithm to efficiently fill the remaining volume.
1. Retrieve the file sphere.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
To switch to performance graphics and display a model in hidden line mode:
1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.
2. Select the graphics subpanel.
3. Click the toggle after engine: and select performance.
5. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.
6. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon,
Altair Engineering
, the third icon from the left below the all button.

245
7. Click all.
8. Click mesh color and select Black from the pop-up menu.
To create a new component for the tetra elements:
3. Click name = and enter tetras.
4. Click color and select a color for the new collector from the pop-up window.
5. Click create.
6. Select return to access the main menu.
Note
For this exercise we have created a component collector that does not reference a solver
template. For more information on how to associate a solver to a collector, see the
HyperMesh on-line Help.
To tetramesh using the CFD meshing subpanel:

2. Select the CFD mesh subpanel.
3. Click the switch below fixed prism trias/quads and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Pick an element that belongs to the sphere.
or
Click the upper comps, select trias from the list of components, and click select.
5. Click the toggle and select boundary layer prisms.
6. Click the lower right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.
7. Click init thickness = and enter the value 0.5.
8. Scroll through the other options using the TAB key and assign the following values:
init growth rate = 1.100
acceleration = 1.100
growth rate = 1.250
initial layers = 0.750
9. Click tetmesh.
10. Select return to access the main menu.

Altair Engineering
Volume enclosed tria mesh.

To use the mask panel to view the interior of the tetramesh model:
2. Select top.
7. Click interior.
8. Using the left mouse button to define the corners of your window, select elements from the right
half of the model.
9. Click select entities.
10. Click mask.
12. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon,
, the third icon from the left below the all button.
13. Click all.

15. Select rear.
Altair Engineering

247
Section cut of tetra mesh volume using CFD mesh.

Altair Engineering
Meshing a Part with Hexahedral Elements - HM-3220

HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as Creating 2-D Elements from Surfaces using the Automesh
Function - HM-3100.
In this tutorial you will learn how to model a bracket using solid hexahedral elements, and how to
approach a volume by breaking it down into individual portions that can meshed more easily.
Although HyperMesh provides an automatic volume mesher with tetrahedral elements, some
applications and analyses call for hexahedral (brick) elements, which are typically considered more
accurate finite elements than tetrahedral elements. The standard technique of creating first 2-D
elements in preparation for the generation of the 3-D hexahedral elements will be applied.
For this example, the following 3-D element creation panels will be used: elem offset, spin, and
linear solid. For more information regarding these panels, please refer to the Panels section of the
HyperMesh on-line help, or click the HyperMesh help button while in the panel to activate its context
sensitive help.
This tutorial will be particularly useful if you are trying to become familiar with some of the panels and
techniques used for creating solid hexahedral elements, as well as if you want to identify general
approaches to the modeling a part using this type of element.
The model geometry is a bracket designed to support a rail. It is organized into four sections, each of
which lends itself to a different hexahedral meshing technique. Each of these will be explored as the
mesh is generated. The finished part is presented here.
Hexahedral model of the bracket
Altair Engineering

249
To import and organize the model:

1. From the files panel, select the import sub-panel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/bracket_hex.iges.
The model is organized into four IGES layers consisting of:
the base
the first section of the arm, with a constant cross section and curvature
the second section of the arm, with a tapered cross section
the collar
Upon import, the geometry is automatically organized into four component collectors.
2. From the Geom page, select the color panel.

3. Click auto color to automatically assign a color to each of the four gray components
To mesh the base:
Simplify the geometry of the base by removing the through holes using the defeature panel.
Removing these features will allow for more regular 2D and, in turn, 3D elements.
To generate the hexahedral elements, create first shell elements using the automesh panel, and
then "offset" these elements into layers of solid elements using the elem offset panel. The
rectangular shape of the base makes this the most logical approach and simplifies the task.
4. From the permanent menu use the disp panel to turn off the geometry of every component
except the base, lvl1.
Observe how the upper side of the base is divided into two surfaces, one of which is L-shaped
and represents the cross-section of the first portion of the arm to be modeled next. This helps
determine on which surfaces the 2D elements should be created, as this is where the solid
elements from the base and the first portion of the arm will have to match up.
5. From the permanent menu use the global panel to set the current component to lvl1.
We chose to send the elements we create into the same components as their corresponding
geometry data. To remove the through holes from the geometry of the base, start by deleting the
surfaces defining them.
6. Use the delete panel to remove the surfaces representing the inside bore of the four holes.
From the Tool page, select the delete panel.
Select all eight surfaces defining the sides of the holes and click delete entity.

Altair Engineering
Surfaces to delete
7. Once the inside bore surfaces are deleted, the pinholes sub-panel from the defeature panel can
be used to eliminate the holes in the top and bottom surfaces.
From the Geom page, select the defeature pane.
Select the pinholes sub-panel.
Enter 20 for the diameter < field.
Cick find.
Click delete.
This removes the holes in the surfaces and places a fixed point at what was previously their
centers, should these locations be needed for subsequent modeling purposes.
Altair Engineering

251
Base with holes removed

8. Use the automesh panel to mesh the top surface, along with the L-shaped surface representing
the cross section of the arm. Use an element size of 10. Adjust the mesh densities as necessary
to achieve a mesh of all quad elements, as shown in the figure below.
Set the entity selector to surfs, and select the two surfaces defining the top area of the base.
Check the box for reset meshing parameters to:, enter 10 for elem size =, and use the left
most switch to set the element type to quads.
Check that the lower left toggle is set to elements to current comp.
Set the mode to interactive using the upper most switch.
Click mesh to enter the automeshing secondary panel, and select the density sub-panel.
Set the element densities according to the image below.
Click mesh to preview the mesh, and click return to accept it.

Altair Engineering
Quad mesh on base surface

Note
It is very important to ensure that only quad elements are created. In the
subsequent steps we will add a dimension to the shell elements to obtain the
hexahedral elements. With this approach, any tria shell elements would produce
penta elements. If the densities mentioned above do not produce only quad
elements, modify them to obtain only quads.
9. Use the elem offset panel to offset the shell elements 25 units down, creating four layers of
hexahedral elements.
From the 3D page, select the elem offset panel.
Select the solid layers sub-panel.
Set number of layers = to 4, and set total thickness = to 25.
Click offset +.
For additional information on this panel, click help on the permanent menu.
Altair Engineering

253
Hexahedral mesh for the base

This completes the creation of hexahedral elements to model the base. In our approach, the 2D and
subsequent 3D elements were created in such a way that they would respect the boundaries of the
area that will be common to the base and the first portion of the arm.
By creating the quad elements into and around the L-shaped surface, we have ensured that elements
from both portions will line up easily at their boundary. All that will be required is that the same 2D
elements, which were placed in the L-shaped surface, are also used to generate the hexahedral
elements that will model the first portion of the arm.
To mesh the first segment of the arm:
The first segment of the arm has a constant cross-section and the curvature of a 1/4 circle arc.
Various hexahedral element creation panels could be used to model this portion of the bracket (i.e.
line drag, solid map). In this case, use the spin panel to take advantage of the circular nature of this
portion of the model.
1. Turn on the display of the geometry in the lvl2 component.
2. Mask all the hex8 elements, leaving only the original shell elements.
From the Tool page, select the mask panel.
Click elems and select by config.
Click config = and select hex8.
Click select entities.
Click mask.
3. Use the global panel to set lvl2 as the current component.

The shell elements created on the L-shaped surface for the first section of the arm can be spun

Altair Engineering
around the center of the arm radius to form hexahedral elements.

4. Find the center of the arm radius using the three nodes sub-panel of the distance panel.
Hold the left mouse button down and place the mouse cursor on top of one of the circular
lines defining the arm. The line is highlighted and the mouse cursor changes to a box and a
dot. Release the left mouse button.
With the line highlighted, click the line at three different locations. With each click, a
temporary node for N1, N2, and N3 is created.
Click circle center. This generates the center of the circle of which the line is an arc.
Three nodes to create center

5. From the spin panel, select the plate elements within the L-shaped cross section of the arm, and
spin them 90 about the X-axis (Y-Z plane). Generate 24 layers of hexahedral elements as you
spin the plate elements.
From the 3D page, select the spin panel.
Select the spin elems sub-panel.
Click elems and select by surface.

HyperMesh temporarily displays a surface selector.
Altair Engineering

255
Select the L-shaped surface and click select. The elements are highlighted and HyperMesh
takes you back to the spin panel.
Set the direction selector to the x-axis, and with the base selector active, select the circle
center that was created in the previous step.
Type in 90 for angle =, and 24 for on spin =.
Click spin-.
This spins the shell elements in the negative x direction (defined by the right hand rule), and
generates the hexahedral elements.
Spin panel results

This completes the creation of the elements for the first portion of the arm. In our approach, we
decided to take advantage of the characteristics of the geometry and used the spin panel.
Other panels like line drag or solid map could also be used to model this portion of the arm. Should
you want to experiment with these other panels on this portion of the model, simply save the model at
this stage, delete the elements that were just created and re-create them using a different panel.
To mesh the second arm segment:
The remaining arm segment presents some unique problems in that:
The cross section is tapered (not constant).
The end face is curved to match the collar.
For example, the linear solid panel can effectively mesh this segment. However, two corresponding
plate meshes are required, one on the end of the existing arm mesh, and one on the corresponding

Altair Engineering
curved surfaces of the collar. Furthermore, these two meshes must be similar in that they must
contain the same number of elements, and for each element of one set, an element of the same type
must exist in the other set.
The panel will then map each element to its counterpart, creating solid elements in between. Using
this approach, we can easily capture the features of the end of the arm with the 2D mesh, and then
simply create solid elements in between the shells.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all the geometry except the lvl3 component.
2. Use the global panel to set the current component collector to lvl3.
The plate elements for the end shared with the first arm segment can be obtained by creating
faces on the hexahedral elements in the lvl2 component.
3. Use the faces panel to obtain the free faces.
With the entity selector set to comps, select any one element from the first portion of the
arm. The element is temporarily highlighted, signifying that the component has been
selected.
Click find faces.
4. Use the disp panel to turn off the display of the elements in the lvl2 component and review the
elements that were created in the ^faces component. Set the graphics engine to performance
graphics to shade the elements as needed.
Note
A free face is a face of an element that is not shared with any other element. The
faces panel finds the free faces of solid elements The tolerance = field does not apply
to the free face creation process, and therefore was not needed in the previous steps.
For more information about this panel, click help.
5. The surfaces shared with the collar are in the lvl3 component. Select these surfaces from that
component and mesh them, adjusting the densities to obtain a mesh that closely resembles the
one on the end face of the first arm segment.
Pick the three surfaces to mesh and leave all other settings that were used to mesh the base
unchanged. Click mesh.
Use the density sub-panel of the automeshing secondary panel to set the densities of the
various edges to values that match the number of elements at the end of the first portion of
the arm (see figure below).
Warning
The two sets of elements must be "similar" meshes. For the mapping function
to work, both sets must have the same number and type of elements (i.e. one
quad can only be mapped to one quad).
Click mesh to preview the mesh and click return to accept it.
Altair Engineering

257
Mesh to correspond to the mesh on the end face

6. Use the linear solid panel to build the hexahedral elements between the two groups of shell
elements. Build 12 layers of solid elements.
From the 3D page, select the linear solid panel.
With the upper elems selector active, pick one face element representing the end of the first
portion of the arm. This element is now highlighted.
Click elems and select by face. This highlights the remaining elements defining the set of
elements the linear solid function will start from to build the layers of solid elements.
Note
Although more free face elements than needed were created earlier, using the
extended entity selection tools allows you to quickly and easily limit your selection
to the desired entities. In this case, we take advantage of the fact that all the
elements of interest do belong to the same side of the arm or face.
Click the lower elems selector to make it active.
Pick one shell element previously created and representing the end of the second portion of
the arm, click elems again, and select by attached. This highlights all the elements to which
the function will map the first set.
Select nodes as alignment: nodes to define which element in the from: group will be
mapped to which element in the to: group.
Click the upper N1 selector to make it active and select up to three nodes to define uniquely
one shell element from the from: set.
Hint
Depending on which element you try to define uniquely, the number of nodes you
will need may be different. For this example, if you select a corner element, the
node located at the "free" corner is not shared with any other element from the
selection, and it alone defines the element. Therefore, in this case, one alignment

Altair Engineering
node is sufficient.
Click the lower N1 selector to make it active and select the corresponding nodes from the
corresponding element as alignment nodes.
Note
If you have difficulties with this selection, click help and review the first How do I of
the panel help for an example.
Set the toggle to distribute layers, and enter 12 for density = field.
This is the number of layers of solid elements that will be created between the two sets of
shell elements. Do not add any biasing as the layers should all have the same thickness.
Click solids to generate the hexahedral elements.
Linear solid mesh

This concludes the creation of the second portion of the arm. In order to capture the slightly more
complex geometry, we built more 2D elements to gain additional control over how the 3D elements
would fill this volume.
To mesh the collar:
The geometry of the collar is again fairly simple. The difficulty lies this time in ensuring that the
elements filling this volume line up properly with the elements that were just created for the second
portion of the arm.
Altair Engineering

259
The main characteristic of the end of the arm is that the thickness of the various layers of elements is
not constant. Mesh the collar using the linear solid panel, but this time, specify the location of each
layer when building the solid layers.
Start by meshing the bottom side surfaces, then offsetting a copy of those plate elements to the top
so that two sets of elements are available to use in the linear solid panel.
1. Turn off the display of all geometry and elements except component lvl4.
2. Set the current component collector to lvl4.
3. Select and mesh the four surfaces comprising the bottom face of the collar.
Adjust the densities such that four elements are generated across the two smaller surfaces.
These must match the number of elements already created on the arm. Make sure the number of
elements on the inside and outside circular edges match. This will result in a regular, orthogonal
mesh.
Select the four surfaces defining the bottom face of the collar, and, leaving all other settings
unchanged, click mesh.
Using the density sub-panel, adjust the densities according to the image below.
Click mesh to preview the mesh, and click return to accept it.
Densities on the collar end surfaces

4. Select, duplicate and then translate the plate elements to the top surface to have the two sets of
Altair Engineering
elements needed for the linear solid panel.

The elements need to be translated in the X direction a distance equal to the total height of the
collar. Use the distance panel to measure the distance. Once it is identified, highlight the value,
and use CTRL+C to copy the value to the clipboard. In the translate panel, CTRL+V can be used
to retrieve this value.
From the Tool page, select the translate panel.
Click elems and select by collector.
Select lvl4 from the list of components and click select.
Click elems, click duplicate, and select original comp as the component in which the
duplicated elements need to be stored.
Set the translation direction to the x-axis.
Use the F4 function key on your keyboard to go to the distance panel and select the two
points sub-panel.
Pick two fixed points defining the height of the collar. The distance = field displays the
distance between them.
Click the field next to distance = to highlight it, press CTRL+C on your keyboard to copy the
value to the clipboard.
Click return to go back to the translate panel.
Click the field next to magnitude = to highlight it, and use CTRL+V to paste the value of the
distance.
Click translate + to translate (in the positive x direction) the duplicated elements to the other
side of the collar.
Altair Engineering

261
Shell meshes on each end of the collar

5. Use the linear solids panel to generate the solid elements: toggle distribute layers to specify
layers. This allows the exact thickness of each layer to be defined using the existing elements on
the end of the arm.
Turn on the display of the elements in the lvl3 component.
From the 3D page, select the linear solid panel.
Select the two groups of elements and their corresponding alignment nodes.
Toggle from distribute layers to specify layers.
With the node list selector active, select nodes to define the exact location of the solid
element layers, as indicated in the figure below.
A total of 12 nodes should be selected, starting at the collar mesh, then using all of the nodes
along the edge of the lvl3 component, ending with a node on the collar.

Altair Engineering
Specifying element layer location
Click solids to generate the solid elements.
Completed mesh
Altair Engineering

263
This completes the mesh on this part where the approach was dictated by the state of the solid mesh
representing the second portion of the arm. Next, delete all of the plate elements, and equivalence
any coincident nodes to ensure continuity of the solid mesh.
To clean up the model and check continuity of the mesh:
All that remains is to delete the shell elements that were created for the sole purpose of generating
the hexahedral elements.
Since the various groups of solid elements were created individually and using different tools, these
groups may not be attached to one another to form a continuous mesh. To identify and fix any
discontinuity in the mesh, use the faces panel once all the shell elements have been deleted.
1. Turn on all the geometry and elements.
2. From the Tool page select the delete panel to delete all lines, surfs, and quad4 elements
Hint
Select elements by config.
3. Use the vis panel in performance graphics mode to set the display of all elements to transparent.
4. Use the faces panel to identify and eliminate any coincident nodes.
Click elems and select all.
Set tolerance = to 1.0 and click preview equiv.

Hint
Review the nodes that are highlighted and click equivalence to equivalence them.
Note
Always stay within 10%-20% of your target element size for the tolerance and make
sure to preview before equivalencing nodes.
The number of nodes found is directly dependent on the value that was used for the
tolerance (the maximum distance between two nodes for them to be considered
coincident). After equivalencing coincident nodes, the hidden line panel can be
used to review the remaining free faces in the model and check that all the nodes
that needed to be equivalenced were indeed found and equivalenced.
Click find faces.
5. Turn off the display of all elements except the ones in the ^faces component.
6. Use the hidden line panel to verify that the mesh is continuous by looking at the free faces of the
solid mesh. A free face is not shared between elements and can indicate a discontinuity in a
mesh.
From the Post page, select the hidden line panel.
Click fill plot.
Select the cutting function and select both the yz plane and trim plane options.
Click on the cutting plane and drag it through the model to verify that no face elements exist
inside of the outer boundaries of the model.
Note
A free face existing within the boundaries of the model would indicate that this face

Altair Engineering
is not shared between two elements, resulting in a discontinuity in the mesh.

Verifying that the only free faces are the faces defining the outside boundaries of a
volume and that they form a unique enclosed volume, guarantees that the mesh is
continuous.
Cutting plane
The completed mesh on this model should look like this:
Completed mesh
Altair Engineering

265
own reference.
In this tutorial, some basic hexahedral meshing techniques were introduced. For some situations,
these alone may not be sufficient. One of the common challenges with hexahedral meshing comes
from the ability to conform the generated mesh to the geometry. The use of the morphing capabilities
(HyperMorph) available in HyperMesh, along with the solid meshing tools, will provide, in many
cases, answers to these problems. You can familiarize yourself with morphing and HyperMorph by
reviewing the corresponding section from the HyperMesh Users Guide, or by reviewing the tutorial,
Getting Started with HyperMorph - HM-3500.
Another common challenge is the complexity of the geometry that may make it virtually impossible to
manually generate hexahedral elements. Reverting back to tetrahedral elements is sometimes the
only solution and for this type of situation, HyperMesh provides an automatic volume tetramesher. For
tetrahedral meshing techniques, refer to the on-line help and the tutorials, Generating 3-D Tetrahedral
Elements - HM-3210, Tetrameshing a Volume in a Single Step - HM-3230, and Creating a Tria Mesh
for Tetrameshing - HM-3190.

Altair Engineering
Tetrameshing a Volume in a Single Step - HM-3230

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the topology display of surface edges and geometry cleanup
tools in HyperMesh is useful, although not required.
Tetrahedral elements are solid finite elements with four triangular faces. Commonly used to model
solid parts, tetrahedral meshes can often be significantly easier to create than hexa-penta models,
especially on complex geometry. With modern finite element solvers, the results from analyses using
second order tetrahedral elements are often just as accurate as those using hex elements.
HyperMesh provides two methods of generating a tetrahedral element mesh. The standard
tetramesher is not discussed in this tutorial. The volume tetra mesher, which is the object of this
tutorial, works directly with surface geometry to automatically generate a tetrahedral mesh without
further interaction from the user. Even with complex geometry, this method can often generate a high
quality solid mesh quickly and easily.
This tutorial introduces some geometry cleanup techniques for tetrameshing using the geom cleanup
panel, and presents the volume tetra meshing method in the tetramesh panel. For more information
regarding the panels used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section of the on-line help, or
click help while in the panel to activate its context sensitive help.
site, see Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>, or contact your system administrator.
The model used for this tutorial is a housing (see image below):
Housing model
To cleanup the geometry for tetrameshing:
Geometry cleanup for generating a tetrahedral mesh takes a slightly different approach than cleanup
for surface meshing. The primary objective is to first create a completely enclosed volume of
surfaces, then suppress any unnecessary features that might force the generation of less than
optimum elements.
Altair Engineering

1. From the files panel, retrieve the file <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/volume_tetra.hm.

3. Observe the model using the view controls from the permanent menu.
With the geometry now displayed with topology colors, we see there are no free (red) edges in
the model. Since no free edges need to be combined, we only need to look into suppressing
edges that will cause poor element quality.
Note
If you are not familiar with the topology display of surface edges, review the topic
HyperMesh Geometry Terminology from the on line help.
4. Restore view1 using the view panel from the permanent menu.
Observe how the edges, shown in the figure below, if left unsuppressed, would result in narrow
sliver elements or elements with a high aspect ratio.
Edges causing sliver elements

5. Use the geom cleanup panel to toggle these edges.
From the edges sub-panel, select the toggle function.
With the line selector active, suppress the edges shown in the figure above.
Make sure that you suppress all similar instances of these edges around the outside of the part.
6. Spend a few minutes identifying and suppressing other unnecessary features.
There are no hard and fast rules defining what should or should not be suppressed. You want to
minimize thin, narrow surfaces or surfaces that would otherwise force the formation of small or
narrow tria elements.
For this model, use for example an element size of 8 units, and identify features for which the
dimensions would be less than 8 units using for example the distance panel from the Geom
page.

Altair Engineering
See the figure below for one example of edges that can be suppressed.
Suppressing additional edges

Hint A powerful technique for finding problem areas is to use the automesh panel in interactive
mode to preview a mesh on the surfaces. Use your target element size and review areas with a
node density of 1. These are an indication that the feature may be too small for the element size
you plan on using. This helps identify any short surface edges to be suppressed or any fixed
points that should be combined.
In this section, we performed some geometry cleanup on our part, making sure that the surfaces
would enclose a volume, and suppressing any unnecessary edges that would cause sliver elements.
To use the volume tetramesher:
The volume tetramesher requires as input a single volume completely enclosed by a single layer of
surfaces. Surface overlaps, T-connections, internal boundaries or holes are not allowed and will result
in errors.
In this section, use the volume tetra sub-panel from the tetramesh panel to tetramesh the housing.
Experiment with the various options to understand how they influence the final mesh.
2. Use the volume tetra sub-panel to tetramesh the model with an element size of 12.
From the 3D page, select the tetramesh panel.
Select the volume tetra sub-panel.
With the surf selector active, select one of the surfaces in the model.
The rest of the connected surfaces are selected automatically.

Below the surf entity selector, the settings for 2D: and 3D: control the type of element that will be
created for the surface mesh and solid mesh of the part.
Set 2D: to trias and 3D: to tetras.
In the field for element size =, enter a value of 12.
Leave the boxes for use proximity and use curvature unchecked for now.
Altair Engineering

Set the two right switches to generate mesh normally and standard.
Click tetmesh to create the tetramesh.
Use the Disp page of the macro menu to set Gfx: Per.
This shades the elements.
Initial tetramesh
The volume tetramesher creates two components whenever it is used. One is for the shell mesh,
and the other is for the tetramesh. When new components are created in HyperMesh, they
default to having the wireframe display mode. Using the macro changes their setting to use
shaded with mesh lines.
If you wish, you can go to the disp panel to review the components that were created by the
volume tetramesher.
Take a moment to inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetramesher created.
Next, explore the results when the 2D element type is changed.
Click reject.
The mesh, along with the components that were created, should be deleted.
3. Repeat step 2, setting 2D: to R-trias this time, and leaving all other options unchanged.
Notice how using right angle triangular elements produces different mesh patterns.
4. Set 2D: back to trias, and tetra mesh the model using curvature.
Check the box for use curvature to activate this option.
Two additional fields appear.
Set elem feature ang = to 30.
Set min elem size = to 3.0.
Pick one of the surfaces and click tetmesh.

Altair Engineering
Tetramesh with curvature settings

The use curvature option causes more elements to be created along areas of high surface
curvature based on the minimum element size and feature angle you specify. Curved areas such
as fillets will thus have more and smaller elements to capture those features with higher
resolution.
Click reject.
Explore the effect of min elem size = 2.0 and elem feature ang = 30.
Reject this mesh.
Try min elem size = 3.0 and elem feature ang = 20.
Reject this mesh.
5. Tetramesh the model with use proximity:
Check the box for use curvature and set min elem size = 3.0 and elem feature ang = 30.
Check the box for use proximity.
Select the surfaces and click tetmesh.
Compare the resulting mesh (see figure below) to the one obtained earlier when using the use
curvature option alone (see previous figure above)
Altair Engineering

Tetramesh with proximity

The use proximity setting causes the mesh to become more refined in areas where surfaces are
smaller and have more of them meeting up. The result is that for surfaces with shorter edges,
which will create smaller elements, the surrounding surfaces will have a smaller mesh in that area
as well so that there isnt too large of a transition made in adjacent elements.
Note
Other options on this sub-panel allow some degree of control over the speed or quality
optimization and growth rate (internal element size). The growth rate options are:
Standard
Consistent layer thickness based on surface mesh size.
Aggressive
Increased thickness with successive layers.
Gradual
Decreased thickness with successive layers.
Interpolate
Used to transition between different surface mesh sizes.
User controlled
User specified values for growth rate and initial layer thickness.
In this section, we experimented with some of the options available in the volume tetra sub-panel. We
saw how some of the options with the volume tetramesh function have been optimized to enable you
to quickly and easily create a good quality tetrahedral element mesh that accurately represents the
geometry of the model.
own reference.
In this tutorial, we introduced the volume tetramesher available in HyperMesh. We did not cover the
standard tetramesher, which requires as input a surface mesh of tria or quad elements, then provides
you with a number of options to control the resulting tetrahedral mesh. This provides a great deal of
control over the tetrahedral mesh, and provides the means to generate a tetrahedral mesh for even
the most complex models.
However, the quality of the resulting tetrahedral mesh is directly dependent on the quality and size of
the surface mesh it starts with. Thus, the majority of the time spent in creating a tetra mesh is taken
up with cleaning geometry and creating the surface mesh to make sure it is of good quality. While this
method takes more effort that the volume tetra meshing method, the advantage is increased control
over the meshing process.
For more information on the standard tetramesher, refer to the tutorials Creating a Tria Mesh for
Tetrameshing - HM-3190, and Generating 3-D Tetrahedral Elements - HM-3210. These two tutorials
also address tetrahedral element quality and re-meshing.

Altair Engineering

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the check elements and edges panels. The check elements
panel verifies the quality of elements. The edges panel allows you to find free edges (or
unconnected elements) and equivalences nodes on edges.
Testing elements for warpage
Testing elements for aspect ratio
Finding duplicate nodes and free edges in the model

3. Retrieve the modelchk_final.hm file, located in the
Altair Engineering

Testing Elements for Warpage

In this section, we try to identify those elements with excessive warpage and view the failed elements
by using the "Save Failed" option.
To change the performance graphics mode and view the model in hidden line mode:
1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.
2. Select the graphics subpanel.
3. Click the toggle and select performance.
5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon,
6. Click all.
7. Click return twice to access the files panel.
To test elements for warpage:
2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.
3. Click the data entry field after warpage > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowable
warpage.
4. Click warpage.
The elements that have a warpage value higher than the value specified are highlighted. These
elements are also defined as failed elements.
The number of failed elements and the maximum warpage value are displayed in the header bar.
5. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the warpage of the
individual elements
To save failed elements:
Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to place
entities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definition
for the entitys configuration and type in the specified template.
1. Click save failed.
2. Click return.
To view the saved failed elements only:
3. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

Altair Engineering
The failed elements are highlighted.

5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click mask.
Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are working
with a large number of elements.
7. Click return.
Testing Elements for Aspect Ratio

In this section, we try to identify those elements with high aspect ratios and view the failed elements
using the "Save Failed" option..
To check elements for aspect ratio:
2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.
3. Click the data entry field after aspect > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowable aspect
ratio.
4. Click aspect.
The elements that have an aspect ratio value higher than the value specified are highlighted.
These elements are defined as failed elements.
5. The number of elements failed and the maximum aspect ratio are displayed in the header bar.
6. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the aspect ratio of the
elements individually.
To save failed elements:
Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to place
Altair Engineering

entities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definition
for the entitys configuration and type in the specified template.
1. Click save failed.
2. Click return.
To view the saved failed elements only:
1. Select the mask panel from the Tool page.
The failed elements are highlighted.
5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click mask.
Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are working
with a large number of elements.
7. Click return.
Finding Duplicate Nodes and Free Edges in the Model

In this section, we try and find the duplicate nodes and free edges and equivalence these nodes.
To find and equivalence the duplicate nodes:
1. Select the faces panel on the Tool page.
Note: Faces are used only when 3-D elements are present in the model. For 2-D elements only
Edges are used to find the unconnected elements.
2. Click the input collector switch and select the 3-D elems.
3. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.
5. Select preview equivalence.
Temporary nodes are created on all the duplicate nodes.
6. Select equivalence.
7. All duplicate nodes are equivalenced.
8. Click return.
NOTE: Duplicate nodes are within the specified tolerance and have the same location as the
other nodes; however, they have not been equivalenced.
To find free edges:
1. Select the edges panel on the Tool page.
2. Click the input collector switch and select all the 2-D elems.
Altair Engineering
4. Click find edges.
5. Click return.
To view the edges only:
The edges created are 1-D elements. To view them alone, turn off the display of the other elements.
2. Click the upper input collector switch and select comps.
3. Click the toggle and select elems.
4. Click none.
5. Click êdges.
6. Click return.
To validate the free edges, analyze them with respect to the geometry of the model. If there are
invalid free edges, it means there are duplicate nodes that need to be equivalenced. The model
in the graphics area contains an invalid free edge:

8. Click all.
The other elements are displayed.
9. Click return.
To equivalence the remaining duplicate nodes:
Altair Engineering

2. Click delete edges to delete the edge elements.

6. Click preview equivalence.
Four nodes were found that have not been equivalenced.
7. Click equivalence.
8. Click return.
To recheck for free edges:
4. Click find edges.
5. Click return.
To review the edges:
2. Click none.
3. Click êdges.
4. Click return.
There are no free edges other than the valid ones.

Altair Engineering

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the creation of 3-D elements is useful, although not required.
Modeling solid parts with 3-D elements is often a complex task that is achieved in multiple steps using
various 3-D element creation panels. This often results in potential discontinuities in the mesh or
other typical problems such as duplicate elements. Another important aspect of 3-D meshing is to
ensure that the mesh satisfies a set quality criteria. In this tutorial you will learn how to check the
quality of 3-D elements, and how to identify and correct possible discontinuities in the mesh.
HyperMesh provides several tools to check the quality and continuity of a mesh. You will use the
check elems panel to review the quality of the elements. You will also use the faces and hidden line
panels to identify and correct discontinuities in the solid mesh.
For more information regarding the panels used in this tutorial, refer to the Panels section of the online help, or click help while in a panel to activate its context-sensitive help.
To retrieve and review the model file:
1. Retrieve the file solid_meshing_check.hm from the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory using the files panel.
2. Use the Disp page of the macro menu to set the graphics engine Gfx: to performance Per.
All the elements are automatically shaded, making it easier to review the model.
Solid meshed model
Altair Engineering

The model contains 12 component collectors. One contains all the surfaces and the others
contain the solids as well as the shell elements that have been used to generate them.
The part was meshed at different times using various panels such as linear solid, line drag, and
drag, and the elements were deliberately organized in separate collectors. Using different tools to
create the mesh has opened the door for potential issues. This tutorial details these issues and
the procedure that can be followed in HyperMesh to correct them. Some of the potential issues
are
Quality of the elements
Discontinuity in the mesh
Duplicate elements
To check element quality using the check elems panel:

The quality of a mesh can be determined by checking the mesh against quality criteria that you set.
These criteria are defined so as to ensure accuracy in the results when running the model for
analysis.
In this section, use the check elems panel from the Tool page to check the quality of the mesh as
well as to save any elements that fail a particular criterion. For example, for this model we can use
the following quality criteria:
Warpage: 5
Aspect ratio: 5
Skew: 60
Quad faces:
Max angle: 145
Min angle: 35
Length: 3
Jacobian: 0.7.
Tria faces:
Max angle: 120
Min angles: 20
For a complete description of all the checks available in this panel, click help while in the panel and
review its on-line help.
In this panel, various options for viewing the results of the quality checks are available:
standard mode for visual display of the elements that fail the specific check
assign plot mode for a color coded display of the element quality
While the standard mode provides a pass/fail display, the assign plot mode allows you to visualize
the actual quality of the elements based on a color code and a legend, or basically, how good or bad
the elements are. The legend is divided into a number of color bands based on the minimum and
maximum values found in the model for the quality criteria against which the mesh is evaluated.

Altair Engineering
1. In the 3-d sub-panel of the check elems panel, set the default value for the jacobian to 0.7.
From the Tool page, go to the check elems panel.
Click the field next to jacobian and type in 0.7.
Using the same method, you can set any other parameters based on the values defined above.
For the purpose of this tutorial, the mesh will be checked against only the jacobian.
2. Check the mesh against the jacobian in standard mode.
Use the switch to set the mode to standard.
Click jacobian.
The elements that have a jacobian less than 0.7 are highlighted in the graphics region. The
header bar displays the total number and percentage of elements failing that criterion, and in this
case, the minimum value found. Similarly, you can check the mesh against other quality criteria.
For the purpose of this tutorial, the quality of this mesh will be considered acceptable.
Elements failing jacobian (standard mode)
3. Check the mesh against the jacobian in assign plot mode.

The elements are now shown in different colors. The colors are assigned based on the actual
value for the jacobian for the element. Using the legend, you can identify the value of the criteria
for any element. With this display type, elements displayed in red are failing.
Altair Engineering

Elements failing the jacobian (assign plot mode)

Hint
To review the actual values for the quality parameter for any element, click the element in
the graphics window. A small window pops up with all the values. To close the window
click anywhere on the screen.
Note
For different types of solid elements, the quality checks of importance will be different.
For tetra elements, the quality checks that matter most are usually tet collapse, vol
skew, and tetra AR. For a complete description of these checks and all other checks
available in the check elems panel, refer to the on-line help.
In this section, the check elems panel was used to check the quality of the solid elements against a
jacobian of 0.7. You have also experimented with some methods of visualizing the failed elements.
To isolate the elements failing a quality check:
There are many situations in which it is not possible to view elements that fail a quality criterion in the
check elems panel. For example, when the elements are too small to be easily identified, when you
work with solid elements in shaded mode, or when there are too many elements in the model.
Therefore, it is often useful to isolate and limit the graphical display to elements that fail a specific
check. This helps to identify them, and this is also useful in preparation for any other function aimed
at improving the quality of these elements.
In this section, use the save failed function from the check elems panel to put the elements that fail
a check onto a user mark. Then use the mask panel from the Tool page to turn off all the elements
except the ones that failed the check.
1. In the check elems panel, check the jacobian, and save failed elements.
From the check elems panel, select the 3-d sub-panel.
Click jacobian.
Click save failed to put the elements that failed onto a user mark.
2. Use the mask panel to retrieve the failed elements and mask all other elements.
Altair Engineering
Select the mask panel from the Tool page.
Set the type of entity to elems.
Click elems and select retrieve from the extended menu.

The elements that were placed on the user mark are highlighted.
Click elems and select reverse from the extended menu.

All the elements except the ones that failed the jacobian are now highlighted.
Click mask.
Only the elements that failed the check are now displayed.
Elements failing the jacobian
Click unmask all.
Note
Elements saved on a user mark can be retrieved in any other panel (i.e. for element editing,
deletion, etc.), any number of times, until another selection replaces them on the user mark
or the elements are deleted.
Hint
The find panel from the Tool page has a find attached (fe) sub-panel that can be used to
find the layers of elements attached to the ones displayed. This helps locate the failed
elements as well as providing additional elements to work with, for example in trying to
improve quality.
The Find Attached macro from the QA page of the macro menu automatically finds the
elements attached to the elements displayed on the screen
In this section, you learned how to place elements that failed a check in the check elems panel onto
a user mark for later retrieval. These elements in the mask panel were retrieved for the purpose of
limiting the display to only these elements.
Altair Engineering

To detect and remove duplicate elements:

Duplicate elements are identical elements that share all their nodes. Duplicate elements should be
removed because they increase the stiffness of the model while performing an analysis.
Identical elements that do not share all their nodes are referred to as coincident elements. These
elements become duplicate elements when the coincident nodes are equivalenced or merged. The
problem of duplicate elements in the model are addressed in this section. Equivalencing nodes and
rechecking for duplicate elements will be discussed in a later section.
In this section, use the check elems panel to check for duplicate elements in the model and place
them onto a user mark. Then isolate these elements in the mask panel for visual review and delete
them using the delete panel.
1. Use the Disp page of the macro menu to select Gfx: Std.
Wireframe mode improves your view of the inside of a solid model. In this mode, highlighted
elements inside the model are more clearly identified.
2. Check for duplicates and save failed in the check elems panel.
From the Tool page select the check elems panel.
Select the 3-d sub-panel and click duplicates.

The header bar states that there are 100 duplicates in the model.
Click save failed.
Wireframe display of duplicate elements

3. Use the Disp page of the macro menu to select Gfx: Per.
4. Use the mask panel to mask all the elements except the duplicates.
From the Tool page, select the mask panel.

Altair Engineering
Click elems and select reverse.
Click mask.
Duplicate elements
5. Use the delete panel to delete the displayed elements.
6. Press the F5 function key to go to the mask panel and click unmask all.
Note
If the goal is to simply delete the duplicates, go from the check elems panel directly to
the delete panel and retrieve the elements on the user mark to delete them.
In this section, you learned how to check for duplicates in the model using the check elems panel,
and save them to a user mark. Then you visually reviewed the elements on the mark using the mask
panel before deleting them in the delete panel.
To detect and remove shell elements:
Since solid elements are often generated from shell elements in HyperMesh, shell elements are often
only needed for construction purposes. While some specific applications and analyses call for a skin
of shell elements on the outside of a solid mesh, in most cases, it is not desirable to have shell
elements mixed with the solid mesh, and therefore you must delete them. It is a common mistake to
forget these construction shell elements in the model when trying to run an analysis.
Check for and delete any shell elements in the model. Similar to the previous section, you can first
mask all elements other than the ones of review interest, and then delete the shell elements, or
simply go to the delete panel directly and remove the shell elements. Both methods use the same
function: selection of elements by config.
1. Use the mask panel to mask the elements by config with the configuration hex8.
From the mask panel, select the mask sub-panel.
Altair Engineering

Click elems and select by config from the extended menu.
In the panel area, click config = and select hex8.
Verify that the toggle is set to displayed and click select entities.
Click mask.
This removes all the 8-noded hexahedral elements from the display.
Shell elements in the model

2. Press the F2 function key to access the delete panel and delete the elems displayed.
3. Return to the mask panel and unmask all.
Note
If you do not want to isolate the shell elements first, and simply want to delete them, go to the
delete panel directly and select the shell elements by config.
Repeat the selection by config as many times as required to specify all the configurations of
all the elements to select. As you specify more configurations, new elements will be added to
the user mark.
Configurations for shell elements are quad4 and tria3 (first order), and quad8 and tria6
(second order).
In this section you learned how to select elements by configuration for the purpose of masking and
deleting them.
To correct discontinuities by equivalencing nodes:
Mesh continuity is another important aspect in obtaining a final mesh. Meshing an entire part or
multiple parts in a single step is typically a difficult task if quality and uniformity of the mesh is a major
concern. In most cases, the mesh is built in multiple steps using various tools and techniques, which
often results in elements that are not connected to neighboring elements.
To achieve continuity for the mesh, nodes of neighboring elements that are not yet connected can be
merged together by equivalencing them. In this section, use the faces panel from the Tool page to
equivalence nodes within a given tolerance.
The tolerance value determines how far apart two nodes can be to still get equivalenced. To avoid
equivalencing nodes that should not be equivalenced and potentially collapsing the element, the
tolerance you set in the faces panel should not exceed 10% to 20% of your element size.

Altair Engineering
1. Use the vis panel from the permanent menu to make all the elements in the model transparent.
The preview equivalence function of the faces panel lets you preview the nodes to be
equivalenced and working in transparent mode allows you see them inside the solid.
2. Use the faces panel to equivalence nodes in the model with a tolerance of 0.01.
For tolerance =, enter 0.01.
Click preview equivalence.

The nodes falling within the tolerance are highlighted.
Preview equivalence
Warning
You can see a large block of nodes highlighted. When a low tolerance is used,
this is often an indication that coincident elements are present in the model as for
some of the elements, all the nodes seem highlighted.
If a high tolerance had been used, this could be an indication that too many
nodes were found and elements could get distorted.
Click equivalence.
After performing a node equivalencing operation like this, it is recommended that you check for
duplicate elements in the model. Any coincident elements in the model will most likely share their
nodes after equivalencing, regardless of the tolerance specified. (Coincident elements are
identical elements that do not share nodes although they are located at the same position in
space.)
3. Use the check elems panel to check for and save failed any duplicates in the model.
4. As needed, use the delete panel to retrieve and delete the duplicate elements placed on the
Altair Engineering

user mark in the step above.

Note
Equivalencing nodes and then deleting duplicates is the most effective method for
removing coincident elements.
Some common mistakes that produce coincident elements are:
Importing a model twice.
Using an element creation panel twice without realizing elements were already generated the
first time around.
Using the duplicate function from the extended entity selection window without completing
the function of the panel on the new set of elements (i.e. translate, rotate, etc.).
Nodes were equivalenced based on the tolerance you specified. It does not mean that all the
nodes that should have been equivalenced to achieve continuity of the mesh were in fact
equivalenced in this operation.
You can repeat the approach used in step 2 for higher values of the tolerance to see if additional
nodes can be found. Stay within 10%-20% of the element size for the tolerance, or use the check
elems panel to determine the smallest element edge length in the model and use a tolerance
that stays well below this value.
5. Repeat step 2 above with tolerance values of 0.1, 0.5 and 1.0.
Additional nodes are detected and equivalenced.
In this section, you used the faces panel to preview and equivalence nodes that fall within a tolerance
you specified. You also used the check elems panel to identify any duplicates that were created from
equivalencing nodes between coincident elements.
Although you repeated the equivalencing function for various reasonable values for the tolerance,
there is limited confidence that all the nodes that needed to be equivalenced to achieve continuity
were actually equivalenced.
To specify which nodes are retained when equivalencing:
Discontinuities still exist on the front face of the model between the elements of collector four and
seven as shown in the figure below.

Altair Engineering
Gap between elements

In some specific situations, you may want to specify how the equivalencing operation is carried out.
The edges panel, which is similar to the faces panel, provides options that allow you to do this.
While the faces panel is typically used with solid elements, the edges panel is used for ensuring
continuity of shell meshes.
In the edges panel, it is possible to specify at which location the shared node will be: location of the
node with the lowest ID number, location of the node with the highest ID number, or mid-point. It is
also possible to specify which ID number from the two or more original nodes will be assigned to the
shared one.
In this section, use the edges panel to close the gap shown in the figure above by moving the nodes
on the right of the gap to the locations of the nodes on the left of the gap.
1. Use the vis panel to display all elements back in shaded mode with mesh lines.
2. Restore view1 from the view panel.
3. Use the edges panel to equivalence nodes with a tolerance of 2.0.
From the Tool page select the edges panel.
Set the entity selector to comps.
Click comps and select components four and seven.
Set the tolerance to 2.0.
Set equiv at: to lowest id.
Set retain: to lowest id.
Click preview equivalence and click equivalence.

Observe the movement of the node positioning on equivalence. The nodes to the left of the
gap moved to the locations of the nodes on the right, creating a wavy pattern for the mesh.
Altair Engineering

Equivalence at lowest ID node
Click reject.
Change equiv at: to highest id.
Click equivalence.
Equivalence at highest ID node

Equivalencing at the highest node ID number produced the result sought as the rows of elements
produced are more regular. This approach provides an advantage by allowing you to decide the
positioning of the node after equivalence.
Note
In this example, you were able to take advantage of the fact that all the nodes on one side of
the gap had ID numbers that were higher than the ID numbers of all the nodes on the other
side of the gap. This could be anticipated because the two groups of nodes (elements) were
created at separate times.

Altair Engineering
In situations where the node ID numbers are not assigned in such a convenient manner,
manual editing is also available to close the gap. This will be discussed in a subsequent
section.
In this section, you learned how to use the edges panel to equivalence nodes according to userdefined specification for the location of the shared node as well as the ID number to retain.
To verify continuity using free faces:
Despite equivalencing nodes with an increased tolerance, you still cannot be sure the mesh is now
continuous. To verify the continuity of a solid mesh, HyperMesh offers a visual tool based on free
faces in the solid mesh.
While the faces panel allows you to equivalence nodes that fall within a specified tolerance, it is also
used to build shell elements on the free faces of solid elements. A free face is a face of a solid
element that is not shared with any other element. For a solid mesh, it is continuous when the only
free faces that are generated are located on the outside of the mesh, forming a skin enclosing the
single volume defined by the part or set of parts. Any free face located inside the volume would
indicate that there is still some discontinuity in the mesh.
Once the free faces are generated in the faces panel, use the hidden line panel to cut through the
faces element and visually inspect the inside of the outer shell for free faces. Verifying that the only
free faces are the faces defining the outside boundaries of a volume and that they form a unique
enclosed volume, guarantees that the mesh is continuous.
1. Use the faces panel to find faces for all elements in the model.
Click find faces.

Shell elements are generated on the free faces of the solid elements. These shell elements
are automatically placed in the ^faces component collector.
2. Use the disp panel to turn off all the elements except the ones in the ^faces component.
Altair Engineering

Free faces
3. Shade the elements setting Gfx: Per on the Disp page of the macro menu.
4. Use the hidden line panel to look for interior free faces.
From the Post page, select the hidden line panel.
Go to the cutting sub-panel.
Check the boxes for xy plane and trim planes.
Click fill plot.

A cutting plane is displayed in the color set next to the xy plane label.
Use the reverse option on the same line as the plane selected to see the other side of the
faces model as needed.
Using the color selector next to xy plane, select the yellow.

The faces are clearly differentiated from the edges of their intersection with the cutting plane.
Drag the cutting plane through the model along the z direction to verify that no face elements
exist inside of the outer boundaries of the model.
Use the reset planes option to reset the plane to the mid-section as needed.
Some free faces within the outer skin of shell elements can be observed (see figure below) and
this is an indication that the mesh is still not continuous at this last location.

Altair Engineering
Interior free faces

In this section, you learned how to verify whether a solid mesh is continuous or not by building face
elements on the free faces of solid elements in the faces panel, and cutting through these faces in
the hidden line panel to expose interior elements.
To close gaps manually:
In the previous section, one remaining gap was found in the solid mesh. This discontinuity is between
components five and nine. The gap at this location is obviously larger than the tolerances you have
specified so far in the faces and edges panels as it was not closed.
Instead of going back to these panels and increasing the tolerance even more, close this last gap
manually using the replace panel. You can work on the face elements directly as the underlying solid
elements will follow the shell elements since they share nodes.
1. Restore view2 from the view panel.
2. Use the replace panel to equivalence the nodes across the gap.
From the 3D page, select the replace panel.
Check the box for equivalence.
With the node selector next to replace: active, select the node to be moved.
With the node selector next to with: active, select the node where the previous node needs
to be moved and merged.
Repeat these two steps for any other pair of nodes to equivalence to close the gap.
Altair Engineering

Replacing nodes
3. Repeat the steps from the previous section using the faces and hidden line panels to verify that
the mesh is now continuous.
4. Delete the ^faces component using the delete faces function from the faces panel.
The shell elements are removed as well as the component that was created to store them.
5. Use the disp panel to turn back on all the elements.
Warning
When using replace, make sure the result obtained is as desired; if it is not, immediately
reject the operation.
When you want to equivalence nodes, always check the equivalence option otherwise,
the node moves to the new location but does not combine with the other node.
Note
If the at mid point option is selected, the two selected nodes are equivalenced at a
position equidistant from their present location.
In this section, you learned how to close gaps in the mesh using the replace panel. You also verified
that the mesh was finally continuous.
own reference.
In this tutorial some of the common basic techniques for quality checking have been introduced. The
common challenge you face when meshing is continuity of the mesh and you have learned some
methods to eliminate this problem.
Displaying only the elements failing quality checks and finding the attached elements is also a very
useful approach when trying to correct elements. For example, for tetrahedral elements you can use
the tetra remesh function on these elements along with a couple of layers of surrounding elements to
try to improve their quality. For more details on this specific method, review the tutorial, Generating 3D Tetrahedral Elements - HM-3210.
In many situations, the quality of the 3-D elements is directly dependent on the quality of the 2-D
elements that were used to generate them and it is sometimes necessary to go back to the 2-D mesh
in order to improve the 3-D mesh. For more information on how to check and improve the quality of 2D elements, review the tutorials from the Quality section of the HyperMesh tutorials.

Altair Engineering
Measuring and Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a Quality

Index - HM-3320
HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the display panel as well as the creation of shell elements
will be useful.
Checking mesh quality and correcting the mesh is an integral part of the meshing process. While the
check elems panel in HyperMesh provides the tools to check a mesh against a user-defined value
for a given quality criterion, it does not provide an overall measure of the quality of a mesh. This can
be achieved in the qualityindex panel where the quality of a mesh can be reduced to a single
number: the quality index (QI). HyperMesh functions based on the quality index offer more automated
solutions for improving the quality of a mesh and helps eliminate the tedious task of correcting many
elements by hand.
In this tutorial, you will learn how to measure and improve the quality of a 2-D mesh using a quality
index value for the mesh. The qualityindex panel is used to evaluate the quality of the mesh as well
as improve local areas, while the smooth panel is used to achieve larger scale improvements to the
mesh quality based on the quality index.
For more information regarding the panels used in this tutorial, refer to the Panels section of the
HyperMesh on-line help, or click the HyperMesh help button while in a panel to activate its contextsensitive help.
<install_directory>, or contact your systems administrator.
The model geometry for this tutorial is an automotive bracket (see figure below).
Bracket model
Altair Engineering

To retrieve and review the model file:

Load the model file into HyperMesh and observe the mesh:
1. Retrieve the file quality_index.hm from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory using the files panel.
2. From the Disp page of the macro menu, set Gfx: Per to shade the elements.
The model is of a bracket with various features such as holes and fillets. The bracket is meshed with
a mixed mesh of tria and quad elements. You will evaluate the quality of this mesh based on its
quality index and make any necessary improvements.
To understand the qualityindex panel:
The qualityindex panel (2D page) allows you to set quality criteria and evaluate your mesh against
these quality criteria using a single number: the compound quality index (QI) value. It also allows you
to edit and optimize node and edge locations, improving the quality of your mesh by reducing the
compound QI value.
The compound quality index is a function of twelve quality criteria (organized in three pages) that are
set in the panel, as well as the weight factors (comp wt) and penalty values associated with them
(see figure below). Each criterion has five rating levels (ideal, good, warn, fail, and worst) and as
the quality decreases, the penalty value increases. Therefore, the smaller the quality index value, the
better the overall mesh quality for the criteria you set. The weight factor is a multiplier that can be
used to bias the results and assigns more importance to some checks than others.
Criteria table
In this panel, several QI values are computed: one for each element (not reported), one for each
criterion turned on, and the compound QI value that represents the overall quality of the 2-D elements
displayed. Refer to the on-line help for the formulas used to compute these quantities. The compound
quality index is the summation of all the element quality indexes, and also the summation of all the
criteria quality indexes.
To facilitate visual review of their quality, elements are displayed in the graphics region based on their
individual element QI value, which is also based on selected criteria and their corresponding weight
factors and penalty values. With the default colors, elements with a QI value over 10 are in the worst
category and displayed in red. Elements with a QI value between 1 and 10 are in the fail category and
displayed in yellow. Elements with a QI value between 0.8 and 1 are displayed in cyan and fall in the
warn category, and elements with a QI value less than 0.8 are displayed in the background color
(black) and considered good or ideal.
Note:
A quality index value is a relative value that is completely dependent on the quality criteria
you use. The lower the quality index, the closer your mesh is to the quality criteria you
defined.
The qualityindex panel has two modes: criteria and results, which are accessed using a toggle.
In the criteria mode you can:

Altair Engineering
Turn criteria on and off.
Set good and fail values for each criterion.
Set criteria weight factors.
Choose display colors for each rating level.
Load and save criteria files.
Save a summary file of the results.
In the results mode, you can review the results for the different quality criteria you selected, such as:
The percentage of elements that failed a given check.
The worst value found for the check.
The criterion Q.I. value.
The number of quads and trias.
The percentage of trias.
The total number of elements that failed.
The compound Q.I. value.
In both modes, additional options are available: view, edit, and optimize. While the view setting
does not provide any additional options, both the edit and optimize settings provide additional
options for editing the mesh and improving its quality. These options will be discussed later in the
tutorial.
In this section, some of the concepts that govern the qualityindex panel were introduced. For
complete details on this panel, refer to the Panels section of the on-line help, or click help while in a
panel to display its context-sensitive help.
To evaluate the quality of the mesh:
In this section, use the qualityindex panel to evaluate the quality of the mesh on the bracket. While
you could manually define the criteria used to evaluate the mesh in the criteria mode, instead, load a
pre-defined criteria file to set the values for the criteria of interest. Visually inspect the quality of the
mesh based on the color-coding of the elements, and turn to the results mode to access a
quantitative report.
1. From the 2D page, go to the qualityindex panel.
By default, the setting is view for a simple review of the element quality. Elements are colorcoded based on the values currently defined for the quality criteria, the weight factors and the
penalty values, under the criteria mode that are used to compute individual element QI values.
2. Use pg3 of the criteria mode to load the criteria file quality_index.criteria from the
In the qualityindex panel, set the left toggle to criteria.

Quality criteria available are organized in three pages.
Use the page browser from the upper left corner of the panel to go to pg3.
Click load on the criteria file: line and browse for the file quality_index.criteria.
Altair Engineering

Click Open.
The quality criteria defined in the file are automatically loaded and elements in the graphics
area are color-coded based on their element QI values.
Color-coded elements (white background)

3. Review the quality criteria defined on pg1, pg2, and pg3.
Pay close attention to the criteria that are turned on and off, their weight factors, and the actual
values assigned to them for the various rating levels.
Several elements are displayed in yellow, meaning that their element QI values are between 1
and 10. The element QI value is computed as:
(weighted average of penalties that pass) + (weighted sum of penalties that fail)
Considering that all the weight factors are currently set to 1, it can be interpreted that these
elements failed at least one of the checks currently turned on (fail rating).
Hint:
To determine which quality check a specific element fails (fail or worst category) turn
on each criterion separately (one at a time).
Note:
Elements are color-coded based on their QI values. The color-coding does not
necessarily capture the outcome for each specific quality check, but it shows how
elements fare against the entire set of criteria that are selected.
In the end, elements displayed in red and yellow are elements for which the overall
quality (defined by the criteria turned on) does not meet the requirements. Elements
displayed in cyan are simply acceptable.
4. Change the mode to results using the toggle and review the two pages of results.
The fail column lists the fail values set in the criteria mode for easy reference. The %fail column
lists the percentage of element displayed that failed the given criteria, and the worst column lists
the worst value found for the corresponding criteria.

Altair Engineering
You can also review criteria QI values as they are listed in the Q.I. column. In this case, you will
notice that the jacobian quality check is the biggest contributor to the compound quality index.
Maximum angle tria has the smallest contribution, and would not warrant much attention when
trying to decrease the compound quality index for a mesh.
5. Write down the values for comp.Q.I. and # of failed =.
Although these values are relative, they indicate how the mesh does against the set criteria. As
you improve the quality of the mesh later in this tutorial, both numbers will decrease.
In this section, you used the qualityindex panel to review the quality of the mesh based on quality
criteria you set when loading the criteria file.
To save and review criteria files:
Various finite element applications call for different quality criteria and often, various meshed parts in
the same model must meet different criteria. In such situations, the values assigned to the various
quality criteria need to be changed in the qualityindex panel to match the new requirements for each
mesh. While this can be done manually each time, HyperMesh allows you to limit this editing to a
one-time operation by saving values set for the various quality checks in the criteria mode of the
qualityindex panel to a text file. The criteria file you used earlier in this tutorial has been prepared in
a similar manner.
In this section, change the values for some of the criteria in the qualityindex panel and save the
quality criteria to a new file, starting your own library of criteria files. With a pre-defined set of criteria
files you can then easily load the various criteria files for different applications.
1. In the qualityindex panel, criteria mode, update the quality criteria listed to the values specified
in the table below:
Criterion:
Good value:
Fail value:
min length
5.5
3.5
max angle quad
120
140
min angle quad
60
40
Notice how various elements change color as you modify the criteria.
Note:
The element size elem size value used in the min size and max length checks is
the target element size set in the global panel. This value can also be set by loading
a criteria file.
The warn and worst values are set automatically from the good and fail values
when you update the latter ones in the qualityindex panel. To set the warn and
worst values to specific numbers, load the criteria file in which they are defined.
Similarly, the ideal values can be defined in a criteria file when they cannot be
changed in the qualityindex panel itself.
Warning:
When modifying criteria values, HyperMesh may reject some of the values you insert
as there needs to be a logical progression in values. For example, the fail value for
the min size check cannot be larger than the good value, so before increasing this
fail value, you may need to first increase the good value.
2. Use pg3 of the criteria mode to save a criteria file as quality_index_2.criteria to your
working directory.
3. Use any text editor to review the content of this text file.
Altair Engineering

You can edit this file to change values or simply create additional criteria files.
Criteria file
4. Use the results mode of the qualityindex panel to review the comp.Q.I. = and # of failed =
values and compare them to the values found for the criteria file loaded earlier.
Both values have changed. The criterion on the minimum element size was tightened, while those
on the minimum and maximum quad angles were loosened. The result is a slight decrease in the
compound quality index value and a change in the number, and probably the actual elements,
that fail our criteria.
In this section you experimented with changing values for the criteria in the qualityindex panel. You
reviewed how these changes affected the results for the mesh and the color-coding of elements, and
exported a criteria file for the new criteria.
To improve element quality using the edit functions:
The edit tool in the qualityindex panel allows you to improve the quality of elements by letting you
move nodes interactively and swap element edges.
The place node function allows you move nodes manually on their surface while the color-coding of
the elements sharing the node (indicating changes to their quality) is updated in real time. The swap
edge function lets you swap the common edge between two elements to use different nodes, creating
a new configuration that is automatically evaluated against the quality criteria and color-coding.
In this section, experiment with both functions from the edit tool to improve some of the elements
failing the quality criteria defined in the quality_index.criteria file.
1. In the criteria mode of the qualityindex panel, load the criteria file quality_index.criteria
from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory.
2. In the qualityindex panel, use the right switch to select the edit tool.
3. Set the mode to results so that the effect of using the edit tools on the compound quality index
value and the number of elements that fail can be observed.
5. Use the place node function to drag the nodes shown in the figure below such that all the
elements that share them fall in the good range.

Altair Engineering
Nodes to move
Observe how the compound quality index value and the number of elements that fail both
decrease as you fix this area of the mesh. The final mesh in this area should look similar to this:
Improved mesh
As you drag nodes, observe how the values for the results listed in the last columns of the results
mode temporarily change to report the local effect of moving the nodes. The comp.Q.I. shows the
compound quality index for these elements affected by the node being dragged (this helps in
finding an optimal position); # of quads lists the number of quad elements that share the current
node; similarly # of trias shows how many trias use this node, and # of failed tells you how many
of the elements involved in the current operation still fail the quality criteria.
Note
The place node function lets you move the node only on an inferred surface and not
beyond its edges.
Use the undo function at any time to undo the changes you have made to the mesh.

7. In the qualityindex panel, use the swap edge function to improve the quality of some of the
elements in this area (see figure below).
Altair Engineering

Edge to swap
The common edge is changed (connectivity change) and produces two new elements from the
nodes involved.
New mesh after edge swapping

Hint:
When using the swap edge function, the edge selected is re-positioned in the next
possible way between the two elements. A single pick on the edge may or may not
improve the quality, or produce the best improvement. Pick the edge again if the quality
deteriorates. HyperMesh repositions the edge in all possible ways between the two
elements in a cyclic process.
8. Use the swap edge function again between the pair of elements produced and cycle through all
the pairs of elements possible by working with this common edge to select the one configuration
that yields the lowest compound quality index.
The configuration described in the figure above produces the lowest QI value.
9. Use any combination of the place node and swap edge functions to ensure that all the elements
in this area satisfy the quality criteria (see figure below for an example).

Altair Engineering
Improved area
In this section, you used the edit tool and its various functions to manually and interactively
improve one local area of the mesh. As you placed nodes and swap edges, you also monitored
changes to the compound quality index to measure how this number decreases as the quality of
the elements improves.
To improve element quality using the optimize functions:
The optimize tool offers semi-automatic quality correction functions. The node optimize function
finds the optimum position for the node you select so that the quality index for the elements sharing
this node is lowest. With the element optimize function, the same goal is sought; although
HyperMesh works with all the nodes involved in this element at the same time, affecting a larger area.
In this section, experiment with both functions from the optimize tool to improve the quality of the
mesh in some local areas.
1. In the qualityindex panel, set the right switch to optimize and verify the mode is set to results.
In this mode you can monitor how changes are bringing the quality indexes down and improve
the quality of the mesh.
2. Use the view panel to restore view3.
Altair Engineering

Elements to optimize
3. Use the element optimize function to improve the quality of the elements in this area.
Observe changes to the compound quality index value as you use this function.
Note:
You may need to select multiple elements (not just the failing elements) multiple
times to obtain the best possible quality as each operation only considers the
element you select and the elements with which it shares nodes.
The final mesh should look similar to this:
Improved mesh

Altair Engineering
Nodes to optimize
5. Use the node optimize function to improve the quality of the elements failing the checks.
Observe changes to the quality index value as you optimize the location of various nodes. You
should finish with a mesh similar to this:
Resulting mesh
6. Correct any remaining bad elements by using one of the previously mentioned functions such as
element optimize.
Altair Engineering

Final mesh after using element optimize

Notes:
You may or may not always be able to improve the quality of all the elements as these
functions merely change the location of nodes for a given set of elements. These
operations do not allow you to remove or create the elements involved. Therefore, it is
sometimes impossible to meet all the quality criteria with the original elements.
In most situations, using a combination of the four functions presented yields the best
result.
7. Write down the values for comp.Q.I. = and # of failed = and compare these values to those with
which you started.
By now, these values have gone down, although they have decreased by only a certain percentage of
the initial values. This is because there are still many other areas of our mesh that need attention.

Altair Engineering
Areas still requiring attention

In this section, you experimented with the various tools available in the qualityindex panel for
improving the quality of elements to ensure they meet quality requirements. While these tools are
very powerful in improving the quality of a mesh, it may not always be practical to try to fix numerous
elements in a model with this approach as only a few elements can be fixed at a time. These tools are
more useful for local than global areas.
To improve element quality using the smooth panel:
The smooth panel from the 2D page can be used to smooth elements according to quality criteria. In
this mode, it optimizes node locations so that the overall quality index of the elements selected is
minimal. This allows you to work with large numbers of elements at one time.
In this section, use the QI optimization mode of the smooth panel to improve the quality of the
elements. Then go back to the qualityindex panel to review the quality of the resulting mesh.
1. Use the smooth panel, QI optimization mode to optimize the elements based on the criteria
defined in the qualityindex panel.
From the 2D page, select the smooth panel.
Go to the plates sub-panel.
Use the switch to select the QI optimization mode.
Set target quality index = to 0.2.
Leave the box for time limit unchecked.

Optimization time is not a concern with this small model.
Set the feature angle = to 30.0.
Altair Engineering

Set the upper toggle to use criteria in QI panel.

Alternatively, specify a criteria file.
Leave the lower toggle set to recursive optimization procedure.
Click smooth.
If HyperMesh posts a message, click Ignore.
HyperMesh smoothes the elements according to the specified quality criteria and returns the final
quality index value in the header bar.
Note:
Refer to the on-line help for a complete description of all the options available in this
panel.
2. Use the qualityindex panel to review the quality of the mesh.

The number of elements failing the quality criteria has been reduced to only a few.
3. Use the results mode to compare the current values for the compound quality index and the
number of elements that failed to the initial ones.
4. Use the functions available under the edit and optimize tools to fix any element that is still failing
the quality criteria.
While the smooth panel optimizes node locations so that the elements would yield the lowest
compound quality index value, you still have the ability to work on local areas where only the local
quality index is considered and will therefore often yield a different result.
5. Use pg3 of the criteria mode to save a summary file of the results to your working directory.
6. Load this summary file into any text editor and review the information it contains.
own reference.
In this tutorial the technique of evaluating the quality of 2-D elements using quality indexes was
introduced. Methods for correcting elements that fail the quality criteria defined in the qualityindex
panel have also been introduced. They include options in the panel itself, as well as using the
smooth panel to address numerous elements needing improvement.
For alternate ways of checking 2-D element quality in HyperMesh, review the tutorial, Checking 2-D
Mesh Quality and Continuity - HM-3300. For additional methods for improving mesh quality, refer to
Troubleshooting 2-D Mesh Quality Issues Manually - HM-3330.

Altair Engineering
Troubleshooting 2-D Mesh Quality Issues Manually HM-3330

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with the automesh and check elems panels is also useful
although not required.
In FEA modeling, element quality greatly affects the accuracy of the analysis results. The ideal fournode (quad) element is a planar square. If a node is translated in the plane of the remaining nodes,
the interior angles change and the edge lengths vary, introducing skew and aspect ratio in the
element. An out of plane translation results in warpage.
HyperMesh offers various tools to check the quality of a 2-D mesh, as well as several tools that can
be used to improve the quality of the mesh by editing the elements. In this tutorial, you will learn how
to use the check elems panel to evaluate the quality of the mesh as well as isolate the elements that
fail the various quality checks. You will also use several panels such as edit element, automesh,
and replace, and various macros from the macro menu to correct different types of quality issues.
For detailed information on the panels used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section of the
on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help.
To check 2-D element quality:
In this section, retrieve the model file for this tutorial and check the quality of the 2-D mesh against a
set of quality criteria using the check elems panel.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/quality_improvement.hm.
The model is a part of a cars floor panel.
2. From the Disp page of the macro menu, select Gfx: Per to shade the mesh.
Floor panel
Altair Engineering

3. Use the check elems panel to check the quality of the mesh against set quality criteria.
From the Tool page, select the check elems panel, or use the F10 function key.
Set the following quality criteria by typing in the values in the corresponding fields:
Criteria
Values
warpage
20
aspect
length
jacobian
0.5
quads: min angle
45
quads: max angle
145
trias: min angle
15
trias: max angle
120
Check the mesh against each one of these quality criteria by clicking the corresponding
button.
As you select a criterion, HyperMesh highlights in the graphics area the elements that fail the
check. In the header bar, it reports the total number of elements displayed that fail, the
corresponding percentage, and the worst value found in the mesh for the check.
Note
Click on any element to obtain a complete summary of how it fares against the quality
criteria. Left mouse click to close the dialog.
For complete details on the check elems panel and the options available, as well as
quality check definitions, click help to obtain the panels help.
Hint
Use the Quality Report macro from the QA page of the macro menu to obtain a
complete summary of the quality of the 2-D mesh. This summary can also be saved
to a text file.
In this section, we set some quality criteria and reviewed the mesh against them using the check
elems panel. Although the elements are highlighted, it may not always be easy to identify them.
To isolate elements that fail the quality criteria:
Isolating elements that fail the quality criteria allows for their easy identification and review, and also
helps perform editing operations on such a subset of elements. While in some situations it is better to
limit the display to only these elements that fail the check, in others it is useful to also display layers of
elements directly attached to the failing elements. This is the case when you want to perform larger
scale operations, get a better understanding of where the failing elements are located, or simply see
how neighboring elements are affected by editing operations.
In this section, use the check elems panel to place elements failing a check onto a user mark. Use
the mask panel to limit the display of these elements, and finally use the Find Attached macro to
turn on the display of the neighboring layers of elements.
1. Use the check elems panel to check for warpage and save failed.
From the check elems panel, click warpage.

Altair Engineering
Click save failed to place the elements in a user mark.
2. Use the mask panel to mask all elements except the ones you retrieve from the user mark.
From the Tool page, select the mask panel or use F5.
Set the type of entities to mask to elems.
Click elems and select reverse to reverse the selection.
Click mask.
This turns off all the elements except the ones that failed the warpage check.
3. Fit the elements on the screen using the f key from the keyboard.
Warped elements
4. Use the Find Attached macro from the QA page of the macro menu to turn on one layer of
elements attached to the failing elements.
This displays only the failed elements and the ones directly attached to them.
Note
Use the Find Attached macro several times to bring back more layers of elements.
The functions performed by the Find Attached macro can also be performed from
the find panel located on the Tool page.
Several macros (such as Warp) located in the Tools: section of the macro menus
QA page allow you to directly limit the display to the elements failing pre-defined
checks without using the combination check elems/mask panel. To review the
quality criterion value used by each tool, hold the left mouse button down on top of
the macro button and review the header bar.
In this section, we used the check elems panel to identify elements that fail quality checks and saved
them to a user mark. We then used the mask panel to display only the failed elements, and finally we
restored elements attached to the failed elements.
Altair Engineering

To correct elements failing warpage:

When one node is not co-planar to the other nodes, warpage is introduced in a shell element. While a
quad element can be warped, this cannot happen for tria elements. One way of correcting warpage in
quad elements is to split them into two tria elements.
In this section, use three different tools to split elements failing warpage into two tria elements. Use
the edit element panel, the split panel, and the Split Warped macro to resolve this quality issue.
2. Use the check elems panel (F10) to check for warpage and identify the elements that need to be
corrected in this view.
3. Use the edit element panel to split the failing elements into two trias.
Use the F6 function key to go directly to the edit element panel, also found on the 1D, 2D,
and 3D pages.
Select the split sub-panel.

From this sub-panel, you can either first select the elements to split and then define a split
line, or simply define the split line and apply it to the elements displayed.
Set the switch to displayed elems.
Select two points to build a split line (see figure below).
Defining a split line
Click split.
Repeat these steps for the second element to split in this view.
4. Use the edit element panel to combine neighboring trias.
From the edit element panel, select the combine sub-panel.
Set the toggle to combine to quad.
Set auto comb = to 2.
Select pairs of trias to combine (see figure below).

Altair Engineering
Combining adjacent tria elements

5. Use the check elems (F10) panel to visually locate additional elements failing warpage from the
elements displayed.
6. Use the split panel (Shift+F6) to divide quads into trias.
Select the plate elements sub-panel.
Set the switch to divide quads.
Select the elements to split.
Click split.
This divides the quads selected into two tria elements. You could now combine some of the
trias produced with the neighboring trias that lie in a similar plane.
7. Use the Split Warped macro from the QA page of the macro menu to split any remaining warped
quad.
Warnings Macros typically do not have a reject or undo function. It is therefore not possible to
reject their operations.
This macro splits elements with a warpage above 20. It is therefore not suitable if
your quality requirements call for another warpage value.
8. Use the mask panel (F5) to unmask all.
9. Use the check elems panel to verify that no element fails the warpage check.
Warning
When splitting quad elements into trias to avoid warpage, you increase the proportion
of trias in your mesh. If the percentage of trias in your model is of concern, you need
to monitor how addressing one issue affects the other.
Hint
Splitting elements is not the only approach. A warped element can be adjusted by
moving one of the nodes closer to the plane formed by the other three nodes of the
element.
This completes the quality correction of warped elements. In our approach, we have split the element
failing warpage into two trias and improved the quality. We also combined adjacent tria elements into
quad elements.
Altair Engineering

To correct elements failing the aspect ratio:

Elements failing the aspect ratio check are elements for which at least one side is much shorter than
the others are. Often, these elements fail other checks such as min angle (trias) or minimum length,
and vice versa. Solving one class of quality issues sometimes helps with the others.
In this section, isolate elements based on their aspect ratio using the Aspect macro. Restore layers
of elements surrounding them using the Find Attached macro. Finally, resolve the case of narrow
elements by deleting them and closing the gaps using the replace panel.
1. Use the Aspect macro from the QA page of the macro menu to display only elements with an
aspect ratio above 5.
Elements are left in one area of the model. Fit the model to the screen as needed.
2. Use the Find Attached macro from the QA page to turn on one layer of elements.
4. Use F10 to select the check elems panel and highlight the elements failing the aspect ratio.
5. Use the delete panel to delete the elements failing the aspect ratio (see figure below).
Hint
Use the save failed option from the check elems panel to place these elements on
a user mark and retrieve them from the delete panel.
Elements to delete
6. Use the replace panel to close all the gaps left by the deleted elements.
Use the F3 function key to access the replace panel located on the 1D, 2D, and 3D pages.
Verify the equivalence option is activated and the at mid-point option is de-activated.
Pair nodes across the gaps for the node selectors of the replace: and with: categories (see
figure below for one example) until all gaps are closed

Altair Engineering
Closing gaps
7. Use the mask panel to unmask all.
8. Use the check elems panel to verify that no other element fails the aspect ratio check.
Note
Here we corrected narrow elements that could simply be deleted, with the gaps
closed using the replace function. In other instances, gaps left by deleted elements
require new elements to be created by hand using the edit element panel. This is
covered in a subsequent section.
Small gaps can be closed in an automated way using the edges or faces panel and
equivalencing nodes within a set tolerance. Refer to these panels help for complete
details.
In this section, we corrected issues with elements having a failing aspect ratio by simply deleting
them and closing the gaps left using the replace panel.
To correct elements failing the minimum length check:
Elements that fail this check have at least one side for which the length is less than the specified
value. When the element is simply narrower than its neighbors, this can be corrected using the same
technique as used in the previous section: deleting the elements and equivalencing nodes across the
gaps. In other situations, one preferred alternative consists of deleting the failed element(s) and recreating the elements in the empty area by hand. In this section, use this second technique to fix
elements that fail the length check.
1. Use the check elems panel to save the elements that fail the length check.
2. Use the mask panel to limit the display to the elements failing the length check.
4. Use the Find Attached macro twice to restore two layers of surrounding elements.
Altair Engineering

Elements failing length check

While it is possible to delete the elements that fail the length check and close the gaps using the
replace panel, the pattern of the surrounding mesh is questionable enough to delete the failing
elements and their neighbors before re-creating new elements using the edit element panel.
5. Use the delete panel to delete the elements highlighted in the figure below.
Elements to delete
6. Use the edit element panel to create two quad elements to fill the hole.
Use the F6 function key to select the edit element panel.
Activate the quad radio button.
Select two sets of four nodes to create the quad elements (see figure below).

Altair Engineering
Closing the hole with quads

7. Unmask all elements.
8. Check the mesh against the length check.
Notes These two techniques (delete/replace and delete/create element) are applicable for
resolving most classes of quality issues.
Another way to resolve minimum length issues is to alter the dimensions of the sides by
changing the distance between nodes.
In this section, we deleted the elements failing our length criterion and closed the gaps formed using
the edit element panels.
To correct quads failing angle checks:
Elements failing one angle check often fail the second. While you can use the techniques presented
in the previous sections to resolve angle issues, here we will smooth the mesh in the areas
surrounding the elements failing angle checks to correct them.
2. Use the check elems panel to check the mesh against the quads: min angle and quads: max
angle checks.
Altair Engineering

Elements failing quads: min angle

3. Use the Smooth: 1 macro to improve the elements failing the quad angle checks.
Select the QA page of the macro menu.
Select Smooth: 1.
An elems selector is posted in the HyperMesh panel area.
Select the four elements that failed the quads: min angle check.
Click proceed.
HyperMesh smoothes the location of the nodes belonging to the elements selected and one
layer of elements surrounding them.
4. Check the mesh against the quads angle checks to verify no more quads fail.
Notes
This technique is just as valid with tria elements.

Alternatively you can use the smooth panel from the 2D page, which offers
additional options, to perform smoothing on sets of elements. Refer to this panels
help for complete details.
Smoothing node location is a tool that can help resolve other classes of quality issues
such as length, aspect ratio, and jacobian.
In this section, we used smoothing tools to fix issues with the min and max interior angles of quad
elements.
To correct elements failing the jacobian check:
The jacobian is a measure of how close an element is to a perfect shape. A perfect quad element is a
square and has a jacobian of 1.0. While most of the techniques presented so far can be used to
improve the jacobian of elements, in this section we will remesh sets of elements to improve their
jacobian.

Altair Engineering
1. Use the check elems panel to check the mesh against the jacobian check.
Elements failing jacobian

2. Use the Remesh: 2 macro to improve the elements failing the jacobian check.
Select the QA page of the macro menu.
Select Remesh: 2.
An elems selector is posted in the HyperMesh panel area.
Select the three elements that failed the jacobian check.
Click proceed.
HyperMesh remeshes the elements selected as well as two layers of surrounding elements.
Mesh after remesh

3. Check the mesh against the jacobian check to verify no more elements fail.
Notice an improvement in the pattern of the mesh.
Altair Engineering

Note
In addition to this method, you can use the automesh panel from the 2D page, which
offers several options for remeshing not only surfaces, but also sets of elements. Refer
to this panels help for complete details.
In this section, we used re-meshing tools to fix issues with the jacobian of our 2-D mesh.
This completes the tutorial. You may discard this model or save to your working directory for your
own reference.
In this tutorial, we introduced tools for evaluating the quality of a 2-D mesh and isolated elements
failing specific quality checks. We also presented various manual techniques that can be used to
improve the quality of elements.
For more information on using automated tools to improve the quality of a 2-D mesh, please refer to
the tutorial Measuring and Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a Quality Index - HM-3320. For more
information on remeshing a mesh or creating a higher quality mesh, review the tutorials Remeshing
2-D Elements - HM-3110 and Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on User-Defined Quality
Criteria - HM-3150.

Altair Engineering
Creating Connectors - HM-3400

HyperMesh - HM-1000.. We also recommend you review the content of the HyperMesh Users
Guide/Building Models/Connectors section in the on-line help. This section contains all the definitions
and background information on connectors that will help you get the most out of this tutorial.
The goal of this tutorial is to assemble several parts of a model using various types of finite elements.
To achieve this goal, we will create connectors (geometric entities), and then "realize" them into finite
elements, just like surfaces are used to produce shell elements.
In this tutorial you will learn how to create connectors, define them completely, and realize them into
various types of finite elements. You will also learn how to review and modify these connectors, and
check the quality of the finite elements produced. Finally you will experiment with the easy part
swapping capability connectors offer.
This tutorial will be particularly useful if you are trying to become familiar with the panels and
techniques available in HyperMesh for performing part assembly.
For more information regarding a specific panel used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section
of the HyperMesh help, or click the HyperMesh help button while in the panel to activate its context
sensitive help.
The model used in this tutorial is a front cradle assembly comprising various components. While
some parts are meshed, other are still defined with their geometry only (see image below).
Front cradle assembly model
Altair Engineering

To retrieve and review the model:

3. From the files panel select the hmfile sub-panel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ front_cradle_assembly.hm.
4. From the Disp page of the macro menu, select Gfx: Per to visualize the elements in shaded
mode with mesh lines.
5. From the Disp page of the macro menu, set Vis opts: 3 to shade the surfaces in the model.
6. Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to review the various components in the model.
The model is organized into several components, consisting of rails and cross members. While
some of the components contain elements only, others contain geometry data alone. Additional
components that will be required for this tutorial have already been created and are simply empty
at this time.
7. Turn off and on all the elements in the model.
Notice how some weld points are available on one side of the assembly to define the location of
welds between the rails Rail_Out_Right and Rail_In_Right, while there are none on the other
side of the model (Rail_Out_Left and Rail_In_Left). Notice also how there is no such weld point
between the outside rails Rail_Out_Right and Rail_Out_Left, and the meshed cross_member.
To create connectors manually:
There are several ways of generating connectors in HyperMesh. In this section we will explore the
manual creation. A connector, which is a geometric entity in HyperMesh, is simply a database of
information defining a specific request for connection between entities at a specific location. Entities
that are to be connected are referred to as link entities. The connector location is defined as a node, a
geometric point, or a geometric line. While you can define and assign the link entities as you create
connectors, it is not a requirement.
Start by creating connectors at the locations defined by the weld points available in the model. Then
create a connector between the outer rail and the meshed cross member at a node location. Finally,
take advantage of the symmetry of the model to duplicate and reflect the connectors to the opposite
side of the model where no weld points are available. Finish by checking that no duplicate connectors
exist in the model.
1. Use the create panel of the connectors module from the 1D page to create connectors at the
points in the weld_points component.
From the 1D page, enter the connectors module.
Select the create panel.
Set the entity type to points.
Click points and select by collector.
Pick the weld_points component from the list and click select.
Set the connect when: switch to none.

This option limits the function of this panel to the creation of connectors without specifying
any link entities or even their type for the connectors.
Click create.
This generates connectors at the locations specified. Notice their display in yellow, which is
the color of unrealized connectors.

Altair Engineering
Click vis opts and enter 8 in the field for size =.

This increases the display size of the connectors. This vis opts dialog lets you review
connectors in various color codes: by state (realized, unrealized, failed), by number of layers
(the thickness), and according to the component they belong to. It also allows you to control
their display (turn them on and off).
Connectors created at weld points

Note
With our strategy of duplicating and reflecting connectors, it was not desirable to
define any link entities for our connectors at the time of creation. The link entities (rail
components) for the various connectors will be different components for each side of
the assembly. For more details on the various options of the create panel, click help
to bring up its context sensitive help.
2. Use the create panel to create a connector for the Rail_Out_Right and cross_member
components at the node identified with the bolt1 tag.
From the create panel from the connectors module, set the entity type to nodes.
Restore the pre-defined view1 using the view panel from the permanent menu.
From the graphics area, pick the node identified with the bolt1 tag.
Creating a connector at a node location
Verify connect when: is set to none.
Click create.
This generates a connector at the specified node location.
Altair Engineering

3. Duplicate and reflect the connectors to the opposite side of the model by defining an x-z plane of
symmetry at the center of the model in the reflect panel.
From the Tool page, select the reflect panel.
Set the type of entity to connectors.
Click connectors and select displayed.
Click connectors, select duplicate, and then original comp.

This duplicates the connectors we selected (displayed), and places the duplicates into the
same component as the original ones.
Set the plane selector to use the y-axis.

This is the axis normal to the plane of interest.
Click base to make it active and select the temporary node located at the center of the
model.
Click reflect.
This positions the duplicate connectors on the opposite side of the model.
Duplicating and reflecting connectors

Note
Several other common operations can be performed on connectors, such as translation,

rotation, and scaling.
4. Use the quality panel from the connectors module to check that there are no duplicate
connectors in the model.
From the connectors module, select the quality panel.
Select the connectors (unrealized) sub-panel.

Altair Engineering
Click preview duplicates to identify any duplicates in the model.
Click remove duplicates.

HyperMesh reports in the header bar the number of connectors that are removed.
Note
Duplicate connectors can come from using the duplicate function one too many
times, starting with duplicate weld points, or simply from weld points or connectors
being close to one another enough that they fall within the tolerance specified in the
quality panel.
In this section we created connectors at specific point and node locations. We also took advantage of
the symmetry of the model to quickly add connectors at locations where weld points were not
available. With this approach we decided not to add any information to the connectors, such as link
type or link entities. We need to define these link entities next so that we can realize our connectors
into the finite elements that will assemble our parts together.
To add link entities to connectors:
In order to realize our connectors into finite elements, we need to specify as link entities in the
connectors definition what entities are to be connected by the finite elements. To do this, we use, for
example, the add links panel from the connectors module, and supply the information we did not at
the time of creation.
1. In the add links panel, assign components as link entities by using a search tolerance of 10 and
setting the number of layers for the connectors to 2. Also, define a re-connect rule using part ID
numbers.
From the connectors module, select the add links panel.
Select the connectors displayed.
Set connect when: to now.

In this mode, we not only define the type of the link entities (as the at fe realize mode does)
but also who these link entities are.
Set connect what: to comps.

We will use components as link entities.
Verify that the toggle on the same line is set to elems.
Click comps and select the following components from the list: cross_member,
Rail_Out_Right, Rail_In_Right, Rail_Out_Left, and Rail_In_Left.
Although these are not the components to connect for each individual connector, by using a
search tolerance and defining the number X of layers for the connectors, HyperMesh will
automatically identify the X closest components to each connector and add them as link
entities to the given connectors definition.
Set # of layers to total 2.

This is the number of components that will be connected when connectors are realized.
Check the box for search tol = and enter 10 in the corresponding field.
HyperMesh will find the 2 closest components from the connectors selected within a distance
of 10 units from each connector, and add them to their definition as link entities.
Set re-connect rule: to use id.

Should you want to swap parts in your assembly, connectors will not have to be re-created or
Altair Engineering

re-defined provided that the part you swap in has the same ID number (component ID) as the
part you take out of the assembly.
Click add links.

This updates the definition of our connectors.
2. Review the connectors definition using the info table function.
From the add links panel, select the connectors displayed.
Click info table.

This brings up the Connector Information Table dialog.
Connector information table and missing Link2.

This table can be used for many purposes. You can click Help from the dialog to obtain
detailed descriptions of the various fields and functionality.
Review the information in the table.

Our concern at this time is to make sure that all the connectors have two link entities (Link1
and Link2) defined. If you scroll down the list of connectors, you will find two instances of
only one link entity defined. For these two connectors, HyperMesh was unable to identify two
components from the list we provided within the search tolerance we specified.
3. Identify the connectors with a missing link entity in the graphics area.
Leave the dialog open, and reset the connectors selector in the add links panel.
Click connectors and select by id.

A dialog is displayed that contains a field to enter connector ID numbers.
In the dialog enter the two ID numbers, separated by a comma, of the connectors with
missing link entities (refer to the table).

Altair Engineering
Press ENTER to validate your entry.

The two connectors are highlighted in the graphics area.
These are the connectors we defined between the outer rails and the meshed cross member.
Since we created the initial connector at a node from the outer rail, the missing link, which
was not found when we using the 10-unit search tolerance, is the cross_member
component. Its ID number in the model is 9.
To fix the issue, we can simply add the missing link to the connectors definition using the
Connector Information Table.
4. Add the missing link entities using the Connector Information Table.
In the Connector Information Table, select one of the empty Link2 spaces.
Select the AddLink tab.
Uncheck the box for Increment layers by one.

We do not want to add a layer to this connector but simply update its definition with the
missing link entity.
Verify Link: Type is set to comps, Link: Project to is set to elems, and set Link: Rule to
use-id.
Click the space under Link:(ID) Name.

This temporarily hides the dialog and brings HyperMesh back to the foreground with a
component selector in the main panel area.
In the graphics area, select the cross_member component, or click component and select
cross_member from the list.
Click proceed.
This restores the dialog with the corresponding field filled with the name and ID number of the
component selected.
Altair Engineering

Adding a missing link entity
Click Add Link, and confirm your choice.

The table is updated.
Repeat these steps for the other connector that is missing the same link entity.
Close the Connector Information Table.

Note
We chose to update the connector definition using the table. Another approach could
have been to use the add link panel one more time on the two connectors, by
selecting the appropriate components and simply using a high enough search
tolerance.
In this section, we completed the definition of our connectors by adding link entities with the add links
panel. We then checked the definition of our connectors and found out that some were missing links
because of the search tolerance we initially set. We corrected this issue using the Connector
Information Table.
The connectors are now ready to be realized into finite elements.
To realize connectors into finite elements:
Once the connectors have been completely defined, they can be realized into finite elements that will
constitute the actual physical connection between the various parts. Realization takes place in the fe
realize panel, and connectors can be realized into a broad range of finite elements, including userdefined custom elements.
An unrealized connector (yellow) which successfully produces a finite element becomes a realized
connector (green). One that fails becomes a failed connector (red).
While some elements are solver neutral, some types available in the fe realize panel are solver
specific and require the corresponding template be loaded. In this section we will create some rod
elements between the outer rails (Rail_Out_Right and Rail_Out_Left) and the meshed

Altair Engineering
cross_member component. We will also create Nastran ACM elements between the inner and outer
rails, and at that point we will need to load the Nastran general template.
1. Realize the connectors between the outside rails and the cross_member collector into rod
elements using the fe realize panel, and assign the bolt_props property to them.
From the connectors module, select the fe realize panel.
Select the two connectors to realize from the graphics region.
Creating rod elements
Set element config: to rod.
Set the toggle to property =.
Click property = and select bolt_props from the list of property collectors.
Set proj tol = to 10.
Click fe options.
A secondary panel appears with additional options for the finite elements to generate.
Verify the toggle is set to without systems, and check the boxes for snap to node and
attach to shells.
We create node dependent welds for which we do not want individual systems. With these
options turned on, HyperMesh will change node location or even re-mesh local areas of the
shell mesh to ensure that the rod elements created remain normal to the shell elements and
share nodes with them.
Return to the fe realize panel and click realize.

HyperMesh returns a message signifying that it failed to realize the connectors we selected.
The connectors are now displayed in red.
Select the two connectors and bring up the info table.

The State column describes the nature of the errors encountered. In this case, no projection
was found onto the cross_member component. This means that the projection tolerance
needs to be increased.
Close the information table and set proj tol = to 20.
Click realize.
The two rod elements are successfully created and the connectors turn green.
Review the model and the rod elements that were created. Zoom into the model as needed.
You can review the information table again and the information that appears now that the elements
have been created: the Config field appears and the State is changed to realized for both
connectors.
Altair Engineering

Rod elements
2. Realize all the remaining connectors into ACM 71 elements and place these elements in the
ACMs component.
In the fe realize panel, select all the unrealized connectors.

Hint
Use a selection by window, or use the vis opts to temporarily turn off the realized
connectors and perform a selection of displayed connectors
Set proj tol = back to 10.
Set element config: to custom.
Click type = and select nastran 71 acm (shell gap) from the list of custom weld types.
This weld type is defined with hexahedral elements in the space between the shell elements,
and RBE3 elements tying the corners of the hexa to the closest shell elements. The property
field is automatically updated.
Click fe options, and set diameter = to 2.

This is the diameter of the nugget. It is used to determine the size of the hexahedral element.
Return to the fe realize panel and click realize.

HyperMesh complains that a valid template needs to be loaded for it to be able to create this
solver specific weld type.
Load the nastran/general template using the global panel from the permanent menu, and
set the current component to ACMs.
Select the connectors again and click realize.

The ACM welds are generated and no connector failed to realize.

Altair Engineering
ACM weld type
Use the info table to review the status of all connectors.

Note
Connectors that are realized into the wrong type of finite element can be unrealized
in the unrealize panel. They simply go back to an unrealized state (yellow) and can
be realized again into a different element type.
Deleting the finite element associated with a realized connector turns the connector
back to an unrealized state.
In this section we realized our connectors into various types of welds. We also used the connectors
information table to troubleshoot issues with realization.
Once the finite elements have been generated, the next step consists of make sure they are of good
quality.
Altair Engineering

To check the quality of the elements obtained from realization:

The quality panel from the connectors module is used to check the quality of the 1D and 3D finite
elements obtained from the realization process. Some of the typical concerns with 1D elements are
their length, whether they are attached to the shells or not (free 1D), and whether they are normal to
them or not (angle). For 3D elements, length can also be a concern as is the jacobian.
1. Use the quality panel to check that there are no free 1D elements, that their length is not more
than 5 units and that their angle to the shell normal is less than 12 degrees.
From the connectors module select the quality panel.
Select the 1D elems sub-panel.
Check the box for free 1Ds and click check.

No 1D element fails this check.
Check the box for length > and specify a value of 5 in the corresponding text field.
Click check.
Two connectors fail and are highlighted. The corresponding rod elements have a length that
exceeds the five units we set. Looking at the model and the distance between the parts
connected by these elements, we can conclude that this is a direct consequence of the
spacing between the parts involved.
Uncheck the box for the length criterion and check the box for angle >.
Enter a maximum value for the angle of 12 degrees and click check.
No 1D element fails this check either.
2. Use the quality panel to check that 3D elements do not have a length that exceeds 5 units and
that their jacobian is higher than 0.7.
Select the 3D elems sub-panel.
Check the box for length > and specify a value of 5 in the corresponding text field.
Click check.
No connector fails.
Check the box for jacobian < and enter a value of 0.7.
Click check.
No 3D element fails this check either.
In this section, we checked the quality of the finite elements we obtained in the realization process.
Since all connectors were successfully realized, and the quality of the finite elements is satisfactory,
we can now:
Export a master connectors file.
Delete the connectors in our model.
To export a master connectors file:

Most of the information stored in the connector entity can be exported to a master connectors file.
This file contains connector entity information such as location, link entity, link entity state, and link
entity rules. The exported file may also contain metadata information stored in the connector.

Altair Engineering
The master connectors file contains welding information at a given location and also assists in the
weld automation process. An exported master connectors file can be re-imported using the
connectors reader to re-create weld connectors at all or selected connectors.
This file can be exported from the Connector Information Table.
1. Export a master connectors file with the information for all the connectors in the model.
From the connectors module, go to the fe realize panel, or any other panel that offers the
info table function.
Select all connectors.
Click info table.
From the Connector Information Table, select Export.
Use the file browser to set the name and location of the exported file.
Use, for example, your working directory.
Click Save.
Use any text editor to review the content and format of the exported file.
Note
Review the Connectors section of the on-line help for detailed information on the
master connectors file, its content and format.
2. Delete the connectors in the model.
From the connectors module, select the delete panel.
Set the type of entity to connectors.
Select all connectors.
Set the toggle to only.

When deleting connectors, you have the option the delete the connectors alone, or any
element that was created by realizing them as well. Here we do want to retain the finite
elements and only delete the connector entities.
In this section, we exported a master connectors file that can be used to re-generate connectors, and
we also deleted the connectors in our model.
So far we have only created connectors manually using the create panel. There are two additional
ways of creating connectors, and we will explore these automated ways in the next two sections.
To generate connectors from a master connectors file:
Automating the welding process is key to the activity of model assembly. HyperMesh has the
capability of automatically generating connectors from master connectors files as well as numerous
master weld files. For master weld files that are not supported, templates to work with the connectors
reader can be easily created.
For example, the connector entity created with the information specified in the master connectors file
is displayed as unrealized (yellow). To realize the connectors as welds, the connector fe realize
panel must be used.
In this section, import a master connector file to generate connectors between the unmeshed parts,
as well as between some of the surfaces and meshed parts. Realize these connectors into weld
elements.
Altair Engineering

1. From the files panel select the import sub-panel to import the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/connectors.mcf using the WELD type.
Connectors are automatically created to connect the unmeshed cross members together as well
as with the meshed parts of the assembly. These connectors are placed, along with the weld
points which where also automatically created, into a new component called CE_Locations.
Connectors from master connectors file

2. Set the current component to welds.
3. Realize the connectors into welds, assigning the weld_props property and ensuring the welds
share nodes with the shells where appropriate.
From the fe realize panel select the connectors displayed.
Set the configuration to weld and property = to weld_props.
Go to fe options and verify that both boxes are checked.
Use a projection tolerance of 10, and click realize.
All the connectors are successfully realized into weld elements. Fixed points are created on the
surfaces where the welds are attached to ensure nodes are created at these same locations when
the surfaces are meshed. Meshed parts have local areas re-meshed to ensure that the welds share
their nodes with the pre-existing nodes (see image below).

Altair Engineering
Creating welds between meshed and unmeshed parts

In this section we automatically generated connectors from a master connectors file and simply used
the fe realize panel to generate weld elements.
To create connectors from existing finite elements:
In many situations it is desirable to be able to go from existing welds to connectors. One example is
when you have legacy data for which there are no connectors available and you need to update the
weld type to a different finite element (for example, to go from rigids to ACM welds).
Connectors, which offer a great deal of functionality and can be realized into all kinds of finite
elements, can provide substantial time saving in converting weld types in assembly models.
In this section, use the fe absorb panel to obtain connectors from the rod elements we created earlier
in this tutorial. Delete the rod elements and realize the connectors obtained into ACM elements.
1. Set the current component to ACMs using the global panel.
2. Use the fe absorb panel to generate connectors from the elements in the rods component.
From the connectors module, select fe absorb.

A dialog is displayed to define the finite elements from which to obtain connectors.
Use the drop-down menu to set the FE Configs: to rod.
Set the Elem filter: toggle to Select.

The Elements selector is no longer grayed out.
Click Elements to activate this option.

This posts an elems selector in the HyperMesh panel area.
Click elems from the HyperMesh panel area, and select by collector.
Check the rods component and click select.
Altair Engineering

Click proceed from the HyperMesh panel area to complete the selection.
Leave Move connectors to FE component un-checked
Click Absorb in the dialog.

Connectors are automatically generated at the locations of the rod elements. Their state is
realized as they are associated to the rod elements themselves. These connectors are also
automatically placed in the current component ACMs as we did not activate the option to
send them to the same component as the elements from which they were generated (rods).
New connector at rod location
Click Close in the dialog to close it.

Note
In the process above, we chose to select the elements to get converted. Given the
fact that the elements of interest were the only ones of their type in our model, we
could have simply used the all element filter in the dialog.
3. Delete the rods component collector using the delete panel.

As this component is deleted, the rod elements are also deleted and the corresponding two
connectors go back to an unrealized state. They can now be realized into ACMs.
4. Realize the two connectors into ACM elements using the fe realize panel.
Note
The connectors obtained from finite elements are defined in a manner that is consistent with
the information available from the finite elements. For example, re-connect rules will be set to
none. Use the info table function to review all connectors attributes.
In this section we learned how to generate connectors from finite elements for the purpose of
replacing these finite elements with a new weld type.
To swap parts in the assembly:
In numerous applications, the design of parts changes as part of the CAE process. With every new
design, new parts need to be incorporated in the assembly while others are removed. Connectors
give you the ability to easily swap parts in assemblies. With the use of re-connect rules, connectors
can identify the parts that are to be welded (link entities) using their names and/or their ID numbers.
When you do not use re-connect rules, link entities that you delete are removed from the connector
definition, while using re-connect rules will ensure that the link is maintained as a reference to a name
or ID. Therefore, it is important to verify that a re-connect rule has been specified for connectors
before attempting to swap parts.
In this section, verify that re-connect rules are set for the connectors involved. Swap then the
component cross_member (ID=9), with a new design, using the same ID number, imported as an
HyperMesh model.
Altair Engineering
1. Use the info table function to review the re-connect rules for the two connectors connecting the
meshed cross_member and the outer rails.
Go to any panel offering the info table function.
Select the two connectors and click info table.
From the Connector Information Table dialog, click Configure to load the Configure Table
View dialog.
This dialog lets you customize the table and select which fields are displayed.
Check the box for Rule, and click Close.

Notice how the Link fields now display not only the link entities but the associated re-connect
rules as well. Both rules are set to none, since these two connectors were not defined by us
but generated from finite elements which do not store this type of information.
2. Use the Search/Replace tab from the Connector Information Table dialog to update both
connectors with the use id re-connect rule.
Select one of the cells in the Link2 column that reads comp 9 none.
The cell is highlighted in blue. The characteristics of this link entity are displayed in the
Search/Replace tab on the Find what line. Changes can be made by setting options in the
Replace with line.
Use the drop down menu on the Replace with line to set Link: Rule to use id.
Click Update, and confirm your choice in the confirmation dialog.

The information is updated in the table itself as the cell selected now reads comp 9 use-id.
Repeat these steps for the second cell in the Link2 column.
Component 9 is the only component we will swap, so this is the only link entity for which we
will update the re-connect rule.
Updating re-connect rules

Altair Engineering

Close the Connector Information Table.
3. Delete the cross_member component collector.

Notice how the two connectors go back to an unrealized state (yellow) as the component used as
one of the link entities has been removed.
4. From the files panel select the import sub-panel to import the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/swap_part.hm using the HM MODEL import type.
A cross member similar to the one we deleted, but with different dimensions, is imported.
5. From the disp panel on the permanent menu use the name(id) option to verify that the ID
number of the imported cross member (new_cross_member component) is 9.
6. Set the current component to ACMs in the global panel.
7. Re-realize the two connectors between the outer rails and the new cross member into ACM
elements.
In this section, we reviewed the definition of some connectors and updated their re-connect rules in
preparation for swapping of parts. After a part was removed, the connectors, using this part as a link
entity, went back to being. Once the new part was imported, a simple realization was required to
incorporate it into the assembly.
own reference.
In this tutorial, we covered all three methods for creating connectors:
Manually, using the connectors module.
Automatically, importing a master connectors file.
Automatically, generating connectors from existing weld elements.
We also learned how to manipulate connectors and review and edit their definition to perform various
tasks related to model assembly.
One implication of creating node to node welds and using the attach to shell option is that the shell
mesh may be locally modified. Should such a modification bring some shell elements outside of your
quality ranges, you can refer to the tutorial, Measuring and Improving 2-D Mesh Quality using a
Quality Index - HM3320, for ways of modifying a shell mesh based on quality criteria.

Altair Engineering
Getting Started with HyperMorph - HM-3500

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Familiarity with some of the common tasks in HyperMesh is assumed.
HyperMorph is the mesh-morphing module available within HyperMesh. Use HyperMorph to:
change the geometric shape described by a mesh
alter dimensions of a meshed part parametrically
map an existing mesh onto a new geometry
create shape changes for use in optimization
The morphing process within HyperMorph allows you to alter models in useful, logical, and intuitive
ways while keeping mesh distortion to a minimum. Results from the shape changes can be used in
analysis, optimizations, and parametric studies.
In this tutorial, you will learn the terminology used by HyperMorph as well as some of its basic
concepts. You will also experiment with some of the tools available in the HyperMorph module from
the Tool page.
the on-line help, or click help while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help.
This tutorial requires about 25 minutes to complete and uses files located in the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you are unable to locate this directory at
your site, see Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>, or contact your system
administrator.
To familiarize yourself with domains and handles:
HyperMorph uses domains, handles, partitions, and morphing criteria to alter the shape of an entire
model or some portion of it. You have control over this process by relocating nodes, assigning
constraints to various nodes, making use of biasing and taking advantage of the symmetry of the part.
You divide a model into domains each of which have "handles" and manipulate the handles to
change the shape over the entire model or some portion of it. When the handles move the shapes of
the domains change and the positions of the nodes within the domains also change. During the
morphing process the mesh changes in a logical way: the nodes near the moving handles move a
greater distance than the nodes near the stationary handles and the mesh stretches or compresses
to match the changes in the domain.
Domains consist of nodes or elements grouped according to various modeling features such as
edges, break angles, and curvature changes. Handles accompany each domain and provide the
mechanism to modify the shape of the model or a portion of the model.
Domains and handles are divided into two basic groups, global and local. The global group consists
of a single domain called the global domain and eight global handles that form a box around the
model. Every node in the model is part of the global domain and thus, global handles can influence
every node in the model. The intent of the global handles are to make large-scale shape changes to
the model. Wherever there is a high density of nodes, you may also find a global handle.
The local group consists of four types of local domains (1D domains, 2D domains, 3D domains, and
edge domains) and their handles. These local handles can only influence nodes contained in the
domains they are associated with. Use local handles to make localized shape changes to the model.
Altair Engineering

Models may have only a global domain if you want to make changes over the entire model. Models
may have only local domains so changes are applied to a specific portion of the model. In addition,
models can also contain both global and local handles and domains, allowing you to logically
combine both large and small shape changes.
The following is a table describing the various domains and its corresponding symbol used in the
display of the model.
When a global domain and handles are generated automatically using autogenerate or created with
the create handles option turned on, HyperMorph generates eight global handles, one at each of the
eight corners of a box laid out along the global axes surrounding the model. These global handles are
named "corner" followed by a number from one to eight. HyperMorph will also place at least one
global handle within the box in areas of the models peak nodal density. These handles are named
"handle" followed by a number.
The automatic global handle generation works particularly well for space-frame models such as full
car models. However, for small models such as a control arm or bracket, the recommendation is for
you to build your own local domains and handles since you are more likely interested in changing the
local area rather than the entire model.
If the autogenerate process does not create handles in the positions where you want them to be, you
can always delete them, reposition them, or create additional handles.
Handles can be further classified as independent or dependent. An independent handle creates
displacements to the model only when it is moved. A dependent handle creates displacements
influenced from its own movements and that of other handles it is linked to. A handle can be made
dependent on one or more handles. This allows you to create as many layers of dependencies
between your handles as you desire. For example, you can make all the handles at one cross section
of a beam (modeling using 2D shell elements) dependent on a single handle allowing you to move an
entire cross section while only having to select one independent handle.

Altair Engineering
To create domains and handles:

In this section you will learn how to:
Create a global domain and global handles
Create local domains and handles
Autogenerate both global and local domains and handles
1. From the files panel, select the hm file sub-panel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/domain_and_handle.hm.
2. Create a global domain and create handles using the domains panel.
From the Tool page, select the HyperMorph module.
Select the domains panel.
Verify the middle top switch is set to global domain.
Verify the toggle is set to create handles.
Click create.
A global domain with its global handles (in red) are displayed on the screen.
Global domain
3. Create 3D domains with the elements in the solid component using the domains panel.
In the domains panel, set the middle top switch to 3D domains.
Select solid.
Click create.
Altair Engineering

Create domains from solid elements

Both 3D domains and 2D domains are created on the solid collector. The solid elements
selected are grouped together into a 3D domain. New 2D elements are created on the faces
of each 3D domain and placed into a component called ^morphface. The elements on the
face of each 3D domain are placed into a 2D domain. If the partition domains option is
active this 2D domain is then sub-divided. Do not delete or edit the elements in this 2D
domain or rename the ^morphface component. If you do, the results are unpredictable.
Edge domains are placed around each 2D domain and local handles are created at the
ends of each edge domain. In cases where the solid element contains shell elements on
one face, then HyperMorph will not create ^morphface elements coincident with the
existing shell elements on that particular face.
4. From the domains panel, select the create sub-panel.
5. Click autogenerate.
A dialog is displayed with the message This command will delete all morphing entities.
Continue? (y/n). Autogenerate deletes all the domains and handles in the model before
generating new ones
6. Click Yes.
This action automatically generates global and local domains and their handles. You can use
partitioning parameters to alter how these are created.

Altair Engineering
Autogenerate domains and handle

To partition a domain:
A way of logically dividing a 2D domain into smaller 2D domains, such as where the angle between
elements exceeds a certain value or where the domain changes from flat to curved, is called
partitioning. Partitioning makes it faster and easier for you to prepare your model for morphing. By
activating partition domains you can invoke partitioning when autogenerating or when creating a
domain. If you are unsatisfied with the results of the partitioning you can change the partitioning
parameters and try again, or edit the domains by hand from the domains panel using the create and
organize sub-panels.
The figure below shows an example of partitioning. For the model on the left, the 2D domain was
created without partitioning. For the model on the right, partitioning was used. Note how the 2D
domains divide along angle and curvature change boundaries.
Example of the results of a partition
Altair Engineering

In this section, perform a partitioning of a local domain.
In the domains panel, create a 2D domains using partitions domains of the elements in the set
elem element set.
From the domains panel, select the create sub-panel.
Change the middle switch to 2D domains.
Click elems, and pick by sets from the pop-up window.
Select elem set.

All the elements stored in elem set are highlighted on the screen.
Verify both retain handles and partition domains are unchecked.
Click create.
A new small domain is displayed on the screen.
Repartition domain
A smaller 2D domain is defined and appears on the screen (see figure above). Four new
handles are also identified at the corners of the new domain. This allows you to partition a
smaller, local domain within the original large domain. Moving the handles of the new
domain will influence nodes only within the new domain.
If partition domains is active, all 2D domains created will be partitioned according to the
partition criteria (edges, break angle, etc.) set from the parameters sub-panel of the
domains panel. If retain handles is active, HyperMesh does not delete any existing
handles when calculating the position of the handles for any created or organized domain.
To morph a model:
Once a model is divided into domains and handles, you move the handles to change the shapes of
the domains, and in turn change the positions of the nodes within the domains. The morphing
process consists of moving some handles to different locations:
In this section, interactively morph a mesh by:
Interactively moving a global handle
Interactively moving a local handle
1. Use the move handles sub-panel of the morph panel to morph a handle along xyz.
From the HyperMorph module, select the morph panel.

Altair Engineering
Select the move handles sub-panel.
Verify the lower switch is set to interactive and the lower toggle to real time.
Set the upper switch to along xyz.
Set x val = to 1.0.

This allows the selected handle to be moved in X direction.
With the handles selector active, pick any red circular handle on the screen.
Click morph.
Move the mouse cursor onto the display, and drag the handle you selected.
You can see the shape of the entire model changes according to the movement of the
mouse.
Click undo all to return to the original model.
2. Click reset under handles and repeat the above step using a local handle (yellow).
To understand biasing:
Biasing is a way of modifying the influence of a handle over other nearby nodes. You can change the
biasing factors associated with each handle from the set biasing sub-panel of the morph panel.
Higher bias values increase the influence that handle has over nearby nodes. Lower bias values
decrease the influence.
Bias values of 1 give linear results that result in morphs with sharp angles at the handle locations. A
bias value of 2 will result in morphs with a nice gentle curvature through the handle locations. Using
bias factors of 1 at the corners of a model and 2 everywhere else will generally give a smoothly
morphed model.
You can combine morphs with different bias values for the same handles. For instance, you can set a
handles bias value to 2, morph the mesh, then set it to 1 and morph the mesh again, resulting in a
cumulative effect. Refer to the figure below for example of how morphing a mesh using different
biasing values results in varying mesh patterns.
Altair Engineering

Results of different biasing values

To use morphing constraints:
Morphing constraints restrict the movement of nodes during morphing operations. There are five
types of constraints that can be applied to any node:
fixed
along vector
along plane
along line
along surface
When a perturbation is applied to a constrained handle, the handle moves along the constraining
feature regardless of the applied perturbation. For example, if within a particular domain you constrain
all nodes surrounding a hole to be fixed nodes, and then morph the domain by moving a handle, the
hole remains at the same location with the same size throughout the morphing process.
The set constraints feature is useful for morphing a mesh that has been mapped to, projected to, or
created on a surface.
In this section apply constraints and fix nodes. Constrain all nodes of a hole to make them fixed
nodes to leave the hole untouched while morphing the model.
1. Use the set constraints sub-panel of the morph panel to constrain nodes around the hole to
fixed.
From the HyperMorph module, select the morph panel.

Altair Engineering
Select the set constraints sub-panel.
Set the switch to fixed.
With the nodes selector active, select the nodes around the hole.
Click constrain nodes.
All selected nodes are now set to fixed nodes.
2. Use the move handles sub-panel to move along xyz one of the global handles (red).
Verify the lower switch and toggle are set to interactive and real time.
Verify the upper switch is set to along xyz and x val= is set to 1.0.
With handles active, pick any red global handle on the screen.
Click morph and drag randomly the model in the x direction.
Notice that every node moves except the hole.

To understand and use symmetry:
To simplify the morphing process, you may want to take advantage of any symmetric properties in
your model. There are two basic symmetry groups: reflective and non-reflective.
Reflective symmetries are 1-plane, 2-plane, 3-plane, and cyclical. They allow you to link two or
more handles so that moving one handle results in a corresponding movement across the symmetric
plane. Non-reflective symmetries are linear, circular, planar, radial 2D, cylindrical, radial + linear,
radial 3D, and spherical. Non-reflective symmetries change the way handle movements influence
nodes as well as link handle movements so moving one affects the others.
Symmetry types can be combined or applied to unconnected domains. Use the symmetry links
options from the morph panel to control whether the symmetric handle movements will be linked or
not. Refer to the HyperMesh online help for more information.
In this section experience the difference between meshes with and without a symmetric plane by
moving handles. The model file symmetry_examples.hm has circular and 1-plane symmetries
pre-defined.
1. From the files panel retrieve the file <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/symmetry_examples.hm.
You can discard the previous model or save it to your working directory for your own reference.
Altair Engineering

Examples for comparing symmetry

2. Use the move handles sub-panel to morph Handle C12 and Handle C13 along vector z-axis.
Select the morph panel.
Verify the lower switch and toggle are set to interactive and real time.
Set the upper switch to along vector and select z-axis.
Click handles to make it active, and pick Handle C12 and Handle C13 from the screen.
Handles C12 and C13 are two yellow handles with name tags in the Circular symmetry
mesh.
Click morph and drag the handles in the z direction.

Notice only the central ring area is lifted up.
3. Use the move handles sub-panel to morph handle Local2 along vector x-axis.
Under handles click reset.

This removes the selection of Handles C12 and C13.
Click handles and pick the yellow handle with tag Local2 from the screen.
Change the direction from z-axis to x-axis.
Click morph and drag the handle on the screen.

This enables the handle to move in the X direction. Notice the handle, Local4, moves along
the negative X direction due to the 1-plane symmetry.
Under handles click reset.

This removes the previous selection.

Altair Engineering
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the two models with name tags No symmetry. Those two models are
the same as the above two, except symmetry has not been defined for them. See the figure
below for the result.
After morphing with symmetry

To saves shapes:
Shapes are collections of handle and node perturbations. When you morph your model, HyperMorph
stores the results of the morph internally as a collection of perturbations. When you save your morph
as a shape, HyperMorph takes the difference between the initial state of the model and the current
state of the model and creates a shape entity to describe it. A shape can be stored as a perturbation
vector applied to the morph handle or directly to the nodes of the model.
Shapes allow you to: 1) Store different mesh shape changes in one model, 2) Re-apply a shape to
the mesh at a later stage, 3) Combine multiple shape changes simultaneously and, 4) Generate
shape variables for optimization using OptiStruct and store model changes for parametric studies
using HyperStudy.
For most morphing operations, a shape can be described as a collection of handle perturbations.
However, for situations where constraints have been added to the model or there is a radius-change
operation, node perturbations are necessary to fully describe the shape. When you are saving a
shape you can either save as handle perturbations or node perturbations. If you are going to
make changes to your domains and handles, you should save your shapes as node perturbations. If
you made no changes to your domains and handles, then save them as handle perturbations as
this will result in a smaller file size.
Once a shape is saved you can apply it to your model with any given scaling factor. To create a
shape, do the following:
1. From the Tool page, select the HyperMorph module.
2. Select the morph panel.
3. After morphing a mesh, select the save as shape sub-panel and save the modified mesh as a
shape entity.
Altair Engineering

own reference.
In this tutorial, we introduced some of the basic principles and tools of morphing using HyperMorph.
Important concepts such as domains, handles, partitioning, symmetry and biasing were introduced.
Some limited morphing tools were also used to morph our example model.
For additional information and techniques on using HyperMorph to apply morphing to models, review
the tutorials Understanding the HyperMorph Morphing Process - HM-3510, and Applying HyperMorph
Strategies - HM-3520.

Altair Engineering
Understanding the HyperMorph Morphing Process HM-3510

HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as the HyperMorph introductory tutorial Getting Started with
HyperMoph - HM-3500.
HyperMorph is the mesh-morphing module available within HyperMesh. In this tutorial, you will
explore the steps of a typical morphing process using HyperMorph:
perform a shape change using morphing tools from the domains and morph panels.
save the shape change/perturbation using the save as shape function
apply the undo function to return to the original model
Additionally you will learn how to animate shapes in HyperMesh using the deformed panel.
This tutorial is particularly useful if you want to learn some of the foundations of performing morphing
in HyperMesh using HyperMorph.
This tutorial requires about 40 minutes to complete. It uses a file located in the
To understand the process and tools available:
In general, you perform the following activities in this order:
1. Generate shape changes
In this step create domains and handles (global and/or local); refine these domains and handles
by removing/adding your own local/global handles, merging/editing domains, creating
dependency among handles, and so forth.
How you apply these features is important and sometimes crucial to the quality of your mesh
change. For example, you may find areas in your model, particularly those defined by curved
edges, not moved or rotated in the same way as the neighboring handles. To fix this, you need to
add more handles in your model along the edges you wish to move or rotate with greater
precision.
You may employ additional HyperMorph features as necessary: use a symmetric plane, constrain
certain nodes to move in a way you desire (fixed nodes, constrained nodes to move along a
surface, etc), apply different biasing values, and so on.
This section presents different processes you can use individually or collectively to do the shape
change.
Use move handles

In the move handles sub-panel you can move handles to morph a mesh. You may want to
use move handles in these situations:
You want to interactively morph a mesh.
Altair Engineering

There is no reference value for the result after morphing. For example, you want to
modify the depth of a channel, however there is no requirement about how much
distance you can morph the channel.
You want to have better hand control while morphing a mesh. Namely, you can adjust
morphing easily using the mouse cursor.
Five functions are available under move handles:
interactive
Allows you to move handles directly by dragging the mouse across the
screen. Select an entity such as a vector, line, plane, surface, or
domains, to orient the mouse location in 3D space, and move a handle
by dragging it to a new location. Not recommended for moves to
specific locations.
translate
Apply a perturbation to selected handles using along xyz with values

for x, y, and z and system =. Or select along vector and select a
vector.
rotate
Apply a rotation to selected handles by selecting a vector and base

node and selecting constant or linear.
move to xyz
Effective for positioning handles at specific locations or placing them on

lines, surfaces, or another mesh.
move to node
Effective for positioning handles at specific locations or placing them on

lines, surfaces, or another mesh.
Use alter dimensions

From the alter dimensions sub-panel you can create a morph by selecting a dimension in
the model and changing its value. The following could be situations when you want to use
alter dimensions: You want to morph the precise
distance between two nodes
angle made by two nodes and a vertex
radius of an edge domain
curvature of an edge domain
The basic idea revolves around selecting two nodes (a and b), and then selecting the handles
to those nodes that will change the dimensions (distance, angle, radius, or curvature)
between nodes a and b to the value you desire.
Use map to geom

From the map to geom panel you can map nodes or domains to existing geometry. There
are three functions available:
Map to line
Map to plane
Map to surface
When mapping to a surface, HyperMorph places all of the mapped nodes onto the surface,
shrinking the mesh if necessary. HyperMorph will not automatically stretch the mesh to the
edges of the mapped surface if the mapped surface is larger than the mesh. If this is desired,

Altair Engineering
you will need to use the user control option or use map to geom more than once to move
the nodes on the surface to the edges of the surface manually.
2. Save the morphs as a shape entity
From the save as shape sub-panel you can save the active morph as a shape (or shapes) entity.
You need to save as shape when:
Storing different mesh-shape changes in one model
Re-applying a shape change to the mesh at a later stage
Combining multiple shape changes simultaneously
Recovering the original model
Completing analysis, optimization, or parametric studies using OptiStruct or HyperStudy
3. Undo morph
You have two options to undo a morphing action. Both undo or undo all are found on the morph
panel. Undo returns you to the previous step before the last morph, and undo all returns the
model to its original state. redo or redo all re-applies the last shape change or all shape
changes.
To keep multiple shape changes independent, you must undo all morphs applied to the first
shape before applying the next set of shape changes.
Notes
In order to retain the newly morphed model, you need to save it as a HyperMesh data
file (*.hm) (from the files panel). When you do this, all the shape changes you saved
are stored with the HyperMesh binary data file (*.hm) as a shape entity. This allows
you at a future time to reload this saved HyperMesh database and re-apply the
shape changes stored in the shape entity.
Once you have saved the shapes with the HyperMesh model, you can recreate the
shapes anytime. This is useful when you desire to pick up where you left off or make
further modifications to a modified model. The following sections describe activities
you can do with the shape entities associated with HyperMesh models.
You can apply saved shapes to a model from the apply shapes sub-panel of the
morph panel. If you saved the shapes to the .hm binary file, to restore the shapes,
read in the file, go to the morph panel and select apply shapes. Applying shapes
before exporting a file modifies your model with the morphing changes you applied to
the model.
If you would like to visualize the quality of the mesh changes to avoid element
distortion problems, create animations. This can be done only after the morphs are
saved as shape entities and all shape changes are undone so you are back to the
original model. That means you can use the animations function after the undo
activity or you can reload the HyperMesh file with its shape entity saved, then, go to
the optimization panel in HyperMesh, select the shape sub-panel, link all shapes to
design variables, and then perform the animations. You can also scale the shape
changes or design variables.
To adjust parameters for domain generation:

The default parameters used by HyperMorph were selected to work for a large variety of models. In
some cases, due to the scale of the model or models that contain a lot of curvature, the morphing
parameters may need to be adjusted. The parameters, domain angle and curve tolerance, control
Altair Engineering

the generation of the domains and how they are subdivided (partitioned). In this section, modify these
parameters and generate domains for a model.
1. From the files panel retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/solid_plate_mesh.hm.
This loads a model containing both shell and solid elements.
2. Set domain angle = 50 and curve tolerance = 8.0 in the parameters sub-panel of the
domains panel.
From the Tool page, go to the HyperMorph module.
From the domains panel, activate the parameters sub-panel.
Set domain angle = to 50 and curve tolerance = to 8.0.

Note
The domain angle refers to the angle at which domains are broken into smaller
domains (subdivided). Curve tolerance refers to the angle below which a domain is
considered flat. This is used to recognize the faces of solid models and features of
shell models. Smaller domain angle or curve tolerance settings tend to generate
smaller domains and more handles.
3. Use the create sub-panel of the domains panel to autogenerate domains.
Verify partition domains is active.
Click autogenerate.
4. Click view from permanent menu, and select the right view.
5. Save the file to your working directory as solid_plate_mesh_1.hm using the files panel.
This file will be used in subsequent sections.
In this section we learned how domain parameters can influence the domains obtained from the
domains panel.
To improve morph control:
To better control the morphing operations, you can split edge domains, and add local handles. This
model contains a curved edge of shell elements. If we simply change the curvature of the radius
without adding any handles, we would end up with a rough curve. In this section compare the result of
morphing the model saved in the previous section and morphing this same model to which a handle
was added by splitting an edge domain. Start by splitting the edge and saving the current model with
a different name.
1. Use the edit edge sub-panel of the domains panel to split edge.
From the domains panel, select the edit edges sub-panel.
Verify the switch is set to split edge.
Click domain and pick the long edge domain from the plate component (see figure below).
Click node and select one node where the edge domain is to be split (see figure below)
Click split.
Repeat the last three steps for the second node location.

Altair Engineering
Splitting edge domain

2. Use the files panel to save the file as solid_plate_mesh_2.hm.
3. Retrieve the file solid_plate_mesh_1.hm previously saved to your working directory.
4. Use the move handles sub-panel from the morph panel to morph along vector one of the
handles.
Set the leftmost switch to along vector and select the N1, N2, N3, vector.
Verify the rightmost switch is set to interactive with the toggle set to real time.
Selecting handle and nodes
Altair Engineering

Click handles and select the corner handle (see figure above).
Click N1 and pick one node as described in the figure above.
Click N2 and select a second node.
Click morph and drag the handle in the direction defined by the two nodes.
Notice the mesh shape change.
Result of interactive morphing without additional handles

5. Retrieve the file solid_plate_mesh_2.hm from your working directory.
6. Repeat step 4 above to morph using three handles along the direction of the two same nodes.
The mesh change is not as dramatic (see image below). The use of more handles provides
increased control over the mesh changes.
Result of interactive morphing with additional handles

Altair Engineering
In this section we broke down an edge domain and added handles to gain additional control over the
way a mesh is morphed and elements are modified.
To use an edge domain to represent a bending deformation:
In this section, we look at how to lift one portion of the plate mesh away from the original surface, as
though the part represented was subjected to bending.
Start by creating the additional edge domain using a node list in the domains panel. This generates
new handles. Then use the morph panel to move handles and simulate the bending of the part.
1. From the files panel retrieve the file solid_plate_mesh_1.hm generated in a previous section.
2. Use the domains panel to create an edge domains using a node list.
Select domains and activate the create sub-panel.
Set the upper switch to edge domains.

A node list selector appears.
Select a row of nodes as shown in the figure below.
Selecting nodes to create edge domains
Click create to generate an edge domain with two handles on the plate component.
3. Save the file to your working directory as solid_plate_mesh_3.hm.

4. Use the morph panel to move handles along vector normal to the plane of the shell elements.
From the HyperMorph module select the morph panel.
Verify the right switch is set to interactive and the right toggle to real time.
Set the left switch to along vector, and select the z-axis vector.
With the handles selector active, select the three handles as shown as in the figure below.
Click morph and drag the handles.
Altair Engineering

One part of the plate component is lifted.
Bending the shell component

5. Click undo all in the morph panel to undo morph.
In this section we partitioned a 2D domain to simulate a certain type of deformation using the morph
tools.
To modify a flat face of solid elements by using partitioned 2D domains:
In this section, raise a flat side of the solid elements by partitioning the surface domains and pulling
the handles perpendicular to the original face.
Start by partitioning the existing 2D domains by creating a new domain in the domains panel. Then
use the morph panel to move handles along a vector normal to the face of the solid elements.
1. From the permanent menu, click view and select the iso1 view.
2. Use the domains panel to create a 2D domain with the partition domains option.
Set the switch to 2D domains.
Verify partition domains is active.
Click elems and select all 14 elements as shown in the figure below.
Hint
If it is not easy to select the elements from the screen, display only the
^morphfaces component and select the elements.

Altair Engineering
Selecting elements for partitioning
Click create.
A new 2D domain is created.
3. Use the morph panel to move handles along vector in the N1, N2, N3 direction normal to the
face of the solid elements.
From the morph panel, select the move handles sub-panel.
Verify the switch is set to along vector.
Set the direction to N1, N2, N3 and select three nodes on the plane of the solid faces (see
figure below).
With handles active, pick the 4 handles at the corner of the 2D domain previously created
(see figure below).
Selecting nodes and handles
Click morph and drag the handles.
Altair Engineering

Morphing a solid face

In this section, we modified the geometry of solid elements by working on their faces.
To remove a modified domain:
In this section, use the update sub-panel from the domains panel to partition domains after they
were created without the partition option. Use this panel also to reset the domain after modifying or
partitioning it.
1. Retrieve the file solid_plate_mesh_3.hm.
2. Use the update sub-panel of the domains panel to partition the domain that was created on the
shell elements.
From the Tool page, select HyperMorph.
Click domains and select the update sub-panel.
Click domains and select the 2D domain that was created in a previous section (see figure
below).
Update 2D domain
Click partition to remove the edge domain on the plate component.
In this section we restored a 2D domain to its state before being partitioned in a previous section.
Altair Engineering
To modify the radius of a curved face of solid elements:

When you want to modify the radius of the curved face of a group of solid elements, create the
necessary domains on the 3D elements, then alter the curvature of the face by morphing the edge
domains.
Start by retrieving the original file. Then create some 3D domains using the domains panel. Finally,
use the morph panel to alter dimensions for the radius of the edge domains.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the file <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/solid_plate_mesh.hm.
2. From the permanent menu, click view to select the iso1 view.
3. Use the domains panel to create 3D domains from the elements in the PSOLID and PSOLID.1
components.
From the Tool page select the HyperMorph module.
Set the selector to 3D domains.
Select PSOLID and PSOLID.1.
Click create.
3D domains are created for solid elements. 2D and edge domains are created on the faces and
edges of the solid elements.
4. From the files panel save the file to your working directory as solid_plate_mesh_4.hm.
5. Use the alter dimensions sub-panel of the morph panel to change the radius of edge domains.
From the morph panel, select alter dimensions.
Set the right switch to radius =.
Set the left switch to hold ends.
With the domains selector active, pick the two edge as shown in the figure below.
HyperMorph automatically calculates the radius and displays about 37.41 for radius =.
Altair Engineering

Selecting edge domains
Set radius = 70.0.
Click morph to alter the radius.
Result of changing the radius

In this section we experimented with additional ways of modifying the geometry of a solid mesh.

Altair Engineering
To apply multiple shapes:

In this section, learn how multiple shapes can be built during the same HyperMesh session. This is
particularly useful when you have 2 or more areas of a model that you would like to change using
morphing. The morphing module accommodates this by allowing you to make the first changes, save
them, undo them, and then make the second set of morphing changes and save them as well. Once
the specific changes are made, you can then re-apply them individually and create any solver files
necessary.
In this example, the first change will be to modify the height of one section of the model. The second
change is to modify the radii of another portion of the model. Once that is done, you review these
changes by observing the animations of the modified model.
For each change, first create domains as needed using the domains panel, then alter dimensions
using the morph panel. Once the model has been morphed, use the save as shape sub-panel of the
morph panel to save the morph as a shape. Finish by applying the shapes to the model.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the file solid_plate_mesh_1.hm from your working directory.
2. From the permanent menu, click view and select the rear view.
3. Use the morph panel alter dimensions sub-panel to modify the distance between nodes and
their followers.
From the Tool page select the HyperMorph module.
Select the alter dimensions sub-panel.
Set the right switch to distance = and the left switch to hold end a.
Click node a and pick the node as shown in the figure below.
Click node b and pick the node as shown in the figure below.
The distance between node a and node b is about 32.5. We are going to reduce this to 25.
Altair Engineering

Selecting nodes and handles by window
Under node a click handles, then click handles again and select by window.
Draw a window as shown in the figure above (windowA) and select the interior handles.
Under node b click handles, then click handles again and select by window.
Draw a window as shown in the figure above (windowB) and select the interior handles.
Input 25.0 for distance =.
Click morph.
The height changes. Notice none of the handles in windowA move since we set hold end a
previously.

Altair Engineering
Changed height
4. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape as sh1.
From the morph panel, select the save as shape sub-panel.
Click shape = and input the name sh1.
Set the toggle to as node perturbations.

When a shape is saved as node perturbations, it always has the same shape no matter
what changes occur with the morphing entities. For example, the shape change will be kept
even if a new partition is performed.
Click save to save the shape change.
5. Click undo all from the morph panel.

All shape changes are removed and the model returns to its original shape.
6. From the permanent menu select view and click restore1.
7. From the domains panel, select the parameters sub-panel.
Set domain angle = 90.0 and curve tolerance = 80.0.

Increasing the values of domain angle and curve tolerance leads to fewer handles to create.
Altair Engineering

Note
You can find additional parameters on the parameters sub-panel. They are handle
size, symmetry size, handle tolerance and global influence. For more detail,
please refer to the online help.
8. Use the domains panel to create new 2D domains as in the figure below.
Click elems and select the 24 elements as shown in the figure below.
If the selection from the graphics area is difficult, you can display only the ^morphfaces
component to make the element selection easier.
Select the 24 elements
De-activate partition domains, and leave retain handles unchecked.
Click create.
The 2D domain expands as shown in the figure below.
Expanded 2D domain

Altair Engineering
9. Using the morph panel, alter dimension to change the radius of the two curved edge domains of
the 2D domain created in the previous step.
From the morph panel, select the alter dimensions sub-panel.
Set the right switch to radius = and left switch to hold ends.
Click domains and pick the two edge domains as shown in the figure below.
Edge domains to pick
Set radius = 30.0.
Click morph.
The radii change.
Altered radii
10. Use the save as shape sub-panel of the morph panel to save the shape as node perturbations
with the name sh2.
11. Click undo all to return to the original model shape.
12. Use the apply shapes sub-panel of the morph panel to apply shapes sh1 and sh2 with a 1.0
multiplier.
Altair Engineering

Select the apply shapes sub-panel.
Click shapes and check both sh1 and sh2.
Set multiplier = to 1.0.
Click apply.
This re-applies to the model the two shapes created previously.
13. Use the apply shapes sub-panel to remove the applied shapes.
Set multiplier = -1.0.
Click apply.
This removes both sh1 and sh2 shape changes and the model returns to its original shape.
14. From the files panel, save the file to your working directory as solid_plate_mesh_5.hm.
In this section we started by creating various shapes for various morphs. We saved these shapes and
after the model was brought back to its original form, we applied these shapes using a multiplier to
perform new morphs.
To review morphing using animation:
HyperMesh allows you to review morphing via animation. By looking at the morphing animation, you
can
Visualize how much your mesh changes
Detect element distortion as a result of morphing
Graphically scale the morphed mesh for better visualization.
In order to review morphing animation, you will need to:

1. Morph a mesh
2. Save each morphing as a shape
3. Link a shape to a design variable
4. Review animation under the deformed panel
Steps 1 and 2 are the same as previously described. This section covers steps 3 and 4.
Linking the created shapes to design variables allows you to run a shape optimization using
OptiStruct. It also enables you to review animations of your shape changes as a result of morphing by
reviewing animations of the linked design variables.
1. Load the optistruct template in the global panel first before linking a shape to a design variable.
2. Use the shape panel to create design variables desvar from the shapes sh1 and sh2.
From the BCs page select the optimization module.
Select the shape panel.
Select the desvar sub-panel.
Set the function to create.

Altair Engineering
Set the right toggle to multiple desvars.

This enables HyperMesh to link a shape to a design variable, and you can review each shape
change in each animation file afterwards.
Set initial value = 0.0, lower bound = 0.0, and upper bound = 1.0.
This enables the shapes to be scaled by 1.0 during animation.
Click shapes and activate both sh1 and sh2.
Click create.
Note
From the shape panel you can access the undo morphing option where you can
disable all the shape changes and return your model to its original configuration.
Click animate from the shape panel, desvar sub-panel.

HyperMesh automatically jumps to the deformed panel from the Post page.
Click simulation = to load the animation file corresponding to each shape and click linear to
review the animation.
If the results of the animation are what you expect, then you can proceed with any solving
process you may have in mind or continue with any other steps you had in mind for the new
model.
If the results of the animation do not show what you wanted, then you can make additional
morphing changes and repeat this process until you have what you want. You could also revert to
the original model and try alternate approaches using HyperMorph to achieve the desired results.
own reference.
In this tutorial, we introduced one basic process of morphing using HyperMorph: creating domains
and morphs, save the morphs as shapes and undoing these transformations. Some of the morphing
tools were used to morph our example model, and the animation of shapes was also introduced.
For additional information and techniques on using HyperMorph to apply morphing to models, review
the tutorials Getting Started with HyperMorph - HM-3500 and Applying HyperMorph Strategies - HM3520.
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Applying HyperMorph Strategies - HM-3520

HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as the HyperMorph introductory tutorial Getting Started with
HyperMoph - HM-3500. Completing the tutorial Understanding the HyperMorph Morphing Process HM3510 is also recommended.
HyperMorph is the mesh-morphing module available within HyperMesh. In this tutorial, you will learn
how to apply some of the HyperMorph morphing strategies to various parts of a car model. Several
options from the domains, handles, and morph panels of the HyperMorph module will be applied to
the various models used.
Each section of this tutorial requires between 5 and 15 minutes to complete. Most sections are
independent but it is recommended that you take them all in the order presented.
This tutorial uses files located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you are
unable to locate this directory at your site, see Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>, or
contact your system administrator.
To change the radius of a hole:
In this section change the radius of a hole. Start by retrieving the model file and then creating
domains and handles using the domains panel. Finish by using the alter dimensions sub-panel of
the morph panel to change the radius of the hole.
1. Retrieve the file full_car_project_original.hm from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm
directory using the files panel.
2. Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to turn off all components except chassis1 and
chassis2.
3. Use the parameters sub-panel from the domains panel to set domain angle = 50.0 and curve
tolerance = 8.0.
From the Tool page select HyperMorph.
Select the domains panel and go to the parameters sub-panel.
Set domain angle = 50.0 and curve tolerance = 8.0.
4. Use the create sub-panel to create 2D domains for the elements in components chassis1 and
chassis2.
Go to the create sub-panel of the domains panel.
Select chassis1 and chassis2.

Both components are highlighted on the screen.
Verify partition domains is activated.
Click create.
Altair Engineering

Domains and handles are displayed on the screen.

5. From the permanent menu select view, and restore view1 by clicking restore1.
6. Use the alter dimensions sub-panel from the morph panel to set the radius = to 20 for the hole
(see image below).
From the morph panel, go to the alter dimensions panel.
Set the right switch to radius = and the left switch to hold center.
With domains active, pick the edge domain of the hole as shown in the image below.
HyperMorph shows the radius is about 12.5.
Selecting the circular edge domain
Set radius = 20.0 and click morph.
Hole with increased radius

7. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape with the name s1 as node perturbations.

Altair Engineering
8. Click undo all in the morph panel.

This brings the model back to its original state.
In this section, we created 2D domains and modified the radius of a hole. We then saved the morph
into a shape, and undid the morph.
To change the location of a hole:
In this section, move the hole on a bracket (Part A) and constrain the nodes of another bracket (Part
B) to move relatively in order to maintain the alignment between two holes on both brackets (see
figure below).
Start by creating dependencies between some handles on part B, and make them dependent on the
handle for the hole on part A using the handles panel. Then use the morph panel to move the hole.
Relocate a hole
1. From the permanent menu select view and select the right view.
2. Use the handles panel to create dependency between handles from Part B and the circle handle
from Part A.
From the HyperMorph module, select the handles panel.
Go to the update sub-panel.
With the upper toggle set to handles, click handles.

A list of handles appear with another handles selector on the far right.
Click handles on the right of the list of handles and select by window.
Altair Engineering

Draw a window as in the figure below and select the interior handles.
Selecting handles by window
Click view from permanent menu, and click restore1 to restore view1.
Under dependent on : click handles to make it active and pick the handle on the hole of part
A (see figure below).
Picking the independent handle

Altair Engineering
Click update.
All the selected handles on part B turn green to signify dependency.
3. Use the move handles sub-panel of the morph panel to move the hole handle on plane defined
with three nodes N1, N2, and N3.
Go to the morph panel and select the move handles sub-panel.
Set the lower switch and toggle to interactive and real time.
Set the upper switch to on plane and N1, N2, N3.
Pick N1, N2, N3 as shown in the figure below, and let N1 be the base node.
Click handles and pick the handle on the hole.
Selecting N1, N2, N3 and handle
Click morph and drag the handle.

You can see the lower bracket (part B) is moved while morphing the hole of part A. Notice
both holes on part A and part B remain aligned.
Holes remaining aligned

4. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape with the name S2 and as node
perturbations.
Altair Engineering


To chamfer / remove a bead pattern using HyperMorph constraints:
In this section, remove a bead pattern by using Hypermorph constraints. Use the set constraints
sub-panel of the morph panel to force nodes to a specific plane.
1. Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to turn off the display of all components except
chassis3, chassis4, and chassis5.
Notice the sharp channel in the model (see figure below).
Bead pattern to remove

2. Use the disp panel to turn off all existing domains and handles.
3. Click view and select the top view.
4. Use the domains panel to create 2D domains of elems selected by window according to the
image below.
From the HyperMorph module, select the domains panel.
Go to the create sub-panel.
Set the type of domains to 2D domains.
Click elems and select by window.
Select the elements interior to the window shown in the image below.
Rotate the model around the y axis using the left arrow key on your keyboard as needed to
make the window creation easier.

Altair Engineering
Chassis3, 4, 5 and draw a window
Click create.
5. Use the set constraints sub-panel of the morph panel to constrain nodes on plane using
nodes N1, N2, N3.
Go to the morph panel, set constraints sub-panel.
Click nodes and select by window.

Draw the same window as in the image above. Make sure to select all nodes involved in the
bead pattern.
Set the switch to on plane and set the direction to N1, N2, N3.
Pick N1, N2, N3 and a base node as in the figure below.
Altair Engineering

Select N1, N2, N3 and base node
Click constrain nodes.

The pattern is flattened and disappears.
Result of constraining nodes

6. Save as shape, with the name S3 and as node perturbations.
7. Click undo all.
To alter a channel width of a car hood:
In this section, change the dimensions of a card hood using the alter dimensions sub-panel of the
morph panel. Do this by creating first 2D domains, and then using the distance function of the alter
dimensions sub-panel. Apply the changes in dimensions by defining the new distance between
reference nodes and defining handles following these nodes.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all components except car_hood, and turn off all domains and

Altair Engineering
handles.
3. Use the domains panel to create 2D domains from the elements displayed.
Domains and handles on the car hood

4. From the morph panel, use the alter dimensions sub-panel to set the distance between
handles to 100 (see figure below).
Go to the morph panel, alter dimensions sub-panel.
Set the right switch to distance = and the left switch to hold middle.
Click node a and pick A1 as shown in the figure below.
Click node b and pick B1 as shown in the figure below.
Altair Engineering

Selecting node a and node b
HyperMorph automatically calculates the distance between end a and end b and shows the
value in the distance = field. It reads about 120.
Click handles under node a and pick the handles marked as node a followers in the figure
below.
Click handles under node b and pick the handles marked as node b followers in the figure
below.

Altair Engineering
Selecting followers
Click distance = and input 100.
Click morph.
The width of the entire channel is reduced based on the change in the distance between the
two nodes that were selected.
To generate a bead pattern on a bumper using autoshape:

In this section, generate a bead pattern on the bumper by using the autoshape panel. Start by
creating 2D domains on the bumper based on new parameters. Then use the autoshape panel and
use a multiplier to create the bead.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all domains, all handles, and all components except bumper.
2. Click view and select the rear view.
3. In the parameters sub-panel of the domains panel, set domain angle = 80.0 and curve
tolerance = 80.0.
4. In the create sub-panel, create 2D domains from elems selected by window (see figure below).
Elements by window
Four handles are created.
5. Use the autoshape panel to create four shapes for the four handles.
Go to the autoshape panel.
Verify magnitude = 1.0, and verify the toggle is set to element normals.
This ensures all the handles move along the directions of the element normals.
Altair Engineering

Click handles to make it active and select the four handles that were created previously.
Click create to create four shapes.
6. Use the apply shapes sub-panel of the morph panel to apply the previously generated shapes
with a multiplier = 80.
In the morph panel, select apply shapes.
Click shapes and select the last four shapes localXXX-N (XXX could be any number).
Set the multiplier = to 80.0.
Click apply.
Autoshape
7. Go to the save as shape sub-panel, and save the shape with the name S4 and as node
perturbations.
To add a fillet to an engine hood using biasing:
In this section, change a hard corner from an engine hood into a fillet using biasing. Start by creating
the necessary 2D domains using the domains panel. Then set biasing values for the various
handles, and finally use the move handles sub-panel of the morph panel to operate the
transformation.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off all domains and handles, and all comps except engine_hoodA.
3. Use the domains panel, parameters sub-panel to set domain angle = 70.0 and curve
tolerance = 70.0.
4. Use domains panel, create sub-panel, to create 2D domains as shown in the figure below.

Altair Engineering
Create three 2D domains

5. Use the morph panel, set biasing sub-panel to update the bias = value to 0.5 for the two
handles represented in the figure below.
Go to the morph panel, set biasing sub-panel.
Click bias = and input 0.5.
Click handles and pick the two handles shown in the figure below.
Click update.
Click screen edit to review the values assigned.
Setting biasing
6. Use the move handles sub-panel from the morph panel to create a fillet by moving two handles
on domain.
Go to the move handles sub-panel.
Set the left switch to on domains.
Altair Engineering

This enables the selected handle to move within the domain.
With handles active, select the two handles as shown in the figure below.
Click morph and drag one of the handles to create a fillet.
Moving handles to create a fillet

7. Use the save as shape sub-panel, and save the shape with the name s5 and as node
perturbations.
To morph a space frame model (full car model):
In this section, apply some morphing tool at the entire vehicule level. First, retrieve the orginal
full_car_project_original.hm model. Then create domains and handles using the domains and
handles panels. Finally, modify the roof and rear of the car using the morph panel and setting
constraints on the nodes that are not to be affected.
1. From the files panel retrieve the file <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
full_car_project_original.hm.
3. Use the domains panel to create the global domain with create handles option.
A global domain and red global handles are created.
4. Use the handles panel to create handles with the name roofs at the 4 nodes represented in
the figure below.
Go to the handles panel and select the create sub-panel.
Click name = and input roofs.
Verify the toggle is set to by nodes.
Click nodes and select the 4 nodes in the graphics area as shown as in the image below.
Click create to create four global handles

Altair Engineering
Under nodes click reset to clear the selection.
Creating four global handles

5. Click view and select the front view.
6. Use the handles panel to create handles with the name back at the 4 nodes shown in the figure
below.
Creating four handles on the back of the car

7. Click view and select the right view.
8. In the morph panel, set constraints sub-panel constrain nodes selected by window and set to
fixed (see figure below).
This constrains all selected nodes to be fixed nodes.
Altair Engineering

Nodes by window to set to fixed

9. Use the morph panel, move handles sub-panel to translate, along xyz, the fours handles on
the car roof in z val = 50.0.
From the morph panel, select the move handles sub-panel.
Set the lower switch to translate.
Set the upper switch to along xyz.
Set z val = to 50.0.
Verify x val = 0.0 and y val = 0.0.
With the handles selector active pick the four handles at the corners of the roof.
Click morph.
Morphed car roof

10. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape as S6 and as node perturbations.
12. Use the set constraints sub-panel to release all the fixed nodes, and then constrain nodes as
fixed using a new window (see image below).

Altair Engineering
Draw a new window to constrain nodes

13. Use the move handles sub-panel to translate along xyz the four back handles using x val= 100.0, y val= 0.0, and z val= 0.0.
Morphed rear
14. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape as s7 and as node perturbations.
16. In the set constraints sub-panel, click release all to release all fixed nodes.
To apply symmetry:
In this section, take advantage of the symmetry of the model to define a plane of symmetry, and have
morphing applied to one side of the vehicle applied to the other side at the same time.
Start by creating some nodes using the create nodes panel. Then use these nodes to define a local
coordinate system using the systems panel. Use this local coordinate system to define a 1 plane
plane of symmetry in the symmetry panel. Finally, translate one of the handles from the roof of the
car in the morph panel.
1. Use the F8 key to go to the create nodes panel, type in coordinates and create nodes at:
x = 0, y = 500, z = 1500 (node A)
x = 0, y = 0, z = 1500 (node B)
Altair Engineering

x = 400, y = 0, z = 1500 (node C)
2. Use F11 to go to the collectors panel and create a systcols using color 5, named new1, and
with no card image.
3. Click view and select the iso 1 view.
4. Use the systems panel from the HyperMorph module to create a rectangular coordinate
system based on the nodes created earlier.
Verify the lowest switch is set to rectangular.
Click nodes and pick node B.
Click origin and pick node B.
Click x-axis and pick node A.
Click xy plane to pick node C.
Click create to create a local system.
Adjust the size of the display by increasing value for size = (see figure below).
Local coordinate system

5. From the Disp page of the macro menu, click Off next to Elems : to turn off all elements.
6. Use the symmetry panel to create a 1 plane symmetry for the global domain, named REC, and
with a size = 100.
Go to the create sub-panel of the symmetry panel.
Click symmetry = and input REC.
Set the upper switch to 1 plane.
Click size = and input 100.0.
Pick color 12.
Click domains and select the global domain symbol from the screen,

Altair Engineering
Click syst and select the local system you just created.
Click create to create the 1 plane symmetry.
1 plane symmetry
7. Use the Disp page from the macro menu, and click On next to Elems : to redisplay all elements.
8. In the morph panel, move handles sub-panel, translate along xyz one handle (see image
below) with x val = -200.
Set the left switch to along xyz.
Set the right switch to translate.
Click x val = and input -200.0.
With the handles selector active, pick one of the handles on the back of the roof (see figure
below).
Click morph.
Altair Engineering

Morphed roof with 1 plane symmetry

9. Use the save as shape sub-panel to save the shape as S8 and as node perturbations.
10. Click undo all.
To match a mesh to new geometry:
In this section map an existing mesh to new geometry. This is particularly useful when small changes
are made to a design as creating a completely new mesh for the new design can be avoided.
1. From the files panel, retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/map_geometry.hm.
2. Autogenerate domains for the model using the domains panel.
From the Tool page select HyperMorph.
Go to the domains panel and select the create sub-panel.
Click autogenerate to automatically create domains and handles.
On the Disp of the macro menu, click 3 next to Vis opts:.

HyperMesh shades the surfaces in the model.
3. Use the map to geom panel to auto map all domains to the surface.
Go to the map to geom panel from the HyperMorph module.
Set the left switch to map domains and the right switch to map to surface.
Click domains and select all.
Click surf and select the surface from the graphics region.
Click auto mapping.

This maps all the elements to the surface.

Altair Engineering
Map a mesh to a surface
own reference.
In this tutorial, we applied several tools of morphing in HyperMorph to a car model. Important
concepts were applied to a real life example. Some local morphing was done, as well as space frame
morphing.
For additional information and techniques on using HyperMorph to apply morphing to models, you
can refer to the HyperMorph and Morphing Strategies guide available in the Users Guide / Building
Models section of the HyperMesh on-line help.
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Defining Composites - HM-4000

The composites panel aligns the element material angle of a mesh of shell elements with a selected
direction or coordinate system. This material angle is used in different analysis codes to define
composites, or other non-isotropic materials, or stress output request directions. You can also review
the material angle directions to verify that they have been set correctly. You can choose to have the
material angles displayed either as vectors or as continuous lines that follow the 0-degree direction
within each element.
To load the file for this tutorial:
1. Retrieve the HyperMesh database file,
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/composites.hm.
2. Load the nastran/general template using the files/template panel.
A valid analysis template must be selected for the composites panel to function properly.
Currently, valid analysis templates include:
Nastran
Ansys
To update all the elements to the correct element types for Nastran:
1. Go to the elem types panel on the 2D page.
2. Click on the elems button and select all.
When you select all, all element types (1D, 2D, and 3D) are updated.
3. Click update to update the element types.
Note:
For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the local x-axis of the selected system
onto the face of the shell elements. How each analysis code interprets this information
varies.
To assign the material direction using the system ID:

1. Check elem orientation from the composites panel on the 2-D page.
2. Indicate the elements that you want to assign material angles to.
3. Select elems, by collector, white and select.
4. Click the Element orientation method: switch and select by system ID.
5. Select system and enter ID = 1.
Altair Engineering

6. Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.
7. Click size = and enter a value that specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are
when displayed.
8. Activate join lines if you want to display connected lines instead of review vectors to represent 0degree ply directions.
9. Click assign.
To Undo:
Click reject immediately after clicking assign.
Note:
The selected elements are re-assigned to the global coordinate system (id = 0) and the
panel is reset. This function assigns the ID of the coordinate system to the selected
elements. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For visualization
purposes, HyperMesh projects the local x-axis of the selected system onto the face of
the shell elements. If you later modify the system, the element material directions
change implicitly.
To assign an orientation vector to the elements by using a system axis:

1. Select the composites panel from the 2D page.
2. Select the elems, by collector, red component and select.
3. Select the switch under Element Orientation Method and select by vector:
4. Set the switch under by vector to y-axis.
5. Set size = 2.000.
6. Set the color to blue.
7. Click project.
8. Click the card button from the permanent menu.
9. Set the entity selector to elems.
10. Select any element in the red component.
11. Click edit.
12. Review the card.
Note
The THETA field for the NASTRAN element card is now set to an angle for each
element in the collector. (This is the angle from the global coordinate system x-axis in
the model.)

Altair Engineering
Figure 1
Note
This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which is defined as the
angle between the node1-node2 direction and the projection of the selected local axis
onto the surface of the shell element. How each analysis code interprets this
information varies. For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the selected axis
onto the face of the shell elements. Any changes you subsequently make to the
specified system have no effect on the elements.
To assign an orientation vector to the elements by using a vector:

2. Select the elems, by collector.
3. Select collector color and click select.
4. Set the Element orientation method: to by vector.
5. Set the switch to vector.
6. Select the radial r vector from the spherical coordinate system on the bottom of the ball; the r axis
will flash once when you click on it,
7. Select the origin of the local spherical system as the base.
8. Set size = 2.000.
9. Set the color to blue.
10. Click review.
11. Click the card button from the permanent menu.
12. Set the entity selector to elems by double clicking on an element in the model.
13. Select any element in the green component.
14. Click edit.
Altair Engineering

Note
This function assigns a material angle, which is defined as the angle between the
node1-node2 direction and the projection of the selected vector, onto the surface of the
shell element, to the selected elements. How each analysis code interprets this
information varies. For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the selected vector
onto the face of the shell elements.
To assign an orientation vector to the elements by using an angle:

2. Select the elems, by collector, in the yellow component.
3. Select the yellow_sample collector and click select.
4. Set the Element orientation method: to by angle.
5. Enter angle = 45.00.
6. Click set.
7. Click the card button from the permanent blue menu.
8. Set the entity selector to elems by double clicking on an element in the model.
9. Select any element in the yellow component.
10. Click edit.
Note
THETA is set to 45.000. This function assigns the specified material angle, which is
defined as an angle from the node1-node2 along the surface of the shell element, to the
selected elements. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For
visualization purposes, HyperMesh rotates the node1-node2 edge of the element
around the element normal through the defined angle.
Note
This option should be used only in situations where great care has been taken to
assure that the node1-node2 direction of the shell elements are initially aligned
properly.
To reviewing ply directions:

1. Select the ply directions subpanel from the composites panel.
2. Select the elems, by collector, in the yellow component.
3. Select the yellow_sample collector and click select.
4. Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.
5. Click ply = field and enter the ply layer number that you wish to review.
6. Click review.
Note
Any elements that do not have a ply angle assigned, display the 0-degree direction as
the ply angle. Ply directions are set through card images in solver templates.

Altair Engineering
Working with Loads on Geometry - HM-4010

HyperMesh - HM-1000. This tutorial assumes you are familiar with some of the basic tasks in
HyperMesh, such as creating collectors for example. Familiarity with the automesh panel is also
useful, although not required.
When setting up a model for analysis, boundary conditions are usually needed, whether it is
constraints or any type of loading condition. HyperMesh allows for the creation of these boundary
conditions on finite elements directly but also on geometric entities. This tutorial explains how to
create loads on geometry in HyperMesh, and how to subsequently map them to finite elements. The
following topics are included:
Creating loads and boundary conditions on geometry
Mapping the loads from geometry to elements
Exporting to a solver deck
Modifying the mesh and re-mapping the loads to the new mesh
For more information on the various panels used in this tutorial, please refer to the Panels section of
the on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help.
The model file used for this tutorial is a C channel:
C-channel model in shaded mode

To retrieve the model, load the OptiStruct user profile, and create load collectors:
In this tutorial, we will experiment with the export of the loads applied to geometry entities. Therefore,
we will need to have a template loaded. In this section, retrieve the c-channel model and load the
OptiStruct user profile. By loading this user profile, the template will be automatically loaded. We will
Altair Engineering

also apply some constraints, forces and pressure load to our model, and we will need load collectors
to organize them.
1. From the files panel select the hm file subpanel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/c-channel0.hm.
The model geometry is of a C channel with two reinforcement ribs. The various surfaces are
organized into several component collectors.
2. Load the OptiStruct user profile using the user profile button from the Geom page.
The model does not contain any load collectors to store the loading conditions we will create.
Create three load collectors for constraints, forces and pressure loads.
3. From the collectors panel create a loadcol with the name constraints, assign color 2, and no
card image.
4. Similarly, create two more loadcols with names pressure and forces, assign colors 10 and 15
respectively, and no card images.
Everything is now ready for us to create the different boundary conditions.
To define loads and boundary conditions on geometry:
You can apply loads to geometric entities in a way similar to the manner in which loads are applied to
mesh by using the following panels from the BCs page: forces, moments, constraints, pressures,
temperatures, flux, velocities, and accels.
In this section we will apply constraints, pressure, and forces to geometric entities in the model.
Constrain the bottom portion of the c-channel using line data. Then create pressure loads on the top
surfaces. Finally add forces at the eight corners of the surfaces defining the top of the c-channel (see
image below).
Constraints on lines, pressures on surfaces and forces on fixed points

Altair Engineering
1. From the global panel set the current loadcol to constraints.

Note
constraints is displayed after loadcol: on the header bar. This indicates the current
load collector.
2. Fully constrain the bottom eight lines of the c-channel using the constraints panel from the BCs
page.
From the BCs page select the constraints panel.
Select the eight lines defining the bottom portion of the c-channel.
Lines to constrain
After size=, enter the value 1.

This is the size of the icons that will be used to represent the constraints in the graphics area.
Uncheck the box next to label constraints.
Constrain dof1, dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6 by checking their respective boxes.
Dofs with a check will be constrained, while dofs without a check will be free. Dofs 1, 2, and 3
are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom. Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational
degrees of freedom.
Click create.
This applies these constraints to the selected lines. They display as a triangular icon and
checking the box for label constraints would display what degrees of freedom are
constrained.
3. From the global panel set the current load collector to pressure .
4. Apply a pressure of 25 units normal to the top three surfaces using the pressures panel.
From the BCs page select the pressures panel.
Altair Engineering

Set the entity selector to surfs and pick the three surfaces defining the top of the c-channel.
Surfaces to apply pressure to
Click magnitude = and enter the value 25 for the pressure.

Specifying a negative magnitude ensures that the pressure load is pushing down on the
surfaces. By default the pressure load is created normal to the surfaces.
Toggle the display of the pressures from magnitude % = to uniform size =.

An arrow is used for the graphical display of pressure loads. The size of the arrow can be
input as a value or as a percentage of the actual pressure load applied. We choose to specify
its length as a certain number.
Click uniform size = and enter the value 1.

This is the size the arrows will have in the graphics area.
Uncheck the box next to label loads.

We choose not to display the actual value of the pressure load in the graphics area.
Click create.
This applies the pressure loads to the selected surfaces. They are represented with an arrow
as well as a label. This label can be template based (PLOAD4 here) or follow the HyperMesh
terminology (P) as specified in the modeling sub-panel of the options panel.
5. From the global panel set the current load collector to forces.
6. Creates forces at the 8 corners of the three top surfaces with a magnitude of 15 units in the
negative z direction using the forces panel.
From the BCs page select the forces panel.
Set the entity selector to points and select the eight fixed points defining the corners of the cchannels top surfaces.

Altair Engineering
Fixed points to apply forces to
Set the coordinate system toggle to global system.
Click the vector definition switch and select uniform size =.
Click uniform size = and enter the value 1.
Uncheck the box next to label loads.
Click magnitude = and enter the value 15.

The minus sign is used to specify a direction opposite to the one we will select in the next
step.
Click the direction definition switch below magnitude =, and select z-axis.
Click create.
This creates a number of point forces, with the given magnitude in the z-direction, to be
applied to the fixed points selected.
Altair Engineering

Loads on geometry
Note
If you sent some loads into the wrong load collector, use the organize panel on loads
to move them into the right collector.
In this section we created various types of loads on various geometric entities: lines, surfaces and
fixed point. The ultimate goal is to have these loading conditions applied to finite elements. We
will now create these elements.
To generate elements on the surfaces:
Use the automesh panel to create a quad dominant (mixed) mesh. The elements generated will be
organized into their surfaces component collectors to avoid the need of setting current component
collectors.
1. Create a mixed mesh with an element size of 0.25 units on the surfaces displayed using the
automesh panel.
Check the box next to reset meshing parameters to:.
After element size =, enter the value 0.25.
Set the element type to mixed.
Click the toggle to switch from elements to current comp to elements to surfaces comp.
This ensures that the elements created go into the surfaces component collector.
Set the meshing mode to automatic.

Altair Engineering
In this mode HyperMesh will automatically generate a mesh on the surfaces based on the
element size and the type of elements selected. No further user input is required or can be
supplied.
Click mesh.
2. Use the Disp page of the macro menu to set the graphics engine Gfx: to performance Per.
Meshed c-channel
In this section we quickly created a shell mesh on the surfaces. We can now try to map the loads that
were applied to geometric entities onto these finite elements.
To map the loads from geometry to elements:
A load collector, just like component collectors, can store both loads on geometry and loads on finite
elements. These two types of loads are separate and independent, and can therefore be manipulated
independently. At this time, our load collectors contain loads only in their geom side. By mapping
these loads on geometry onto finite elements and using our existing loadcols, we will also populate
their elems side.
In this section, use the load on geom panel to map the loads from the geometric entities (to which
the geometric loads are applied) to the mesh associated with these geometric entities for the
constraints and pressure load collectors.
1. Map the constraints in the constraints loadcol to the mesh using the load on geom panel.
From the BCs page select the load on geom panel.
Click loadcols and check the box next to constraints from the list of load collectors.
Click select.
Click Map loads.
Altair Engineering

The constraints previously applied to the lines are now also applied to the nodes of the mesh
associated to these lines. These constraints are placed in the same load collector as the
ones applied to the geometry, only in the elems portion.
Constraints mapped to the elements

2. Repeat the steps above to map the pressure loadcol to the mesh.
The pressure loads previously applied to the surfaces are now mapped to the nodes associated
to these surfaces. These pressure loads are placed in the same load collector as the ones
applied to the geometry.
To export the model to a solver deck:
When exporting the model using an export template, only the loads on mesh are exported. These
loads on mesh may have been applied directly to the mesh, mapped from geometry to the mesh, or
both. The export sub-panel of the files panel allows you to export loads to an ASCII solver-specific
file (according to the loaded export template). The loads are exported as mesh loads.
The all/displayed toggle allows you to determine which loads are exported.
If all is selected, all the loads on geometry that have not been mapped (if any), are mapped to loads
on mesh and all the loads on mesh are exported.
If displayed is selected, all the displayed loads on mesh (if any) are exported. All the loads on mesh
associated with the displayed loads on geometry (if any) are exported as well. If any loads on
geometry are displayed and have not been mapped, they will automatically be mapped to loads on
mesh and exported as well.
In this section, use the display panel, disp, on the permanent menu to ensure that only the already
mapped loading conditions are exported. One load collector stores both loads on geometry and loads
on mesh. The mesh (or multiple meshes) is associated with the geometrical entities to which the
loads on geometry have been applied. Each load type is stored in a dedicated section of the same
load collector.

Altair Engineering
The display panel allows separate or simultaneous visualization of loads on mesh and loads on
geometry. Turn off the display of loads applied to the geometric entities to display only the loads
applied to the mesh.
1. Use the disp panel to turn off the display of the loads applied to geometric entities.
Select the display panel disp from the permanent menu.
Click the upper switch and set the type of collector to loadcols.
Next to loadcols, toggle to geoms to modify the display of the loads applied on geometry.
Right mouse click to uncheck the boxes for constraints, pressure, and forces.
2. From the files panel select export sub-panel.

3. Set the toggle to displayed, and export the model to your working directory as an OptiStruct
deck.
Since loads applied to geometry were turned off in the disp panel in the previous step, only the
loads mapped previously will be exported using the displayed option in the export sub-panel.
You may open the exported deck in any text editor to verify that no OptiStruct FORCE card has
been exported in the deck.
In this section we experimented with the behavior of the export sub-panel when it comes to loads
applied to geometry and elements. We learned that with different combinations of the all/displayed
option and loads displayed in the disp panel, we can control what information gets exported.
To modify the mesh and re-map the loads to the new mesh:
Besides the convenience they offer, loads applied to geometry give you the flexibility of re-applying
them as many times as you want to different meshes. This feature is particularly useful when
remeshing a model without deleting complicated loads or boundary conditions. After remeshing,
loads or boundary conditions that have been applied to geometrical entities can be easily remapped
to the new mesh, while loads applied to elements are automatically deleted when the elements
themselves are deleted.
In this section, remesh the surfaces and re-map the loads on geometry to the new mesh.
1. Use the automesh panel to remesh all the surfaces using an element size of 0.5 units.
After element size =, enter the value 0.5.
Leave all other options used earlier unchanged.
Click remesh.
The automesher deletes the existing elements before creating a completely new set based
on the new element size. As you exit the automesh panel, the loads that were applied to the
initial mesh are removed since the elements are no longer there.
Altair Engineering

New mesh
2. Map all the loads on geometry to the new mesh using the load on geom panel.
From the BCs page select the load on geom panel.
Click loadcols and check the boxes next to constraints , pressure, and forces.
Click select.
Click Map loads.

The loading conditions initially defined for the geometric entities are now applied to the new
mesh. The various loading conditions are placed into the same load collector as the
corresponding ones applied to the geometry. Note that we did not have to display these loads
to map them.
Note
Deleting geometric entities to which loads are applied will also result in the deletion of
these loads. It will not affect any loads applied to the mesh, though.
In this section we experimented with the re-mapping of loads applied to geometry onto a new mesh.
Loads applied on geometric entities can be mapped several times onto the different finite element
entities attached to these geometric entities. We took advantage of this in a situation where a mesh
had to be changed, and it saved us from having to re-create loads on the elements.
own reference.
In this tutorial, we used several boundary condition creation panels to generate constraints and
various loading conditions on geometric entities. We then experimented with the mapping of these
loads on geometry onto finite elements. We also familiarized ourselves with the rules that govern the
export of loads on geometric entities.
We did not give any consideration to the creation of specific card images that need to accompany the
various loading conditions. For more information on how to generate the various loading conditions
for different solvers, refer to the Modeling / Solver Specific section of the HyperMesh tutorials.

Altair Engineering
Setting Up OptiStruct FE Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4100

This collection of OptiStruct tutorials demonstrate how to retrieve a HyperMesh database containing a
fully defined OptiStruct database, export the input deck, and run an OptiStruct job from the solver
panel in HyperMesh.
Since each tutorial builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first tutorial and continue
doing the tutorials in the following order:
Running OptiStruct from HyperMesh - OS0001
Running OptiStruct at the Command Line - OS0002
Analysis of a Plate with a Hole - OS0003
Analysis of a Coffee Pot Lid with Thermal Loads - OS0004
Normal Modes Analysis of a Splash Shield - OS0005
3D Inertia Relief Analysis using OptiStruct - OS0006
3D Buckling Analysis using OptiStruct - OS0007
Direct response analysis of a flat plate - OS0008
Modal response analysis of a flat plate
You can access these tutorials from the OptiStruct tutorials as well.
Altair Engineering

407

Altair Engineering
Setting Up NASTRAN Static Analysis in HyperMesh HM-4200

In this tutorial, use the HyperMesh NASTRAN interface to create finite elements on the geometry of a
plate with a hole, apply boundary conditions, and perform finite element analysis.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise and
continue doing the exercises in the following order.
Defining the model in HyperMesh
Applying boundary conditions in HyperMesh
Writing the NASTRAN input deck
Viewing the results

3. Click retrieve.
HyperMesh displays an Open file dialog.
4. Select the plate_hole.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
5. Click Open.
Note file: displays the location of the plate_hole.hm file.
Defining the Model in HyperMesh

To retrieve the NASTRAN template for this tutorial:
2. Select the template subpanel.
3. Click load.
4. Select the nastran directory.
5. Select the general template file.
Altair Engineering

6. Click Open.
Note template: displays the location of the general template.
The NASTRAN general template allows you to define NASTRAN-specific attributes in
HyperMesh.
To create material collectors and components:
Create your material collectors before creating your component collectors; components must
reference a material collector.
3. Select the switch after collector type: and select mats.
4. Click name = and enter steel.
5. Click card image = and select MAT1.
The MAT1 card image is loaded for the material steel.
7. Click E to make the status title active.
8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2E5.
9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.30.
10. Click return.
11. Click the switch after collector type : and select comps.
12. Click name = and enter shells.
13. Click card image = and select PSHELL.
14. Click material = and select steel.
HyperMesh goes to the card image panel for the new component, shells. HyperMesh assigns
color 8 to the elements that are organized into this component, and assigns the material steel to
this component.
17. Click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter 10.0.
A component is created named shells. Any elements created and organized into this component
have the thickness attributes defined by the PSHELL card. The elements have material attributes
defined on the MAT1 card by the material collector steel, since the shells component references
this material collector.
Use the card image subpanel to modify the card images for these collectors.
Altair Engineering
Use the update subpanel to define a different material for the components.
To mesh the geometry:
The automeshing module allows you to mesh interactively on surfaces. It also includes tools for
manipulating surface edges and meshing fixed points (locations where the mesher is required to
place a node). The elements generated are organized into the current component, shells.
2. Select the surface displayed in the graphics area and click mesh.
3. Click using size and biasing = and enter 40.
4. Click recalc all.
5. Click mesh.
6. The automesher creates about 400 elements on the surface.
Plate mesh using element size of 40mm.

7. Click return to save the mesh in the shells component.
Applying Boundary Conditions to the Model

In this section, the model is constrained such that two of the four edges cannot move. A total lateral
load of 1000N is applied at the edge of the hole so that all forces point in the positive z-direction.
To create collectors:
Altair Engineering

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter spcs.
6. Click create.
The collector is created.
7. Click name = again and enter forces.
9. Click create.
The collector is created.
To create constraints:
2. Click loadcol = and select spcs.
3. Click return.
4. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.
6. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.
7. HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.
8. Click interior, if not already selected.
Create a window around the left and right edges of the model. Do this by picking points on the
screen with your mouse.
The nodes along the left and right edges of the model are selected (see the figure below).
10. HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.

Altair Engineering
Select these nodes to apply single point constraints.

11. Click dof1-dof6, if not already selected.
Note
Dofs that are checked are constrained.

Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom
Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom
12. Click create to apply these constraints to the selected nodes.

To create forces on the nodes around the hole:
2. Click loadcol = and select forces.
3. Click return.
4. Click return again to access the main menu.
5. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.
HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.
7. Click interior.
8. Create a window around the hole of the model. Do this by picking points on the screen with your
mouse.
The nodes around the hole of the model are selected (see the figure below).
HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.
Altair Engineering

Select these nodes to create loading around hole.

10. Click nodes and select save from the extended entity selection menu.
11. Click return.
12. Select the count panel on the Tool page.
The nodes are counted automatically so that a calculation can be made to create a total force of
1000N.
13. Click the upper left switch and select nodes.
14. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity select menu.
The nodes saved in the forces panel are retrieved.
15. Click selected to count the number of nodes around the hole.
16. Click return.
18. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.
19. Click magnitude = and enter 1000/47 or /number of nodes found in the count panel.
The total load on the nodes around the hole is 1000N.
20. Click the plane and vector definition switch below magnitude = and select z-axis.
21. Click create.
22. Click return.
The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create a NASTRAN subcase (a load
step in HyperMesh).
1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.
Altair Engineering
2. Click name = and enter lateral force.

3. Click loadcols and select spcs and forces.
4. Click select.
5. Click create.
The load step is created.
6. Click return.
To create control cards:
1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BCs page.
2. Click SOL.
3. Click the switch and select either Statics (SOL 101) or Statics & Lin. Heat Transfer (SOL 24)
from the pop-up menu.
4. Click return.
5. Click PARAM.
6. Click AUTOSPC.
7. Click return.
8. Click return again to access the main menu.
Writing the NASTRAN Input Deck

In this section, write the NASTRAN input deck file, specified with the .dat extension, before running
NASTRAN.
To write your file:
2. Select the export subpanel.
3. If the nastran/general template is not specified in the template: field, click load and select
the general template file from the nastran directory.
4. Click Open.
5. Click write as and enter plate_hole.dat in the file name field.
6. Click Save.
This writes your HyperMesh database as a NASTRAN ASCII input deck.
To save your .hm file and exit HyperMesh:
Altair Engineering

3. Click save as and enter plate_hole_new.hm in the File name field.

4. Click save.
6. Click quit to exit HyperMesh.
To add output requests to your deck:
1. Open the plate_hole.dat file in a text editor, such as WordPad.
2. After the SUBCASE 1 card, insert the following cards:
DISPLACEMENT(PUNCH)=ALL
STRESS(PUNCH)=ALL
3. Save the changes to your file.
4. Exit the text editor and submit the job to NASTRAN for analysis.
Viewing the Results

After running NASTRAN, the punch file plate_hole.pch is created. This file contains
displacement and stress results for your linear static analysis. This section describes how to view
those results in HyperMesh. Use the utility program hmnast to translate the .pch file into a
HyperMesh results file.
To run hmnast, attach the results file and set visual options:
1. From a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, type the following:
hmnast d von_max plate_hole.pch plate_hole.hmres
2. Start HyperMesh and remove any model that is currently loaded:
Select the delete panel on the Tool page.
Click delete model.
Select Yes from the pop-up window.
3. Retrieve the input deck that was used to run the NASTRAN job:
Select the files panel.
Select the import subpanel.
Click FE.
Click triangle and from the pop-up menu select nastran.
Click the upper toggle to no FE overwrite.
Click import.
Choose plate_hole.dat.
Click Open.

Altair Engineering
4. Set the visual options:
Select the command subpanel.
Click browse and choose nastut1.cmf, located in the

Click Open.
Click execute.
5. Attach the results file for post-processing:
Select the results subpanel.
Click browse and select plate_hole.hmres, located in the directory from which
NASTRAN is run.
Click Open.

To view a deformed shape:
1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.
2. Click simulation =.
SUBCASE-1 is the only simulation. If you had created two load steps, two simulations would
exist: SUBCASE-1 and SUBCASE-2. The subcase IDs reflect your HyperMesh load step IDs.
3. Click Subcase-1.
4. Click model units = and enter 250.
5. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original, undeformed mesh
(refer to the figure below).
Isometric view of deformed plot overlaid on original undeformed mesh. Model units are set to 250.
To view a contour plot of stresses and displacements:
1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.
2. Click simulation = and select Subcase-1.
3. Click data type = and select Displacements.
Altair Engineering

5. Select top from the pop-up menu.

6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select von Mises Stress(max,all).
8. Click assign.
9. Click contour and compare your model to the picture below.
von Mises stress plot using discrete contours (in performance graphics mode).

Altair Engineering
Setting Up an ABAQUS Analysis in HyperMesh - HM-4300

This tutorial explains how to use the interface between HyperMesh and ABAQUS. The following
exercises are included:
Loading ABAQUS user profile
Defining material properties
Defining *SOLID SECTION for solid elements
Defining contact surfaces and interactions
Defining spring elements and properties
Defining loads and boundary conditions
Defining output requests
Defining *STEP card
Exporting the file to ABAQUS
Running hmabaqus and post processing

Loading ABAQUS User Profile

A set of standard user profiles is included in the HyperMesh installation. They include lsdyna,
nastran, abaqus, ansys, optistruct, moldflow, madymo, and HyperMesh. The user profiles change the
appearance of a panel - they do not affect the internal behavior of each function.
To load the ABAQUS user profile:
1. Click the user prof. button from the Geom page.
2. Select Abaqus as profile name and click OK.
3. Select Standard3D as template name and click OK.
Defining Material Properties

HyperMesh supports many different material models for ABAQUS. In this example, you will create
the basic *ELASTIC material model with no temperature variation. The material properties will then
be assigned to the elements through the component collector.
To read in the initial model file:
1. Select the files panel.
Altair Engineering

419

3. Click retrieve and select
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abaqus3_0tutorial.hm.
4. Click Open.
To set the pre-prepared visual options:
2. Select the command subpanel.
3. Click browse and choose <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abtut1.cmf.
4. Click execute.
5. Click return to exit the panel.
To create the *ELASTIC material model card:
2. Create the material collector with the appropriate card image:
Select the create subpanel.
Click the switch after collector type and select mats.
Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.
Click name = and enter STEEL
Click card image = and choose ABAQUS_MATERIAL
Click create/edit.
3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate material model cards:
Select Elastic in the option list.
By default, the selected type is ISOTROPIC. If it is not, click the switch and select
ISOTROPIC.
By default, the ELASTICDATACARDS= field value is 1. If it is not, input 1 to set the number
of datalines.
In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath E(1) and enter 2.1E5.
In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath NU(1) and enter 0.3
Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

To tie the material card to the component collectors:
2. Select the update subpanel.
3. Click the upper switch and select comps.
Altair Engineering
4. Click material = and select STEEL.

5. Double-click comps and select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list.
6. Click select to finish the selection process.
7. Click update.
8. Select material id from the list.
9. Click update.
Defining *Solid Section for Solid Elements

HyperMesh supports sectional properties for all elements from the component collector. In this
example, you will create the *SOLID SECTION card and tie it to an existing component collector.
To create the *SOLID SECTION card for an existing component:
2. Select the card image subpanel.
3. Click the collector type: switch and select comps.
4. Click card image = and select SOLIDSECTION.
5. Click load.
6. Select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list of components.
To view the *SOLID SECTION cards:
1. Select the card panel from the permanent menu.
2. Click the switch and select comps.
3. Click comps and select INDENTOR from the list of component collectors.
5. Click edit to view the *SOLID SECTION property card image.
6. Click return to finish the viewing process.
Defining Spring Elements and Properties

In ABAQUS contact problems, it is common to use weakly grounded springs to provide stability to the
solution in the first loading step. This section explains how to create these springs and how to create
the *SPRING card.
Altair Engineering

421
To reset the view for further processing:

1. Select the display panel from the permanent menu.
3. Click the toggle to elems.
4. Click the all button on the right side of the panel.
6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.
To create the *SPRING card:
2. Create a component collector with the appropriate card image:
Select the create subpanel.
Click the switch after collector type and select comps.
Click name = and enter GROUNDED.
Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.
Click card image = and choose SPRING.
Click color and select Color10.
Click create/edit.
3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate options:
Click the field beneath dof1 in the card image and enter 3.
The dof2 field in the *SPRING card is ignored by ABAQUS for SPRING1 elements.
Click the field beneath Stiffness in the card image and enter 1.0E-5
Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

To create the spring elements:
1. Select the elem types panel on the 1D page.
2. Click mass = and select SPRING1.
In HyperMesh, grounded elements are created and stored as mass elements since they only
have one node in the element connectivity.
5. Click component = and select GROUNDED from the list of component collectors.
As the spring elements are created, they will be placed in this component.
Altair Engineering
7. Create the spring elements:
Select the masses panel on the 1D page.
Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.
Type the following in the id = selection window: 451t460b3
This shorthand selects all of the nodes from 451 to 460 in increments of 3.
Click create.
Defining Contact Surfaces and Interactions

HyperMesh supports defining the *SURFACE card by using sets, components, or individual element
IDs with faces. In this example, you will use "individual element faces" to define the slave contact
surface and "sets" to define the master contact surface.
To create the *CONTACT PAIR card:
1. Select the interfaces panel from the BCs page.
3. Click name = and enter the name: CONTACT1
4. Click type = and select CONTACT_PAIR.
5. Click create.
To create the *SURFACE, TYPE=ELEMENT cards:
3. Click name = and enter the name, SLAVE
4. Click type = and select SURFACE_ELEMENT.
5. Click interface color and select a color.
6. Click create.
7. Follow steps 1 through 8 to create another *SURFACE named MASTER.
To define a *SURFACE by selecting element faces:
1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.
2. Select the add subpanel.
3. Double-click name = and select SLAVE.
4. Click the entity selector switch and select face.
Altair Engineering

423

8. Use the right mouse button to deselect BEAM.
10. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select top from the pop-up menu.
11. Double-click the solid elems button and select displayed from the extended entity selection
menu.
12. Click nodes to the right of face nodes and pick two nodes (or three nodes) as shown below.
13. Click add to the right of slave: to add these faces to the *SURFACE .
No modification of the *SURFACE card is necessary for surfaces defined using element faces.
When you export the deck to ABAQUS, a list of element faces is written after the *SURFACE
card.
To define a *SURFACE using sets:
3. Double-click name = and select MASTER.
4. Click the entity selector switch and select sets.
5. Click sets and choose BEAMSURF from the list of sets.
7. Click update to add the set to the *SURFACE.
To define the face identifiers of a set in *SURFACE card:
3. Double-click name = and select MASTER.
Altair Engineering
4. Click edit.
5. Click the selection box under Label and choose S1 from the pop-up menu.
Note:
HyperMesh does not display a *SURFACE that is defined using sets.
There are two ways to define the surface using a set:
To define the surface by explicitly specifying a face (as in this tutorial):
Click the selection box under Label and choose the correct face from the pop-up menu.
For this method, all elements in the set must be properly aligned and you must know
which face is involved in the contact.
To define the surface using the ABAQUS TRIM functionality:
Click Trim on the menu list.
Click the switch under TRIM and select YES from the list.
This method allows ABAQUS to automatically define the master surface based on rules
in the ABAQUS Users Manual.

To create the * SURFACE INTERACTION card:
4. Click name = and enter CONTACT1.
5. Click card image = and choose SURFACE_INTERACTION.
7. Select the Friction option.
8. Click the field beneath Fric_Coef(1) in the card image and enter 0.05.
9. Click return to accept the changes to the card image.
To add *SURFACE and *SURFACE INTERACTION cards to the *CONTACT PAIR card:
3. Double-click name = and select CONTACT1.
4. Click edit.
5. Click Property and select CONTACT1 from the list of properties.
6. Click Slave_Surface and select SLAVE from the list of groups.
Altair Engineering

425
7. Click Master_Surface and select MASTER from the list of groups.

8. Select SmallSliding from the option list.
Notice that the parameter SMALL SLIDING now appears in the card image.
Defining Loads and Boundary Conditions

A load collector in HyperMesh is a repository for loads and constraints. Each load or constraint must
belong to a load collector. There are two load collector card images: "HISTORY" and
"INITIAL_CONDITION". Loads or constraints that are to be used as history data (under *STEP)
should be collected into load collectors with "HISTORY" card image. These load collectors also need
to be added to the corresponding load steps (*STEP) from the Load steps panel. In contrast, loads or
constraints for model data should be collected into load collectors with "INITIAL_CONDITION" card
image. They will automatically be written out in the model portion of the Abaqus input deck
To create the HISTORY type load collector:
3. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.
4. Click name = and enter the name: HISTORY1.
5. Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.
6. Click card image = and choose HISTORY.
7. Click color and choose Color 5 from the pop-up menu.
8. Click create.
To create an entity set for loading:
1. Select the entity sets panel on the BCs page.
2. Click name = and enter LOADED.
3. Click the input collector switch and select nodes.
4. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select left from the pop-up menu.
5. Click nodes and select by window from the pop-up menu.
6. Click points on the screen to create the pick window shown in the picture below.

Altair Engineering

8. Click create.
To create constraints on the BEAM component:
2. Click loadcol = and select HISTORY1 from the list of load collectors.
As the constraints are created, they will be placed in this load collector.
4. Select the load types panel on the BCs page.
5. Click constraint= and select BOUNDARY.
8. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, dof2, and dof3.
9. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof4, dof5, and dof6.
10. Click nodes and select by sets from the extended entity selection menu.
11. Select ENDS from the list of entity sets.
12. Click select.
13. Click create.
To create constraints on the INDENTOR component:
Altair Engineering

427
2. Click loadcol = and select HISTORY1 from the list of load collectors.
As the constraints are created, they will be placed in this load collector.
6. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, and dof2.
7. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6.
9. Select LOADED.
10. Click select.
11. Click create.
To create forces on the INDENTOR component:
4. Select LOADED.
5. Click select.
6. Click the upper switch and select vectors.
7. Click magnitude = and enter 10.0
8. Click the lower switch and select z-axis.
9. Click the toggle to global system.
10. Click create.
Defining Output Requests

An output block in HyperMesh is a repository for output requests. Output blocks have to be added to
load steps (*STEP) from the Load steps panel.
To create a output block:
1. Select the output block panel from the BCs page.
2. Click name = and enter OUTPUT1.
3. Click create.

Altair Engineering
4. Click return.
To edit the output block:
2. Double-click name = and select OUTPUT1.
3. Click edit.
4. Select NodeFile in the options list.
5. Select U from the sub-options list of NodeFile.
6. Select ElFile in the options list.
7. Select S and SINV from the sub-options list of ElFile.
8. Select ContactFile in the options list.
9. Select CSTRESS from the sub-options list of ContactFile.
Defining *STEP card

A load step in HyperMesh corresponds to a *STEP definition in ABAQUS model history. Load
collectors, output blocks and groups (for explicit template) organized into a load step are output within
the corresponding step definition in the ABAQUS input deck.
The card previewer of the loadstep should be edited to define other history related keywords and
parameters including the analysis type, OP options (for various loads and constraints) and so on.
To create a load step (*STEP card):
1. Select the load steps panel from the BCs page.
2. Click name = and enter STEP1.
3. Click the loadcols button and select HISTORY1 from the list of loadcols.
4. Click the outputblocks button and select OUTPUT1 from the list of output blocks.
5. Click Create.
6. Click return.
To edit the load step:
1. Select the load steps panel from the BCs page.
2. Double-click name = and select STEP1 from the list of load steps.
3. Click edit.
4. Define parameters to the *STEP key word:
Select StepParameters in the options list.
Altair Engineering

429
Select Increment and Nlgeom from below StepParameters in the options list.
Click the field after INC= in the card image and enter 100.
5. Define the analysis type:
Click the AnalysisProcedure switch and select Static from the analysis types list.
You may have to use the vertical scroll bar on the left side of the card image to find the
AnalysisProcedure option.
Select the Dataline option from the option lists for Static analysis
Click the [ Init_Inc ] field in the card image.
Click the field beneath Init_Inc in the card image and enter 0.05 as initial increment.
6. Define the *FILE FORMAT card for the step:
Select FileFormat in the options list.
Click the switch under Options and select Ascii from the list.

Exporting the File to ABAQUS

The data currently stored in the database must be output to an ABAQUS .inp file for use with the
ABAQUS solver. The .inp file can then be used to perform the analysis using the ABAQUS outside
of HyperMesh.
To export the .inp file:
3. Select the TEMPLATE option
4. Click the toggle to all.
5. Click write as and type in a name for the input deck: job1.inp
6. Click Save.
To save the .hm file and quit from HyperMesh:
3. Click save as and type job1.hm.
4. Click save.

Altair Engineering

After you quit HyperMesh you can run the ABAQUS solver using the job1.inp file that was written
from HyperMesh.
Running hmabaqus and Post-Processing

After you have run the job using ABAQUS, the .fil file is available. In order to read the results into
HyperMesh, you must use the hmabaqus external results translator to convert the ABAQUS .fil file to
a HyperMesh formatted results file. Once this is done, you can attach the results file and perform
post-processing procedures.
If you ran ABAQUS and created your own .fil file, run the hmabaqus results translator to create the
results file. If you did not run the solver, you can use the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abaqus3_0tutorial.hmres file supplied in the
Tutorial directory.
To run hmabaqus:
1. Select the solver panel from the BCs page.
2. Click the switch at the top left corner and select hmabaqus.
3. Click the browse.. button at the input file: line and select job1.fil and click Open.
4. Click the browse.. button at the output file: line and select job1.hmres and click Open.
5. Click solve.
6. Click return.
To import the hm file, attach the results file, and set visual options:
1. If you have a model loaded into HyperMesh, follow these procedures:
Select the delete panel from the Tool page.
Click delete model.
Answer Yes in the pop-up window.

3. Read the input deck that was used to run the ABAQUS job or the input deck supplied in the
tutorials directory:
Select the import subpanel.
Click FE.
Click left toggle switch and choose ABAQUS from the pop-up menu.
Click the upper toggle to no FE overwrite.
Click the import.. button and select job1.inp, if you ran your own solver program (or
abaqus3_0tutorial.inp, if you want to use the supplied file).
Click Open.
Altair Engineering

431
4. Set the pre-prepared visual options:
Select the command subpanel.
Click browse and choose <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abtut2.cmf from

the tutorials directory.
Click execute.
If you are using the x version of HyperMesh, an error message may be displayed. Select
continue in the pop-up menu.
5. Assign the results file for post-processing:
Select the results subpanel.
Click the browse = and choose job1.hmres (or abaqus3_0tutorial.hmres if you

want to use the supplied file).

To post-process displacement and stress results:
2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00
Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.
3. Click data type = and select Displacements.
4. Click the lower leftmost switch and select model units from the pop-up menu.
5. Click model units = and enter 10.0
6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select Von Mises.
8. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select restore 1 from the pop-up menu.
9. Click assign.
The default location for ABAQUS to output stress values is at the Integration Points. The
hmabaqus program takes these values and averages them to the centroid of each element.
Therefore, the most accurate representation of the stress values as they were reported from
ABAQUS can be found with an assigned plot.
To post-process incremental results:
1. Select the transient panel on the Post page.
2. Click start with = and select step 1 inc 1, t=5.00e-02.
3. Click end with = and select step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00.
4. Click data type = and select Von Mises.
5. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.

Altair Engineering
If you are using the x-version, skip to Step 12.

6. Click transient.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Mises
stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to view
the history of the stress development.
7. Once the animation begins, click the leftmost toggle to visual options.
8. Click the toggle next to mode and select hidden line.
9. Click the toggle next to color and select contour.
10. Click return to exit the animation.
11. Activate the hidden line option.
12. Click transient.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Mises
stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to view
the history of the stress development.
13. Click return to exit the animation.
To set up the display for post-processing contact results:
2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.
4. Click none.
6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.
The elements displayed on the screen are the slave elements that are involved in the contact.
To view the contact results, the underlying element faces must be visible. The following steps
show all of the elements connected to these slave element faces.
7. Select the find panel on the Tool page.
8. Select the find attached subpanel.
9. Click the upper switch and select elems.
10. Click the switch under attached to: and select elems.
11. Click elems under attached to: and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.
12. Click find.
To post-process contact results:
Altair Engineering

433
2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00

Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.
3. Click data type = and select Contact Pressure.
4. Click the second switch down, which should be set to model units, and choose undeformed
from the pop-up menu.
5. Click contour.
At this point, an error message is displayed in the message bar that states:
Some node results were not found (ignored).
When ABAQUS reports contact results, it only reports values for the nodes directly on the slave
surface. Therefore, the nodes on the other end of the displayed solid elements dont have any
contact results reported from ABAQUS. HyperMesh recognizes that there are no values at
those nodes and reports an error message to warn you that they may be missing results. Also
notice that the contact pressure is high on the corners of the slave surface, but is zero in the
middle where no contact is occurring.

Altair Engineering
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh HM-4310

This tutorial explains how to use the ABAQUS Contact Manager for 2D models. The following
Loading ABAQUS user profile and model
Starting Abaqus Contact Manager
Defining surfaces for 2D solid elements
Defining surfaces by set
Defining surface interaction property
Defining contact pair

Loading ABAQUS User Profile and Model

A set of standard user profiles is included in the HyperMesh installation. They include LSDYNA,
NASTRAN, ABAQUS, ANSYS, OptiStruct, moldflow, MADYMO, and HyperMesh. While the user
profiles change the appearance of some panels, they do not affect the internal behavior of each
function.
1. Click the user prof. button from the Geom page.
2. From the profile name dialog select Abaqus and click OK.
3. From the template name dialog select Standard2D and click OK.
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abaqus_contactManager_2D_tutorial.hm.
7. Click Open.
To start Contact Manager:
1. Load the ABAQUS user profile.
2. Click the Contact Manager button in the Abaqus Macro menu.
This opens the "Abaqus Contact Manager" window.
Altair Engineering

3. Move the window to the bottom-left corner of the HyperMesh interface and resize it to your liking.
Defining Surfaces for 2D Solid Elements

In HyperMesh, you can define the *SURFACE, TYPE=ELEMENT card by using individual element
IDs or sets with corresponding face identifiers. In this exercise, you will create surfaces by defining
individual 2D solid element IDs and corresponding faces.
To create the "frame-top" surface:
1. Select the Surface tab in the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
2. Click the New button.
This opens the Create New Surface dialog.
3. Type frame-top in the Name: entry box.
4. Select Element based as the type of surface.
5. Click Color: button and select color 5.
6. Click Create.
This opens the Element Based Surface window for defining elements and corresponding faces
for the surface.
7. Select the Define tab in the Element Based Surface dialog.
8. Select 2D solid, axisymmetric, gasket option from the Define surface for: radio buttons.
9. Click the Elements button.
This opens the HyperMesh element selector panel.
10. Click the elems button.
11. Select by collector.
12. Check frame component and hit SELECT.
You will see the elements in the frame component highlighted.
13. Click proceed to return to the Element Based Surface dialog.
14. From the Select faces by: radio buttons select the Nodes on edge option.
15. Click the Nodes button.
This opens the HyperMesh node selector panel.
16. Select two nodes from the top of a selected solid element as shown below.

Altair Engineering

18. Type 30.00 at the Break Angle entry box.
19. Click the Add button to find all edges of the selected solids that fall within the break angle of the
edge defined by the two nodes.
This adds these edges to the current surface and creates special contactsurface elements for
display.
To delete edges you do not want use the Delete Face page.
20. When satisfied with the surface definition, click Close to return to the Abaqus Contact Manager
window
Defining Surfaces by Set

IDs or sets with corresponding face identifiers. In this exercise, you will create surfaces by defining a
set and corresponding face identifiers. HyperMesh allows only one set in a surface. It also does not
support a combination of sets and individual elements in the same *SURFACE data line.
To create the "silder-bot" surface:
1. Select the Surface tab at the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog and click the Display None button
to undisplay all surfaces.
It will open the Create New Surface dialog.
3. Type slider-bot in the Name: entry box.
6. Click Create.
This opens the Element Based Surface dialog for defining elements and corresponding faces for
the surface.
7. Select the Define tab at the Element Based Surface dialog.
8. From the Define surface for: radio buttons select the Element set option.
Altair Engineering

9. Click the Element set: entry box and select slider-bot from the list of existing sets.
10. Click the Review Set button to highlight all the elements in the selected set.
11. Right mouse click the Review Set button to reset the highlighting.
12. Click the Face: button and select S2 from the pull down menu.
13. Check the Display option and click the Update button.
This adds the selected set and face identifier to the current surface. In addition, it creates a
special display for the surface.
Notice the S2 face actually does not define a valid surface for elements in slider-bot set.
14. Click the Face: button and select None from the pull down menu.
15. Uncheck the Display option and click the Update button.
This adds the selected set to the current surface. Abaqus will generate a free surface the set.
Note HyperMesh, by default, does not create any display for surfaces defined with sets.
16. Select the Optional parameter tab in the Element Based Surface window.
17. Select the Trimming of open free surface option and select YES from the toggle.
18. Click Close to return to the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
Youll notice in the Surface: table that the Display options for the slider-bot surface is disabled.
At this point, you have created all the surfaces required.
19. Click the Display All button to display all surfaces.
You can review any surface by selecting from the table and clicking the Review button. The
selected surface will be highlighted with white and show up through the solid mesh when using
performance graphics. If the surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying
elements are highlighted. A right mouse click on all Review buttons will clear the highlighting.
Defining Surface Interaction Property

In this exercise, you will define the *SURFACE INTERACTION card with corresponding *FRICTION
card..
To create the "friction1" surface interaction:
1. Select the Surface Interaction tab at the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
This opens the Create New Surface Interaction dialog.
3. Type friction1 in the Name: entry box.
4. Click Create button.
This opens the Surface Interaction dialog.
5. Select the Define tab in the Surface Interaction dialog.

Altair Engineering
6. Select the Friction option as the surface interaction property.

7. This makes the Friction page active.
8. Go to the Friction page.
9. Select Default as the Friction type: and Direct option as the friction co-efficient definition
method.
Selecting this option means that the Exponential decay and Anisotropic parameters will not be
written to the input file.
10. Enter 1 in the No of data lines entry box and click set.
A single row will show up in the Direct table.
11. Click the first cell in the Friction Coeff column and enter 0.05.NOTE for Direct and Anisotropic
tables:
The column numbers in the table will change with the No of Dependencies selected. The
row numbers can be defined in the No of data lines entry box. Clicking the corresponding
Set button will update the table to have the specified number of rows.
For inputting values in the table, click on a cell to make it active and enter the values from the
keyboard. The table works like a regular spread sheet.
You can also read comma-delimited data from a text file by clicking the Read From a File
button. This button opens up a file browser window. Select the file and click Open to export
the comma-delimited data. The row number will be set to the number of data lines found in
the file.
Clicking the Right mouse button in the table displays a pull down menu with copy, cut and
paste options. Comma-separated data can be copied/cut into, or pasted from the clipboard
with these options. Relevant hot keys (for example, Ctrl-c, Ctrl-x and Ctrl-v in Windows) will
also work.
Clicking the left mouse button in a cell activates that cell. Clicking into an already active cell
moves the insertion cursor to the character nearest the mouse.
Moving the mouse while the left mouse button is pressed strokes out a selection area.
The left, right, up and down arrows move the active cell.
SHIFT-<arrow> extends the selection in that direction.
CTRL-leftarrow and CTRL -rightarrow moves the insertion cursor within the cell.
CTRL -slash selects all the cells.
BACK SPACE deletes the character before the insertion cursor in the active cell. If multiple cells
are selected, BACK SPACE deletes all selected cells.
DELETE deletes the character after the insertion cursor in the active cell. If multiple cells are
selected, DELETE deletes all selected cells.
CTRL -A moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the active cell. CTRL -E moves the
insertion cursor to the end of the active cell.
CTRL minus (-) and CTRL equals (=) decrease and increase the width of the column
with the active cell in it.
Altair Engineering

While you are over a border, pressing Button-1 (Left button) or Button-3 (the right button
in Windows) and moving the mouse causes interactive resizing of that row and/or column
to occur.
12. Click OK to go back to the Abaqus Contact Manager window.
Defining Contact Pair

In this exercise, you will define the *CONTACT PAIR card with corresponding surfaces and surface
interaction.
To create the "silder-frame" contact pair:
1. Select the Interface tab in the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
This opens the Create New Interface dialog.
3. Type slider-frame in the Name: entry box.
4. Select Contact pair as the type of interface.
This opens the Contact Pair dialog.
6. Select the Define tab in the "Contact Pair" window.
7. Click the Select slave surface: entry box to show a list of the existing surfaces.
8. Select slider-bot from the list as the slave surface.
9. Click the corresponding Review button.
The selected surface is highlighted with white and shows up through the solid mesh when in
performance graphics. If the surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying
elements are highlighted. Right mouse click on all Review buttons will clear the highlighting.
Note The corresponding Create New button opens the Create New Surface window for creating
a new surface. When you are done creating and defining the surface, the Contact Pair
window will return with the new surface selected as the slave surface.
10. Repeat steps 7 and 8 using the Select master surface: entry box and selecting the frame-top
as the master surface.
11. Click the Select surface interaction: entry box to show a list of the existing surface interactions.
12. Select friction1 from the list as the interaction property for the current contact pair.
13. Go to the Parameter page at the Contact Pair window.
14. Select SmallSliding from the available options.
15. Click OK to go back to the Abaqus Contact Manager window.
At this point, you have created the contact pairs required. You can review any contact pair by
selecting it from the table and clicking the Review button. Both the master and slave surface will
be highlighted highlighted with white and show up through solid mesh when in performance
graphics. If a surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are

Altair Engineering
highlighted. A right mouse click on all Review buttons will clear the highlighting.
16. Click the Close button to close the Abaqus Contact Manager window.
General comments:
The Edit ... button opens the corresponding window for editing the selected interface, surface or
surface interaction.
The Review button reviews the selected interface, surface and surface interaction as follows:
For surface, it highlights the selected surface in the HyperMesh window. The surfaces are
highlighted with white and show up through solid mesh when in performance graphics. If the
surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are highlighted
in the HyperMesh window.
For interface, it highlights corresponding slave and master surfaces together in HyperMesh
window. The surfaces are highlighted in the same fashion as mentioned above.
For surface interaction, it highlights the names of all interfaces using the selected surface
interaction in the Interface table. There is no graphical review for surface interaction.
The Delete button deletes the selected interfaces, surfaces or surface interactions. This button
accepts multiple selections from the Interface table.
The Sync button updates the Contact Manager with the current HyperMesh database. If you
create, update or delete any components, groups, properties or entity sets from HyperMesh
panels while the Contact Manager is open, click the Sync button to update the Contact
Manager with the changes.
If you minimize the Contact Manager window or it goes behind the HyperMesh window, clicking
the Contact Manager button in the Abaqus Macro menu restores it.
There is bubble help for important buttons. Place the mouse on the buttons for a few moments to
view it.
A double click on the interface, surface or surface interaction names in the table opens the
corresponding edit windows. A right mouse click on these names displays pull down menu with
options.
Clicking on the border with the left or right mouse button pressed down and moving the mouse
can resize columns in a table.
SHIFT and CTRL keys can be used with left mouse clicks to select multiple items in a table (useful
for deleting multiple items).
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh HM-4320

This tutorial explains how to use the ABAQUS Contact Manager for 3D models. The following
Loading ABAQUS user profile and model
Starting Abaqus Contact Manager
Defining surfaces for solid elements
Defining surfaces for shell elements
Defining surfaces by set
Defining surface interaction property
Defining contact pair

Loading ABAQUS User Profile and Model

A set of standard user profiles is included in the HyperMesh installation. They include LSDYNA,
NASTRAN, ABAQUS, ANSYS, OptiStruct, moldflow, MADYMO, and HyperMesh. While the user
profiles change the appearance of some panels, they do not affect the internal behavior of each
function.
1. From the Geom page click the user prof. button.
2. Select Abaqus as the profile name and click OK.
3. Select Standard3D as template name and click OK.
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abaqus_contactManager_3D_tutorial.hm.
7. Click Open.
Altair Engineering

To start Contact Manager:

1. Load the ABAQUS user profile.
2. Click the Contact Manager button in the Abaqus Macro menu.
This opens the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
3. Move the dialog window to the bottom-left corner of HyperMesh window and resize it to your
liking.
Defining Surfaces for Solid Elements

IDs or sets with corresponding face identifiers. In this exercise, you will create surfaces by defining
individual element IDs and corresponding faces.
To create the "box1-top" surface:
1. Select the Surface tab in the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
3. Type box1-top in the Name: entry box.
the surface.
10. Use the right mouse button to deselect all components except BOX_1.
13. Restore the Element Based Surface dialog (click the Contact Manager button or the icon in the
task bar).
15. Select 3D solid, gasket option from the Define surface for: radio buttons.
17. Click the elems button.

Altair Engineering
18. Select by collector.

19. Check the BOX_1 component and click select.
You will see the elements in BOX_1 component highlighted.
21. Select Solid skin option from the Select faces by: radio buttons.
22. Select a color from the Solid skin color: button.
23. Click the Faces button.
This creates a temporary skin of the selected elements and opens the HyperMesh element
selector panel.
24. Select an element from the top of the solid skin.
25. Click the elems button and select by face.
You will see all faces at the top of the solid skin are highlighted.
26. Rotate the model in HyperMesh interface to verify all desired faces are selected.
You can deselect any element (by right clicking) or add more if you like.
27. When you are satisfied with the element faces selected, click proceed to return to the Element
Based Surface dialog.
28. Click the Add button to add these faces to the current surface.
This creates special "face" elements (rectangles with dot in the middle) for display.
You can reject the recently added "faces" by clicking the Reject button. You can also delete
"faces" from the Delete Face page.
dialog.
To create the "box2-top" surface:
1. Select the Surface tab in the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog and click the Display None
button to undisplay all surfaces.
3. Type box2-top in the Name: entry box.
the surface.
Altair Engineering


13. Restore the Element Based Surface dialog (by clicking the Contact Manager button or the icon
on the task bar).
14. Select the Define tab on the Element Based Surface dialog.
17. Click the elems button, select by collector, check the BOX_2 component and click select.
You will see the elements in BOX_2 component highlighted.
19. Select Nodes on face option from the Select faces by: radio buttons.
20. Click the Nodes button to open the HyperMesh node selector panel.
21. Select two corner nodes (or three nodes) from the top of the selected solids as shown below.

23. Write down 30.00 at the Break Angle entry box.
24. Click the Add button to find all faces of the selected solids that fall within the break angle of the
face defined by nodes.
It adds these faces to the current surface and creates special "face" elements (rectangles with dot
at the middle) for display.

Altair Engineering
dialog.
To create the "cylinder-top" surface:
1. Select the Surface tab in the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog and click the Display None button
to undisplay all surfaces.
3. Type cylinder-top in the Name: entry box.
the surface.
10. Use the right mouse button to deselect all components TOP_CYLINDER.
12. Click the f button on the permanent menu.
in the task bar.)
17. Click the elems button, select by collector, check TOP_CYLINDER component and click select.
This highlights the elements in TOP_CYLINDER component.
19. Select Solid skin option from the Select faces by: radio buttons.
20. Select a color from the Solid skin color: button
21. Click the Faces button.
This creates a temporary skin of the selected elements and open the HyperMesh element
selector panel.
22. Select an element from the solid skin, click the elems button, select by face.
Altair Engineering

You will see faces all around the solid skin are highlighted.
23. Rotate the model in the HyperMesh interface to verify all desired faces are selected.
You can deselect any element (by right clicking) or add more if you like.
24. When you are satisfied with the element faces selected, click proceed to come back to the
Element Based Surface dialog.
This creates special "face" elements (rectangles with dot at the middle) for display.
dialog.
Defining Surfaces for Shell Elements

In HyperMesh, you can define the *SURFACE, TYPE=ELEMENT card by using individual shell
element IDs or sets with corresponding SPOS/SNEG face identifiers. In this exercise, you will create
surfaces by defining individual element IDs and corresponding normals to define the SPOS/SNEG
faces.
To create the "cylinder-bot" surface:
3. Type"cylinder-bot in the Name: entry box.
the surface.
8. Select 3D shell, membrane, rigid option from the Define surface for: radio buttons.
12. Use the right mouse button to deselect all components except BOT_CYLINDER.
14. Click the f button on the permanent menu.
Altair Engineering
in the task bar).
17. Click the elems button, select by collector, check BOT_CYLINDER component and click select.
You will see the elements in BOT_CYLINDER component highlighted.
18. Click proceed to return to the Element Based Surface window.
The normals of the selected elements will be displayed at this point. If the normals are too big,
click Reset, go to the view panel from the permanent menu and select front from the pop-up
menu. Restore the Element Based Surface dialog and repeat steps 15 -17.
Youll notice that all normals are pointing inwards.
19. Check the Reverse option.
It will create special "face" elements (rectangles with dot at the middle) for display.
21. You can reject the recently added "faces" by clicking the Reject button. You can also delete
"faces" from the Delete Face page
22. Go to the Adjust Normal page and select Display normals option.
The normals of all the "faces" in the curret surface will be displayed. Youll notice that all normals
are pointing outwards.
23. When satisfied with the surface definition, click Close to go back to the Abaqus Contact
Manager dialog.
Defining Surfaces by Set

IDs or sets with corresponding face identifiers. In this exercise, you will create surfaces by defining a
set and corresponding face identifiers. HyperMesh allows only one set in a surface. It also does not
support combination of sets and individual elements in the same *SURFACE data line.
To create the "box1-bot" surface:
3. Type box1-bot in the Name: entry box.
Altair Engineering


the surface.
8. Select Element set option from the Define surface for: radio buttons.
14. Go to the view panel from the permanent menu and select bottom from the pop-up menu.
in the task bar).
16. Click the Element set: entry box and select box1-bot from the list of existing sets.
17. Click the Review Set button to highlight all the elements in the selected set.
18. Right click the Review Set button to reset the highlighting.
19. Click the Show Faces button.
This creates a temporary skin of the selected element set and open the HyperMesh element
selector panel.
20. Select an element from the bottom of the solid skin, click the elems button, select by face.
You will see all faces at the bottom of the solid skin are highlighted. You can deselect any
element (by right clicking) or add more if you like.
21. When you are satisfied with the element faces selected, click proceed to return to the Element
Based Surface dialog.
The face identifier tags (color coded) of the selected faces are displayed at this point. In
performance graphics, the solid mesh sometimes blocks these tags. You might have to rotate the
model a little to make these tags visible or switch to Standard graphics.
Since all face identifiers tags for the bottom side of the box1-bot set are S3, you can use the S3
identifier for this set.
23. Check the Display option and click the Update button.
This adds the selected set and face identifier to the current surface. In addition, it creates a
special display for the surface.

Altair Engineering
Note
HyperMesh, by default, does not create any display for surfaces defined with sets.
However, if you check the Display option before clicking Update, it will create a special
display using contactsurface elements. The special display does not have any link to
the set in HyperMesh database. Therefore, if you edit the set later on, the display would
not reflect them automatically. In this case, you need to come to this page, check the
Display option and click Update button again.

To create the "box2-bot" surface:
This opens the "Create New Surface" window.
3. Type box2-bot in the Name: entry box.
the surface.
8. Select Element set option from the Define surface for: radio buttons.
14. Go to the view panel from the permanent menu and select bottom from the pop-up menu.
at the task bar).
16. Click the Create/Edit Sets button to opens the entity sets panel in HyperMesh.
17. Type box2-bot in the name = entry box, select elems option from upper switch, select all
elements from the bottom of BOX_2 component and click create.
18. When you are done creating/editing the set, click return.
The Element Based Surface dialog returns with the new set appearing in element set list.
19. Click the Element set: entry box and select box2-bot from the list of existing sets.
20. Click on the Review Set button to highlight all the elements in the selected set.
21. Right mouse click the Review Set button to reset the highlighting.
Altair Engineering

22. Click the Show Faces button.

This creates a temporary skin of the selected element set and opens the HyperMesh element
selector panel.
23. Select an element from the bottom of the solid skin, click the elems button, select "by face".
You will see all faces at the bottom of the solid skin are highlighted. You can deselect any
element (by right clicking) or add more if you like.
24. When you are satisfied with the element faces selected, click proceed to come back to the
Element Based Surface dialog.
The face identifier tags (color coded) of the selected faces display at this point. In performance
graphics, the solid mesh sometimes blocks these tags. You might have to rotate the model a little
to make these tags visible or switch to Standard graphics.
Since all face identifiers tags for the bottom side of the box1-bot set are S3, you can use the S3
identifier for this set.
26. Uncheck the Display option, if checked and click the Update button to add the selected set and
face identifier to the current surface.
Note HyperMesh, by default, does not create any display for surfaces defined with sets.
Youll notice in the Surface: table that the Display options for the box2-bot surface is disabled.
At this point, you have created all the surfaces required.
28. Click the Display All button to display all surfaces.
Select the display panel from the permanent menu, select comps and click all. Go to the new
panel from the permanent menu and select iso1 from the pop-up menu.
You can review any surface by selecting from the table and clicking Review button. The selected
surface will be highlighted with white and show up through solid mesh in performance graphics. If
the surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are highlighted.
Right mouse click on all Review buttons to clear the highlighting.
Defining Surface Interaction Property

In this exercise, you will define the *SURFACE INTERACTION card with corresponding *FRICTION
card..
To create the "friction1" surface interaction:
1. Select the Surface Interaction tab at the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
This opens the Create New Surface Interaction dialog.
3. Type friction1 in the Name: entry box.

Altair Engineering
This opens the Surface Interaction dialog.

5. Select the Define page in the Surface Interaction dialog.
6. Select Friction option as surface interaction property.
That makes the Friction tab active.
7. Select the Friction tab.
8. Select Default as the Friction type: and Direct option as friction co-efficient definition method.
Selecting this option means that the Exponential decay and Anisotropic parameters will not be
written to the input file.
9. Enter 1 at the No of data lines entry box and click set.
A single row appears in the Direct table.
10. Click the first cell on the Friction Coeff column and enter 0.05.
Note for Direct and Anisotropic tables:
The column numbers in the table will change with the No of Dependencies selected.
The row numbers can be defined at the No of data lines entry box. Clicking the
corresponding Set button will update the table to have the specified number of rows
For placing values in the table, click a cell to make it active and type in the values. The
table works like a regular spreadsheet
You can also read comma-delimited data from a text file by clicking the Read From a
File button. This button opens up a file browser window. Select the file and click Open to
export the comma- delimited data. The row number will be set to the number of data lines
found in the file
Clicking the right mouse button (Button-3) in the table shows a pull down menu with
copy, cut and paste options. Comma-separated data can be copied/cut into or pasted
from clipboard with these options. Relevant hot keys (for example, CTRL-C, CTRL-X and
CTRL-V in Windows) will also work.
Clicking the left mouse button (Button-1) in a cell activates that cell. Clicking into an
already active cell moves the insertion cursor to the character nearest the mouse.
Moving the mouse while the left mouse button (Button-1) is pressed strokes out a
selection area.
The left, right, up and down arrows move the active cell
SHIFT-<arrow> extends the selection in that direction.
CTRL-left arrow and CTRL right arrow move the insertion cursor within the cell.
CTRL -slash selects all the cells.
BACK SPACE deletes the character before the insertion cursor in the active cell. If multiple
cells are selected, BACK SPACE deletes all selected cells.
Altair Engineering

DELETE deletes the character after the insertion cursor in the active cell. If multiple cells
are selected, DELETE deletes all selected cells.
CTRL -A moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the active cell. CTRL-E moves the
insertion cursor to the end of the active cell.
CTRL minus (-) and CTRL equal (=) decrease and increase the width of the column with
the active cell in it.
To interactively resize a row or column, move the mouse over the border while Button-1
or Button-3 (the right button on Windows) is pressed.
11. Click OK to go back to the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
Defining Contact Pair

In this exercise, you will define the *CONTACT PAIR card with corresponding surfaces and surface
interaction.
To create the "top-cylinder-box1" contact pair:
1. Go to the Interface page at the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
This opens the Create New Interface dialog.
3. Type top-cylinder-box1 in the Name: entry box.
4. Select Contact pair as the type of interface.
This opens the Contact Pair dialog.
6. Select the Define tab in the Contact Pair dialog.
7. Click the Select slave surface: entry box to show a list of the existing surfaces.
8. Select box1-top from the list as the slave surface.
9. Click the corresponding Review button.
The selected surface is highlighted with white and shows up through solid mesh in performance
graphics. If the surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are
highlighted. Right mouse click on all Review buttons to clear the highlighting.
Note
The corresponding Create New button opens the Create New Surface dialog for
creating a new surface. When you are done creating and defining the surface, the
Contact Pair window returns with the new surface selected as the slave surface.
10. Follow step 7 and 8 using the Select master surface: to select the cylinder-top as the master
surface.
11. Click the Select surface interaction: entry box to show a list of the existing surface interactions.
12. Select friction1 from the list as the interaction property for the current contact pair.
13. Select the Parameter tab in the Contact Pair dialog.
Altair Engineering
14. Select SmallSliding from the available options.

15. Click OK to return to the Abaqus Contact Manager dialog.
To create the "top-cylinder-box2" contact pair:
Follow step 1 through 15 above to define the top-cylinder-box2 contact pair with box2-top as
slave surface, cylinder-top as master and friction1 as the surface interaction.
To create the "bot-cylinder-box1" contact pair:
Follow step 1 through 15 above to define the bot-cylinder-box1 contact pair with box1-bot as
slave surface, cylinder-bot as master and friction1 as the surface interaction.
To create the "bot-cylinder-box2" contact pair:
Follow steps 1 through 15 above to define the bot-cylinder-box2 contact pair with box2-bot as
slave surface, cylinder-bot as master and friction1 as the surface interaction.
At this point, you have created all the contact pairs required. You can review any contact pair by
selecting from the table and clicking Review button. Both the master and slave surface will be
highlighted highlighted with white color and show up through solid mesh in performance graphics. If a
surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are highlighted. Right
mouse click on all Review button will clear the highlighting.
Click the Close button to close the Abaqus Contact Manager window.
General comments:
The Edit ... button opens the corresponding window for editing the selected interface, surface
or surface interaction
The Review button reviews the selected interface, surface and surface interaction as follows:
For surface, it highlights the selected surface in HyperMesh window. The surfaces are
highlighted with white and show up through solid mesh in performance graphics. If the
surface is defined with sets (display option disabled), the underlying elements are highlighted
in HyperMesh window.
For interface, it highlights corresponding slave and master surfaces together in HyperMesh
window. The surfaces are highlighted in the same fashion as mentioned above.
For surface interaction, it highlights the names of all interfaces using the selected surface
interaction in the Interface table. There is no graphical review for surface interaction.
The Delete button deletes the selected interfaces, surfaces or surface interactions. This
button accepts multiple selections from the Interface table.
The Sync button updates the Contact Manager with the current HyperMesh database. If you
create, update or delete any components, groups, properties or entity sets from HyperMesh
panels while the Contact Manager is open, click the Sync button to update the Contact
Manager with the changes
If you minimize the Contact Manager dialog or it goes behind the HyperMesh window,
clicking the Contact Manager button in the Abaqus Macro menu restores it.
Altair Engineering

Bubble help exists for important buttons. Place the mouse on the buttons for a few moments
to view it.
Double clicking the interface, surface and surface interaction names in the table will open
the corresponding edit windows. A Right mouse click on these names displays a pull down
menu with options.
Clicking a table border, pressing and holding the left or right mouse button and moving the
mouse can resize columns in a table.
Shift and Ctrl keys can be used with a left mouse click to select multiple items in a table
(useful for deleting multiple items).

Altair Engineering
Defining *STEP using ABAQUS Step Manager - HM-4330

This tutorial explains how to use ABAQUS Step Manager to define history data (*STEP). The
following exercises are included:
Loading the ABAQUS user profile
Retrieving the HyperMesh model file
Defining the *STEP card and specifying *STATIC as an analysis procedure
Defining loads (*CLOAD) and boundary conditions (*BOUNDARY)
Defining pressure loads (*DLOAD) with an element set
Defining output requests
Exporting the database to an ABAQUS input file
For more information regarding the panels used in this tutorial, refer to the Panels section of the online help, or click the help button while in a specific panel to bring up its context sensitive help. For
detailed information on the HyperMesh ABAQUS interface, refer to the External Interfacing section of
the on-line help.
Loading the ABAQUS User Profile

A set of standard user profiles is included in the HyperMesh installation. They include Abaqus,
Ansys, HyperMesh, LsDyna, Madymo, Moldflow, Nastran, and OptiStruct. The user profiles change
the appearance of a panel - they do not affect the internal behavior of each function.
1. From the Geom page, click the user prof..
2. For Profile name:, select Abaqus and click OK.
3. For Template name:, select Standard3D and click OK.
To retrieve the HyperMesh model file:
1. From the files panel, select the hm file subpanel.
2. Click retrieve and select the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/abaqus_StepManager_tutorial.hm.
3. Click Open.
4. Click return.
Altair Engineering

The abaqus_StepManager_tutorial.hm file contains pre-defined model data. Use this file in
the following exercises to define the history data portion of this model.
To define a *STEP card and specify *STATIC as the analysis procedure:
In this exercise, you will create a *STEP card with the *STATIC analysis procedure.
1. If you are currently not on the Abaqus macro page, click Abaqus from the macro menu.
2. Click Step Manager.
The Step Manager dialog is displayed.
3. Click New and enter step1 in the Name: text box.
4. Click Create to create the step.
This creates a step called step1 and opens the Load Step edit dialog.
5. From the tree on the left side of the window, select Title.
The Step heading: option with a disabled field is displayed.
6. Activate the Step heading: check box and enter 100kN load in the text box.
7. Click Update to store the heading information into step1.
8. From the tree, select Parameter.
9. Activate the Name and Perturbation check boxes, and click Update. Notice that name is
already set to step1.
10. From the tree, select Analysis procedure.
11. For Analysis type:, select static and click Update.
This creates the *STATIC keyword in step1.
In this exercise, you created a step (*STEP) called step1 and specified *STATIC as the analysis
procedure. Next, you will define the loads and boundary conditions.
Defining Loads (*CLOAD) and Boundary Conditions (*BOUNDARY)

In this exercise, you will add *CLOAD and *BOUNDARY keywords to the current load collector by
defining loads and boundary conditions.
To create constraints (*BOUNDARY):
1. From the tree, select Boundary.
2. Click New and enter loads_and-constraints in the Name: text box.
3. Click Create to create the load collector.
4. Optionally, click the button in the Display column and select a color for the load collector.
5. Make sure the Status check box for loads_and_constraints is checked. By selecting this check
box, we are adding this load collector into the loadstep.

Altair Engineering
6. Click the loads_and_constraints load collector in the table.

A set of new tabs is displayed on the right.
7. From the Define tab, keep Type: set to default (disp).
8. Click Define from Constraints panel.
This takes you to the Constraints panel in HyperMesh. Use this panel to create constraints.
To create constraints from the Constraints panel:
1. Click view on the permanent menu and select right.
2. Click the yellow nodes button and select by window.
3. With the exception of the nodes at the ends of the cradle, draw a rectangle around all the
displayed nodes to select them as shown below.
4. In the menu area, activate exterior and click select entities. This selects all nodes outside the
window you drew.
5. Activate all six dofs dof1, dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, dof6.
6. Click create.
HyperMesh creates constraints at the nodes you selected.
7. Click return.
You are returned to the Step Manager Load Step dialog.
8. Look at the Load type: line at the bottom of Step Manager window. Notice that Bc (short for
BOUNDARY) appears on this line, identifying it as a load type created in the
load_and_constraints load collector. The corresponding load type on the tree is also
highlighted.
To create Forces (*CLOAD):
1. From the tree, double-click Concentrated loads.
2. Select CLOAD-Force from the expanded options under Concentrated loads.
A new set of tabs is displayed.
3. From Define tab, click Define from Forces Panel.
The HyperMesh Forces panel is displayed. Use this panel to create forces.
Altair Engineering

To create forces from the Forces panel:

1. From the graphics area, click the central node on the top side of the bracket arm. Refer to the
figure below to see which node to select.
2. In the magnitude: text box, enter 100 kN.

3. Click the switch next to N1, N2, N3 and select z-axis.
4. Click create.
5. Click return.
Notice that Cload-f is now added to the Load type: line, indicating CLOAD-force as another load
type created in the loads_and_constraints load collector. The corresponding load types on the
tree are also highlighted.
6. From the Load Step dialog, left-click Review.
The constraints and forces that belong to the loads_and_constraints load collector are
highlighted.
7. Right-click Review.
The highlighted constraints and forces revert back to the load collector color.
In this exercise, you constrained and applied concentrated loads on the model using HyperMesh
panels. The constraints (*BOUNDARY) and loads (*CLOAD) information is automatically stored in
step1. Next, you will specify the output requests for this step.
Defining Pressure Loads (*DLOAD) with Element Set

In this exercise, you will add *DLOAD (pressure) load to the current load collector with an element
set.
To create pressure loads (*DLOAD):
1. From the tree, double-click Distributed loads.

Altair Engineering
2. Select DLOAD from the expanded options under Distributed loads.

A new set of tabs appears on the right.
3. From the Define tab, select Element sets.
The element sets table is displayed.
4. From the permanent menu in HyperMesh, click view to set the view and restore the Pressure
with set view.
5. From the Load Step dialog, select default (Pressure) from the Type: drop-down list.
6. Select the pressure_set from the Element sets drop-down list.
7. Click on the right arrow button to the left of the table.
The selected set is added to the element sets table.
8. Click Review set under the Element sets drop-down list.
The element set in HyperMesh is highlighted in white as shown below.
9. Right-click Review to clear the highlighted display in HyperMesh.

The highlighted elements revert back to the load collector color.
10. Under the Label column of the element sets table, select P from the drop-down list for the newly
added pressure_set.
11. Since the pressure_set contains shell elements, the direction of normal to the elements must be
known to determine the sign of the magnitude. To find the direction of the normal, select the
pressure_set element from the table and click Show faces under the table.
The normals for pressure_set are displayed in HyperMesh as shown below.
Altair Engineering

12. Right-click Show faces to clear the display in HyperMesh.

13. Enter -10 in the Magnitude field of the element sets table for pressure_set.
Note that the negative magnitude means pressure load in the opposite direction of the underlying
shell element normals.
14. Click Update under the element sets table.
The HyperMesh database is updated. Notice that Dload is now added to the Load type: line,
indicating DLOAD as another load type created in the loads_and constraints load collector. The
corresponding load types on the tree are also highlighted.
15. Select pressure_set from the element sets table.
16. Click Review under the element sets table to review the loads in HyperMesh as seen below.

Altair Engineering
17. To make the view clearer, click Label under the Load collector table.
The Label Options dialog is displayed.
18. De-select the Load label check box to turn off the labels.
The new view with the labels turned off is shown below.
19. From the Label Options dialog, click Close.

In this exercise, you constrained and applied distributed loads on the model using HyperMesh panels.
The loads (*DLOAD) information is automatically stored in step1. Next, you will specify the output
requests for this step.
Altair Engineering

Defining Output Requests

In this exercise, you will specify several output requests for step1.
To request ODB file outputs:
1. From the tree, double-click Output request.
2. Select ODB file from the expanded options under Output request.
3. Click New and enter step1 output in the Name: text box.
4. Click Create.
5. Click step1 output (which you just created).
A new set of tabs is displayed on the right.
6. From the Output tab, activate the Output check box. Leave Output set to field.
7. Activate the Node output and Element output options.
The Node Output and Element Output tabs are displayed.
8. Click the Node Output tab.
9. In the lower left area, double-click Displacement and activate the U check box.
U is added to the data line on the right. You are now requesting displacement results in the ODB
file.
10. Click Update.
11. Click the Element Output tab.
12. Activate the Position check box and set it to Nodes.
13. In the lower left area, double-click Stress and activate the S check box.
S is added to the data line on the right. You are now requesting stress results in the ODB file.
14. Click Update.
To request Results file (.fil) outputs:
1. From the tree, under Output request, select Result file (.fil).
2. From the Define tab, activate the Node file and Element file check boxes.
The Node File and Element File tabs are activated.
3. From the Node File tab, in the lower left area, double click Displacement and activate U.
U is added to the data line on the right. You are now requesting displacement results in the .fil
file.
4. Click Update
5. From the Element File tab, activate the Position check box and set it to averaged at nodes.
6. In the lower left area, double-click Stress and activate S.

Altair Engineering
S is added to the data line on the right. You are now requesting stress results in the .fil file.
7. Click Update.
8. Click Review.
A text-editor showing the output requests you made is displayed. This is the format used in the
ABAQUS input file (.inp).
9. Click Close on the text-editor window.
10. Click Close.
The Load Step edit dialog of Step Manager closes and you are returned to the main Step
Manager window. The main Step Manager window displays step1 information as we defined in
previous exercises.
11. Click Close to exit the Step Manager dialog.
In this exercise, you requested displacement and stress results in ABAQUS output database format
(.odb) and ABAQUS results file format (.fil). Next, you will export the model and history data
currently stored in the database to an ABAQUS input file (.inp).
Exporting the Database to an ABAQUS Input File

The data currently stored in the database must be output to an ABAQUS .inp file for use with the
ABAQUS solver. The .inp file can then be used to perform the analysis using ABAQUS outside of
HyperMesh.
To export the .inp file:
1. From the files panel, select the export subpanel.
2. Select the TEMPLATE option.
3. Click the toggle to all.
4. Click write as.
5. Select your working directory and for File name:, enter job1.inp.
6. Click Save.
To save the .hm file and quit from HyperMesh:
2. Click save as.
3. Select your working directory and for File name:, enter job1.hm.
4. Click Save.
Altair Engineering

After you quit HyperMesh, you can run the ABAQUS solver using the job1.inp file that was written
from HyperMesh.
For additional tools and techniques, refer to the tutorial Pre-Processing for Bracket and Cradle
Analysis using ABAQUS - HM-4340.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Bracket and Cradle Analysis using

ABAQUS - HM-4340
HyperMesh - HM-1000. A working knowledge of the creation and editing of collectors and card
images is a pre-requisite.
In this tutorial, you will learn how to setup an ABAQUS input file in HyperMesh for obtaining the linear
static response of a cradle and bracket assembly subjected to a 100 kN load on the bracket, with the
cradles ends fully constrained. The following exercises are included:
Viewing images of keywords and data lines in HyperMesh as they appear in the ABAQUS
input file
Creating and editing ABAQUS materials and section properties
Selecting ABAQUS entity types for HyperMesh element and load configurations
Creating loads and boundary conditions for model data (*KINEMATIC COUPLING and
*BOUNDARY)
Creating an ABAQUS step containing title, analysis procedure, parameters, *CLOAD on

bracket, and output requests
Exporting a model to an ABAQUS formatted input file
Millimeters and KiloNewtons (mm, kN) are used and the tutorial is based on ABAQUS 6.4.
For more information regarding the panels used in this tutorial, refer to the Panels section of the online help, or click the help button while in a specific panel to bring up its context sensitive help. For
the on-line help.
The model used is a ball and a baseball bat (see image below).
Bracket and cradle assembly
Altair Engineering


1. From the Tool page, click the user prof..
2. For Profile name:, select Abaqus and click OK.
3. For Template name:, select Standard3D and click OK.
To retrieve the HyperMesh model file:
2. Click retrieve and select the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/bracket_cradle.hm.
3. Click Open.
4. Click return.
The bracket_start.hm file contains the following ABAQUS model data:
ELSET bracket modeled with penta (C3D6) and hexa (C3D8) elements
ELSET cradle modeled with tria (S3) and quad (S4) elements
Two *KINEMATIC COUPLING entities at the brackets bottom bolt holes
Material named aluminum
*SOLID SECTION property for ELSET bracket with the aluminum material associated to it
Understanding the Relationship between ABAQUS and HyperMesh Entities

HyperMesh card images allow you to view images of keywords and data lines for defined ABAQUS
entities as interpreted by the loaded template. The keywords and data lines appear in the ABAQUS
input file as you see them in the card images. Additionally, for some card images, you can define and
edit various parameters and data items for the corresponding ABAQUS keyword.
Use the card (card editor) panel from the permanent menu to review and edit card images. Also, for
many entities, review and edit their card image from the panel in which they are created.
*ELEMENT with Section Property

The ABAQUS keyword *ELEMENT, TYPE = <type>, ELSET = <name>, is defined by ABAQUS
elements collected in a HyperMesh component collector. One *ELEMENT keyword is written to the
ABAQUS input file for each element type in the component. The name of the ELSET is the name of
the component.
The ABAQUS sectional property associated with the *ELEMENT is defined by the components card
image. The material associated with the property is defined by a HyperMesh material collector
associated with the component. The diagram below shows how *ELEMENT and its associated
property are organized in HyperMesh.
*ELEMENT, TYPE=C3D4, ELSET=INDENTOR
340,
454,
455,
463,
453
341,
453,
463,
464,
452

Altair Engineering
*SOLID SECTION, ELSET=INDENTOR, MATERIAL=STEEL

There are more than a dozen component card images for the ABAQUS templates. Examples include
SOLIDSECTION, SHELLSECTION, GASKETSECTION, BEAMSECTION, SPRING, JOINT, and
MASS.
To define a *ELEMENT keyword with an associated sectional property:
1. From the collectors panel, create a component collector with a card image and a material
collector.
2. If necessary, edit the components card image to define data lines and parameters for the
sectional property.
3. Organize elements into the component.
ABAQUS Materials in HyperMesh

An ABAQUS *MATERIAL is a HyperMesh material collector with a card image.
There are three card images for the HyperMesh ABAQUS templates: ABAQUS_MATERIAL,
GASKET_MATERIAL (for the Standard templates), and CONNECTOR_BEHAVIOR. There are two
ways to create a material collector and associate it to a component. Both methods use the collectors
panel.
Method One
Create a material collector with a card image and edit it to define material data. Do this from
the create sub-panel with collector type set to mats. Select this material when you create a
component. The material is automatically associated to the create component.
Method Two
HyperMesh automatically creates a material collector when you create a component. The
materials name is the components name. The material is automatically associated with the
component. Use the card image sub-panel to assign a card image to the material and edit it
to define material data.
Update a component with a material from the collectors panel, update sub-panel.
In HyperMesh, it is possible to add as many data lines as you want for a material (such as *PLASTIC
with yield stress, plastic strain, and temperature data). Manually enter the data in HyperMesh or
import an ABAQUS formatted input file on top of the model in HyperMesh to create the data lines.
To review the models content:
In this section, use the card panel to review elements, section properties, and materials as they
appear in the ABAQUS input file.
Start by reviewing the card image of one of the elements. Then card edit the two components
bracket and cradle to review the sectional properties associated with the elements in these
components. Finally, card edit the aluminum material collector to review the defined aluminum
material.
1. Use the card panel from the permanent menu to edit the card image of one of the elems from
the bracket.
A card image for the element is displayed. It shows the elements type to be either C3D6 or C3D8
and belonging to the ELSET named bracket.
Altair Engineering

2. Use the card panel to edit the comps named bracket.

A card image is displayed. It shows the brackets *SOLID SECTION property. The aluminum
material is associated with it.
3. In the card panel, reset the comps selection.
4. Edit the card image for the component cradle.
The message Could not find section in template for entity, aborting is displayed in the header
message bar. This means no card image is assigned to the cradle component. One will be
assigned to it later in a subsequent section.
5. Use the card panel to edit the mats aluminum material collector.
A card image is displayed. It contains ABAQUS data lines defining the material.
Note
If you have difficulties reviewing the various card images, refer to the tutorial Getting Started
with HyperMesh - HM-1000, or click the help button to load the card panel's help.
Review of the models content is complete. Now we can complete the model data.
To create a *MATERIAL for the cradle:
In this section, create a *MATERIAL with *ELASTIC to define as steel the ELSET (component)
cradle. Create the material from the collectors panel, create sub-panel. Then update the cradle
component with this new material. When you define the sectional property for the cradle component
in the next section, the material will already be referenced in the property.
1. From the collectors panel, create/edit a mats collector with the name steel, and the
ABAQUS_MATERIAL card image.
From the menu area of the card editor, slide the scroll bar down and activate the Elastic
option to create *ELASTIC.
In the displayed card image, specify 200 for elastic modulus E(1).
Specify 0.3 for Poissons ratio NU(1).

The steel material is defined.
2. Use the update sub-panel to assign the steel material to the cradle component and update the
material id field.
The steel material is now associated to the ELSET cradle.
Note
If you have difficulties performing these steps, click help and review the help for the
collectors panel.
To define a *SHELL SECTION for the cradle:

In this section, define a *SHELL SECTION property for the ELSET (component) cradle. Specify a
thickness of 2.5. Do this by loading the SHELLSECTION card image for the cradle component.
Then edit the card image to specify the thickness.
1. From the collectors panel, select the card image sub-panel to load/edit the SHELLSECTION
card image for the cradle component.
2. Specify 2.5 for the thickness, [Thickness].
Notice the steel material is already specified in the section property definition:
Altair Engineering
*SHELL SECTION, ELSET=cradle, MATERIAL=steel

The *SHELL SECTION property is now defined for the ELSET cradle.
Understanding HyperMesh Entity Configurations and Types

HyperMesh element and load entities have two identifiers: configuration and type. The entity
configuration is a HyperMesh core feature while the entity type is defined by the template. For
example, HyperMesh element configurations include rigid, spring, quad4, and hex8. Possible quad4
configuration types in the Standard3D template include S4, S4R, S4R5, M3D4, M3D4R, R3D4, and
DS4. Similarly, HyperMesh load configurations include constraints, force, pressure, and temperature.
In the HyperMesh ABAQUS templates, pressure configuration types include DLOAD, FILM, DFLUX
and DECHARGE.
Most of the HyperMesh element and load configurations have their own panels. From the 1D, 2D, and
3D pages, use the elem types panel. From the BCs page, use the load types panel to select the
desired ABAQUS entity type for different element and load configurations.
Kinematic Constraints in HyperMesh
With the exception of *EQUATION, ABAQUS kinematic constraints, such as *KINEMATIC
COUPLING and *MPC (BEAM, TIE, LINK, PIN), are rigid (1D) elements in HyperMesh. From the 1D
page, use the rigids panel to create them. Organize them into HyperMesh component collectors. No
sectional property or material is needed for these entities. Hence, either organize them into their own
component without a component card image or into a component containing different ABAQUS
entities.
Entities Not Requiring a Material
Some ABAQUS entities that are not ABAQUS elements are organized into HyperMesh component
collectors. An example entity is *KINEMATIC COUPLING. Such entities do not need a material.
When creating a component collector for them, select an existing material to avoid creating one that
is not needed.
Unused materials in the HyperMesh database are not written to the ABAQUS input file. An unused
material has no card image.
To constrain the bracket to the cradle:
In this section, create the ABAQUS constraint *KINEMATIC COUPLING to simulate a bolt connecting
the brackets top bolt hole to the cradle. The model already contains two *KINEMATIC COUPLING
entities, one at each of the brackets bottom bolt holes. They are organized into the bracket
component.
Start by creating a new component in which you will organize all the *KINEMATIC COUPLING
entities. This is not necessary, but is done to organize the data and demonstrate the selection of
entities by configuration. This component will contain the *KINEMATIC COUPLING to be created.
Select any existing material to avoid creating one that is not needed.
Use the elem types panel to set the type for rigids to KINCOUP. This allows all elements created
from the rigids panel to be of the type *KINEMATIC COUPLING.
Finally, create the *KINEMATIC COUPLING using the rigids panel.
1. Use the collectors panel to create a comps with the name connection, no card image, the
material steel, and select a color for it.
Altair Engineering

The connection component is now the current component as shown in the header bar. All
elements and geometry created from this point forward are automatically organized into it.
2. Use the elem types panel to set the type rigid to KINCOUP.
From the 1D page, select the elem types panel.
Select the 1D sub-panel.
For rigid =, select KINCOUP.
3. Use the view panel from the permanent menu to restore the top bolt hole view.
4. Use the distance panel to create a node at the center of the bolt hole to be the *KINEMATIC
COUPLING reference node.
Press the F4 key to enter the distance panel from the Geom page.
From the graphics area, select three nodes on the top side of the bolt hole for N1, N2, and N3
(see figure below).
Selecting nodes for circle center
Click circle center to create a node at the center of the selected nodes.
5. Use the rigids panel to create a spider -like rigid link for the *KINEMATIC COUPLING.
From the 1D page, select the rigids panel.
Activate all six degrees of freedom, dof1 to dof6, to constrain the *KINEMATIC COUPLING
reference node in all six directions.
Set dependent: to multiple nodes.
With the node selector for independent: active, select the center node created in the
previous step.
With the nodes selector active, select all the nodes on the top side of the bolt hole (see figure
below).

Altair Engineering
Selecting independent and dependents nodes
Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to turn off the elements in the bracket
component.
With the nodes selector active, select the nodes around the hole in the cradle (see figure
below).
Selecting dependent nodes from the cradle
Create the *KINEMATIC_COUPLING.
Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to turn on the elements from the bracket
component.
Altair Engineering

Kinematic coupling
The *KINEMATIC COUPLING is now created and organized into the connection component.
6. Move all *KINEMATIC COUPLING entities into the connection component using the organize
panel.
From the 1D page, select the organize panel.
Set the entity type to elems.
Click elems and select by config.
For config =, select rigidlink.
For type =, select *KINCOUP.
Click the toggle in the middle of the panel to change displayed rigid links to all rigid links.
Select entities to select all rigid links in the model.
For destination =, select connection.
Move all rigid links to the connection component.
All the *KINEMATIC COUPLING entities are now organized into the connection component. Model
data definition is complete.

Altair Engineering
To use Step Manager for initial conditions:

HyperMesh includes a tool named Step Manager. It is used to create, edit, review, re-order, and
delete ABAQUS initial conditions and steps. This tool is accessible from the Abaqus page of the
ABAQUS macro menu.
Step Manager
Step Manager has a default step named Initial Condition. It is used to create boundary conditions
and loads (initial conditions) in the model data portion of the ABAQUS input file.
A dialog is displayed to edit the Initial Condition step. Only valid boundary conditions and load types
for model data can be selected from the Step Managers Load Step options list for the Initial
Condition step.
Initial condition dialog

Use this dialog from left to right by:
selecting a load step type from the list (left column)
creating a load collector (center area)
creating the loads using the menu area (right side)
Altair Engineering

To define *BOUNDARY:
Create these constraints at the cradles ends using the Step Manager. Define them as model data,
not history data. Do this by editing the Step Managers default step named Initial Condition. For this
step, create a load collector and then create the constraints.
1. Open the Step Manager from the Abaqus page of the macro menu.
2. From the Step tab, select Initial Condition from the table.
3. Click Edit to modify this step.
A new dialog is displayed.
4. From the Load Step options list, select Boundary.
This specifies the type of initial condition you want to create.
5. Use New to create a new load collector named constraints.
6. Check Display for the constraints load collector.
7. Optionally, select a Display color for the constraints load collector.
8. From the load collector table, click constraints to make this collector active.
New menus are displayed on the right for the Load Type selected (Boundary).
9. From the Define tab, set Type: to default (disp).
10. Click Define from Constraints panel to go to the Constraints panel.
The Constraints panel in HyperMesh is displayed.
11. Use the view panel from the permanent menu to select the right view.
12. Click nodes and select by window.
13. Draw a window in the graphics area such that all nodes at both ends of the cradle are selected.
Selecting nodes for constraints

14. Activate all six degrees of freedom, dof1 to dof6, to constrain the selected nodes in all six
directions.
15. Create the constraints.

Altair Engineering
16. Return to the Step Manager.

17. Close the Initial Condition step and return to the Step Managers main window.
To define the history data:
The history data portion of the ABAQUS input file defines the sequence of events for the simulation.
The loading history is divided into a series of steps. Each step contains the type of simulation, loads,
constraints, output requests, and contacts (for ABAQUS Explicit). The ABAQUS *STEP option marks
the start of a step, while the *END STEP option marks the end.
In the Step Manager, create, review, edit, delete, and re-order the ABAQUS steps. In the Step
Manager, loads are organized into load collectors and output requests are organized into HyperMesh
output blocks.
To define the ABAQUS step:
For this analysis, we are interested in the linear static response of the cradle and bracket assembly to
a 100 kN load applied on the bracket, with the cradles ends fully constrained. This is a single event,
so only one ABAQUS step is needed. In this section, use the Step Manager to create the step as
follows:
Define its title, heading, parameters, and the analysis procedure.
Apply a concentrated force (*CLOAD) on the brackets arm.
1. From the Step tab of Step Manager, create a New step named step1.
2. From the Load Step options list, select Title to define the steps title.
The menu for Title is displayed on the windows right side.
Activate the Step heading: option.
Specify 100kN load for the step heading name.
Update the step.
3. From the Load Step options list, select Parameter.
Activate the option Name so the steps name is written to the ABAQUS input file.
Activate the option Perturbation to set the analysis for small-scale, linear deformations.
Update the step.
4. From the Load Step options list, select Analysis procedure.
For the Analysis type:, select static
Update the step.
5. Click Text to review what has been defined so far for the step.
6. From the Load Step options list, expand the list for Concentrated loads.
7. Select CLOAD-Force (Concentrated loads >> CLOAD-Force).
8. Create a new load collector named force.
9. Optionally, select a Display color for the force load collector.
Altair Engineering

10. From the Load collector table, select force to activate this collector.
New menus are displayed on the right for the selected load type (CLOAD-Force).
11. From the Define tab, click Define from Forces Panel to create a CLOAD from the Forces
panel.
12. From the graphics area, select the central node on the top side of the brackets arm (see figure
below).
Node for CLOAD

13. Specify 100 for the magnitude =.
14. Leave the system selector set to global system.
15. Select z-axis for the forces direction vector.
16. Create the force.
17. Return to the Step Manager.
To specify output requests for step and export the model:
In this section, use the Step Manager to specify displacement and stress results to be output to the
ODB and FIL results files for step1. Finally, export the model to an .inp file.
1. From the Load Step options list,under Output request, select ODB file.
2. Create a new output block named step1_output.
3. From the Output block: table, select step1_output to make it active.
4. From the Output tab, activate the option Output and leave it set to field.
5. Activate the Node output and Element output options.
6. Specify the nodal displacement output for the ODB file.
Go to the Node Output tab.
Expand the Displacement output options list.

Altair Engineering
Activate the option U from the Output options list.
Note
Resize the Step Manager window as needed to view the output options list more easily.
Update the step.
7. Specify elemental stress output for the ODB file.
Select the Element Output tab.
From the Output options list, under Stress, activate S.
Update the step.
8. From the Load Step options list, under Output request, select Result file (.fil).
The output block step1_output is still highlighted (active) in the Output block table.
9. From the Define tab, activate the options Node file and Element file.
10. Specify nodal displacement output for the FIL file.
Select the Node File tab.
From the Output options list, under Displacement, activate U.
Update the step.
11. Specify the elemental stress output for the FIL file.
Select the Element File tab.
Activate the Position option and set it to averaged at nodes.
From the Output options list, under Stress, activate S.
Update the step.
12. Close the Step Manager window.

Defining the step is now complete.
13. Use the files panel to export the model to your working directory as
bracket_cradle_complete.inp.
14. You can now submit the .inp file to ABAQUS for analysis.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this HyperMesh model or save it to your working
directory for your reference.
In this tutorial, we introduced some of the concepts that govern the HyperMesh interface to ABAQUS.
We also used the Step Manager that allowed us to do basic modeling in terms of ABAQUS, such as
defining boundary conditions, output requests, and steps.
For additional tools and techniques, refer to the tutorial Pre-Processing for Crashing Tubes Analysis
using ABAQUS - HM-4350.
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Crashing Tubes Analysis using

ABAQUS - HM-4350
HyperMesh - HM-1000 as well as the tutorial Defining ABAQUS Contacts for 3-D Models in
HyperMesh - HM-4310. Working knowledge of the creation and editing of collectors and card images
are a definite pre-requisite.
In this tutorial you will learn how to setup in HyperMesh an ABAQUS input file for obtaining the
dynamic response of multiple tubes with one tube fully constrained and gravity applied on the other
tubes. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Create *ORIENTATION system
Create contact between shell elements
Create a step with *AMPLITUDE associated to *DLOAD
The units used in this tutorial are Miliseconds, Millimeters, Kilograms, and Kilonewtons (ms, mm, kg,
kN), and the tutorial is based on ABAQUS 6.4.
the on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to bring up its context sensitive help. For
the on-line help.
The model used is composed of four tubes (see image below).
Crashing tubes
Altair Engineering

To load the ABAQUS Explicit user profile and retrieve the model:
1. Click user prof from the Tool page to load the Abaqus user profile and Explicit template.
2. Use the files panel to retrieve the file crash_tubes.hm file from the
The model contains the following ABAQUS model and history data:
Four tubes with shell (S4R) elements. The corresponding ELSETs are named FixTube,
MovTube, MovTube2 and MovTube3.
A *SHELL SECTION property for each tube. Each property is associated with one of two
materials.
*BOUNDARY constraints on the ELSET named FixTube.
A HyperMesh system.
To define ABAQUS *ORIENTATION in HyperMesh:

*ORIENTATION specifies a local system defining local material directions for elements.
In ABAQUS, shell and membrane elements have default local directions. They are not the global
system directions. The default local 1-direction is the projection of the global x axis direction onto the
shell surface. If the global x axis is normal to the shell surface, the local 1-direction is the projection of
the global z axis onto the shell surface. The local 2-direction is perpendicular to the local 1-direction in
the surface of the shell. Refer to the figure below.
Default local shell directions

In HyperMesh, create a systems collector using the collectors panel, and a HyperMesh system using
the systems panel:
1. Using the collectors panel, create a systems collector systcols with no card image.
The *ORIENTATION name is automatically derived from the name of the systems collector
containing the *ORIENTATION. Because of this, place each *ORIENTATION in its own systems
collector
2. From the Geom page use the systems panel to create a HyperMesh system.
From the HyperMesh system create the *ORIENTATION using the card panel:
3. In the card panel, select the HM system (systs) and click edit.
4. In the menu area, activate the ORIENTATION option to create the *ORIENTATION keyword.
5. If the *ORIENTATION system is for solid elements, do not activate the locdir_alpha option. If this

Altair Engineering
*ORIENTATION system is for shell and membrane elements, activate the locdir_alpha option.
By default, the local axis closest to being normal to the elements 1 and 2 material directions is
the local 1-axis. Also by default, the additional rotation about the local normal axis is 0. You can
change these values by editing the [locdir] and [alpha] fields in the pop-up card image.
6. Associate the *ORIENTATION to the desired sectional properties:
In the card panel, select component collectors and click edit.
In the menu area, activate the ORIENTATION option.
In the pop-up card image, specify the name of the systems collector in the OrientationName
field.
Local directions for this model:

The default set of local material directions can sometimes cause problems; a case in point is the
models fixed tube pictured below. For most of the elements in the tube, the local 1-direction is
circumferential. However, there is a line of elements normal to the global x axis. For these elements
the local 1-direction is the projection of the global z axis onto the shell, making the local 1-direction
axial instead of circumferential. A contour plot of the direct stress in the local 1-direction will look
strange, since for most elements, it is the circumferential stress, whereas for some elements it is the
axial stress. In this case, use the *ORIENTATION option for the fixed tube to define more appropriate
local directions.
Default local 1-direction in the fixed tube

To create *ORIENTATION for the fixed tube:
In this section, use the approach described in the previous section to create a *ORIENTATION for the
fixed tube. Use the pre-defined cylindrical coordinate system for this tube and define the card using
the card panel.
1. Use the disp panel to turn on the display of the pre-defined HyperMesh cylindrical system located
at one end of the fixed tube and organized in the Orient_Coord systcols.
This system was created using the systems panel from the 1D page.
2. Use the card panel to edit the system's card and define the ORIENTATION option.
Enter the card panel in the permanent menu.
Click the entity selector switch and select systs.
Select the local system in the graphics area.
Edit the system.
Activate the ORIENTATION option.
Altair Engineering

*ORIENTATION, NAME = Orient_Coord is now shown in the card image.
Activate the locdir_alpha option.

[locdir] and [alpha] entries are now shown under *ORIENTATION in the card image.
In the card image, leave [locdir] set to 1 to specify the radial axis as the axis closest to
being normal to the shells 1 and 2 material directions.
Leave [alpha] set to 0 for the additional rotation of the local normal axis.
3. Associate *ORIENTATION to the fixed tubes sectional property using the card panel.
In the card panel, click the entity selector switch and select comps.
Click comps and select FixTube.
Click edit.
*SHELL SECTION, ELSET = FixTube is shown in the pop-up card image.
Activate the Orientation option from the options list.

ORIENTATION = entry is shown on the *SHELL SECTION line.
In the card image, specify Orient_Coord for the OrientationName.
Defining *ORIENTATION for the ELSET FixTube is now complete.

To define contact between the tubes as ABAQUS general contact:
General contact is a new feature in ABAQUS version 6.3. It is an automatic contact, geared towards
models with multiple components and complex topology. The general contact algorithm is usually
simpler to define than the two-surface contact algorithm.
Following is the simplest definition of general contact:
*CONTACT
*CONTACT INCLUSIONS, ALL ELEMENT BASED
You can assign other contact properties within a general contact using the following option.
*CONTACT PROPERTY ASSIGNMENT
surf_1, surf_2, prop_1
In this section, use the Contact Manager to define a contact pair property between the FixTube and
the MoveTube (the closest tube to the fixed tube). Then define a general contact for the entire model
and assign the contact pair property to it.
The general contact algorithm is used to define contacts between the tubes. A contact pair property is
assigned to the general contact to define a different type of contact algorithm between the FixTube
and the MoveTube. This contact pair property is not required. However, it is created here for the
purpose of demonstrating how it is specified in a general contact using HyperMesh.
In a model like this, where both components have similar geometry (mesh) and material properties,
either the fixed or moving tube can be chosen for the slave or master surface. Here use the ELSET
FixTube for the slave surface of the contact pair property.
Create slave *SURFACE on FixTube by selecting elements in the Contact Manager:

Altair Engineering
1. Open the Contact Manager from the Abaqus page of the macro menu.
2. On the Surface tab, click New to begin defining a surface.
Specify S1_Fixed for the surface Name:.
Set the surface Type: to Element based.
Optionally, choose a Color: for visualizing the surface.
Click Create.
The Element Based Surface, Name: S1_Fixed window is now displayed.
3. Select 3D shell, membrane, rigid from the Define surface for: options list.
4. Click Elements to select the elements on which the surface will be defined.
In the HyperMesh panel, click elems and select the by collector selection method to select
elements by component collector.
Select the component FixTube.
Proceed with the selection.

The normals for the selected elements are displayed. They are pointing out of the fixed tube.
This is the desired direction. SPOS will be written to the input file for the elements in this
contact surface. To specify SNEG in the input file, activate Reverse in the contact manager
window before doing the next step. This does not change the element normals.
5. Add the elements to the surface.

6. Close out of the Sl_Fixed surface window and return to the Contact Managers main window.
Notice the surface Sl_Fixed is listed in the Surface tab.
To create master *SURFACE on MoveTube by selecting a set of elements in the Contact
Manager:
1. On the Surface tab, click New to begin defining a second surface.
Specify Ma_Moving for the surface Name:.
Set the surface Type: to Element based.
Optionally, select a Color: for visualizing the surface.
Create the surface.

The Element Based Surface, Name: Ma_Moving window is now displayed.
2. Select Element set from the Define surface for: options list.
3. Use the drop-down menu below Element set: to select the pre-defined element set
Ma_TubeContSet.
4. Click Review Set to highlight the elements in the selected set.
5. Right-click Review Set to remove the highlight on the elements.
6. Select Show Faces to view the direction of the element normals.
7. Click OK in the pop-up information window.
Altair Engineering

The normals are pointing into the moving tube. Hence, the faces on the inside of the moving tube
elements are SPOS.
8. Switch the Face: option from None to SNEG.
This specifies the faces on the outside of the moving tube elements. SNEG is written to the input
file for the set of elements forming this master contact surface.
9. Activate the Display option.
10. Update the surface definition.
11. Answer Yes to the pop-up confirmation question.
12. Close out of the Ma_Moving surface window and return to the Contact Managers main window.
Notice the surface Ma_Moving is listed in the Surface tab.
To create *SURFACE INTERACTION in the Contact Manager:
1. On the Surface Interaction tab, create a new surface interaction with the name
CrashContact_Inter.
A Surface Interaction dialog displays.
2. On the Define tab, activate the Friction option.
3. On the Friction tab, specify 0.2 for Friction Coeff in the table.
4. Click OK to return to the Contact Managers main window.
Notice the surface interaction CrashContact_Inter listed in the Surface Interaction tab.
To define a general contact, *CONTACT in the Contact Manager:
1. On the Interface tab, click New to begin defining an interface.
Specify Crash_contact for the interface Name:.
Set the interface Type: to General Contact.
Click Create to go to the interfaces panel, card image sub-panel.
2. Edit the interface named Crash_contact.

*CONTACT is shown in the pop-up card image.
3. Activate the option Contact_Inclusions from the options list to create *CONTACT INCLUSIONS.
4. Activate the option All_Element_Based to define the ALL ELEMENT BASED option in the
*CONTACT INCLUSIONS line.
5. Scroll down the options list and activate the option Contact_Property_Assignment to create
*CONTACT PROPERTY ASSIGNMENT.
6. In the card image, click Surface1(1) and select surface S1_Fixed.
7. Click Surface 2(1) and select surface Ma_Moving.
8. In the card image, scroll horizontally to the right to see all of the options available for *CONTACT
PROPERTY ASSIGNMENT.

Altair Engineering
9. Click Surface_Interaction(1) and select interface CrashContact_Inter.

10. Return to the Contact Manager.
11. Close the Contact Manager.
Defining the general contact between the tubes is complete.
To create *STEP:
For this analysis, only one *STEP is needed. Create a *DYNAMIC, EXPLICIT step. Specify field
output requests. Lastly, add the general *CONTACT and *SURFACE INTERACTION (groups) to the
step. Adding the latter is required for ABAQUS/Explicit, but not ABAQUS/Standard. It is history data
for Explicit.
1. Open the Step Manager from the Abaqus page of the macro menu.
2. Click New to begin defining a step.
Specify Crash as the step Name:.
Click Create to create the step.
3. Select Title from the Load Step options list.
Activate Step heading: and type in Moving tubes Rho 1.8E-09.
Update the step.
4. Select Analysis procedure in the Load Step options list.
Set the Analysis type: to dynamic.
On the Dataline tab, specify 0.2 for the Time period.
Update the step.
5. Close the Step Manager.

To understand boundary conditions for this model:
In ABAQUS/Standard, common boundary conditions are *BOUNDARY constraints to prevent rigid
body motion and *CLOAD and *DLOAD (forces and pressures). In ABAQUS/Explicit, common
boundary conditions are constraints and time varying boundary conditions, like time varying
displacement, velocity or acceleration, causing dynamic structural response.
For this analysis, the nodes at the ends of the fixed tube are fully constrained with *BOUNDARY
constraints. These *BOUNDARY constraints are model data. In HyperMesh, they are organized into a
load collector named Constraint with the card image INITIAL_CONDITION.
*DLOAD, TYPE = GRAVITY, AMPLITUDE = curve will be created for all nodes of the moving tubes.
This is a constant acceleration applied in the global x direction. *AMPLITUDE is not required for
gravity since it has a constant magnitude. However, *AMPLITUDE is assigned to the *DLOAD in this
section for the purpose of showing you how to do this in HyperMesh. *AMPLITUDE allows arbitrary
time variations of the applied condition throughout a step.
To create *AMPLITUDE in HyperMesh:
*AMPLITUDE is an xy curve in HyperMesh. There are two methods for creating *AMPLITUDE in
HyperMesh.
Altair Engineering

Method 1:
Create *AMPLITUDE using the edit curves panel with the math option.
Method 2:
Create *AMPLITUDE by importing an xy data file. Below is an example of the xy data file format.
XYDATA
0.0, 0.0
1.0, 2.0
(more lines)
ENDDATA
HyperMesh supports *AMPLITUDE with DEFINITION = TABULAR. Use the Step Manager to
associate a *AMPLITUDE to a load in HyperMesh.
Curves are displayed in xy plots in HyperMesh. Create a plot using the plots panel. Use the curve
attribs panel to change a curves name. Use the delete panel to delete curves and plots. Preview the
card image of a *AMPLITUDE by selecting curves in the card panel.
In this section, create two *AMPLITUDEs. Create the first one using Method 1. The purpose for
creating this *AMPLITUDE is to simply demonstrate how to do it using the edit curves panel.
Create the second *AMPLITUDE using Method 2. The time and acceleration (gravity) data file was
created in Excel and exported as a comma separated file (*.csv). Specify the second *AMPLITUDE
for the *DLOAD, TYPE = GRAVITY that you will define.
1. Create *AMPLITUDE in the edit curves panel using a mathematical expression:
Enter the xy plots module from the Post page.
Enter the edit curves panel, create sub-panel.
Activate the math option.
Specify {0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5} for the x (time) values.
Activate y and specify {2 * x} in the y (acceleration) values.
Create the curve.
Use the disp panel as needed to turn on the display of the plots.
The curve is named curve1. Since no plot was selected in the edit curves panel, the xy plot
was automatically created and is named untitled.
2. Create *AMPLITUDE by importing a data file in the read curves panel.
Enter the xy plots module from the Post page.
Enter the read curves panel.
Leave the plot name set to untitled.
Browse and select the file named gravity_curve.csv from the

Click input.
A curve named curve2 is created on the plot named untitled.

Altair Engineering
To define *DLOAD, TYPE = GRAVITY:

Define this on all the nodes of the moving tubes. Use the Step Manager for the step named Crash.
1. Open the Step Manager from the Abaqus macro menu.
2. Edit the step named Crash.
3. Under Distributed loads in the Load Step options list, select DLOAD.
4. Under Load collector: create a New load collector named GRAVITY.
5. Optionally, select a Display color for the GRAVITY load collector.
6. Highlight GRAVITY in the load collector table to make this collector active.
7. On the Define tab, set the load Type: to gravity.
8. From the Element sets pull-down list select the set named ALLTUBES.
9. Click the right-pointing arrow button to add the set ALLTUBES to the table.
10. Specify 9810 in the table for the *DLOAD Magnitude.
11. Specify 1, 0, 0 in the table for Comp1, Comp2, Comp3 respectively.
This defines a unit vector in the global x direction.
12. Update the step.
13. On the Parameter tab, activate the option Amplitude curve and set it to curve2.
14. Click Review to display curve2 in the graphics area.
15. Right-click Review to turn off the display of the curve.
To define output requests for the ODB file and export the model:
In this section, use the Step Manager to define output request for the step Crash. The export the
model file as an INP file using the Explicit template.
1. In the Step Manager, select Output request from the Load Step options list.
2. Select ODB file
3. Create a New output block named field_output.
4. Highlight field_output in the Output block: table to make it active.
5. On the Output tab, activate the Output option and set it to field.
6. Activate the options Node output and Element output.
7. Activate the Time marks option and set it to yes.
8. Activate the Number interval option and specify 20 intervals.
9. Update the step.
10. Go to the Node Output tab.
Altair Engineering

11. Under Displacement from the output options list, select U to request nodal displacement output.
13. Go to the Element Output tab.
14. Under Section_points select 0 and then 1 through 5 to request results on element layers 1
through 5.
15. Under Stress select S to request element stress output.
16. Update the step and close the Step Manager.
17. Use the files panel to export the model to your working directory as
crash_tubes_Complete.inp.
Make sure the template field shows the filename abaqus/explicit.
directory for your own reference.
In this tutorial we introduced some of the concepts that govern the HyperMesh interface to ABAQUS.
We used the Contact Manager to setup a general contact between all the tubes. We also used the
Step Manager to do basic modeling in terms of ABAQUS such as defining boundary conditions,
output requests and steps.
For more detailed information on the Contact Manager and Step Manager, please refer to the on-line
help.

Altair Engineering
Setting up an ANSYS Stress Analysis in HyperMesh HM-4400

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the HyperMesh ANSYS interface for stress analysis.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise and
continue doing the exercises in the following order:
Updating elements
Defining element properties
Updating load types
Exporting a HyperMesh database file to ANSYS
Translating results in ANSYS

A Description of the Model

A compressor wheel with blades is modeled as a plane stress problem with two planes of symmetry.
The blades are connected to the wheel using dovetail joints. The wheel and dovetail joints are
modeled using plane42 elements. The region of contact between the dovetail and the wheel slot is
modeled using point-to-point gap elements. The blades are modeled using lumped mass elements
connected to the dovetail joint with link elements. The loading is centrifugal (angular velocity of 3600
rpm). The gap elements make this a non-linear analysis.
Altair Engineering

Updating Elements
In this section, make the existing element types ANSYS-compatible elements.
1. Launch HyperMesh or clear the current model.
4. Click retrieve.
HyperMesh displays the Open files dialog.
5. Select the hm-ansys.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
6. Double-click file name or click Open.
HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the
ansys.hm file.
hm-

To select the ANSYS template:
1. Select the user prof panel from the Geom page.
The User Profile dialog displays.
2. Select ansys from the list of user profiles.
3. Click OK.
The defaults for ansys are set and the macro menu for ansys appears.
To update elements:
1. Click the macro, Update Elem Type.
2. Click select comps.
3. Click comps.
4. Select WHEEL and DOVETAIL and click select.
5. Click proceed.
A list of element types appears in the macro menu area.
6. From this list select plane42 or type 42 in the elem type = text box.
7. Click update.
9. Click comps.
10. Select GAP and click select.

Altair Engineering
11. Click proceed.

12. From this list select contac12 or type 12 in the elem type = text box.
13. Click update.
15. Click comps.
16. Select LINK and click select.
17. Click proceed.
18. From this list select link1 or type 1 in the elem type = text box.
19. Click update.
21. Click comps.
22. Select MASS and click select.
23. Click proceed.
24. From this list select mass21 or type 21 in the elem type = text box.
25. Click return.
Defining Element Properties

In this section, define element properties based on the ANSYS template.
To define plane element properties:
1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.
3. Click comps again and select WHEEL and DOVETAIL.
4. Click select.
5. Click card image =.
6. From the pop-up menu select plane42.
7. Click edit.
HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.
8. Select kopt3_FLAG.
9. Click return.
HyperMesh returns to the card panel.
Altair Engineering

To define options for mass, gap, and link elements:

3. Click comps and select GAP.
4. Click select.
5. Verify card image = is set to plane42.
6. Click edit.
7. Select kopt1_FLAG, kopt2_FLAG, and kopt4_FLAG.
8. Click the data entry field under kopt2 and enter 1.
9. Click return.
HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.
10. Click comps.
11. De-select GAP.
12. Select MASS.
13. Click select.
14. Verify card image = is set to plane42.
15. Click edit.
16. Click kopt3 list box.
17. Select the last item: 2-D mass without rotory inertia.
18. Click return twice.
To create a property collector for mass elements:
4. Click name = and enter MASS.
5. Click card image = and select MASS21p from the pop-up menu.
6. Click material = and select mat.
8. Click kopt3 list box.
9. Select the last item: 2-D mass without rotary inertia.

Altair Engineering
10. Click the data entry field under MASS(1) and enter 100 for the mass of the MASS elements.
11. Click return.
To create a property collector for gap elements:
3. Click name = and enter GAP.
4. Click card image = and select CONTAC12p.
7. Click the data entry field under KN(2) and enter 2 E 05.
8. Click return.
To create a property collector for link elements:
3. Click name = and enter LINK.
4. Click card image = and select LINK1p.
7. Click the data entry field under AREA(1) and enter 10 for the cross sectional area of the link
elements.
8. Click return.
After creating property collectors, assign them to their respective element types.
Altair Engineering

To update mass element properties:

1. Select the masses panel on the 1-D page.
3. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click config = and select mass from the extended entity selection menu.
Type = automatically sets to mass21.
6. Click property = and select MASS.
7. Click update.
8. Select property.
9. Click update.
To update the gap element properties:
1. Select the gaps panel on the 1-D page.
4. Click config = and select gap from the extended entity selection menu.
Type = automatically sets to contac12.
6. Click property = and select GAP.
7. Click update.
8. Select property.
9. Click update.
To update the rod elements:
1. Select the rods panel on the 1-D page.
4. Click config = and select rod from the extended entity selection menu.
Type = automatically sets to link1.
6. Click property = and select LINK.

Altair Engineering
7. Click update.
8. Click return.
Updating Load Types

In this section, make the existing load types ANSYS compatible.
2. Click constraint = and select D_CONSTRNT.
3. Click loads and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click update.
5. Click return.
Exporting a HyperMesh Database File to ANSYS

In this section, edit your HyperMesh database file and export it to ANSYS.
To write the ANSYS .prp file:
3. Click write as and enter hm-ansys.prp.
4. Click save.
5. Click return.
6. Click quit to end the HyperMesh session.
You do not need to save the HyperMesh file.
To edit the ANSYS file:
You must edit the hm-ansys.prp file since HyperMesh does not translate the application of angular
velocity to ANSYS.
1. Open the hm-ansys.prp file in a text editor.
2. Before the /SOLU command, insert the following command:
OMEGA,,,377
(3600 rpm ~ 377 rad/s)
3. Save the file and exit.
You can now submit the hm-ansys.prp file to ANSYS for analysis.
Altair Engineering

Translating Results in ANSYS

The ANSYS analysis performed on the hm-ansys.prp file generated a file named hm-ansys.rst.
hmansys translates this ANSYS binary file into a HyperMesh binary results file using the command
line utility hmansys.exe. You can then use the HyperMesh binary results file, hm-ansys.hmres,
for post-processing.
To generate the file hm-ansys.hmres:
1. Launch HyperMesh.
2. Select the solver panel on the BCs page.
3. Click the switch and select hmansys.
4. After input file : click browse and select hm-ansys.rst.
5. After output file : click browseand enter hm-ansys.hmres.
6. Click options : and enter the platform on which the ANSYS analysis was performed and enter
other options as needed. For more information, see Results Translation in the External
Interfacing on-line help.
7. Click solve.
8. To specify the HyperMesh results file, on the global panel after results file: click browse and
select hm-ansys.hmres.

Altair Engineering
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 2-D Models in HyperMesh HM-4410

The HM-ANSYS Contact Wizard allows the user to automate the procedure to create surface-tosurface target/contact element-pairs.
For more information, see Creating Target/Contact Element Pairs in the External Interfacing section
of the HyperMesh on-line help.
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Contact Wizard to create ANSYS 2-D surface-to-surface
target/contact element-pairs.
To load the ANSYS User Profile:
1. Launch HyperMesh or clear current model.
2. Select the user prof panel from the GEOM page.
3. Select Ansys from the list of user profiles.
4. Click OK.
This sets the defaults for ansys and loads the the ansys macro menu.
To retrieve the HM model file for this tutorial:
3. Click retrieve.
HyperMesh displays the open files dialog.
4. Select the hm-ansys_contact_wizard_2-d_tutorial.hm file, located in the
5. Click open or double-click the file name.
HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the hmansys_contact_wizard_2-d_tutorial.hm.
HyperMesh displays the model as shown in the figure below.
Altair Engineering

To launch the HM-ANSYS Contact Wizard:

1. Click the contact wizard macro button.
The Selecting Target Body window (shown below) is displayed in the top-left corner of the
screen. The HyperMesh window can be resized to better match with the Selecting Target Body
window size and location.
Step 1: Selecting Target Body

1. Set Select contact type: to 2D Contact.
2. Click the Select Target Body button in the dialog shown above. The HyperMesh panel shown
below is displayed.

Altair Engineering
3. Click comps.
4. Select the component named DISC_42.
5. Click select.
6. Click proceed.
The Next button in the Selecting Target Body dialog will be activated.
7. Click the Next button. The edges of the selected target body will be extracted and displayed as
shown in the figure below. The Selecting Target Elements dialog will be displayed.
Step 2: Selecting Target Elements

1. Click the Select Target Elements button in the dialog box shown below.
The following HyperMesh panel will be displayed.
Altair Engineering

2. Click elems.
The HyperMesh extended entity selector will be displayed.
3. Select by window as the element selection method.
4. Select the contact surface elements as shown in the figure below.

6. Click proceed
The Next button in the Selecting Target Elements dialog will be activated.
7. Click the Next button, and the Defining Target Element Component dialog will be displayed.

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Defining Target Element Component
This dialog displays the default target component ID and default target component type
which cannot be modified.
The target component name can be changed, but the name should not be used by other
components in the model.
Click the target contact component color button to change the default target/contact
component colors. Select the new color from the pop-up menu.
The KEYOPT values will be assigned to the target component by default. Click on the radio
button Do not apply KEYOPTs, if you do not want to assign any KEYOPTs to the target
components.
Optionally, click on a KEYOPT menu button to select the appropriate KEYOPT value from the
pop-up menu. To see all options for a specific KEYOPT, move the mouse over a KEYOPT
button, and a yellow cursor-help box pops up with detailed description of all available options.
Click the Next button in the Defining Target Element Component dialog. A full model
displays as shown in the following figure. The Selecting Contact Body dialog then displays.
Altair Engineering

Step 4: Selecting Contact Body

1. Click the Select Contact Body button.
The HyperMesh Panel shown below will be displayed.
2. Click comps.
3. Select the component named BOX_42.
4. Click select.
5. Click proceed.
6. Click the Next button in the Selecting Contact Body dialog.
The edges of the selected contact body will be extracted and displayed as shown in the following
figure.

Altair Engineering
The Selecting Contact Elements dialog displays.

Step 5: Selecting Contact Elements
1. Click the Select Contact Elements button, and the following HyperMesh panel will be displayed.
2. Click elems.
The HyperMesh extended entity selector displays.
4. Select the contact surface elements as shown in the following figure.
Altair Engineering


6. Click Proceed.
7. Click Next in the Selecting Contact Elements dialog.
The Defining Contact Element Component dialog will be displayed.
Step 6: Defining Contact Element Component
This dialog displays the default contact component ID: and contact component type
which cannot be modified.
The contact component name can be modified, but this name should not be used by other
The previously selected (in step 3, the Defining Target Element Component dialog)
target/contact component color will be displayed. The color can be modified again. The new
color will be applied to both target and contact components.
The KEYOPT values are assigned to the contact component by default. Click on the radio
button Do not apply KEYOPTs, if you do not want to assign any KEYOPTs to the contact
component.
Optionally, click on a KEYOPT menu button to select the appropriate KEYOPT value from the
pop-up menu. To see all of the options for a specific KEYOPT, move the mouse over a

Altair Engineering
KEYOPT button, and a yellow cursor-help box pops up with detailed description of the
available options.
Click the Next button in the Defining Contact Element Component dialog. The full model
will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
The Defining Properties dialog then displays.

Step 7: Defining Properties
Altair Engineering

The target and associated contact elements are identified by a shared real constant set. This
real constant set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
A new property with the real constant values will be created by default. Both target and
contact components will be pointed to this new property. Click the radio button Do not apply
real constants if you do not want to assign any real constants to the target/contact elements.
Optionally, modify or enter the target/contact elements real constant values. Click the Reset
Default button to reset the default values at any time.
Click the Next button in the Defining Properties dialog. The Defining Material Properties
dialog displays.
Step 8: Defining Material Properties
It is optional to define a new material for the target/contact elements or to select an existing material.
If do not want to assign any material properties:
1. Click the Next button in the Defining Material Properties dialog to create target/contact
elements.
2. Go to Step 9 (below).
To define a new material:
1. Click the Define New button in the Defining Material Properties dialog, and the Defining New
Material dialog will be displayed.

Altair Engineering
A new material will be created in the HyperMesh database. The default material ID will be
displayed which cannot be modified.
The default material name can be modified.
The default coefficient of friction (MU) value can also be modified.
2. Click Next in the Defining New Material dialog to create the target/contact elements. The
Exiting dialog will be displayed.
To select an existing material:
1. Click the Existing button in the Defining Material Properties dialog. The Selecting Existing
2. Click on the Select Existing Material button.

Altair Engineering

3. Click mats.
4. Select a material. Only one material should be selected.
5. Click select.
6. Click return.
7. Click on Next in the Select Existing Material dialog to create the target/contact elements. The
Exiting dialog will be displayed.
Step 9: Exit or Restart
A summary of target/contact elements created by the contact wizard is displayed in the Exiting
dialog.
To exit the Contact Wizard:
Click the Exit button.
To restart the Contact Wizard:
Click the Restart button.

This will take you back to step 1 and allow you to create another pair of target/contact
elements.

Altair Engineering
Defining ANSYS Contacts for 3-D Models in HyperMesh HM-4420

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Contact Wizard to create ANSYS 3-D surface-to-surface
target/contact element-pairs.
For more information, see Creating Target/Contact Element Pairs in the External Interfacing section
of the HyperMesh on-line help.
To load the ANSYS User Profile:
1. Launch HyperMesh or clear current model.
2. Select the user profile panel from the GEOM page.
3. Select Ansys from the list of user profiles.
4. Click OK.
This sets the defaults for ansys and displays the ansys macro menu.
To retrieve the HyperMesh model file for this tutorial:
3. Click retrieve.
HyperMesh displays the Open file dialog.
4. Select the hm-ansys_contact_wizard_3-D_tutorial.hm file, located in the
5. Click Open or double-click the file name.
HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the hmansys_contact_wizard_3-D_tutorial.hm file.
HyperMesh displays the model as shown below.
Altair Engineering

To launch the HM-ANSYS Contact Wizard:

1. Click the contact wizard macro button.
The Select Target Body dialog is displayed at the top-left corner of the screen. At this point, you
may want to adjust the size of the HyperMesh window.
Step 1: Selecting Target Body

1. Set Select contact type: to 3D Contact.
2. Click the Select Target Body button in the Contact Wizard dialog.
The following panel is displayed.

Altair Engineering
3. Click comps.
4. Select the component named CYLINDER_SOLID45.
5. Click select.
6. Click proceed.
7. The Next button in the Select Target Body dialog is activated.
8. Click Next.
The faces of the selected target body are extracted and displayed as shown below.
The Selecting Target Elements dialog is displayed.
Step 2: Selecting Target Elements

1. Click Select Target Elements.
The following panel is displayed.
{bmct stepanel.bmp}
2. Click elems.
The HyperMesh extended entity selector is displayed.
4. Select the contact surface elements as shown below.
Altair Engineering

5. Click proceed.
The Next button is activated.
6. Click Next.
The Defining Target Elements Component dialog is displayed.

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Defining Target Element Component

The Defining Target Elements Component dialog displays the default target component ID and
type. You cannot modify these.
1. The target component name can be modified. This name should not be used by other
2. Click the color button to change the default target/contact component colors. Select the new
color from the pop-up menu.
3. By default, the KEYOPT values will be assigned to the target component. Click the radio button
Do not apply KEYOPTs, if you do not want to assign any KEYOPTs to the target components.
4. Optionally, click on a KEYOPT menu button to select the appropriate KEYOPT value from the
pop-up menu. To see all the options for a specific KEYOPT, move the mouse over a KEYOPT
button. A yellow cursor-help box pops up with detailed description of all the options.
5. Click the Next button in the Defining Target Element Component dialog.
A full model displays as shown in the figure below.
The Selecting Contact Body dialog displays.

Step 4: Selecting Contact Body
1. Click the Select Contact Body button.
Altair Engineering

The following HyperMesh Panel will be displayed.
2. Click comps.
3. Select the component named BOX_SOLID45.
4. Click select.
5. Click proceed.
6. Click the Next button in the Selecting Contact Body dialog. The faces of the selected contact
body will be extracted and displayed as shown in the figure below.
The Selecting Contact Elements dialog will be displayed.

Step 5: Selecting Contact Elements
1. Click the Select Contact Elements button.

Altair Engineering
2. Pick one element on top of the upper face of the box.

3. Click elems.
4. The HyperMesh extended entity selector will be displayed. Select the by face selection method.
The contact surface elements are selected as shown in the figure below.
5. Click proceed.
6. Click Next in the Selecting Contact Elements dialog. The Defining Contact Element
Component dialog will be displayed.
Altair Engineering

Step 6: Defining Contact Elements Component
1. This dialog will display the default contact component ID and type which cannot be modified.
2. The contact component name can be modified, but should not be used by other components in
the model.
3. The previously selected target/contact component color will be displayed, but can be changed
again. The new color will be applied to both target and contact components.
4. By default, the KEYOPT values will be assigned to the contact component. Click the radio button
Do not apply KEYOPTs, if you do not want to assign any KEYOPTs to the contact component.
5. Optionally, click on a KEYOPT menu button to select the appropriate KEYOPT value from the
pop-up menu. To see all of the options for a specific KEYOPT, move the mouse over a KEYOPT
button, and a yellow cursor-help box pops up with detailed description of all the available options.
6. Click the Next button in the Defining Contact Element Component dialog.
7. A full model displays as shown in the figure below.

Altair Engineering
The Defining Properties dialog will be displayed.

Step 7: Defining Properties
The target and associated contact elements are identified by a shared real constant set. This
real constant set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
Altair Engineering

By default, the real constants values will be assigned to the target/contact components. Click
on the radio button Do not apply real constants if you do not want to assign any real
constants to the target/contact elements.
Optionally, modify or enter the target/contact elements real constant values. You can click on
the Reset Default button to reset the default values at any time.
Click the Next button in the Defining Properties dialog. The Defining Material Property
dialog will be displayed.
Step 8: Defining Material Properties
It is optional to define a new material for the target/contact elements or to select an existing material.
If do not want to assign any material properties:
1. Click the Next button in the Defining Material Property dialog to create target/contact elements.
To define a new material:
1. Click the Define New button in the Defining Material Property dialog. The Defining New

Altair Engineering
A new material will be created in the HM database. The default material ID will be displayed, and
cannot be modified.
The default material name can be modified. The default coefficient of friction (MU) value can also
be changed.
2. Click Next in the Defining New Material dialog to create the target/contact elements. The dialog
Reviewing Normals will be displayed. The model will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
To select an existing material:
1. Click on the Select Existing button in the Defining Material Properties dialog. The Selecting
Existing Material dialog will be displayed.
Altair Engineering

2. Click the Select Existing Material button.

3. Click mats.
4. Select a material. Only one material should be selected.
5. Click select.
6. Click return.
7. Click Next in the Selecting Existing Material dialog to create the target/contact elements. The
Reviewing Normals dialog will be displayed.
The model will be displayed as shown in the following figure.

Altair Engineering
Step 9: Review Normals
The target and contact elements normal should point towards each other. If they do not, the solution
will not be performed correctly in ANSYS. Please review the normal vector direction and reverse
them if needed.
1. Select the target and/or contact components.
2. Define a vector size (default size is 0.000).
3. Click on Display Normals to see the normal vector directions.
4. Select the target/contact components again for which the normal vector direction needs to be
reversed.
5. Click on Reverse Normals to reverse the normal vector directions.
6. Click Next after reviewing the normals. The Exiting dialog will be displayed.
Altair Engineering

Step 10: Exit or Restart
A summary of target/contact elements created by the Contact Wizard is displayed.

To exit the Contact Wizard:
Click the Exit button.
To restart the Contact Wizard:
Click the Restart button.
This will take you back to the first step and allow you to create another pair of target/contact
elements.
You are encouraged to create another pair of target/contact elements by selecting the
CYLINDER_SOLID45 as the target body and BOX_SOLID95 as the contact body. If you elect to do
so, we would suggest using the display panel to display only the couple of contact components. The
number panel might then be used to display the node numbers of these elements. Please note the
BOX_SOLID45 elements are first order elements, whereas the BOX_SOLID95 elements are second
order.

Altair Engineering
Checking Penetration, Creating Joints, and Checking

Minimum Time Step - HM-4500
This tutorial explains techniques commonly used in different crash analysis codes.
Checking for penetration
Fixing penetrations
Creating joints
Checking the minimum time step

Checking for Penetration

It is not uncommon that during the setup of a FEA model errors may occur while positioning the
components, extracting the middle surface from the geometry of a parts or assigning the thickness to
them; this will probably cause that an existing penetration exists.
All the crash codes have now internal routines able to automatically adjust the initial penetration;
unfortunately the adjustment is not user controlled and this can hide severe errors in the modeling
and distort the analysis results.
In HyperMesh the user can perform a penetration check before the actual run to visualize the location
and detect the magnitude of the interference.
The area where the penetration check is performed can be defined using a contact interface or a
selection of elements and/or nodes. In both these cases the element thickness need to be defined; in
addition when the check is performed on portion of model defined by a contact the definition a
contact interface is also required; the contact types supported are surface to surface, nodes to
surface and single surface.
For more information on defining thickness on collector cards, refer to the collectors panel in the
Panels section of the on-line help. For more information about creating contact interfaces, see the
interfaces panel in the on-line help.
Altair Engineering

525
Detect and fix the penetration between the elements defining a contact Surface to Surface.
The penetration panel calculates penetration based on the following formula:
Ta/2 + Tb/2 - d = P
Where Ta and Tb represent element and/or nodal thickness, d is the distance between the element
midplanes, and P is the amount of penetration. HyperMesh computes the penetration and checks on
a node by node basis, which allows the penetration, P, to vary throughout the model. Nodes with
negative penetration values are marked as non-penetrating nodes.

Altair Engineering
Segment or Element normals are not considered when determining if nodes are penetrating the
opposing face. Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the normals. The normals direction is
taken into account in the phase of Fixing Penetrations, as we will discuss in more detail next.
There are some limitations for penetration checking:
Two known penetration checking limitations
Nodes that penetrate far enough through the thickness of the opposing surface so that the
thickness does not overlap at the nodal location (left diagram in above figure).
Nodes that lie exactly normal to nodes on the opposing contact surface (right diagram in
above figure). Some of the nodes in the right diagram will be detected, however some of the
nodes will not be detected.
Moreover HyperMesh does not currently detect penetration in solid elements.
Retrieve the model file:

3. Click retrieve.
A file browser displays.
4. Using the browser, select the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/pene_dyna.hm file.
5. Click Open.
This file consists of independent models we will use for the different examples in the penetration
tutorial.
6. Click return.
Altair Engineering

527
To specify the dyna.key template:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.
2. Click load.
3. Use the file browser to select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.
4. Click Open.
5. Click return.
To change the display:
1. Select the disp panel from the permanent menu.
2. Verify the collectors shell1 and shell2 are the only active collectors; deactivate any other
collectors.
3. Click return.
To check for penetrations:
The model consists of two components of shell elements with thickness 9.0; the flanges are too close
causing a penetration to exist. This section discusses the procedure to follow to check the penetration
occurring in the elements defining an LS-DYNA contact. The contact is type surface_to_surface and
both master and slave are defined using *set_segment .
1. Select the penetration panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the groups sub-panel.
3. Click group and select S2S_regular (the slave and master of this interface are both defined
using a *set_segment).
4. Select the check box of the segment orientation option.
5. Click check.
Fixing Penetrations
All of the nodes that fail the Penetration check are marked as temporary nodes, and the Penetration
Fix panel displays.
The header bar reports the total number of penetrating nodes and the Max/Min penetration occurred.

Altair Engineering
Note
The Penetration Fix panel can only be accessed after completing a penetration check in
the penetration panel.
1. Under interface thickness calculator select the option part thickness using a scale = 1.0.
2. Set the display mode to nodes.
With nodes mode on HyperMesh displays yellow temporary nodes at all node locations failing the
penetration check. The vectors mode displays vectors in the direction and magnitude required to
fix each penetrating node. You can alternate the vector display between uniform size or
magnitude %. The contour mode displays a contour plot from zero to the maximum penetration.
3. Click adjust to fix the penetration.
The adjust function allows you to quickly fix penetrations by moving the nodes that failed the
penetration check. When you click adjust, the penetrated nodes move in the direction and
magnitude of the vectors in the vectors display mode.
Additional use of the adjust function continues to translate the nodes in the same direction and
magnitude. You must use this function with discretion because the adjust function deforms the
original model at the points of penetration (shown in the next exercise).
After the adjust function has been applied, you can:
Use reject to undo the last modifications and remain in the penetration check adjustment panel
Use abort to undo the last modifications and return to the penetration panel
4. Use return to accept the modifications and return to the penetration panel
Once the amount of penetration is determined, the value is used to calculate the vector directions
and magnitudes required to fix the penetrating nodes. Surface to Surface and Single Surface
contacts create vector magnitudes equal to P/2 (the total penetration divided by 2). Node to
Surface contacts define vector magnitudes equal to P because only slave nodes are adjusted.
Note
The interface thickness calculator has two criteria available to fix penetrations:
When the part thickness scale is selected HyperMesh obtains the thickness of the
elements from the current template, applies the scale factor, and uses that thickness to
determine the penetration.
Altair Engineering

529
When the contact thickness is selected HyperMesh uses the value entered as the
thickness of the elements to determine the adjustment for the penetration. Entering a
value 0 tells HyperMesh to use the original thickness.
The save penetrated option allows you to save the location of the penetration areas.
Those data can then be used in other HyperMesh panels to fix the penetration.
In the Penetration Checking, HyperMesh does not take into account the direction of the
element or segment normals. Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the direction
the normals are pointing. However, during the Penetration Fix the computed direction
and magnitude of the penetration does take into account the direction of the normals.
When the segment orientation option is off (second figure below), the penetration
check does not take into account the directions of normals. Instead, the check
calculates the amount of penetration as the shortest distance required to move nodes
so they do not lie within the region defined as the element thickness. The returned
values are the mathematical absolute amount of nodal penetration. It is recommended
that you leave the segment orientation option active unless all the vectors in the
vector display mode are pointing in the opposite direction needed to fix the
penetration. The segment orientation can be used to check penetration for contact
defined by contact surf (*set_segment) as well as for other contacts or when the area of
the penetration check is defined by just nodes/elements.
In the first case the algorithm takes into consideration the orientation of the
*set_segment. In all other cases, the algorithm considers the element normal.
Note
The element normal is defined using the right hand rule according to the elements
nodes.
Segment normal is associated to the direction of the *set_segment used to define
contacts. The LS-DYNA entities *set_segment are created in HyperMesh using the
contactsurf panel in the BCs page.
The following picture illustrates the exercise we will do next where the use of the
segment orientation option is necessary to avoid erroneous penetration adjustment.
The first image shows the nodes where the two parts are penetrating and the second
one shows the direction of the element normals.

Altair Engineering
Where penetration exists
Direction of the element normals
Altair Engineering

531

1. Select the disp panel from the permanent menu.
2. Verify collectors shell9 and shell10 are the only active collectors
3. Deactivate any other collectors.
4. Click return.
To check for penetrations:
The model consists of two components of shell elements with thickness of 5.0; the flanges are
intersecting causing a severe penetration to exist. This section discusses the procedure to check the
penetration between two selections of elements.
1. Select the penetration panel from the Tool page.
2. Select the elems2elems sub-panel.
3. Click the elems selector at the top of the panel and select all the elements in the component
shell9 (red color).
4. Click the elems selector at the bottom of the panel and select all the elements in the component
shell10 (blue color).
5. If active unselect the check box of the segment orientation option.
6. Click check to activate it.
The area failing the Penetration check is marked and the Penetration Fix panel is displayed.
7. Click adjust.
Few nodes are moved in order to eliminate the penetration but the parts intersect each other to a
greater degree.
8. Click reject to restore the original position for the shell.
9. Select the check box of the segment orientation option.
10. Click Adjust.
The nodes are moved in the correct direction and no penetration exists.
11. Click return twice.
Note The <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/pene-dyna.hm file contains other model
components that may be useful for trying the penetration checking/adjusting functions.
These examples are not included in the tutorial but are available for more practice. Use
the display panel to view the other collectors in the model.
Creating Joints
Joint definitions are created in the fe joints panel on the 1D page. HyperMesh supports the following
standard joint types: Spherical, Revolute, Cylindrical, Planar, Universal, Translational, and Locking.
HyperMesh also supports LS-DYNAs *CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_OPTION property to
define friction, damping, stop angles, etc. The LS-DYNA solver interface supports the creation of
joints in the fe joints panel. The PAMCRASH solver interface currently supports the creation of joints
as rod elements (see the PAMCRASH tutorial).\
Altair Engineering
Note
A spherical joint consists of two coincident nodes. During analysis, the two coincident
nodes are forced to remain coincident but the bodies attached to each coincident node
are allowed to rotate freely about the joint location.
To retrieve the joints.hm file:

3. Click retrieve.
4. Select the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/joints.hm file.
5. Click Open.
6. Click return.
To load the dyna.key template:
2. Click load.
3. Select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.
4. Click Open.
5. Click return.
To activate coincident node picking:
According to the LS-DYNA specification a joint needs to reference a pair of coincident nodes. The
creation of this element requires the selection of coincident nodes. Do this by activating the coincident
node picking option in HyperMesh. When activated any attempt to select a coincident node will
present you with a selection circle identifying the coincident node id.
1. Select the options panel in the permanent menu.
2. Select the modeling subpanel.
3. Activate the coincident node picking check box.
4. Click return.
1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.
2. Select the blue torus, orange torus, and New Joint collectors for the current component.
3. Deactivate any other collectors.
4. Click return.
To create a spherical joint:
1. Select the fe joints panel on the 1D page.
Altair Engineering

533
3. Click the switch under joint type and select spherical.

4. Left click once on a node in the center of both tori to bring up the coincident node picking window
(see figure below).
There are two nodes in the window, node 598 and node 1.
5. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor over the node labeled 598.
The blue rigid body attached to this node is highlighted.
6. Release the left mouse button to select node 598.
7. Repeat the last three steps, but select node 1 from the coincident node picking window instead
of node 598.
8. Click create to generate the spherical joint element.
Note
A revolute joint consists of four nodes, two sets of two coincident nodes. During
analysis, all four of the revolute joints nodes remain at the same location with respect
to each other. The bodies attached to the nodes are free to rotate about the axis that
lies along the length of the revolute joint.

1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.
2. Select the bearing, shaft, bearing rigids, shaft rigids, and New Joint collectors.
3. Deactivate the other collectors.
4. Click return.
To create a revolute joint:
1. Zoom in on one end of the shaft assembly (see figure below).
2. Click the switch under joint type and select revolute.
3. Left click once on a node at the center of one of the rigid link elements to bring up the coincident
node picking window (see figure below).
4. Select a node attached to a blue rigid link element.
If you depress the left mouse button while your cursor is over a node in the coincident node

Altair Engineering
picking window, the element attached to that node is highlighted.

5. Click at the same node location again and select the node attached to the orange rigid link
element.
6. Repeat the previous three steps on the opposing pair of blue and orange rigid link elements (see
figure below).
7. Click create.
8. Click return.
Checking the Minimum Time Step

The time subpanel in the check elems panel calculates element time steps, based on the FEA
solver, and allows you to check for time steps that fall below a specified value. In explicit codes such
as LS-DYNA it is sufficient that a single element would have a small time step to drastically reduce
the total CPU time of the entire job. For this reason the check is used to identify those elements.
To retrieve the pene_dyna.hm file:
3. Click retrieve.
4. Select the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/pene_dyna.hm file.
5. Click Open.
6. Click return.
To specify the dyna.key template:
The time step associated to an element is related to its geometric characteristic and to its material
properties such as density and young modulus. For this reason a material and a valid template need
to be associated to the elements.
Altair Engineering

535
2. Click load.
4. Click Open.
5. Click return.
To check the time steps:
2. Select the time sub-panel.
3. Click check elems.
HyperMesh lists the total number of elements failing the check.

Altair Engineering
Dummy Positioning, Seatbelt Routing, and Control

Volumes - HM-4510
This tutorial continues with several exercises demonstrating general interfacing with crash analysis
codes.
Dummy positioning
Seatbelt routing
Reviewing airbag design state

Dummy positioning
The dummy panel is located under the safety panel module. The dummy panel is used to position
any dummy model that contains a component hierarchy (a.k.a. tree structure) defined in HyperMesh .
The dynakey and pamcrash import translators can build the tree structure automatically when
importing supported dummy model files.
H-Point subpanel
Position and rotate the H-point

1. Select files on any of the main menu pages.
2. Activate the hm file radio button.
3. Click file = twice.
4. Select the dummy_position.hm file from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
5. Click retrieve.
Load the dyna.key template in the files panel:
1. Select files on any of the main menu pages.
2. Activate the template radio button.
Altair Engineering


5. Click return to leave the files panel.
Turn off all entities except components and set the component display to shaded only:
1. Click on the only comps macro button found in the Display: group to turn off all entities except
for components.
2. Under the Display: macro button group, click on the per button next to gfx to turn on
performance graphics.
3. Under the vis panel, click on the shaded only icon, then the all button.
4. Click return to leave the vis panel.
5. Enter the dummy panel from the safety panel on the tool page.
6. Activate the H-point radio button to enter the H-point sub-panel.
7. Select any element on the dummy to select the entire dummy.
8. Under position: type -1.280, 0.350, and 0.284 in the x=, y=, and z= number fields respectivly.
The tab key can be used to cycle through the number fields.
9. Click position to move the H-point to the specified coordinates.
10. Under rotate: set the N1, N2, N3 vector selection to y-axis and set increment = 24.00.
11. Click rotate+to see the rotation angle about the y-axis.
12. Click rotate- to see the negative rotation about the y-axis.
Incremental subpanel
Adjusting Limb Positions

Adjusting limbs utilizes the incremental subpanel under the dummy panel. Internally, incremental
rotations are based on successive rotations about X, Y, then Z. These successive rotation values are
reflected in the current number fields. It is not required to rotate joints in order about their local X,
then Y, and then Z axis when using the interface in the dummy panel. There is no limitation on the
number of rotations nor the order of rotations. However, rotating out of sequence will modify all
rotation values reported in the X, Y, and Z current number fields to reflect successive rotations.
To adjust the limb positions:
1. Activate the incremental radio button to enter the incremental sub-panel.
2. Enter 5.00 in the increment number field.
3. Select any element in the lower left leg. HyperMesh follows the model hierarchy up to the
Altair Engineering
previous joint in the knee and down to the end of the hierarchy through the foot.
4. Click the <, decrement, next to yrot row five times to change the rotation of the left knee to -25.0
degrees.
5. Select any element in the lower right leg and click the <, decrement, next to yrot row five times to
change the rotation of the right knee to -25.0 degrees.
6. Repeat this exercise to set the shoulders yrot to -40.0, elbows yrot to -65.0, and wrists xrot
to +/-10.0.
7. Click return.
Seatbelt Routing
The seatbelt panel is located under the safety panel module. The seatbelt panel can be used to
create straight seatbelt segments as well as seatbelt segments that wrap around a dummys torso or
lap.
Seatbelts panel
To create straight belt segments:
Seatbelt 1
Altair Engineering

1. Retrieve the seatbelt.hm file from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory

(or skip this step and continue with the Dummy Positioning tutorial).
Select files on any of the main menu pages.
Activate the hm file radio button.
Click retrieve.
Select the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/seatbelt.hm file.
Click open.
2. Shade the elements.
Turn on performance graphics from the Display macro button group, by clicking on the per
button next to gfx.
3. From the tool page, select the safety panel, then the seatbelt sub-panel.
4. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the yellow retractor element (see
figure, Seatbelt 1, below).
5. Select the upper, red slipring for the to node selection box (see figure).
6. Click mesh. When components for the wrap around: selection have not been specified,
HyperMesh creates straight belt segments between the from node and two node nodes.
7. Click return.
To create shoulder belt segments that wrap around the torso:
Seatbelt 2
Altair Engineering
1. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the upper, red slipring element (see
figure).
2. Select the lower, red slipring element for the to node selection box (see figure).
3. Activate the comps selection box and select the components that compose the torso area.
Click the comps entity selection box twice to bring up the component list panel.
Click the comps entity selection box in the component list panel to bring up the entity
selection window.
Select by assems to bring up the assembly list panel.
Select the upper torso and lower torso assembly.
Click select in the assembly list panel.
Click return.
4. Click the toggle next to 1D to set it to 2D/1D to create a combination of linear and plate belt
elements.
5. Enter 0.03, 0.10, 0.01, and 0.005 in the belt width =, from side endlength =, to side
endlength =, and gap = fields, respectively.
6. Click place 1D elements in twice and select the seatbelts_linear collector containing linear
element properties.
7. Click place 2D elements in twice and select the seatbelts_shell collector containing shell
element properties.
Panel settings
8. Click orient to create the belt line and enter belt orientation mode. Two red and one green belt
segments are displayed. The red segments represent the belt line between the connection points
and the first point of contact on the dummy. The green segment is in contact with the dummy.
9. Adjust the segments by clicking on a segment to activate it, then while holding in the left mouse
button, drag the mouse up and down to adjust the segments orientation about its endpoints. The
easiest way to adjust the belt line is to adjust the two end segments rather than the center green
segment.
10. When the belt is properly oriented, click mesh to enter the mesh model.
11. Adjust the belt densities in the mesh module as needed then click return to leave the mesh
module.
Note
Click the toggle in the panel area of the mesh module to switch between a tria and rigid
element transition between the shell and linear elements.
Altair Engineering

To create belt segments that wrap around the lap:

The steps for creating belt segments that wrap around the lap are the same as the steps for wrapping
belts around the torso. The only difference is to select new end points as well as the lap components
instead of torso components.
1. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the top of the constraint on the floor
(see figure).
2. Keep the lower, red element at the buckle as the to node (see figure).
3. Click reset under the comps selection box.
4. Select the components that compose the lap.
Click the comps entity selection box to bring up the component list panel.
Click the comps entity selection box in the component list panel to bring up the entity
selection window.
Select by assems to bring up the assembly list panel.
Activate the checkboxes next to the lower torso, upper left leg, and upper right leg
assemblies.

Altair Engineering
Click select to leave the assembly list panel.
Click return to leave the component list panel.
5. Click orient to create the belt line and enter belt orientation mode. Two red and one green belt
segments are displayed. The red segments represent the belt line between the connection points
and the first point of contact on the dummy. The green segment is in contact with the dummy.
6. Adjust the segments by clicking on a segment to activate it, then while holding in the left mouse
button, drag the mouse up and down to adjust the segments orientation about its endpoints. The
easiest way to adjust the belt line is to adjust the two end segments rather than the center green
segment.
7. When the belt is properly oriented, click mesh to enter the mesh model.
8. Adjust the belt densities in the mesh module as needed, and then click return to leave the mesh
module.
Seatbelt 3
Altair Engineering

Reviewing Airbag Design State

The control volumes panel is located under the safety panel module. The control volumes panel
can be used to create control volumes as well as review their design state.
To review the design state:
1. Retrieve the seatbelt.hm file from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory
(or skip this step and continue with the Seatbelt Routing tutorial):
Select files on any of the main menu pages.
Activate the hm file radio button.
Click file = twice.
Select the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/seatbelt.hm file.
Click retrieve.
2. Set the component display to shaded only:
Under the Display: macro button group, click on the Per button next to Gfx to turn on
performance graphics
Under the vis panel, click on the shaded only icon, then the all button.
Click return to leave the vis panel.
3. Enter the control vol panel from the safety panel on the tool page.
4. Select the view button on the permanent menu on the right side of the menu panels and select
the restore2 button.
5. Select reference geometry sub-panel.
6. Click review.
7. Select cv1 from the control volume list to display this control volumes design state in the
HyperMesh GUI window.
8. Click return to leave the control vol panel. The display of the control volume will be set back to
its initial state.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Baseball Impact using LS-DYNA HM-4600

HyperMesh - HM-1000. Working knowledge of the creation and editing of collectors and card images
are a definite pre-requisite. Familiarity with the interfaces panel, and the creation of boundary
conditions are useful although not required.
In this tutorial you will learn how to setup an LS-DYNA input file for analyzing the impact response of
a ball impacting a baseball bat. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Creating materials, sections and parts for the model
Defining the contact between the ball and the bat with the
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE card
Setting up the bat as rigid until the time of impact
Applying an initial velocity to the ball and the bat using the
*INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION card
The units used in this tutorial are Milliseconds Millimeters Kilograms (ms, mm, kg), and the tutorial is
based on LS-DYNA 970.
detailed information on the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface, refer to the External Interfacing section of
the on-line help.
The model used is one of a ball and a baseball bat:
Baseball bat and ball model
Altair Engineering

To load the LS-DYNA user profile and import the model:

In this section, load the LS-DYNA user profile, then import a LS-DYNA input deck containing the
mesh for the ball and club.
1. From the Geom page select the user profile button to load the LsDyna user profile.
Selecting the LS-DYNA user profile sets the FE input reader to LS-DYNA KEY and loads the
dyna.key FE output template. It also loads an LS-DYNA macro menu with numerous tools
specific to this interface. The graphical user interface is tailored to LS-DYNA users with panel
names and options renamed or removed to match LS-DYNA terminology as much as possible.
2. From the files panel, select the import sub-panel to import the LS-DYNA deck
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/baseball.key.
The model is loaded and organized into three component collectors (1, 2 and 3) named by
HyperMesh. One for the ball (2), one for the bat (3), and a third component to attach the bat to its
center of rotation and containing beam elements (1). No materials or properties are defined at this
time.
Note
When importing an LS-DYNA deck, any HyperMesh warning and error messages are
written to a file named dynakey.msg. This file is created in the folder from which
HyperMesh is started. The content of the file is also displayed in a pop-up Tcl window.
On import, any LS-DYNA cards not supported by HyperMesh are written to the control
card unsupp_cards. This card is accessed from the BCs page/control cards panel
and is a pop-up text editor. The unsupported cards are exported with the rest of the
model.
Care should be taken if an unsupported card points to an entity in HyperMesh. An
example of this is an unsupported material referenced by a *PART card. HyperMesh
stores unsupported cards as text and does not consider pointers.
On import, HyperMesh renumbers entities having the same ID as other entities. In
HyperMesh, for example, all elements must have a unique ID. The message file
dynakey.msg provides a list of renumbered elements and their original and new IDs.
To understand the relationships between the *PART, *ELEMENT, *MAT and *SECTION cards in
HyperMesh:
A *PART shares attributes such as section properties (*SECTION) and a material model (*MAT). A
group of elements (*ELEMENT) sharing common attributes generally share a common part ID (PID).
The figure below shows how the keywords *PART, *ELEMENT, *MAT and *SECTION relate to each
other in LS-DYNA.
Relationships in LS-DYNA

Altair Engineering
The figure below shows how these keywords are mapped to HyperMesh entities:
Map to HyperMesh entities

Component, property and material collectors are created and edited from the collectors panel. For
the LS-DYNA keyword interface, there is only one component card image and it is named Part. There
are several property card images, such as SectShll, EOS1, and HourGlass. There are many
material card images, such as MATL_1, MAT_T1, and SDMAT1.
The complete list of card images is available from the collectors panel as you assign card images to
the various types of collectors.
A HyperMesh card image allows you to view the image of keywords and data lines for defined LSDYNA entities as interpreted by the loaded template. The keywords and data lines appear in the
exported LS-DYNA input file as you see them in the card images. Additionally, for some card images,
you can define and edit various parameters and data items for the corresponding LS-DYNA keyword.
many entities, their card image can be viewed and edited from the panels in which they are created.
To create *MAT cards:
In HyperMesh, a *MAT card is a material collector with a card image. To relate it to a *PART card, the
material collector needs to be assigned to a component collector.
You can assign the material to the component collector as you create the component using the
create sub-panel of the collectors panel. In situations, where the material was not assigned to the
component at the time of creation (and in this case a dummy material is created with the same name
as the component collector), update the component collectors definition by assigning the material in
the update sub-panel of the collectors panel.
In this section, create a material collector with the MATL1 card image using the collectors panel.
This material will be assigned to the ball. Create also a material collector with the MATL3 card image
to define the material used for the bat.
1. Create/edit a material collector with the name elast1, and a MATL1 card image using the
create sub-panel of the collectors panel.
-
In the card previewer, click [Rho] to activate its field and enter 5.0 E-7 for the density.
Specify 35 for Youngs modulus [E].
Specify 0.45 for Poissons ratio [Nu].
2. Create/edit a material collector with the name elast2, and a MATL3 card image.
Altair Engineering

Click the [Rho] field and enter 3.7 E-6 for the density.
Specify 0.25 for Poissons ratio [Nu].
Specify 0.1 for yield stress [SIGY].
Note
If you have difficulties completing any task with the creation, update or editing of
collectors in this tutorial, refer to the on-line help for the collectors panel by clicking
help from the permanent menu.
Hint
Any collector that you mistakenly create instead of create/edit can be edited using the
card image sub-panel of the collectors panel.
In this section, we created the materials we will use for the analysis. We can now define the
*SECTION cards that will be used to define the properties of the elements in the model.
To create *SECTION cards:
In HyperMesh, the *SECTION card is assigned to a property collector. To generate this card, create a
property collector using the collectors panel.
Although a material = field displays in the create sub-panel of the collectors panel when creating a
property collector, this field is not meaningful for LS-DYNA models as *SECTION cards do not
reference any materials (*MAT card).
This field is needed for interfacing with other solvers and this is why you see it. As an LS-DYNA user,
you have two ways of treating this field:
You can select an existing material when creating a property collector and avoid creating a
material you will not use.
You can leave the field blank. By doing so, a new material (with no material card image) is
created with the same name as the property collectors, but it is not exported to the LS-DYNA
input file as no card is assigned to it.
The model consists of a ball modeled with shell elements, a bat meshed with solids, and beam
elements to constrain the bat to its rotation center. Create property collectors with appropriate
*SECTION cards for all three types of elements.
1. Create/edit a property collector with the name prop shell, and a SectShll card.
-
In the card previewer for the *SECTION_SHELL card, specify 2.5 for the shell thickness
[T1].
This *SECTION_SHELL card will be used for the ball (component 2).
2. Create a property collector with the name prop solid, and a SectSld card.
This *SECTION_SOLID card will be assigned to the bat (component 3).
3. Create/edit a property collector with the name prop beam, and a SectBeam card.
-
Select the element formulation [ELMFORM] 1 for the beams.
Specify 25 for [THIC1s] and [THIC1t].

This *SECTION_BEAM card will be assigned to the beam elements in component 1.

Altair Engineering
In this section we created the *SECTION property cards that will be assigned to the component
collectors.
To update components with materials:
The various components in the model do not have materials assigned to them. Update the
components containing the bat (3) and beam (1) elements with the elast2 material using the
collectors panel, update sub-panel. Similarly associate the material elast1 to the component 1
defining the ball.
1. Assign the material elast2 to comps 1 and 3 representing the beam and solid elements using the
update sub-panel of the collectors panel.
-
Specify material id for the characteristic to update.
The message The collectors have been updated appears in the header bar.
2. Assign the material elast1 to comps 2 representing the ball using the update sub-panel of the
collectors panel.
In this section we updated the material collectors assigned to component collectors. By doing this, we
created a relationship that will result in the right material ID showing in *PART cards once we assign
them to our component collector.
To assign *PART cards to the ball, bat and beam elements:
Assign the *PART card to the component for the ball and specify the *SECTION_SHELL card ID in it.
Do this by loading and editing the Part card image for the ball component collector (2) using the
collectors panel, card image sub-panel.
Next, using the same procedure, assign a *PART card to the bat component (3) and specify the
*SECTION_SOLID card ID. Finally assign a *PART card to the component containing the beams (1)
and specify the *SECTION_BEAM card ID in it.
1. Load/edit the Part card for component 2 using the card image sub-panel of the collectors
panel, and assign prop shell to the [SID] field.
-
In the card previewer, click [SID] to activate a selector.
Click the [SID] yellow selector and select prop shell from the list of property collectors
(*SECTION cards).
2. Similarly, load/edit the Part card for component 3 using the card image sub-panel of the
collectors panel, and assign prop solid to the [SID] field.
3. Similarly load/edit the Part card for component 1 using the card image sub-panel of the
collectors panel, and assign prop beam to the [SID] field
In this section we assigned *PART cards to our component collectors. We also made sure to link
them to the *SECTION cards by assigning the corresponding property collectors. The material id
fields were automatically set from assigning material collectors to the component collectors in the
previous section.
To create *CONTACT cards:
With the exception of *CONTACT_ENTITY (created in the rigid walls panel), LS-DYNA contacts are
created in the interfaces panel from the BCs page.
An LS-DYNA contact is a HyperMesh group. When you want to manipulate a *CONTACT, such as
Altair Engineering

delete it, renumber it, or turn it off, you need to work with groups.
LS-DYNA has multiple ways to define master and slave entity types from which to choose. The table
below lists these types. While HyperMesh supports all of them, this section focuses on contacts with
slave and master type 3.
SLAVE AND MASTER TYPES
LS-DYNA Card
EQ. 0: set segment id
*SET_SEGMENT
EQ. 1: shell element set id
*SET_SHELL_Option
EQ. 2: part set id
*SET_PART
EQ. 3: part id
*PART
*EQ. 4: node set id
*SET_NODE_Option
*EQ. 5: include all

*EQ. 6: part set id for exempted parts
*SET_PART_LIST
*For slave surface only

In this section, create a contact between the ball and the bat with the card
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE. The ball will be the slave surface while the
bat will be the master surface. Define the master and slave entities as components (*PART).
First create a group with the SurfaceToSurface card image using the create sub-panel of the
interfaces panel. Next, add the master and slave to the group using the add sub-panel. Lastly, edit
the groups card image using the card image sub-panel, select the Automatic option and specify a
friction coefficient.
1. Create a group with the name contact and the SurfaceToSurface card image using the
create sub-panel of the interfaces panel.
-
From the BCs page select the interfaces panel.
Specify contact for name =.
Select SurfaceToSurface for type =.
Optionally select a color.
Click create.
2. Define the master and slave as comps 3 and 2 respectively using the add sub-panel.
-
From the interfaces panel, select the add sub-panel.
Set the entity type to comps under master:.
Click the yellow comps selector and select the bat component 3.

Altair Engineering
Click update in the master: line, to the right of the yellow comps selector.
Select comps for slave:.
Click the yellow comps selector in the slave: line and select the ball component 2.
Click update in the slave: line.
Click review to graphically view the entities in the interface the master entities of the interface
are drawn in blue and the slave entities in red.
3. Edit the definition of the group, using the card image sub-panel, to select the Automatic option
and set the static coefficient to 0.1.
-
From the interfaces panel, select the card image sub-panel.
Click edit to review the card image.
Under Options, use the switch and select Automatic from the pop up menu.
Specify 0.10 for the static coefficient [FS].
In this section we defined the contact between the bat and the ball as a
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURACE.
To create *DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID cards in HyperMesh:
The table below lists the LS-DYNA *DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID keywords. Each of them is generated
by creating HyperMesh load collectors with the Dform2RigidNew card image.
DYNA Keyword
Purpose
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID
Define parts to be switched to rigid at the start of

the calculation
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID_AUTOMATIC
Define parts to be switched to rigid or to

deformable at some state in the calculation.
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID_INERTIA
Define inertial properties for the new rigid bodies

created when the deformable parts are switched
Below is the card format for specifying parts for the *DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID keywords:
1
PID
MRB
where
PID is the ID of the slave part to be switched
MRB is the part ID of the master rigid body to which the part is merged.
In HyperMesh, rather than specifying one part at a time, you specify an entity set containing all of
the desired slave parts in the *DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID card image. On export, the entity sets
part IDs are written to the LS-DYNA input file according to the above card format.
Altair Engineering

To create a *DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID card for the bat:

Create this card to set up the bat as rigid until the time of impact with the ball in order to reduce
computation time. First create an entity set containing the bat component (3). Then create the
following two keywords:
DYNA Keyword
Purpose
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID
Switch the deformable bat to rigid at the

beginning of the analysis
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID_AUTOMATIC
Switch the rigid bat back to its deformable

configuration when contact between the bat
and ball is detected.
1. Create an entity set of comps with the name bat set and containing the bat component 3 using
the entity sets panel.
-
From the BCs page select the entity sets panel.
Specify bat set for the set name.
Set the entity type to comps.
Select the bat and beams component 3.
Create.
2. Create/edit a loadcols named def_to_rig with the card Dform2RigidNew in the collectors
panel.
-
In the card previewer, click the part set ID option [PSID] to activate a PSID(1) selector.
Click PSID(1) and select bat set from the list of sets.
Use a similar approach to define the conditions to switch the baseball bat back to its original
deformable configuration.
3. Create/edit a loadcols named rig_to_def_with the card Dform2RigidNew in the collectors

panel.
-
In the card previewer, select Automatic under Options.
Enter 1 for the unique set number for this automatic switch set [SWSET].
Select 4 in the Code field for the activation switch code.

The switch will take place when the contact force is non-zero.
Specify 1 for [ENTNO] to identify the contact.
Check the box for R2D_Flag in the menu area.
Move the scroll bar on the left side of the card image down until you see [PSIDR2D].
Specify the bat set set ID in the [PSIDR2D] field.

HyperMesh automatically writes the number of rigid parts to be switched to deformable in the
R2D field (card 2, field 6) based on the number of parts in the entity set you will select.
In this section we defined the bat as a rigid until the time of impact.

Altair Engineering
We can now apply boundary conditions: a translational velocity to the ball, a rotational velocity to the
bat and constraints the common node of the beam elements.
To create an initial velocity (*INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION) for the ball:
In this section, create an initial velocity *INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION card to apply velocity to
the ball.
Create/edit a loadcols with the name tran_vel and an InitialVel (*INITIAL_VELOCITY) card
using the collectors panel.
-
In the card previewer, activate the Generation option
Select Part ID under STYP for set type.
Select the component 2 [PID].
Specify -30.0 for the initial velocity in the global y-direction VY.
This completes the creation of an initial velocity for the ball in the negative global Y direction.
To create a rotational initial velocity for the bat

Create a *INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION card to apply a rotational velocity to the bat along the
Z axis passing through the common end of the beams.
Do this by first creating a load collector with the InitialVel card image. Then edit the load collector
card image to specify the GENERATION option and other parameters.
Create/edit a loadcols named rot_vel and with the InitialVel card image using the collectors
panel.
-
In the menu area, activate the Generation option.
Select Part ID under STYP for set type.
Specify the component 3 in the PID field
Specify 0.02 for the angular velocity in the [OMEGA] field.
Specify -2000 in the [XC] field
Specify 1 in the [NZ] field
In this section, we created an angular velocity applied to the bat.

To create a *BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE card:
In this section, constrain with a *BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE card the node on the common end of the
beam elements leaving the rotation around the Z axis free.
Do this by first creating a load collector with no card image. The constraints will be organized into this
collector. Then select BoundSPC for the HyperMesh constraint configuration from the elem types
panel. Lastly, create constraints from the constraints panel
1. Create a loadcols with the name SPC and no card image using the collectors panel.
2. Set the type of constraint to *BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE in the load types panel.
-
From the BCs page, select the load types panel.
Altair Engineering

Set constraint = to BoundSPC.
3. Constrain the common node of the beam elements using the constraints panel.
-
From the BCs page, select the constraints panel.
Set the entity selector to nodes.
Select the node on the common end of the beam elements.

The node at the end of the beams is highlighted.
Check the boxes for the first five degrees of freedom, dof1 through dof5, leaving the box for
dof6 unchecked.
Create the constraints.
In this section, we used the load types panel to ensure that the type of constraints was set to the LSDYNA card of interest. We then simply used the constraints panel to constrain the node common to
all the beam elements fully except for rotation around the Z axis (dof6).
To review control cards and export the model:
In this section, enter the control cards panel from the BCs page to review the controls and
parameters used for this run, and export the model to an LS-DYNA deck.
1. From the BCs page select the control cards panel.
This panel will display, on multiple pages, the control cards available. The control cards that are
activated are displayed in green.
2. Export to your working directory the model as an LS-DYNA deck called baseball_run.key
using the export sub-panel of the files panel.
In this tutorial we introduced some of the concepts that govern the HyperMesh interface to LS-DYNA.
We also use numerous panels that allowed us to do basic modeling in terms of LS-DYNA such as
defining contacts or boundary conditions.
For additional tools and techniques, refer to the tutorial Pre-Processing for Airbag Analysis using LSDYNA - HM-4610.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Airbag Analysis Using LS-DYNA HM-4610

For this tutorial it is recommended that you complete the introductory tutorial Getting Started with
HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as the tutorial Pre-Processing for Baseball Impact using LS-DYNA HM-4600 for basic concepts on the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface.
In this tutorial you will learn how to use HyperMesh to setup a LS-DYNA input file for analyzing the
impact response of a ball and inflating airbag. The ball is subject to the gravity load. The modeling
steps that are covered are:
Creating a *AIRBAG_WANG_NEFSKE card
Defining the balls load with a *LOAD_BODY card
Defining the contact between the ball and the airbag with a
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE card
Defining the auto-contact for the airbag elements with a

*CONTACT_AIRBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE card
Defining the contact between the airbag and a rigid plane with a
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO_SURFACE card
The units used in the model are millisecond millimeter and kilogram (ms, mm, kg), and the tutorial is
detailed information on the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface, refer to the External Interfacingsection
of the on-line help.
administrator.
The model used is one of a ball, a folded airbag and a rigid plane:
Airbag and ball model

To load the LS-DYNA user profile and retrieve the model:
In this section, load the LS-DYNA user profile and retrieve the HyperMesh binary file containing the
model for the tutorial.
Altair Engineering

1. Load the LsDyna user profile using the user profile button from the Geom page.
Selecting the LS-DYNA user profile sets the FE input reader to LS-DYNA KEY and loads the
dyna.key FE output template. It also loads a LS-DYNA macro menu with numerous tools specific
to this interface. The graphical user interface is tailored to LS-DYNA users with panel names and
options renamed or removed top match LS-DYNA terminology as much as possible.
2. Retrieve the file airbag.hm from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory using the hmfile
sub-panel of the files panel.
The model contains 4 component collectors defining the folded airbag, the ball and a rigid plate. It
also contains several curves displayed in a plot. You can turn the display of plots off using the
display panel disp.
3. Set the display of plots to none in the disp panel from the permanent menu.
In this section, we simply retrieved the model and simplified the display by turning off plots.
To define the airbag with a *AIRBAG_WANG_NEFSKE card:
The *AIRBAG card defines an airbag or control volume in LS-DYNA, and is created in HyperMesh
using the control vol panel from the safety module accessed from the Tool page.
Note that this same panel is also accessible by clicking the *airbag shortcut on the A-D page of the
LS_DYNA macro menu.
In this section, start by creating a *SET_PART_LIST card containing the components AirbagTop
and AirbagButton. Then create and edit the *AIRBAG card using the control vol panel to specify
the set ID that describes its geometry.
1. Create a set of comps named airbag and containing components AirbagTop and
AirbagButton using the entity sets panel.
-
From the BCs page, enter the entity sets panel.
Specify airbag for the set name.
Select components AirbagTop and AirbagButton.
Create the set.
2. In the control vol panel, create a control volume named bag, with the card airbag, and assign to
it the airbag set.
-
Enter the safety module from the Tool page.
Enter the control vol panel, airbag sub-panel.
Specify bag for the control volume name.
Select airbag for the card image.
Select the entity set airbag.
Create the control volume.
3. Edit the control volume bag, select WangNefske under Options, and enter the following data in
the card image.
Field
Parameter description
Value
CV
Heat capacity at constant volume
1000.0
CP
Heat capacity at constant pressure
1300.0

Altair Engineering
Temperature of input gas
800.0
LCMT
Pre-defined curve specifying input mass flow rate
curve id 1
C23
Vent orifice coefficient
1.0
LCA23
Pre-defined curve defining vent orifice area as a function of

pressure
curve id 2
CP23
Orifice coefficient for leakage
1.0
PE
Ambient pressure
1.0E-4
RO
Ambient density
1.0E-9
GC
Gravitational conversion constant
1.0
In this section, we defined the airbag referencing in an *AIRBAG card the set of components
containing the actual elements. We also specified numerous parameters in the card itself.
To define the gravity on the ball with a *LOAD_BODY_X card:
Create this card to define the gravity load acting on the ball in the negative x-direction. Do this by
creating a load collector with the LoadBody card image. In the collectors card image, specify the
pre-defined *DEFINE_CURVE curve with ID 3.
In the collectors panel, create/edit a loadcols named grav, and using the LoadBody card
image.
-
In the menu area, activate X_Direction.
Specify the pre-defined curve for gravity for the load curve ID [LCID].
To create and review contacts in HyperMesh:

DYNA has multiple ways to define master and slave entity types from which to choose. HyperMesh
supports all of them and the table below describes how all slave and master types are created and
specified in contacts.
Slave and Master Type
DYNA Card
Panel Used to Create Card
Equivalent Type in
interfaces panel,
add sub-panel
EQ. 0: set segment id
*SET_SEGMENT
set_segment (contactsurfs)
or
csurfs
interfaces, add sub-panel
entity
entity sets or
sets
entity
entity sets or
sets
comps
EQ. 1: shell element set id
EQ. 2: part set id
*SET_SHELL_Option
*SET_PART_LIST
EQ. 3: part id
*PART
collectors
comps
* EQ. 4: node set id
*SET_NODE_Option
entity sets or
sets
entity
all
sets
* EQ. 5: include all

* EQ. 6: part set id for
Altair Engineering
*SET_PART_LIST

and then card image subpanel
exempted parts
* For slave surface only
As shown in the table the interfaces panel add sub-panel has several master and slave types
(comps, sets, entity, etc.) to choose from to specify the LS-DYNA master or slave for a
*CONTACT. Only the valid master and slave types can be selected for the particular contact you
are creating.
When the master or slave type is set to comps and only one component is selected, the LS-DYNA
type is 3, part id, and *PART is created. When multiple components are selected, the LS-DYNA type
is 2, part set id, and *SET_PART_LIST is created.
Moreover with the lsdyna user profile loaded when the master or slave type is sets, only those
sets valid for the particular contact you are can be selected. For example, for
*CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE, only a list of node sets is available for slave; you will not see
a list of other set types, like element or part sets.
Note
You can review contacts with the review button in the interfaces panel, add sub-panel.
To define the contact between the airbag and the ball:

In this section, define the contact between the airbag and the ball using a
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE card. Define the ball as the master surface
with master set type 3, part id. Define all of the airbag to be the slave surface with slave set type 2,
part set id. Use the pre-defined entity set (*SET_PART_LIST) named airbag to define the slave
surface. The set contains the components AirbagTop and AirbagButton.
1. In the interfaces panel, create/edit a group named Airbag_ball, of type SurfaceToSurface,
and assigning the Automatic option.
-
From the BCs page, enter the interfaces panel, create sub-panel.
Specify Airbag_Ball for the group name.
Select SurfaceToSurface for the type.
Create/edit the group.
In the menu area, select Automatic under Options.
2. Use the add sub-panel to define the Ball comps as master and the airbag sets as slave.
-
Go to the add sub-panel of the interfaces panel.
Set the master surface type to comps.
Select the Ball component.
Update the master selection.
Set the slave surface type to sets.
Select the entity set airbag.
Update the slave selection.
In this section we defined the contact between the ball and the components defining the folded
airbag.

Altair Engineering
To define the self contact for the airbag:

Define the self-contact for the airbag in the interfaces panel using the
*CONTACT_AIRBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE card. Define all of the airbag to be the slave surface with
slave set type 2, part set id.
1. In the interfaces panel, create/edit a group named airbag with the SingleSurface type, and
assign it Airbag from the list of Options.
-
Enter airbag for the group name.
Select SingleSurface for the type.
Select Airbag under Options.
2. Use the add sub-panel to update the slave with comps AirbagTop and AirbagButton
-
Select the add sub-panel.
Set the slave: surface type to comps.
Select the components AirbagTop and AirbagButton.
Update the slave selection.
In this section we defined the self contact for the airbag itself.
To define the contact between the plate and the airbag:
In this section, define the contact between the plate and the airbag with a
*CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE card. Define the RigidPlate part as the master with master
type 0 set segment id. Define AirbagButton as the slave with slave type 4, node set id.
1. Create a contactsurf (*SET_SEGMENT card) for the master entities RigidPlate using the
set_segment panel
-
Enter the set_segment panel in the BCs page.
Select the elems sub-panel.
Specify master for name =.
Select setSegment for card image =.
Optionally select a color for the HyperMesh contactsurf entity
Select the RigidPlate component and click select.
Create the contactsurf.

The graphical representation of a contactsurf is pyramids, one pyramid for each segment.
The orientation of a pyramid represents the normal orientation of the segment. By default, the
orientation of a pyramid is the same as the normal of the element underneath.
2. Create the NodesToSurface contact with the name Airbag_Plate using the interfaces panel.
-
Enter the interfaces panel, create sub-panel.
Enter Airbag_Plate for the group name.
Altair Engineering

Select NodesToSurface for the type.
Optionally select a group color.
Create the group.
3. Use the add sub-panel to add the master csurf and the slave nodes from AirbagButton.
-
Select the add sub-panel of the interfaces panel.
Set the master: surface type to csurf.
Select the contactsurf master just created.
Add the master selection.
Set the slave surface type to entity.
Select the nodes in the AirbagButton component collector.
Add the slave selection.
In this section, we defined the contact between the rigid plate and the airbag as a surface to nodes
contact using the HyperMesh contact surface entity and nodes.
In this section, review the controls and parameters used for this run. Finally, export the model as a
LS-DYNA deck.
In HyperMesh, with the exception of the cards listed in the table below, all *CONTROL and
*DATABASE cards are created from the control cards panel in the BCs page.
*DATABASE cards NOT created from control cards panel
DYNA card
Panel used to create card
*DATABASE_CROSS_SECTION_(Option)
PLANE option, rigid walls panel

SET option, interfaces panel
*DATABASE_HISTORY_(Option)
output blocks panel
*DATABASE_NODAL_FORCE_GROUP
interfaces panel
1. Enter the control cards panel in the BCs page to review the control cards for this run.
2. Export to your working directory a LS-DYNA input file using the export sub-panel of the files
panel.
You can submit the LS-DYNA input file to LS-DYNA.
In this tutorial we learned how to generate various loading and boundary conditions in HyperMesh.
We also defined various types of contacts using the interfaces panel.
For additional information on how to create the various LS-DYNA cards supported in HyperMesh,
review the topic Generating LS-DYNA Cards Supported by HyperMesh. Use, for example, the Index
tab of the on-line help to access this topic that contains step by step instructions on how to generate
the various cards.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using LSDYNA - HM-4620

HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as the tutorials Pre-Processing for Baseball Impact using LS-DYNA HM-4600 and Pre-Processing for Airbag Analysis using LS-DYNA - HM-4610 for basic concepts on
the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface.
In this tutorial you will learn how to use HyperMesh to setup an LS-DYNA input deck for analysis of
the impact of a bumper again a moving rigid wall. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Associating *Part, *Mat and *Section using the Content Table.
Converting node to node connections (*Constrained_Node_Set) into a mesh-less welding

(mat100) using HyperMesh connectors.
Defining the contact for the elements in the bumper with a

*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL card.
Defining the interaction bumper-moving wall with the *RIGIDWALL_PLANAR and

*DEFINE_BOX cards.
Creating a *DATABASE_HISTORY_SHELL card to output time history for user defined

elements.
the on-line help, or click the help button while in the panel to display its context sensitive help. For
detailed information on the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface, refer to the External Interfacing section of
the on-line help.
This tutorial uses a file located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you are
The model used consists of a simplified bumper model (see image below):
Bumper model
Altair Engineering


In this section, load the LS-DYNA user profile and retrieve the HyperMesh binary file containing the
1. Load the LsDyna user profile using the user profile button from the Tool page.
Selecting the LS-DYNA user profile will also load the LS-DYNA macro menu with a specific tool
called Content Table we will use in this tutorial.
LS-DYNA macro menu

2. From the files panel, select the hm file sub-panel and retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/bumper_crash.hm.
The model contains 5 component collectors defining the lower and top bumpers, the mouthing
bracket, the backing plate and the welds.
To review and organize parts, properties, and materials using the Content Table:
None of the components in the model have a material or a property associated to them at this point,
although materials and properties have been defined for the model and are present in the database.
In this section, use the Content Table to associate the various materials and properties to the
components according to the following table:
Component (*Part)
Material (*Mat)
Property (*Prop)
Backing Plate Bumper
aluminum
section 1mm
Mounting Bracket
steel
section 2mm
Lower Front Bumper
steel
section 2.5mm
Top Front Bumper
steel
section 2.5mm

Altair Engineering
1. Click the Content Table macro from the Tools page of the macro menu.
A dialog is displayed with a tabular list of the parts (components) in the model.
Content table
2. Assign a new section and material to the Backing Plate Bumper part.
Left click the selection button (left-most column) corresponding to the Backing Plate
Bumper part
The entire row highlights. The Original Section name(id) and Material name(id) fields are
filled in the Update area if available.
Use the drop down menus next to New to select section 1 mm and aluminum.
Click Update.
3. Use the same method as in step 2 to update the other parts.

No need to assign material and property to the welds.
Hint
You can select Lower Front Bumper and Top Front Bumper at the same time with
the CTRL or SHIFT key to update the two parts in a single step.
Altair Engineering

Updated content table

4. Close the content table.
Note
For more information on this tool, refer to the Content Table section of the on-line help.
In this section, we used the Content Table to quickly and effectively assign material and properties to
the various parts in the model.
To convert node to node connections into meshless welds:
The different parts in the bumper are connected using 2-node *Constrained_Node_Set (similar
procedure would apply to *Constrained_Nodal_Rigid_Body), which are all stored in the welds
component.
In this section, use the fe absorb function from the connectors module to extract the connectivity
information from the rigids, and generate connectors. Then create beam type 9 elements by realizing
the connectors into LS-DYNA MAT100 elements using the fe realize panel from the connectors
module.
5. Use the fe absorb function to generate connectors from the rigids.
From the 1D page, select the connectors module.
Click fe absorb.
This displays a dialog.

Altair Engineering
Fe absorb dialog
Set Fe Configs: to rigid.
Set Elem filter: to all.
Click Absorb.
HyperMesh generates connectors at the locations of the rigids. These connectors are
displayed in green to signify that they are in the realized state.
Connectors
Close the dialog.
6. Realize the connectors into dyna 100 mat100 custom elements in the fe realize panel.
From the connectors module, go to the fe realize panel.
Click connectors and select all.
Altair Engineering

Use the element config: switch to select custom from the list.
This loads additional fields.
Click type= and select dyna 100 mat100 as the type of element to create.
Type 10.0 in the proj tol= field.
Click realize.
This generates:
A *Element_Beam configuration 9 on every connectors location.
A *Section_Beam card for every pair of component connected. Define then the cross
section you prefer.
A *Mat_Spotweld for every pair of component connected. You can optionally define
failure criteria.
A *Contact_Spotweld defined as follow: the master is defined using a *Set_Part_List with

all the parts that are welded to the beam elements. Slave is defined with a
*Set_Node_List with all the nodes of the beam used in the contact.
A *Element_Plottel card to connect the beams to the nodes of the shell surrounding. Use
this connection to find elements attached to beams.
In this section we used the connectors tools to replace rigid welds in the model with mesh-less welds.
For more detailed information on connectors, please refer to the Connectors section of the on-line
help.
To define the self contact for the bumper:
In this section, define the self-contact for the bumper using the interfaces panel. Define a
*Contact_Automatic_General card and use all of the components to be the slave surface.
1. From the interfaces panel, create a group named contact with the Automatic_General type.
From the BCs page, select the interfaces panel.
Enter contact for the group name.
Select AutomaticGeneral for the type.
Create the group.
2. Use the add sub-panel of the interfaces panel to select all as slave.
Set slave: to all using the switch.
Click update.
In this section we defined the self-contact for the elements in the bumper.

Altair Engineering
To define the moving rigidwall impacting the bumper:

In this section, define the moving rigidwall using the rigidwall panel. Create a
*Rigidwall_Planar_Moving card. The nodes to be slave to the rigidwall are all the nodes included in a
*Define_Box that you define first using the boxes panel.
1. Use the boxes panel to create the *DEFINE_BOX card.
From the BCs page select the boxes panel.
Type in box rwall for the block name = field.
Set card image = to DefineBox.
Toggle lower bound: to x=, y=, z=.
Specify the coordinates for lower bound: and upper bound: as:
lower bound
upper bound
x=
100
200
y=
-600
600
z=
400
700
Create the box.
Optionally activate review nodes to see which nodes are included in the box.
2. Use the rigid walls panel to create a RWPlanar rigid wall.
From the BCs page, select the rigid walls panel.
Specify wall for the group name =.
Set type = to RWPlanar.
Optionally select a rgdwall color.
Create the group.
3. Use the geom sub-panel to define the location and size of the rigid wall.
From the rigid walls panel, select the geom sub-panel.

In this sub-panel, the origin of the rigid wall (tail of the normal vector) is defined by a base
node. Create such a node using the create nodes panel and then select it for the base
node.
Enter the create nodes panel by pressing the F8 key.
Select the type in sub-panel.
Enter the values 100, 0 and 565 for x=, y= and z=, respectively.
Create node.
Return to the rigid walls panel, geom sub-panel.
Altair Engineering

Specify the node just created to be the base node.
Set normal vector: to x-axis.
Set shape: to plane and infinite.
Update the group.
4. Define the motion of the rigid wall using the motion sub-panel.
From the rigid walls panel, select the motion sub-panel.
Set type of motion: to velocity.
Set the upper left switch to components and type in 5.0 for the x comp = field.
5. Use the card sub-panel to edit the card image for the group.
Select the card sub-panel.
Edit the group.
Specify the ID of the box box rwall for the [BOXID] field to define the slave nodes of the rigid
wall.
Specify 1.2 for the friction coefficient [Fric] and enter 300 for the [mass] value of the moving
rigidwall.
To create a *DATABASE_HISTORY_SHELL card, review control cards and export the model:
In this section, create a *DATABASE_HISTORY_SHELL card to request some nodes to be output to
the ASCII file ELOUT. Then review the control cards and export a deck of the model.
1. Use the output block panel to generate this card for a few nodes.
From the BCs page, select the output block panel.
Specify elem TH for the output block name.
Select a few elements of interest from the graphics area.
Create the output block.
2. From the BCs page, select the control cards panel to review the control cards for this run.
3. Export to your working directory the LS-DYNA model as bumper_complete.k using the files
panel.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard the HyperMesh model or save it to your working
In this tutorial, we introduced some of the macros that can be used to manage parts, materials and
properties effectively in HyperMesh. We also introduced connector entities that are used for model
assembly, and the use of the rigid walls panel for the creation of rigid walls.
For more information on connector entities, you can review the tutorial Creating Connectors - HM3400.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Ink Cartridge Drop Test using LS-DYNA

ALE - HM-4630
In this tutorial you will learn how to setup an ALE LS-DYNA input file of an ink cartridge impacting a
rigid platform. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Review of materials, sections and parts in the model
Update of *SECTION_SOLID and creation of an equation of state *EOS
Review of existing boundary conditions *INITIAL_VELOCITY, *BOUNDARY_SPC,
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO_SURFACE and *LOAD_BODY
Creation of *INITIAL_VOID_PART, *ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_GROUP and
*ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_NODE to setup the AIR-INK fluid interaction.
The units used in this tutorial are Seconds, Meters, Kilograms (sec, m, kg), and the tutorial is based
on LS-DYNA 970.
detailed information on the HyperMesh LS-DYNA interface, refer to the External Interfacing
section of the on-line help.
This tutorial uses a file located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you
are unable to locate this directory at your site, see Finding the Installation Directory
In this section, load the LsDyna user profile and retrieve the HyperMesh binary file containing the
model for this tutorial.
It is always recommended to load the LS-DYNA user profile when setting up LS-DYNA models in
HyperMesh. It is mandatory to load the user profile in this case as it activates the ALE setup panel,
which is not available otherwise and which extensively used during the setup of this ALE example.
1. Load the LsDyna user profile using the user profile button from the Tool page.
2. Use the files panel to retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/cartridge.hm.
Altair Engineering

Ink cartridge model

The model is loaded and organized into four component collectors INK, AIR, CARTRIDGE and
PLATFORM. Materials and properties are already defined and can be easily reviewed using the
Content Table macro.
3. From the Tools page of the macro menu, click Content Table.
Content table
A rigid material (MATL20) is assigned to the CARTRIDGE and PLATFORM components while
a Mat Null (MATL9) is used for the INK and AIR. These two components also refer to the same
property named SOLID PROP FOR ALE that needs to be updated in the model at this point.

Altair Engineering
To update the SECTION card used by the ALE components:

In this section, use the card panel to card preview the HyperMesh property collector that defines the
SECTION card for the ALE components, assign the ALE option to it.
1. Use the card panel from the permanent menu to edit the card image for the props collector
SOLID PROP FOR ALE.
2. In the card previewer, verify that [ELMFORM] is set to 12.
3. Under Options select the ALE option for the *SECTION_SOLID card.
To create an EOS card and assign it to the ALE components:
In this section, use the collectors panel to create a property collector with the EOS1 card image,
then assign this property collector to the AIR and INK components using the card image sub-panel.
1. Use the collectors panel to create/edit a props collector with the name EOS_LINEAR and the
EOS1 card image.
-
In the card previewer for the EOS_LINEAR_POLYNOMIAL card, specify 1.5E+9 for [c1]
and 1 for [V0].
2. Use the card image sub-panel of the collectors panel to assign the property to the ALE
components.
-
Go to the card image sub-panel.
Set the collector type to comps.
Click name = and select INK.
Click edit and use the EOSID selector to assign the EOS_LINEAR property to the *PART
card.
Repeat these steps for the AIR component.
To review the existing boundary conditions:

Loads and contact have been predefined in the model:
A velocity along the negative Y axis is applied to every node of the ink cartridge using the card
*INITIAL_VELOCITY. This card was created/edited using the collectors panel by generating a load
collector with the INIVEL card image.
The interaction between the cartridge and the platform is defined using the card
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO_SURFACE. All the nodes of the CARTRIDGE are slave to
the master PLATFORM component.
Single point constraints are applied throughout the model. The PLATFORM component has all its
DOF fully locked, while the parts in the ink cartridge have the Z translation (DOF 3) constrained.
This last constrain is necessary for symmetry reasons since the model has been simplified. The
*BOUNDARY_SPC card was created/edited using the constraints panel from the BCs page.
Gravity load along the negative Y direction is applied to the entire model. This card was created
using the collectors panel by generating a load collector with the LoadBody card image. A curve
defining the force versus time function is also necessary to fully create a gravity load. The
*DEFINE_CURVE was created/edited using edit curves panel from the xy plots module (Post
page).
Altair Engineering

1. Use the card panel from the permanent menu to edit the Initial Velocity load collector and
review the initial velocity applied to the model.
2. Use the card panel to edit the LoadBody_3 load collector and review the gravity load applied
to the model.
3. Optionally, use the disp panel to turn on the plot LS-Dyna Load Curves that contains the curve
defining the gravity.
4. Use the review capability available in the add sub-panel of the interfaces panel to graphically
identify the contact.
-
From the BCs page, go to the interfaces panel.
Go to the add sub-panel.
Click name = and select Contact N2S.
Click review.
Use the review opts to control the display of the contact.
5. Use the disp panel from the permanent menu to temporarily turn on the Spc load collector, and
review the constraints.
To setup the AIR-INK fluid interaction:
The ALE setup panel allows to create and modify input data pertaining to the Arbitrary-LagrangianEulerian LS-DYNA capability. This panel is available from the BCs page and displays only when the
LS-DYNA user profile is loaded.
In this section, create the *INITIAL_VOID_PART to define the AIR component as the void in the
fluid interaction. Then use *ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_NODE to control the motion of the ALE
mesh. Finally generate *ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_GROUP to define the type of reference
system prescribed for the fluid interaction and to link the components AIR and INK to the reference
system group
1. Define the *INITIAL_VOID_PART for the AIR component using the ALE setup panel.
-
From the BCs page, go to the ALE setup panel.
Enter VOID for the name =.
Select InitialVoid for the type =.
Create the group.
Go to the add/update sub-.
Set options: to comps.
Click comps and select AIR.
Click update.
2. Define the *ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_NODE to control the motion of the ALE mesh using
the ALE setup panel.

Altair Engineering
Go to the create sub-panel of the ALE setup panel.
Enter ALE_NODE for the name =.
Select RefSysNode for the type =.
In the card previewer, set [NodeCount] to 3.
Set id= to 5, 6, and 7 respectively for NID(1), NID(2), and NID(3).
Defining node IDs

3. Define the *ALE_REFERENCE_SYSTEM_GROUP to define the type of reference system
prescribed for the fluid interaction using the ALE setup panel.
-
Select the create sub-panel of the ALE setup panel.
Enter SYSTEM_GROUP for name =.
Select RefSysGrp for type =.
Create the group.
Go to the add/update sub-panel.
Set the options to comps.
Select the components AIR and INK and click update.
Altair Engineering

Click edit and set [PRTYPE] to 5.
Select the previously created ALE_NODE group for [PRID].

In this section, use the control cards panel to review cards such as *CONTROL_ALE that have
been pre-defined and control the parameters used for this run. Finally, export the model as a LSDYNA deck.
1. From the BCs page, go to the control cards panel and review the activated control card
(green).
2. Use the files panel to export this model to your working directory as an LS-DYNA deck.
You can submit the input deck to LS-DYNA and post process the results in HyperView. Note that
the results pertaining to the post processing of ALE data will be stored as Extra Solid History
Variable in HyperView.

Altair Engineering
Using the PAM-CRASH Interface in HyperMesh - HM-4700

This tutorial introduces the HyperMesh interface to PAM-CRASH. The HyperMesh PAM-CRASH
input translator supports the PAM-CRASH 97 cards and most PAM-CRASH 98 cards.
Load a prepared HyperMesh file
Select the Pam-Crash template
Create control cards
Assign element types
Define materials with component dictionaries
Define HyperMesh groups: sliding interface
Define a rigid wall
Creating boundary conditions
Create time histories
Creating a function
Creating a sensor card
Exporting a Pam-Crash data deck from HyperMesh

Load a Prepared HyperMesh File

A prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory. The file name of the example is raildyna.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.
HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory names
are followed by a slash.
4. Select the rail-dyna.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
Altair Engineering

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the raildyna.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
Select the PAM-CRASH Template

To use HyperMesh with a specific solver, the solver template must be loaded. This template
specifies how HyperMesh writes a solver input deck. PAM-CRASH has only one template.
To load the PAM-CRASH general template:
2. Click template file = twice.
3. Select the general template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under
/pamcrash/general/.
HyperMesh returns to the global panel. Note that template file = now displays the location of
the general template.
Create Control Cards for PAM-CRASH

This section explains how to create the control card for the CONTROL SECTION of the PAM-CRASH
input deck.
Note
The settings of the control cards influence the default values for defining materials. No
PAM-CRASH deck can be executed without error if the control card CTRL is undefined.
To define the title card:

2. Click Title and enter This is my first PAM-CRASH example.
3. Click return.

Altair Engineering
To define the control card:

1. Click Control.
2. Below TIME, enter the value 0.06.
3. Below TIOD, enter the value 0.005.
4. Below PIOD, enter the value 0.005.
5. Click the box below MORE and select 1 from the pop-up menu.
6. Click return.
To define the file optional keyword:
1. Click File Name.
2. Below FILENAME, enter rail-dyna.hm.
3. Click return.
To define the time step optional keyword:
1. Click next.
2. Click Time Step.
3. Click the switch below Shell Criteria and set LARGE (default) from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the switch below Thickness Term and set BEND (default) from the pop-up menu.
Assign Element Types for PAM-CRASH

Depending on the analysis requirement, the HM basic element type can be changed. For example, a
quad4 can be a SHELL or a MEMBR element. The tria3 element can be a TRIA_C, SHELL, or
MEMBR element. The tetra4, the penta6, and the hexa8 elements define the SOLID elements of
PAM-CRASH. Properties can be added for the selected element type by using the control cards.
To assign the element type:
1. Select the elem types panel on the 1-D page.
2. Click quad4 = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.
3. Click elems and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click update.
To edit the SHELL card properties in the card previewer:
2. Click the upper left switch and select elems from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click config = and select quad4 from the pop-up menu.
Altair Engineering

4. Click type = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.

5. Select any displayed element and click edit.
The SHELL card now appears in the card previewer. The number of integration points through
the thickness NINT and the optional thickness T are defined here. If no thickness is entered, the
thickness of the material defined in the component is used.
Define Materials with Component Dictionaries for PAM-CRASH

Each PAM-CRASH material card MAT or MATER requires one component.
Note
The material collector is not used in the PAM-CRASH interface. PAM-CRASH does not
differentiate between material data and cross section data as other solvers do.
Consequently, elements have no reference to materials, which only belong to a
component. The material definition for the elements is included with this component.
Elements are located in a component (beam, bar, joint, shell). The template takes the component ID
as material ID. The card image type of the collector defines the material as 1-D material, 2-D
material, or 3-D material.
To define a Material Type 102 for collector side:
2. Toggle the card image option.
3. To set the collector type, click the switch and select comps from the pop-up window.
4. Click name = twice and select side.
5. Click card image = and select MAT_2D from the pop-up menu.
Note
The template provides MAT_1D, MAT_2D, and MAT_3D dictionaries. Material types
from 200 to 230 are defined with MAT_1D. Materials types from 100 to 151 are defined
with MAT_2D. Material types from 1 to 41 are defined with MAT_3D. To switch the
material type, use the card previewer.
6. Click load/edit.
7. Click the switch below Material Type and select Type 102 from the pop-up menu.
Note
Only the materials of the current dictionary (1-D, 2-D, 3-D) can be selected. The ID of
the material is given by HyperMesh with the component ID.
8. Below density, enter the value 7.85e-9.

Altair Engineering
Note
You can use the TAB or SHIFT TAB key on the keyboard to go to the next or previous
edit field.
9. Below TITLE, enter This is the side material.

10. Below E, enter the value 20000.
11. Below Yield, enter the value 250.
12. Below v, enter the value 0.3.
13. Below t, enter the value 2.
14. Click return.
To define a Material Type 102 for collector topbottom:
2. Click name = and enter topbottom.
3. Click the switch below creation method: and select same as from the pop-up menu.
4. Click same as = and select side.
5. Click color and select Color 10 from the pop-up menu.
All attributes of the card image from the side material are automatically copied into the current
component.
7. Below t, enter the value 2.5.

8. Below Title, enter This is the topbottom material.
Altair Engineering

9. Select LARGE_FMT.
Note
The card previewer of the components allows you to change between the MAT and the
large material format MATER.

Note
The created component topbottom now is empty. We will now move the elements of
the component tmp into the component topbottom.
To reorganize the elements:

1. Select the organize panel on any main menu page.
3. Click elems and select by collector from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Select tmp.
5. Click select.
6. Click destination = and select topbottom.
7. Click move.
All elements of the component tmp are moved to the component topbottom. Note that the color
of the elements has changed from orange to green.
8. Click return.
To delete the component tmp:
1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.
2. Click the switch and select comps from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click comps and select tmp.
4. Click return.
The component tmp is now deleted.
Define HyperMesh Groups: Sliding Interface for PAM-CRASH

This section describes how to define a self contacting sliding interface (type 26). A second interface
is defined only for tutorial purposes.
The procedure below explains how to define a type 26 self contacting sliding interface.
To define the group:

Altair Engineering
3. Click name = and enter self_impact.

4. Click type = and select SLINT26 from the pop-up menu.
Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.
Note
It is possible to define various types of sliding interfaces. All of them, except the
SLINT42, are written as a SLINT / card. The SLINT42 type is written as the PAM 98
SLINT2/ card.
5. Click interface color and select Color 6.

7. Below SLFACM, enter the value 1.0.
8. Select Comment.
9. Below Comment, enter This is the selfimpact interface.
10. Click return.
To add the slave components:
2. Click name = twice and select self_impact.
3. Click the switch below slave: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Click comps twice and select side and topbottom.
5. Click return.
6. Click update.
If update is not clicked, no changes to the previous definition are made. No changes are made to
the graphics window, because the master and slave component list is not displayed.
Note
If you edit this interface with the card previewer, the master and slave set and
component definition are not shown; however, they are still defined in the add
subpanel.

The procedure below explains how to define a type 34 master slave (element - node) contact.
To define the group:
3. Click name = and enter masterslave.
4. Click type = and select SLINT34 from the pop-up menu.
Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.
5. Click interface color and select Color 13.
Altair Engineering

7. Below SLFACM, enter the value 1.0.

8. Click return.
To add the master elements and slave nodes:
Note The add subpanel now appears with different options. The template specifies what group
type is available with the different interfaces, such as SLINT26 or with SLINT34.
Possibilities are: (1) master and slave elements, (2) master elements and slave nodes,
(3) slave elements, and (4) slave nodes.
2. Click the switch below master: and select entity from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the switch below slave: and select entity from the pop-up menu.
4. After master:, click elems to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
5. Select two elements on the model.
6. Click the upper right add.
7. After slave:, click nodes to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
8. Select two nodes on the model.

Altair Engineering
9. Click the lower right add.

You should now see the master elements (elements with x) and the slave nodes (S) displayed on
the model.
Define a Rigid Wall for PAM-CRASH

This section explains how to define a type 4 infinite rigid wall with a base node at -1.00, 0.0, 0.00116.
To create a base node for the rigid wall:
1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.
2. Select the type in subpanel.
3. After X =, enter the value 1.0.
4. After Y =, enter the value 0.0.
5. After Z =, enter the value 0.00116.
6. Click create node.
To create and define the rigid wall card:
1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.
3. Click name = and enter rwall1.
4. Click type = and select RIGWA from the pop-up menu.
Note
You can switch between the PAM 97 RIGWA and the PAM 98 RWALL card by
choosing different types: RIGWA or RWALL.
5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 12.

6. Click size = and enter the value 100.
This specifies the display size of the rigid wall.
7. Click create.
To define rigid wall geometry:
1. Select the geom subpanel.
2. Click name = twice and select rwall1.
3. Click the switch after shape: and select plane from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the toggle after shape: and select infinite.
5. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
Altair Engineering

6. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
7. Select the created node in the graphics area.
You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.
8. Click update.
The rigid wall is now shown in the graphics area.
To add slave nodes for the rigid wall:
2. Click the switch below slaves: and choose nodes from the pop-up menu.
3. Click nodes twice and select by id from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Enter the value 1-21 and press ENTER.
Note that 21 nodes at the interface of the rail and the rigid wall are highlighted. Also note that
one of the nodes was not selected.
5. Click the node that was not highlighted.
or
Enter the value 1012 in the by id field.
6. Click add.
The selected nodes are now set as slaves.

Altair Engineering
To add motion to the rigid wall:

1. Select the motion subpanel.
2. Click the switch below name = and select components from the pop-up menu.
3. Click x comp = and enter the value 1.0.
4. Click the switch below type of motion: and select velocity from the pop-up menu.
5. Click update.
To define attributes in the card previewer:

2. Click the switch and select groups from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click groups and select rwall1.
4. Click return.
5. Click edit.
6. Click the switch below Friction type flag and select no sliding from the pop-up menu.
Altair Engineering

7. Click the switch below Rigid Wall Descriptor Plane Type and select Type 4 from the pop-up
menu.
Note
The card previewer of the rigid wall changed according to the definitions made. Now it
is possible to define the mass and the initial velocity for moving rigid wall with finite
mass.
8. Below mRW, enter the value 1.

9. Below Vinit, enter the value 2000.0.
Creating Boundary Conditions for PAM-CRASH

This section explains how to create model boundary conditions.
3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = and enter bounc.
5. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.
The card image field should be blank.
6. Click color and select Color 15 from the pop-up menu.
7. Click create.
The header bar now displays bounc as the current loadcol.
To specify the load type:

1. Select the load types panel from the BCs page.
2. Click constraint = and choose BOUNC from the pop-up menu.
All constraints that are now created will be displacement boundary conditions.

Altair Engineering
To create constraints on nodes:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu
2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of groups is now off.
5. Select the constraints panel from the BCs page.
7. Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.
8. Enter the value 990-1011.
10. Click create.
The constraints are now added to the nodes.
Altair Engineering

Create Time Histories for PAM-CRASH

For PAM-CRASH, time histories may be defined for nodes, elements, and local coordinate systems.
For this exercise, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements. The operation is
the same for any type of time history that is created.
To create a node time history card:
1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu
2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of loads is now off.
4. Click return.
6. Click name = and enter node_thp.
7. Click the switch and select nodes from the pop-up menu.
8. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.
9. Click create.
The time history for nodes is now created.
To create an element time history card:
1. Click name = and enter elem_thp.
3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.
4. Click create.
To review time histories entities:
1. Click review.
2. Select elem_thp.
The entities associated with this time history are highlighted.
To view the time history card image:
2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.
3. Click outputblocks.
4. Select elem_thp.
5. Click return.

Altair Engineering
6. Click edit.
The time history card is displayed as it will look in the output.
Create a Function
This section describes how to generate curves, which corresponds to the function cards FUNCT and
LOCUR in PAM-CRASH. This curve should serve as a function for a logical sensor switching on and
off. At time=0, the sensor is on, at time=0.01 the sensor is switched off.
To create a curve:
1. Select the xy plots panel from the Post page.
2. Click plots.
3. Click plot = and enter sensor.
4. Click create plot.
5. Click return.
6. Click edit curves.
8. Click plot = and select sensor.
9. Select math.
10. After x = type {0, 0.01, 0.1}.
11. After y = type {1, 0, 0}.
12. Click create.
13. Click return.

14. Click exit to access the main menu.
Create a Sensor Card

Sensors are implemented as properties in HyperMesh. In this example we refer to the curve defined
in the preceding Help topic.
To define a PAM-CRASH sensor:
1. Select the safety panel from the 2-D page.
Altair Engineering

2. Select the sensors subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter sensor.
4. Click card image = and select SENSOR from the pop-up menu.
6. Select COMMENT.
7. Below Comment, enter This is a logical function sensor.
8. Click the switch below Sensor type and select logical function switch from the pop-up menu.
9. Click LCS twice and select curve1.
Exporting a PAM-CRASH Data Deck from HyperMesh

This section explains how to generate a PAM-CRASH input deck from HyperMesh.
To export a PAM-CRASH file:
The template = field must show the pamcrash/general file.
3. Click filename = and enter rail.pc.
rail.pc is the PAM-CRASH file you will create.
4. Click write.
HM writes the deck. A message in the header bar will indicate when the process is completed.

Altair Engineering
Using the RADIOSS Fixed Interface in HyperMesh HM-4800

This tutorial introduces the use of the RADIOSS FIX 4.1 template when creating models for crash
analyses.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with
the first exercise and continue doing the exercises in the following order:
Creating and Defining Components, Materials and Properties
Creating and Defining Interface Elements for RADIOSS
Creating and Defining a Rigid Wall Entity
Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSS
Creating Time Histories for RADIOSS
Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSS
Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HyperMesh

Creating and Defining Components, Materials, and Properties

When starting a new model, typically you need to organize a model by components, material, and
property data. This tutorial demonstrates how to organize a model by defining RADIOSS material
and property cards and also shows how those can be associated with components.
A prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory. The file name of the example is
rail_crash.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.
3. Click retrieve to open the file browser.
4. Select the rail_crash.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
5. Click open.
Altair Engineering

rail_crash.hm
To load the RADIOSS template:
1. Select the files panel and select the template sub-panel.
2. Click load to display the file browser.
3. Select the radioss41.fix template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under
feoutput/radioss/.
4. Click open.
5. Click return.
To define material data:
3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = twice and select steel.
5. Click card image = and select MLAW2 from the pop-up menu.
This is the RADIOSS material.
6. Click load/edit.
7. Below Title, enter steel.
8. Below RHO_1, enter the value 7.8e-06.
This is the density.
Altair Engineering
9. Below E, enter the value 210.

This is the Youngs modulus.
10. Below nu, enter the value .3.
This is the Poissons ratio.
The material properties are now edited.
11. Click return to access the collectors panel.
The material data is now defined.
Material card RADIOSS MLAW2

To create and define property data:
2. Click the switch after collector type: and select props from the pop-up menu.
3. Click name = and enter rail_prop.
4. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.
5. Click card image = and select SectSHEL from the pop-up menu.
The RADIOSS property is now selected.
Note
It is not necessary to specify material in this panel when using the RADIOSS template.
7. Below Title, enter rail property.
8. Below Thick, enter the value 1.0.
The property data is now defined.
9. Click return to access the collectors panel.
Property card RADIOSS SectSHEL
Altair Engineering

To define components:
2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
3. Click name = twice and select rail.
4. Click card image = and select Part from the pop-up menu.
5. Click load/edit.
Note
Although not a RADIOSS card, this allows you to control which property is associated
with a component. RADIOSS does not have a component concept such as
HyperMesh, so this "card" was created to bridge the gap. This card will not be output,
but element data associated with this component will reflect the MATNUM (material ID)
and IPID (property ID) shown here.
6. Click IPID twice and select rail_prop.

This selects the property that was created and defined earlier.
The component data is now defined.
Component card for RADIOSS
Creating and Defining Interface Elements for RADIOSS

This tutorial shows how to create interface elements that define the RADIOSS interface cards.
Interface elements are for defining where contact or possible contact can occur on a model.
To create and define interface entities:
3. Click name = and enter int1.
This is a name for the interface.
4. Click type = and select ELEMtoELEM from the pop-up menu.
5. Click interface color and select Color 9 from the pop-up menu.
7. Click the box below Itype and select 7 from the pop-up menu.
This defines RADIOSS interface type 7. You may also enter in other values pertaining to this
interface, but this example uses the default values.

Altair Engineering
Note
HyperMesh currently only allows surface input types 1 or 5 for RADIOSS.
Interface card RADIOSS ELEMtoELEM

8. Click return to access the interfaces panel.
We will now add master elements to the model.
10. Click name = twice and select int1.
11. Click the switch below master and select entity from the pop-up menu.
Note
For the RADIOSS template, only entity, sets, or all are valid for element definitions.
12. Click the upper elems box and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
You can also select elements individually or with any other option on the extended entity selection
menu.
13. Click the upper right add.
Master interface elements are created on each structure element.
We will now add slave elements to the model.
14. Click the switch below slave and select entity from the pop-up menu.
15. Click the lower elems box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
16. Click the lower right add.
Slave interface elements are created on each structure element.
Note
Slave and master elements are added to all structure elements in order to define the
model for self contact.
Altair Engineering

Slave and master interface elements
Create and Define a Rigid Wall Entity

This tutorial demonstrates how to create and define a rigid wall entity for RADIOSS.
To create and define a rigid wall:
1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.
We will now create and define the rigid wall card.
3. Click name = and enter rwall1.
4. Click type = and select RigidWall from the pop-up menu.
5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 13 from the pop-up menu.
This controls the size of the displayed rigid wall on the screen when it is created.
7. Click create.
The rigid wall group is now created.
We will now define the rigid wall geometry.

Altair Engineering
8. Select the geom subpanel.

9. Ensure that rwall1 is displayed after name =.
10. Click the upper right switch and select plane from the pop-up menu.
11. Click the toggle and select infinite.
12. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
13. Press F8 on the keyboard to select the create nodes panel.
14. Create a node at (900,0,0).
15. Click return to access the rigid walls panel.
16. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
17. Select the created node in the graphics area.
You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.
18. Click update.
The rigid wall geometry is now created.
We will now add slave nodes for the rigid wall.
20. Click the switch below slaves and select nodes from the pop-up menu.
Note
Only nodes, sets, comps, or all are supported for the RADIOSS template.
21. Click the yellow nodes box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
22. Click add.
We will now edit the RADIOSS rigid wall card.
Altair Engineering

Rigid wall
Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSS

This tutorial shows how to create boundary conditions on the model.
3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = and enter load1.
5. Click color and select Color5 from the pop-up menu.
6. Click create.
Note
There are no card images associated with loadcols for the RADIOSS template.

To specify the load type:

Altair Engineering
2. Click velocity = and select PrcrcbVel from the pop-up menu.

All velocities now created are initial velocities.
Load types panel

Note
PrcrcbVel is prescribed velocity.

To create velocities on nodes:
2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of groups is now turned off.
5. Select the velocities panel on the BCs page.
7. Click view on the permanent menu and select left.
The left side of the model is displayed.
9. Use the mouse to draw a window around the nodes on the far left end of the rail.
11. Click magnitude = and enter the value 1000.
12. Click the lower left switch and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
13. Click create.
The velocity is now added to all nodes.
Altair Engineering

Velocities on end of rail
Create Time Histories for RADIOSS

For RADIOSS, time histories for nodes, elements, skew frames, interfaces, and materials are
supported. For this tutorial, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements.
Operation is the same for any type of time history that is created.
To create a node time history card:
2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of loads is now off.
5. Select the output block panel on the BCs page.
6. Click name = and enter nodeth.
7. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.
8. Click create.
The time history for nodes is now created.

Altair Engineering
To create an element time history card:

1. Click name = and enter elemth.
3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.
4. Click create.
To review time histories entities:
1. Click review.
2. Select elemth.
The entities associated with this time history are now highlighted.
To view a time history card image:
2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.
3. Click outputblocks.
4. Select elemth.
5. Click select.
6. Click edit.
The time history card is now displayed as it will look in the output.
RADIOSS element time history card
Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSS

For RADIOSS, some control cards are generated automatically, such as CARD 2.7 NUMBER OF
ELEMENTS, so it may not be necessary for you to view every control card. This tutorial only shows a
couple of control cards in order to describe the procedure.
To view and edit a control card:
Altair Engineering

RADIOSS control cards

2. Click HeaderCard.
3. Below RUNAME, enter a name for the file.
4. Click return.
Repeat this procedure for any other cards you wish to update.
\
RADIOSS header card
To reset a control card:
1. Click delete.
2. Select the control card you want to reset.
The card changes colors from green to grey.
To suppress control card data from being written:
1. Click disable.
2. Select the control card you wish to suppress.
The color changes from green to red.
To reactivate the control card:
1. Click enable.
2. Select the card you want to restore.
The color changes from red back to green.
To define a control card in order to export a RADIOSS file:
1. Click TimeHistory_1.

Altair Engineering
Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HyperMesh

This tutorial explains how to generate a RADIOSS input deck from HyperMesh.
To export a RADIOSS file:
3. Ensure that template = shows radioss41.fix.
4. Click filename = and enter the name of the RADIOSS file you want to create.
5. Click write.
HyperMesh writes the deck, and displays a message when it is complete.
File export
Altair Engineering


Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Pipes Impact Using Radioss Block HM-4810

HyperMesh - HM-1000.. Working knowledge of the creation and editing of collectors and card
images are a definite pre-requisite. Familiarity with the interfaces panel, and the creation of
boundary conditions are useful, although not required.
In this tutorial you will learn how to setup a Radioss input file in HyperMesh for analyzing the impact
response between two pipes. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Creating materials, sections, and parts for the model.
Defining the contact between the two pipes using /INTER/TYPE7.
Applying a translational initial velocity to a pipe using the /INIVEL card.
Applying local constraints to the other pipe using the /BCS card.
The units used in this tutorial are Milliseconds Millimeters Kilograms (ms, mm, kg), and the tutorial is
based on Radioss Block 4.4.
detailed information on the HyperMesh Radioss interface, refer to the External Interfacing section of
the on-line help.
administrator.
The model used is of two pipes (see image below):
Pipe model
Altair Engineering

To load the Radioss Block user profile and import the model:
In this section, load the Radioss Block user profile, then import a Radioss input deck containing the
mesh for the two pipes.
1. Load the RadiossBlock user profile and select the Radioss44.blk template using the user
profile button from the Tool page.
Selecting the Radioss user profile sets the FE input reader to Radioss Block and loads the
Radioss44 FE output template. It also loads a Radioss macro menu with numerous tools specific
to this interface. The graphical user interface is tailored to Radioss users with panels such as the
admas panel on the 1D page, panel names and options renamed or removed to match Radioss
terminology.
2. From the files panel select the import sub-panel and import the following RADIOSS deck:
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/pipes.
The model is loaded and is organized into two component collectors: 1 and 2 (named by
HyperMesh). No materials or properties are defined at this time.
Notes
On import of a Radioss deck, any HyperMesh warning and error messages are
written to a file named radiossblk.msg. This file is created in the folder from
which HyperMesh is started. The content of the file is also displayed in a pop up
window.
On import, any Radioss cards not supported by HyperMesh are written to the
control card unsupp_cards. This card is accessed from the control cards panel
on the BCs page and is a pop-up text editor. The unsupported cards are exported
with the rest of the model.
Care should be taken if an unsupported card points to an entity in HyperMesh. An
example of this is an unsupported material referenced by a /PART card. HyperMesh
stores unsupported cards as text and does not consider pointers.
On import, HyperMesh renumbers entities having the same ID as other entities. In
HyperMesh, for example, all elements must have a unique ID. The message file
radiossblk.msg provides a list of renumbered elements and their original and
new IDs.
To understand the relationships between the /PART, /SHELL, /MAT and /PROP cards in
HyperMesh:
A /PART shares attributes such as section properties (/PROP) and a material model (/MAT). A
group of shells (/SHELL) sharing common attributes generally share a common part ID (PID).

Altair Engineering
The figure below shows how these keywords are mapped to HyperMesh entities:
/SHELL
elem_id
part_id
/PART
part_id
prop_id
mat_id
Organized into component collectors
Component collector
with a component card image
/PROP
prop_id
Property collector
with a property card image
/MAT
mat_id
Material collector
with a material card image
Map to HyperMesh entities

Component, property and material collectors are created and edited from the collectors panel.
For the Radioss keyword interface, there is only one component card image and it is named Part.
There are several property card images, such as P1_shell P2_truss, P14_solid. There are many
material card images, such as M1_ELAST, M48_HONEYCOMB.
The complete list of card images is available from the collectors panel, as you assign card images
to the various types of collectors.
A HyperMesh card image allows you to view the image of keywords and data lines for defined
Radioss entities as interpreted by the loaded template. The keywords and data lines appear in the
exported Radioss input file as you see them in the card images. Additionally, for some card images,
you can define and edit various parameters and data items for the corresponding Radioss block.
many entities, their card image can be viewed and edited from the panels in which they are created.
To create a /MAT card:
In HyperMesh, a /MAT card is associated to a material collector. To relate it to a /PART card, the
material collector needs to be assigned to a component collector.
You can assign the material to the component collector as you create the component using the
create sub-panel of the collectors panel. In situations where the material was not assigned to the
component at the time of creation (and in this case, a dummy material is created with the same
name as the component collector), update the component collectors definition by assigning the
material in the update sub-panel of the collectors panel.
In this section, create a material collector with the M1_ELAST card image using the collectors
panel. This material will be assigned to both pipes.
Create/edit a material collector with the name elast1, and a M1_ELAST card image using the
create sub-panel of the collectors panel.
In the card previewer, click [Rho_I] to activate its field and enter 7.8 E-6 for the density.
Altair Engineering

Specify 0.30 for Poissons ratio [nu].
Note
If you have difficulties completing any task with the creation, update or editing of
collectors in this tutorial, refer to the on-line help for the collectors panel by clicking
help from the permanent menu.
Hint
Any collector that you mistakenly create instead of create/edit can be edited using the
card image sub-panel of the collectors panel.
In this section, we created the material we will use for the analysis. We can now define the
/PROP card that will be used to define the properties of the elements in the model.
To create a /PROP card:
In HyperMesh, the /PROP card is assigned to a property collector. To generate this card, create a
property collector using the collectors panel.
Although a material = field displays in the create sub-panel of the collectors panel when creating a
property collector, this field is not meaningful for Radioss models as /PROP cards do not reference
any materials (/MAT card).
This field is needed for interfacing with other solvers and this is why you see it. As a Radioss user,
you have two ways of treating this field:
You can select an existing material when creating a property collector and avoid creating a
material you will not use.
You can leave the field blank. By doing so, a new material (with no material card image) is
created with the same name as the property collectors but it is not exported to the Radioss
input file as no card is assigned to it.
The model consists of two pipes modeled with shell elements. Create a property collector with a
/PROP/SHELL card that will be used for all the elements.
Create/edit a property collector with the name prop shell, and the P1_SHELL card.
In the card previewer for the \PROP\SHELL card, specify 2.5 for the shell thickness [Thick].
To update components with a material:

The two components in the model do not have materials assigned to them. Update the components
containing the pipe elements with the elast1 material using the collectors panel, update sub-panel.
From the collectors panel, select the update sub-panel to assign the material elast1 to comps 1
and 2.
Specify material id as the characteristic to update.
The message The collectors have been updated appears in the header bar.
In this section, we updated the material collectors assigned to component collectors. By doing
this, we created a relationship that will result in the right material ID showing in /PART cards once
we assign them to our component collector.
To assign the /PART cards to the elements:
Assign the /PART card to the component for the coarse pipe and specify the /PROP/SHELL card ID
in it. Do this by loading and editing the Part card image for the pipe component collector (1) using
the collectors panel, card image sub-panel.

Altair Engineering
Next, using the same procedure, assign a /PART card to the second pipe (2) with finer mesh and
specify the /PROP/SHELL card ID.
1. Load/edit the Part card for component 1 using the card image sub-panel of the collectors
panel, and assign prop shell to the [Prop_id] field.
In the card previewer, click [Prop_id] to activate a selector.
Click the [Prop_id] yellow selector and select prop shell.

This updates the value for this field referencing the appropriate PID.
2. Similarly, load/edit the Part card for component 2 using the card image sub-panel of the
collectors panel, and assign prop shell to the [Prop_id] field.
In this section we assigned /PART cards to our component collectors. We also made sure to link
them to the /PROP/SHELL card by assigning the corresponding property collectors. The material id
fields were automatically set from assigning material collectors to the component collectors in the
previous section.
To create contact cards:
Radioss contacts are created in the interfaces panel from the BCs page.
A Radioss contact is a HyperMesh group. When you want to manipulate a /INTER card, such as
delete it, renumber it, or turn it off, you need to work with HyperMesh group entities.
In this section, create a contact between the two pipes using /INTER/TYPE7. The pipe with the
coarser mesh (2) will be the master surface while the one with finer mesh (1) will be the slave
surface. Radioss has multiple ways to define master and slave entity types from which to choose; in
this example define the master and slave entities as components, doing this the master will be
exported as SURF/PART and the slave as a /GRNOD/PART
First create a group with the TYPE7 card image using the create sub-panel of the interfaces panel.
Next, add the master and slave to the group using the add sub-panel. Lastly, edit the groups card
image using the card image sub-panel, and specify a friction coefficient.
1. Create a group with the name contact and the TYPE7 card image using the create sub-panel
of the interfaces panel.
Specify contact for name =.
Select TYPE7 for type =.
Optionally select a color.
Click create.
2. Define the master and slave as comps 2 and 1 respectively using the add sub-panel.
Set the entity type to comps under master:.
Click the yellow comps selector and select the coarser pipe component 2.
Click update in the master: line, to the right of the yellow comps selector.
Altair Engineering

Select comps for slave:.
Click the yellow comps selector in the slave: line and select the finer mesh pipe component
1.
Click update in the slave: line.
Click review to graphically view the entities in the interface the master entities of the interface
are drawn in blue and the slave entities in red.
3. Edit the definition of the group, using the card image sub-panel to set the static coefficient to
0.10.
From the interfaces panel, select the card image sub-panel.
Click edit to review the card image.
Specify 0.10 for the static coefficient [FRIC].
In this section we defined the contact between the two pipes as /INTER/TYPE7.
To create an initial velocity (/INIVEL/TRA):
When working with the Radioss Block format, HyperMesh requires that all the loads be placed in a
valid load collector.
To assign loads to a load collector you have two choices:
Create individual loads all of same type and direction and store them under the appropriate
load collector. For example BCS stored in a BCS load collector with the same degree of
freedom constrained.
Identify the nodes at which loads act by selecting them through a set. The selection of the set
is possible once the card image of the load collector is edited.
In this section, apply a translational initial velocity to the coarse pipe using /INIVEL/TRA applied to a
predefined set of nodes GRNOD/PART.
Create/edit a loadcols with the name tran_vel and an INIVEL_Collector card using the
collectors panel.
In the card previewer specify -30.0 for the initial velocity in the global z-direction [Vz].
For [Grnod_id] specify the set moving pipe (GRNOD/PART).
This completes the creation of an initial velocity for the pipe in the negative global Z direction.
To create a /BCS and constrain the finer mesh pipe:
In this section, fully constrain the end nodes of the pipe with the refined mesh using a /BCS card.
Do this by first creating a load collector with the BCS_Collector card image. The constraints will be
organized into this collector. Then select BCS for the HyperMesh constraint configuration from the
elem types panel. Lastly, create constraints from the constraints panel
1. Create/edit a loadcols with the name SPC and the BCS_Collector card image using the
collectors panel.
In the card previewer activate all the translational and rotational check boxes
(Translation_Vx, Translation Vy,, Translation_Wz).

Altair Engineering
2. Set the type of constraint to BCS in the load types panel.
Enter the load types panel from the BCs page.
Set constraint = to BCS.
3. Constrain the end nodes of the finer mesh pipe elements using the constraints panel.
From the BCs page, select the constraints panel.
In the create sub-panel, set the entity selector to nodes.
Select the nodes at both ends of the finer mesh pipe (see figure below).
Nodes to contrain
-
Create the constraints.
In this section, we used the load types panel to ensure that the type of constraints was set to the
Radioss card of interest. We then used the constraints panel to fully constrain the end nodes of one
of the pipes.
Notes When creating load magnitude, direction of load or degree of freedom needs to be
specified. It is advisable for visualization purpose to have the load acting in the same
direction as specified in the load collector card. The direction/magnitude of the load is
controlled by the specification entered in the load collector card. For example, a load may
be shown acting along the X axis but if it is stored in a load collector with direction along the
Z axis, this Z direction will be the one assigned to the load.
Every load needs to be stored in a load collector with correspondent card image. For
example store the velocity loads in a velocity load collector.
In this section, enter the control cards panel from the BCs page to review the controls and
parameters used for this run, and export the model to a Radioss deck.
1. From the BCs page select the control cards panel.
This panel displays the control cards available. The control cards that are activated are displayed
in green.
Altair Engineering

2. Export the model to your working directory as a RADIOSS deck called PIPESD00 using the
export sub-panel of the files panel.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this HyperMesh model or save it for your own
reference.
In this tutorial we introduced some of the concepts that govern the HyperMesh interface to Radioss.
We also use numerous panels that allowed us to do basic modeling in terms of Radioss such as
defining contacts or boundary conditions.

Altair Engineering
Pre-Processing for Bumper Impact Analysis using

RADIOSS Block - HM-4820
HyperMesh - HM-1000, as well as Pre-Processing for Pipes Impact Using Radioss Block - HM-4810
for basic concepts on the HyperMesh RADIOSS interface.
In this tutorial you will learn how to use HyperMesh to setup an RADIOSS input deck for analysis of
the impact of a bumper again a moving rigid wall. The modeling steps that are covered are:
Associating \PART, \MAT and \PROPusing the Radioss Component ListTable.
Converting node to node connections (\RBODY) into a mesh-less welding formulation

(\INTER\TYPE2 with \SPRING) using HyperMesh connectors.
Defining the contact for the elements in the bumper with a\INTER\TYPE7 card.
Defining the interaction bumper-moving wall with the \RWALL\PLANE and \BOX cards.
Creating a /TH/NODE card to output time history for user defined elements.
based on RADIOSS Block 4.4.
detailed information on the HyperMesh RADIOSS interface, refer to the External Interfacing section of
the on-line help.
This tutorial uses a file located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm directory. If you are
The model used consists of a simplified bumper model (see image below):
Bumper model
Altair Engineering

To load the RADIOSS user profile and retrieve the model:

In this section, load the Radioss user profile and retrieve the HyperMesh binary file containing the
1. Load the Radioss Block 4.4 user profile using the user profile button from the Tool page.
Selecting the RADIOSS user profile will also load the RADIOSS macro menu with a specific tool
called Components List we will use in this tutorial.
RADIOSS macro menu

2. From the files panel, select the hm file sub-panel and retrieve the file
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ bumper_crash.hm.
The model contains 5 component collectors defining the lower and top bumpers, the mouthing
bracket, the backing plate and the welds.
To review and organize parts, properties, and materials using the Component List table:
None of the components in the model have a material or a property associated to them at this point,
although materials and properties have been defined for the model and are present in the database.
In this section, use the Component List to associate the various materials and properties to the
components according to the following table:
Component (/Part)
Material (/Mat)
Property (/Prop)
Backing Plate Bumper
aluminum
Section 1mm
Mounting Bracket
steel
Section 2mm
Lower Front Bumper
steel
Section 2.5mm
Top Front Bumper
steel
Section 2.5mm

Altair Engineering
1. Click the Component List macro from the Tools page of the macro menu.
Component List
2. Assign a new section and material to the Backing Plate Bumper part.
Left click the selection button (left-most column) corresponding to the Backing Plate
Bumper part
The entire row highlights. The Original Section name(id) and Material name(id) fields are
filled in the Update area if available.
Use the drop down menus next to New to select section 1 mm and aluminum.
Click Update.
3. Use the same method as in step 2 to update the other parts.

No need to assign material and property to the welds.
Hint
You can select Lower Front Bumper and Top Front Bumper at the same time with
the CTRL or SHIFT key to update the two parts in a single step.
Updated Component List

4. Close the Component List.
In this section, we used the Component List to quickly and effectively assign material and
properties to the various parts in the model. CREATE AN HYPERLINK TO THE CORRESPONDENT
PAGE IN THE RADIOSS HELP
Altair Engineering

To convert node to node connections into mesh less welds:

The different parts in the bumper are connected using 2-node rigids (/Rbody), which are all stored in
the welds component.
In this section, use the fe absorb function from the connectors module to extract the connectivity
information from the rigids, and generate connectors. Then create /SPRING elements and
RADIOSS/INTER/TYPE2 contacts by realizing the connectors using the fe realize panel from the
connectors module.
1. Use the fe absorb function to generate connectors from the rigids.
From the 1D page, select the connectors module.
Click fe absorb.
This displays a dialog.
Fe absorb dialog
Set Fe Configs: to rigid.
Set Elem filter: to all.
Click Absorb.

Altair Engineering
HyperMesh generates connectors at the locations of the rigids. These connectors are
displayed in green to signify that they are in the realized state.
Note
HyperMesh can also create a 2 nodes \RBODY using a rigidlink element. In that case
fe Absorb requires the rigid links config to select the /RBODY.
Connectors
Close the dialog.
5. Realize the connectors into radioss type2 (spring) custom elements in the fe realize panel.
From the connectors module, go to the fe realize panel.
Click connectors and select all.
Use the element config: switch to select custom from the list.
This loads additional fields.
Click type= and select radioss type2 (spring) as the type of element to create.
Type 10.0 in the proj tol= field.
Click realize.
This generates:
A 2 nodes \SPRING on every connectors location.
A \PROP\SPR_BEAM\ card for every pair of component connected. Default properties

are used according to the information available in the Radiossweld_config.ini or define
the spring properties you prefer.
A \INTER/TYPE2 for every pair of component connected The Contact is defined as

follow: the master is defined using /SURF/PART and the salve using a
/GRNOD/NODENS
AnHMPlottel card to connect the springs to the nodes of the shell surrounding. This
\element will not be recognized by radioss; it is introduced to easily find elements
attached to the springs.
In this section we used the connectors tools to replace rigid welds in the model with mesh-less welds.
For more detailed information on connectors, please refer to the Connectors section of the on-line
help. Alternatively the Radioss Welds Macro can be used to create mesh less welding for Radioss. It
is available in the Tool macro page. CREATE LINK
To define the contact for the bumper:
In this section, define the self-contact for the bumper using the interfaces panel. Define a
\INTER\TYPE7 card and use all of the entity to define both slave and master surfaces.
1. From the interfaces panel, create a group named contact with the TYPE7l type.
Altair Engineering

Enter contact for the group name.
Select TYPE7 for the type.
Create the group.
2. Use the add sub-panel of the interfaces panel to select master and slave.
Set master: to comps using the switch.
Select the components Backing Plate Bumper, Mounting Bracket, Lower Front Bumper and
Top Front Bumper.
Click update.
Set slave: to nodes using the switch.
Select all the nodes in the model.
Click update
In this section we defined the self-contact for the elements in the bumper. The master entities have
been selected using a /SURF/PART the slave nodes using /GRNOD/NODE. Optionally click review
to identify master and slave.
To define the moving rigidwall impacting the bumper:
In this section, define the moving rigidwall using the rigidwall panel. Create a \RWALL\PLANE card.
The nodes to be slave to the rigidwall are all the nodes included in a \BOX that you define first using
the blocks panel.
1. Use the blocks panel to create the \BOX card.
From the BCs page select the blocks panel.
Type in box rwall for the block name = field.
Set card image = to GroupBox.
Toggle lower bound: to x=, y=, z=.
Specify the coordinates for lower bound: and upper bound: as:
Lower bound
upper bound
x=
100
200
y=
-600
600
z=
400
700
Create the box.
Optionally activate review nodes to see which nodes are included in the box.
2. Use the rigid walls panel to create a RWALL.
From the BCs page, select the rigid walls panel.

Altair Engineering
Specify wall for the group name =.
Set type = to RWALL.
Optionally select a rgdwall color.
Create the group.
3. Use the geom sub-panel to define the location and size of the rigid wall.
From the rigid walls panel, select the geom sub-panel.

In this sub-panel, the origin of the rigid wall (tail of the normal vector) is defined by a base
node. Create such a node using the create nodes panel and then select it for the base
node.
Enter the create nodes panel by pressing the F8 key.
Select the type in sub-panel.
Enter the values 100, 0 and 565 for x=, y= and z=, respectively.
Create node.
Return to the rigid walls panel, geom sub-panel.
Specify the node just created to be the base node.
Set normal vector: to x-axis.
Set shape: to infinite plane.
Update the group.
4. Use the add sub-panel to define the type of slave for the RWALL.
From the rigid walls panel, select the add sub-panel.
Set the slave to rad_box (the actual /BOX will be selected withing the card image)
Click update.
5. Define the motion of the rigid wall using the motion sub-panel.
From the rigid walls panel, select the motion sub-panel.
Set type of motion: to velocity.
Set the upper left switch to components and type in 5.0 for the x comp = field.
6. Use the card sub-panel to edit the card image for the group.
Select the card sub-panel.
Edit the group.
Specify the ID of the box in the [Grnod1Box] field to define the slave nodes of the rigid wall.
Specify 1.2 for the friction coefficient [fric] and enter 300 for the [mass] value of the moving
rigidwall.
Altair Engineering

To create a /TH/NODE card, review control cards and export the model:
In this section, create a /TH/NODE card to request some nodes to be output to the Radioss T01 file.
Then review the control cards and export a deck of the model.
1. Use the output block panel to generate this card for a few nodes.
From the BCs page, select the output block panel.
Specify nodeth for the output block name.
Set the entity selector to nodes.
Select a few nodes of interest from the graphics area.
Create the output block.
2. From the BCs page, select the control cards panel to review the control cards for this run.
3. Export to your working directory the RADIOSS model as BUMPERD00 using the files panel.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard the HyperMesh model or save it to your working
In this tutorial, we introduced some of the macros that can be used to manage parts, materials and
properties effectively in HyperMesh. We also introduced connector entities that are used for model
assembly, and the use of the rigid walls panel for the creation of rigid walls.
For more information on connector entities, you can review the tutorial Creating Connectors - HM3400.

Altair Engineering
Creating a Macro - HM-8000

A macro is similar to a user-defined script, or executable. You can write a macro specifically for
yourself that will execute a series of steps semi-automatically. The macro language uses the same
commands found in the command files generated by HyperMesh.
HyperMesh macros allow you to combine several steps into a single mouse click. Routines you use
often, such as saving the model file, or repetitive tasks you apply to your models, can be converted
into macros.
The macro menu appears on the right side of the HyperMesh interface. It contains page selection
buttons, shortcut buttons, and tools, organized into macro pages. It may be turned on or off from the
options panel menu config sub-panel. If you prefer to create your own version of the Macro Menu, it
may be loaded from the same panel.
The standard pages available are: QA, Mesh, User, Disp, Geom. Each page contains functionally
related macros. User is a page devoted to macros you would create. You can create macros to be
added to existing pages, such as Geom, if you choose. The process to create them is the same as
for macros going on the User macro page.
This tutorial covers the following exercises:
What is a HyperMesh macro?
Creating a control for a macro
Creating your own macro

What is a HyperMesh Macro?

A HyperMesh macro automates a HyperMesh process or executes a series of steps semiautomatically, thereby functioning like a user-defined script or command file. It uses the HyperMesh
macro language, an extension of the HyperMesh command language. The types of macros you can
write vary. They can be simple macros that run from a HyperMesh command file, or contain additional
embed logic using Tcl/Tk scripting commands, or incorporate user interaction.
The macro command language is an interpreted language. This means each command executes in
the order in which it appears in the macro file. While macros offer a great deal of flexibility, remember
once a macro executes, there is no way to cancel the execution or reject the results.
Macros have two parts: the definition of the button (control) that activates the macro and the
instructions the macro performs.
Controls come in the form of buttons and button groups. For each control you specify its
characteristics:
the macro page it displays on
Altair Engineering

621
its label
its location and size
its help message
the macro it calls, and any optional arguments
Following the definition of the control is the set of commands you wish to execute.
HyperMesh macro commands reside in macro page files. Each page of the macro menu is defined in
its own file. These files are located in the HyperMesh bin directory. All the modifications we will make
in the tutorial will be done to the file userpage.mac and will appear on the user page of the macro
menu.
Below is a sample macro file. It contains documentation (follows the // at the beginning of the line),
creates three buttons and a macro for each of the three buttons.
Sample macro
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//
Filename:
userpage.mac
//
Purpose:
Macro menu User page definitions.
// Version: HyperWorks 6.0
//
Copyright:
2002 Altair Engineering Inc., All rights reserved.
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
User Page Widget Definitions

Note: Since relative row locations are used, the menu page is built from
the bottom up.
The following templex test is used to see if the Tcl support buttons
should be added.
{ if ( getenv("HM_DEBUG") == "ON" ) }
*createbutton(5, "TkCon ...",
-1, 0, 10, BUTTON, "Launch the Tk Console.",
EvalTcl, "tkcon.tcl")
*createbutton(5, "WidgetTour ...", -1, 0, 10, BUTTON, "Launch the Tk
Console.", LaunchWidgetTour)
*createbutton(5, "ProDebug", 0, 0, 10, BUTTON, "Connect to the TclPro
debugger.", ConnectToDebugger)
{ endif }
//
User Page Macro Definitions
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
*beginmacro("ConnectToDebugger")
// Purpose: To connect to a remotely running ProDebug session.
//
// Note:
The pathname to the prodebug.tcl script may need to be

Altair Engineering
//
modified to
reflect your installation of TclPro.
*evaltclstring("source /Program\ Files/tclPro1.4/win32ix86/bin/prodebug.tcl; debugger_init;",0)

*endmacro()
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
*beginmacro("LaunchWidgetTour")
// Purpose: Launch the HyperWorks Widget Tour dialog.
*evaltclstring("::hwt::WidgetTour",0)
*endmacro()
Attributes you can change on a macro page include:
buttons to display on that macro page
the location and size of the buttons appearing on a macro page
the label for each button
the help string displayed on the menu bar
the macro called by each button, with optional arguments to pass
HyperMesh macros consist of valid command file or templex commands, and are enclosed by the
*beginmacro(macroname) and *endmacro() commands. Macros may accept data passed to them
using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted.
The following skeleton shows the format of a macro.
*beginmacro(macroname)
macro command statements go here
*endmacro()
Creating a Control for a Macro

To activate a macro from HyperMesh, you must create a button on the Macro Menu to invoke the
macro. Use the *createbutton()command to define the button and its characteristics. The syntax
for this command is:
*createbutton(page, name, row, column, width, COLOR, helpString, macroName [ , arg1 ])
Where:
page
Indicates the page number on which the button is to appear (values 1 through n;
initially there are 5).
name
The text to display on the button. Enclose the text with quotes (").
row
The row in which to place the button (values 1 - n). The number of rows visible
depends upon the graphics resolution setting of your hardware.
column
The column where the button starts (values 0 - 10 ).
Altair Engineering

623
width
The width of the button ( max 10).
COLOR
The color of the button. The available button colors are: RED, BLUE, GREEN,
CYAN, BUTTON, and MAGENTA. The color name must appear in capital letters.
helpString
The string to be displayed in the menu bar when the button is selected. Enclose
text of string in quotes (").
macroName
The name of the macro to call when the button is selected. Enclose text of string
in quotes (").
arg1
A list of one or more optional arguments passed to the macro. You may have as
many arguments as your computers memory will allow.
Figure 1. How rows and columns are laid out

The following activities create a control on the User page of the macro menu.
To create a button:
In this section, create and position the button used to activate a macro. This example creates
everything to appear on the User page.
1. Copy the userpage.mac file from the <install_directory>/hm/bin directory into the
working directory, the directory from where HyperMesh starts. Next change the permissions of
the local userpage.mac file to writeable.
2. Open the userpage.mac file from the working directory in a text editor and scroll to the end of
the file.
3. Add the command:
*createbutton(5,"Test",20,4,6,MAGENTA,"This is a test
experience","macroSample")<cr>
Note
button for
The end of a command is a hard return (press the ENTER key). In your text editor,
type each command until you get to the end of it, then press ENTER. The entry <cr>
represents the hard return.
4. Save the modified userpage.mac file.

5. Start HyperMesh from the working directory. This allows the new session to use the modified
userpage.mac file.
Altair Engineering
6. Press the User button on the Macro Menu. You will see Test, the button we defined in Step 3.
Compare this button to our definition. It is magenta in color, begins in the middle of the row, and
only goes half way across the Macro Menu.
Note:
There is no functionality behind the button at this time because all we did was create
the button now appearing on the User page. Next we will add something for it to do.
Creating your Own Macro

Use the following process to assist you in creating HyperMesh macros.
To create HyperMesh macros:
1. Define the task you want the macro to perform.
2. Execute the process in HyperMesh.
3. Add macro button commands and label.
4. Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.
5. Add them to the macro file.
6. Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands.
7. Load the modified macro file into HyperMesh using options panel.
8. Test/Apply macro.
A Macro to create constraints around the edges of selected elements
Step 1: Define the task
The task is to design a macro to automatically create constraints around the edges of selected
elements. With only a few mouse clicks, we will be able to do the following.
1. Enter the collectors panel.
2. Create a load collector for the constraints.
3. Enter the edges panel.
4. Find the edges around the selected elements.
5. Enter the constraints panel.
6. Apply constraints to the nodes of the edge elements
7. Enter the edges panel.
8. Delete the edges and the edges collector.
Step 2: Execute the process in HyperMesh
1. Delete the command.cmf file from your working directory.
2. Load the file bumper.hm from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ directory.
3. Go to the collectors panel on any page.
Altair Engineering

625
4. In the create sub-panel change the collector type to loadcols.

5. In the name= field enter the name constraints.
6. Select create.
7. From the tool page enter the edges panel.
8. Change the entity selection option to elems,
9. Select a group of elements by window.
10. Press the find edges button.
11. Enter the constraints panel in the BCs page.
12. Click nodes and select by collector then select the êdges collector.
The created edges are plotel elements with two nodes. These elements are on the outside
perimeter of the elements that were selected. Therefore only the nodes on the perimeter of the
elements selected will be constrained.
13. Press create.
14. From the tool page enter the edges panel.
15. Select delete edges.
There are now constraints in the model and commands in the command.cmf file. These
commands will now be extracted and used to create a macro.
Step 3: Add macro button commands
1. Open the userpage.mac file.
2. Go to the bottom of the file and add the commands to create a button for the macro.
*createbutton(5,"Edge_Const",18,0,10,GREEN,"Add constraints to outer
edge of elements" , "macroEdge_Const") <cr>
Step 4 and 5: Extract commands from the command file and add them to the userpage.mac
file
1. Open the command.cmf file.
2. Copy the last lines from the command file.

3. Paste these commands into the userpage.mac file below the statement for the new button.
They should read:
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",7)
*createmark(elements,1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
etc..
*findedges(elements,1,0)
*createmark(nodes,1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
etc .
*loadcreate(1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0)
*deleteedges()

Altair Engineering
Observe the *createmark commands and the list of entity id numbers. A mark is a storage
buffer in HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity id is first entered into the
designated mark.
There are two marks available to you (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines,
surfaces, points, etc). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to
all entities identified in the mark.
Step 6: Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands
1. Embed these commands between a *beginmacro(macroEdge_Const) and a *endmacro().
Notice after the *createmark() commands there are a series of numbers. These numbers are
the element ids, or node ids for the selected nodes. These ids will not be consistent from model to
model. To make the macro useful for multiple models, change the selection method.
Several options exist to make the *createmark commands general enough to work with any
model. For example, to select all the currently displayed elements in the model use the command
*createmark(elements,1)"by displayed".
Another option is to replace the *createmark command with *createmarkpanel. When
executed, this command presents you with an element selection panel in which any of the
HyperMesh element selection methods can be used. This is the method employed in this macro.
2. Change the *createmark(elements,1) command to *createmarkpanel(elements,1,"Select the
elements").
The *createmarkpanel command brings up a selection window in the main menu area of
HyperMesh. This allows you to interactively select entities with the same selection methods as in
all other panels. For further information and arguments for this and other command file
commands, see the on-line help using the index (commands entry) or navigating the contents tab
from HyperWorks, to HyperMesh, to Commands.
3. Change the *createmark(nodes,1) command to *createmark(nodes,1) "by comp"
êdges.
"by comp" is one of many selection methods available. Most of the extended entity selection
methods are available. See on-line help for further details.
The final macro is:
*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const) <cr>
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",7) <cr>
*createmarkpanel(elements,1,"Select the elements to apply constraints
to") <cr>
*findedges(elements,1,0) <cr>
*createmark(nodes,1) "by comp" êdges <cr>
*loadcreate(1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0) <cr>
*deleteedges()<cr>
*endmacro()<cr>
4. Save the userpage.mac file.
Altair Engineering

627
Step 7: Load the new userpage.mac file into HyperMesh

1. Enter the HM session and retrieve the hm.mac macro file through the options/menu config
panel.
When you click Options from the permanent menu then select the menu config subpanel, you
will see the macro file listed is hm.mac. This file, also known as a wrapper file, contains an
include statement calling the userpage.mac file. When you reload the hm.mac file, the updated
userpage.mac file is loaded also.
2. Reload the bumper.hm file.
Step 8: Test/Apply macro
1. Click return and select the user macro page.
Note the new button Edge_Const.
2. Select the new button, Edge_Const. An element selection panel displays prompting you for the
elements to select.
The message placed in the macro now displays in the header bar and the macro waits for you to
select elements.
3. Select elements by displayed.
4. To accept the selection, either click the middle mouse button or click return.
Elements are selected with the usual methods. Once the elements are chosen, you can either
press return or hit the middle mouse key to accept them. Once the elements are accepted the
macro continues with the remaining commands. Constraints now exist around the edges of the
elements.

Altair Engineering
Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis - HM-9000

This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the options
available on the fatigue panel.
In this tutorial, retrieve the file keyhole.hm from the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory. This file contains a finite element (FE) model -for which an analysis has already been
conducted- to obtain the stress/strain information for durability loads of interest.
3. Retrieve the keyhole.hm file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
4. Note file = now displays the location of the keyhole.hm file.
To load the results file:
1. Select the results subpanel.
2. Browse for the keyhole.res file, located in the <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/
directory.
To export data and write a fatigue solver input deck:
1. On the Post page select the fatigue panel.
2. Click the FE Analysis Type toggle and select static/modal.

Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis.
Note
Select the transient dynamic option if a dynamic finite element analysis was used to
obtain the stress/strain results for the model.
3. Click the Output File Format toggle and select ascii.
Altair Engineering

629
Note
Select the binary option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file.
For more information on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats, please see
the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
4. Click browse and locate the file folder you want store the file in, then enter a name for the
output file.
This output file is the input file for the fatigue solver.
5. Click data group = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.
The data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in the
results file.
Note
For more information on how HyperMesh organizes the analysis results available in the
results file, please see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
6. Click the switch under select simulation: and select all.

This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selecting all
writes the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases represented in
keyhole.res.
Note
You can write out stress/strain information for all of the time steps, or you can choose a
range from a starting time step to an ending time step, or you can choose a selection
of time steps manually from the available list.
For more information, see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
The next step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written.
Note
The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Select nodes
if the data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, select elements if the
data group you selected refers to elemental results. Select sets to choose a predefined
entity set comprised of nodes or elements corresponding to a data group with
nodal/elemental results, respectively. If the data group results and the entity type are
not the same, HyperMesh displays an error message, "Results file doesnt contain
nodal values".
7. Click the entity input collector switch and select elems.

9. Draw the window as shown in the figure below.

Altair Engineering
10. Click interior.

12. Click write.
An ascii file is written to the selected directory.
You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.
Altair Engineering

631

Hmesh Tut70

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Hmesh Tut70

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

HyperMesh 7.

Altair Engineering Contact Information

Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com or http://ftp.altair.com/ftp

Trademark and Registered Trademark Acknowledgments

Altair HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

Working with Geometry

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

If you are a new user it is recommended that you complete the

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the

Working with Geometry

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

viii HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

Finding the Installation Directory <install_directory>

Global panel PC example

Installation directory path PC example

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

Global panel UNIX example

Installation directory path UNIX example

HyperMesh 7.0 - Introduction to Tutorials

Getting Started With HyperMesh - HM-1000

The user interface

Using the on-line help

File input and output

Viewing the model using options from the permanent menu

Controling the display and visual attributes

Menus and menu items

Database relationships: elements/components/materials/properties

Setting current collectors, element size and element order

Interfacing with solvers

Reviewing and editing card images

Organizing and deleting entities

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

The HyperMesh interface

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

The User Interface

takes you to the options panel allowing you to modify

takes you to the global panel where you can control

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

global model parameters accessed by several different

allows you to access the on-line help. On panels, you

allows you to access the display panel where you can

is available when you use the performance graphics

The Page menu allows you to select different sets of functions.

Using the on-line help

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

3. From the permanent menu, click help.

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

File input and output

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

Open files dialog

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

The export functionality is used to convert information in a HyperMesh database into

Viewing the model using options from the permanent menu

Fit function. Fits the entire model to the graphics area.

Incremental zoom functions. Zoom the view in or out by a zoom

HyperMesh 7.0 Tutorials - HM-1000

Try the rotation functions.